V'r

'..'
.

..v

itf

*W3
v

*"

JOHN

PRICE

ANTIOUARIAN, RARE

AND SCHOLARLY BOOKS

8 CLOUDESLEY SOUARE
LONDON N1 OHT

ENGLAND

Hermes or A Philosophical
University Grammar.

HARRIS

(James):

Inquiry

concerning

The

Fifth Edition.

Wingrave...,

London: Printed for F.

1794.

8vo,

pp.

xix

[xx

442 [443 - 458 Index], engraved

frontispiece,
contemporary sheepskin, gilt
spine, green morocco label; title-page and

adverts],

frontispiece

rubbed
cracked.

and

slightly

water-stained,

wormed,

spine

dried,

binding
joints

60

',//>'<

ittHtrm

ft

3t4 ,J

Wv/

~8aHt*

'C&vw*^

HERMES
OR
A PHILOSOPHICAL INQVIRY

CONCERNING
VNIVERSAL GRAMMAR
BY IAMES HARRIS ESQ^

SI2IENAI

APP0YNTA2

EINAI

TAP KAI ENTAY0A EOYZ-

THE FIFTH EDITION.

LONDON:
Printed

for

Mr.

W N G R A V E, Succeflbr
NOURSE, in the Strand.

F.

M.DCC.XCIV

to

Ill

To

the Right

Honourable

Hardwicke,

Philip Lord

Lord High Chancellor of GreatBritain

My

*.

Lord,

A S no

one has exercifed

the Powers of Speech
.with jufter and more univerfal
I
applaufe, than yourfelf j
have prefurned to infcribe the
following Treatife to your
Lordihip, its End being to
inveftigate the Principles of
It has a farthofe Powers.
ther claim to your Lordby being
Ihip's Patronage,
conne&ed infome degree with
that politer Literature, which,
in the mod important fcenes
of
A z
*

The above Dedication

is

the Author beingdeiirous that

fpecr, to

the noble Lord,

fidered, as a

when

printed as

it

originally ftood,

what he intended
living, ihould

Teftimony of Gratitude

to his

as real

Re-

now be con-

Mfmor^

Dedication,

iv

you have

'of Bufinefs,

ftill

found time to cultivate. With

regard to myfelf,if what I have
written be the fruits of that
Security and Leifure, obtained
by living under a mild and free
Government; towhomforthis
am I more indebted, than to
your Lordfhip, whether I confider

you

as a Legiflator, or

as a Magiftrate, the

dignity and

in

Permit

me

firft

both

reputation

therefore thus pub-

licly to affure

your Lordfhip,

that withthe greated gratitude

and refpeft

am,

Tour Lordjhitfs mojl

and
Cit

'

tnojl obedient

My Lord,

obliged,

humble Servant,

of Sa!Jhurjf t

Qd.

J,

l/^f.

James

Harris.

PREFACE.
Q

-*-

ing

H E chief End> propofed by

Author of this Treat ife
it

in

the

mak-

public, has been to excite his

Readers

to

curiofity

and

inquiry

teach them himfelf by prolix

and formal Letlures, (from the effi-

not

to

cacy of which he has little expectation)

but to induce them y if pojftble, to be-

come Teachers to themjelves bya?i im~

',

partial ufe of their own u?iderftandings. He thinks nothing more abfurd

than the common notion of InflruSiion,

as if Science were to be poured into
the Mind, like water into a ciflern,
that pajfively waits to receive all that

The growth of Knowledge he

rather thinks to refemble the growth
of Fruit y however external caufes

comes.

may

in

fome degree

co-operate,

the internal vigour,

it is

and virtue of
the

PREFACE.

vi

the tree, that muft ripen the juices to

their juji maturity.

namely,

This then,

men

to

exciting

the

inquire for themfelves into

fubje&s worthy

cj their contemplation,

Author declares to have been

frfl and principal motive for

this the

his

Next to that,
appearing in print*
as he has always been a. lover oj
Letters, he would willingly approve
his jludies

nuous,

and ingehas particularly named

to

He

the liberal

thefe, in dijiin&ion to others

becaufe,

as his Jludies were never profecuted

with the

leajl

regard to

lucre, fo they

are no way calculated for any lucra-

End.

The liberal therefore and

ingenuous (whom he has mentioned

tive

already) are thofe, to whofe perufal

he offers what he has written. Should
they judge favour ably of his attempt,
he may not perhaps heft ate to confejs,

Hoc juvat

et

melH

eft.

For

PREFACE.
For

tho he hopes he cannot be

vii

charged

with the foolijh love of vain Praife^

he has no dejire to be thought indifferent ^ or infenf.ble to ho?iejl

Fame.

From

the influence of thefe fentiments, he has erideavoured to treat his

fubjetl with as
nefs,

much

and perfpicuity

order^ correEi-

as in his

power \

and
fay

if he has failed^ he can fafely

(according to the vulgar phrafe)

that the failure has been his misfortu?ie, and not his fault.
He corns

thofe trite

and

co?itemptible methods

of anticipating pardon for a bad performance^ that " it was the hafly
fruits of a few idle hours ; written
merely for private a?nufeme?it ;
never revifed \ publifhed againji
at the importunity of
confent)
friends^ copies (God knows how)
\"
having by Jlealth gotten abroad
with other ft ale jargon of equal falfhcod and inanity.
May we not afk
fiich Prefacersy

If

what they
4

allege

be

PREFACE.

riii

be true, what has the world to do

with them and their crudities.

As
this in

the Book itfelf,

to

behalf ,

its

merely confine
promifes,

whatever

it

that

does not
its title

but expatiates freely

collateral

is

to pafsy

into

aiming

on

rife in its inquiries,

as far as pofftble, front

fmall matters
is

it

what

itfelf to

every occafion to

and

that

can fay

it

to

the great eft.

Nor

formed merely upon fentiments

are now in fajhion, or fupported

only by fuch authorities as are modern.

Many Authors

are quoted, that now-

a- days are but

little

jludied;

and

fome perhaps, whofe very names are

hardly known.

The Fate indeed of antient Authors

(as we have happenedto mention them)
is not unworthy of our notice.
few of them furvive in the Libraries
of the learned, where fome venerable
Folio, that fill goes by their name,

PREFACE,
juft fuffices to give

nominal

exiftertce.

long fallen into

their very

xx

them a kind of
The reft have

a deeper obfcurity,

names, when mentioned,

affe&ing us as little, as the names,

when we read them, of thofe fub ordi-

nate Heroes,

Alcandrumque, Haliumque, Noemonaque, Prytanimque.

Now
with

if an Author, not content

the more eminent of antient

Writers, fhould venture to bring his

reader into fuch company as thefe
loft, among people (in the faftoionable phraje) that

nobody knows

what quarter can he

have reajon to expeB ? Should the
Author of thefe fpeculations have
done this (and it is to be feared he
has) what method had he beft take in
a circmnftance fo critical f
Let us
fuppofe him to apologize in the befl
manner he can, and in confequence

what

ufage,

of

this, to fuggeft as follows

He

PREFACE.

He

there will be

hopes

found a

pleafure in the contemplation of an-,

tient fentiments, as the view of antient Architecture, tho

fomething

verierable.

what from

its

ruins, has

Add

antiquity

is

to

this,

but

little

known, has from that very circumfancethe recommendation of novelty,

fo that here, as in other infances,
Extremes may be faid to meet.
Farther fill, as the. Authors, whom
he has quoted, lived in various ages,

and

'

fome in the
full maturity of Grecian and Roman
.Literature fine i?i its declenfon
and others in periods fill more barbarous, and depraved', it may afford
in clifant countries x

perhaps ?w unpleafing fpecuiation,

fee how the same
times prevailed ;

Truth,

like

Reason has
how there

to

at all
is

one

one Sun, that has en-

human Intelligence through

every age, and faved it from the
darknefs both of Soph if ry and Erlightened

ror,

Nothing-

PREFACE,
Nothing can more tend to enlarge
the Mind, than thefe exte?ijive views
of Men, and human Knowledge ; nothing can more effe&ually take us off
from the foolijh admiration of what
immediately before our eyes, and
help us to a jujler efiimaie both cf
frefent Men, and prefent Literais

ture.

perhaps too much the cafe with

the multitude in every ?tation, that as
they know little beyond themfelves, and
their own affairs, fo out of this narIt

is

rowfp here of knowledge, they think nothing worth knowing. As we Britons

by our fit nation live dividedfrom the

perhaps will be
be more remarkahly our cafe.

whole world,

found to

this

~A?id he?ice the reafon, that our fludies

are ufually fatisfied in the works of

our own Countrymen ; that in Philofophy, in Poetry, in every kind of
fubjeEl, whether ferious or ludicrous,

whether acred or profane, we think

per-

xi

PREFACE.

xii

perfe&ion with ourfelves > and that

is Juperfiuous to fear ch farther.

it

The Author of this Treatife would

hy no means detraEt from the jujl
honours due to thofe of his Country-

men who
y

either

preceding age>

adorned
pleafure

it*

in

the prefe.nt^

have fo

But

tho

or

illuflrioufly

he can with

and Jincerity join

in celebrat-

ing their deferts, he would not have

the

other
into

or of any
to pafs thro' blind excefs

admiration of

few

a contempt of

thefe,

all others..

Were

fuch Admiratio?i to beco?ne univerfal>

an odd event would follow \ a few
learned men^ without any fault of
their own y would contribute in a manner

to the extinction

like

of Letters.

evil to that

of admiring

only the authors of our own age> is

that of admiring only the authors of
There is inone particular Science.

deed in

this lafl prejudice fomething

3

pecu-

PREFACE.
peculiarly unfortunate^

and

that

xiii
is^

the more excellent the Science, the

more likely it will be found to produce
this effeEl.

'There are
trinftcally

few

Sciences

more in-

than

Mathe-

valuable,

It is hard i?ideed to fay$

matics.
to which they have more co?itributedy
whether to the Utilities of Life, or to
the fublimeft parts of Science* They
are the noblefi Praxis of Logic, or

universal Reasoning. It is thro*

them we may perceive, how the flat ed
Forms of Syllogifm are exemplified in
one SubjeEl, nai?iely the Predicament
By marking the force
of Quantity.
of thefe Forms, as they are applied
here, we may be e?iabled to apply

Nay
them of our elves elfewhere.
farther fill by viewing the Mind,
during its procefs in thefe fyllogiflic
employments, we ?nay corne to know
in part, what kind of Being it is ;
fmce Mind, like other Powers, can

be

PREFACE.

xiv

be only known

Whoever

from

Operations.

its

therefore will Jludy

Mathe-

matics in this view, will become not

Mathematics a more expert

Logician, and by Logic a more rational Mathematician, but a wifer
Philcfopher, and an acuter Reafoner y
only by

in all the pojfible fubjetls

either of

fcie?ice or deliberation.

But when Mathematics,

inflead of

being applied to this excellent purp ofe,

are ufed not

to

exemplify Logic, but

fupply its place ; ?to wonder if

Logic pafs into contempt , and if
Mathematics, inflead of further i?ig
to

become in

fciencey

fa&

a?i

cbfacle.

For when men% knowing nothing of

that Reafoning which

come

is

univerfal,

attach themfelves for years

to a {ingle Species, a pedes wholly
to

involved

only

in

they

Lines

grow

and

Numbers

infenfibly to believe

thefe lajl as infep arable from all

Rea-

foning y as the poor Indians thought

every

PREFACE.
every horfema'n

to be

XV

infepar able from

his horfe.

And thus we fee

necejfity

views,

fould

nay the

of enlarging our literary

even Knowledge itfelf
lefl

obflruEl

perform

the ufe,

own growth, and

fome meafure the part of

in

ignorance

its

and

barbarity.

Such then is the Apology made by

the Author of this Treatife, for the
of antient quotations,
with which he has filed his Book. If
multiplicity

he can excite in his readers a proper

fpirit of curiofty ; if he can help in
the leaf degree to enlarge the bounds

of

Science-*,

revive the decaying

to

of antient "Literature ; to lejfen

the bigotted contempt of every thing

thjle

not modern

and to

cf every age

ajfert to

Authors

their jufi portie?i

of

if he can in the leaf degree

contribute to thefe ends, he hopes it

efleem

may

be allowed,

that he has done

fervice

PREFACE.

xvi

Should

fervice to mankind.
vice he

a reafGn for

his

Work

vive> he has confefi already',

and

to fur

//

would

Should the

be no unpleajing event*

contrary happen^

this fer-

he mufl acquiefce

peaceably pafs
to thofe defined regions^ whither the

in

its

fate^

let it

productions of modern

Wit

are every

day pajfmgy

vicum vendentem thus

in

et odores.

ADVERTISEMENT.
The Reader

is

defired to take notice, that

as often as the author quotes V.

he refers

to

I.

p.

&c.

Three Treatfes publified frf in

cne Volume, Oflavo, in the year

745.

THE

ftvii

THE

CONTENTS.
BOOK
Chapter

I.

I*

De/ign of the

Introduction.

P a ge i
Concerning the Analyzing of
'whole.

Chap.

II.

Speech into

its fmallejl

Parts.
p.

Chap.

III.

Concerning thefeveral Species of

thofe fmallejl Parts,

p.

23

Chap. IV. Concerning Subjlantives9properly

fo

called.

P-

37

Chap. V. Concerning Subftantives of

the.

Secondary Order.

p. 63;

Chap. V I Concerning Attributives, andjii-fi

.

concerning Verbs.

Chap. VII. Concerning Time and

Chap.VIlL Concerning Modes.

Chap, IX. Concerning Verbs,
Species

and

Properties*
a,

p.

87

Tenfes.

p.

100

p.

140

as to their

other remaining

173
Chap.

p.

CONTENTS.

xviii

Chap. X. Concerning

Participles

and Ad-

jectives,

p.

184

Chap. XI. Concerning Attributives of the

Secondary Order.

BOOK

p.

192

II.

Chapter I. Concerning Definitives, page 2 1

'Chap.

Concerning Connectives, andjirji

II.

ihofe called Conjuncliofis. p. 2 37

Chap.

III.

Concerning thofe other Connectives, called Prepofitions. p. 2 6

Chap. IV. Concerning

Chap. V. Concerning

Cafes.

p.

Interjections

275

Reca-

pitulationConclufwn. p. 289

BOOK
Chapter

I.

Introduction

III.

the Subject into

Divi/ion
its

of

principal

page 305
Upon the Matter or common SubParts.

Chap.

II.

ject of

Language.

316
Chap.

p.

CONTENTS.
Chap.

III.

xix

Upon the Form, or peculiar Character of Language,

p.

327

Chap. IV. Concerning general or univerfal

Ideas.

p.

Chap. V. Subordination of

350

Intelligence

Difference of Ideas, both in

particular

Men, and

in

whole

Nations Different Genius of

Charac-

different Languages

ter of the Englifh

tal,

the Latin,

"the

and

Orien-

the Greek,

Superlative Ex-.
Hence of
Lafl Conclu-

Languages
ce

the

Jon.

p.

403

ERRATA.
Page

8o, Note, line 14, for

28,

J.

tiTreTxKxoi',

from the bottom, for

read

VTroraxltKev.

cgyeuxv, read o^yxuv.

Lately Publijhed,

NEW EDITION,
PRICE

WITH A HEAD

of

T A

rpHREE

I.

AUTHOR BY BARTOLOZZI,

JAMES HARRIS,

C O N

Vol.

BOUND,

td.

lis.

OF THE

The WORKS

VOLUMES OCTAVOy

IN FIVE

it.

Efq.

G,

TREATISES:

The

Firft,

The Second, concerning

Mhfic, Paintings and Poetry ; The Third, con-

concerning Art

cerning

Vol.

Happ in rfs.

HERMES;

II.

or,

a Philofophical Inquiry

concerning JJniverfal

Vol.111.

Grammar,

PHILOSOPHICAL ARRANGEMENTS,
containing a variety of fpeculalions, logical,
ethical, and metaphyseal ; derived

phyjical,

from the principles of the Greek Philofophers,

and illujlrated. by examples from the greatejl
Writers both ancient and modern.

Vol.IV.
and V.

PHILOLOGICAL INQUIRIES: InThree

Parts.

Containing,

The Rife and

and Critics.

I.

An

II.

different

lllujlrathn

Principles,

as

Species

of Criticifm

of Critical Dcclrines and

appear in diflinguijhed

they

Authors, as well ancient as modern.

III.

An

and Literature of

Efjay on the Tajle

the middle Ages.

To which are added, four Appendixes.

Firfr,

An

Account of the Arabic Manuscripts belonging to the Efcurial Library in Spain.

Second, Concerning the Alanujcripts of L ivy,
ird, Concerning' the
in the fame Library.
Manujcripts of Cebes, in the Library of the
King of France. Fourth, Seme Account of
Literature in RuJJla, and of its Progrejs to-

wards being

*** Any

of the above

civilised.

Volumes may be had

complete Sets.

feparate, to

HERMES
OR A PHILOSOPHICAL INQUIRY
CONCEPvNING UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR.

BOOK
CHAP.

I.

I.

INTRODUCTION.
Defig?j of the Whole.

Men

IF

by nature had been framed Ch.

for Solitude, they

had never

felt

an

Impulfe to converfe one with another

And

if,

lower Animals, they

like

had been by nature

irrational,

they could

not have recognized the proper Subjects

of Difcourfe.

Since

Speech then

is

joint Energie of our beft and nobleft

culties (a),

(that

is

to

Fa-

of our Rea-

fon

V. I. p. 147 to 169. See alfo Note xv.

292, and Note xix. p. 296, of die une Volume*

{a) See
p.

fay,

the

I.

HERMES.

Ch.

fon and our focial Affection) being withal

I.

out peculiar Ornament and Diitinclion, as

Men-, thofe Inquiries

may furely be deemed

intereftingas well as liberal,

how Speech may

fearch
'

folved

or how, when

which

either

be naturally re*

refolved,

it

may

be again combified.

Her e a large field for fpeculating opens

before us.
as

We may either behold Speech,

divided

Statue

Limbs

into

may be
;

its

conjiituent Parts, as a

divided into

or elfe, as refolved into

and Form,

as the

folved into

These

its

feveral

its

Matter

its

fame Statue may be re-

Marble and Figure.

different Analyjings or Rejblu-

tions conftitute

sophical,

or

what we

call (b)

Philo-

Universal Grammar.

When
{b)

Grammaticam

etiam bipartitam ponemus, ut alia

fit literaria, alia philofophica,

Scient. VI. I.

And

&c.

Bacon, de

foon after he adds

Augm

Ferumtamen

ipfd re moniti, cogitatione complexijumus Grammatitam quandam, qua non analogiam verborum ad invicem,

hac

fed analogiam inter verba

quirat.

et res five

rauonemfedulo in-

Book the First*

When

we have viewed Speech thus Ch.

analyfedy we may then confider it, as
And here in the firfl place
compounded.
we may contemplate that (c) Synt he/is,

which

by combining Jimple

a Truth

Terms produces

then by combining two Truths

produces a third ; and thus others, and

others, in continued Demonftration,

we

till

are led, as by a road, into the regions

of Science.

Now

this is \h2Xfuperi0r

cellent Synthefis,

which alone applies

to our Intellect or Reafon,

B
(c)

Arijlotle

fays

twi/

rrrXoxw XtyopLvuv z$\v

oTov v9tfW7r^>,

and mod: ex-

Aeuk^j

and which

v.a\a.

2>\

[xn$sy.izv

ocXnvig hte

rfzi'xj.i,

or falfe

runneth, conquereth.

as for

C"UV70~1/

Kj ^lOCl^BTiV ift

True and

De
TO

Falje are feen in

eYw*

Viy.otOf thofe words

in/lance,

Cat. C. 4.

ginning of his Treatife

<rvfjt.-

iJ/si/JV?

which are fpoken without Connexion, there

either true

to

conduct

an

itfelf

is

Man,

So again

no one

white,

in the be-

Interpretatione, nri^i yixf

r^/svoog

*J

Csmpojition

TO

aAflOiV*

and Divijion.

Compofition makes affirmative Truth, Divifion makes

negative, yet both alike bring
far therefore

may be

Terms

together, and fa

called fynthetical,

I.

HEP. M

4
Cli. I.
"*'~ v

conduct according
the Art of

E. S.

Rule, conftitutes

to

Logic.

After

wc may

this

turn

which

{d) inferior Compoiitions,

thofe

to

are pro-

ductive

(d)

Ammonuii

Comment on

in his

the Treatife

Epfxwiix;, p. 53, gives the following Extract

from Thtophrejlus, which is here inferted at length, as
Tlifii

well for the Excellence of the IVlatter, as becauie

it is

not (I believe) elfewhere extant.

yap

Ai-riJJi

v<ty\<;

tu \oy& vykwaq^ (xa6'

Qeo^paf^)

<pi7^<ro$(&>

AKPOI2MENOT2,
cx\ zjpoTitivTizi

ytvovlxi

isroiitlixrt

rx

TOTS
^ rns

tj,

Xiyw

Zv

xpoXoyixc,

x^ rx-Jtx ixp[*c;iu;s

yX'jxvTriT^3
K/

*, tz)>
k,

/xr,

y.ocipov

dxpoxrxv,

e'ti

weevruv zrx-

Xtya cyjinu;

x-pouyujtAEVW? eVi/aeAhVeIo:**

tc'.

rtpx-

xj ixirXrfcxi

Tjpoq tv\v zcei'^w p^EiowOiVIa tftjiw* ~r,g J* ye

tx

aA-

thtci? itto^uv, oicv

(3ja^uAcya?, xxlx

TA IIPArMATA

y.oivx

<T'j[j.7r\Ly.zi

t^v xk\ou> IStuv,

LXAxtj.Zuvoy.ivuv, ol(Txi te rlu

x.7-

tpyov dvlxig exAe-

ruv qvo[axtccv,xa>.x

risToou

zri7-

we^j f*w nv ryv <t^e-

x) p*lcpixYi } cSWtj

<riui/orscx

wf Six

exr,i>Eix<; }

yjf

Stupitrw

to/mu'uj
vttIp

Tit; ccKpoiCfxtua^

x) $s$r)fj<.ivfttv*,

XvXols,

a.

IIPOI

rw IIPOS TOTE AKPOATA2

avJ5

ystrQxi

0%

TA IIPArMATA,

IIPOS

<nv

rn; te

te i^eucT^

I1POE

fiXcVo^*

SnXlyyuyy

Book the First.

du&ive of the Pathetic, and the Pka- Ch.

fant in

Thefe

their kinds.

all

Com-

latter

pofitions

Xj to ccXn^\<;

aVoJaxi/J?.

ing tivofold

(as

fettled it) one

fomething,

and

to

to

the Speaker propofs

refpeel

to

the jirjl

Hearers,
it

hath

Hearers

perfuade his

to

Relation, that

IVtth

which regards

becomes the bufinejs of

and

ufe,

and

two,

thcj'e

not

to feleft

thofe that

the

Thus

are employed Poetry and Rhetoric.

refpeclable JVords,

of vulgar

Relation of Speech be-

Hearers, to whom it explains

the Things, concerning which

//><?

one

77;,?

Philofophcr Thcophrafus

the

the mojl

are common and

council fuch JVords harmorl fly

to

one with another, fo as thro' thefe things

and

their

and

the

other Form> of Eloquence, together xvith Copioufnefs

and

Brevity, all employed in their proper fa/on,

lead,

as

confluences, fuch

Delicacy,

Perfpicuity,

to

the

Hearer, andJlrikc him, and hold him vanquifhed by

the

power of Perjuafon.

Relation of Speech
will be

found

to

to

On

the contrary, as to the

Things,

here the Philofophcr

have a principal employ, as well in

refuting the Falfe, as in demonji'rating the True.

Sanciius

fpreaks

elegantly

on the fame Subjefh

Creavit Deus hominem rationis participem

cui,

quia

dedit

Ser-

monem. Sermcr.i autem pcrfciendo tres obifces

buit.
Prima cjl Grammatica, qua ab oratione

adhi-

Sociabilem

cfmos

qua

&

efje

volult,

barbarifmos

magna pro munere

expellit

in Sermo?:is veritate vcrfatur

qua; ornatum Sermonis

B3

fzlcc-

fecunda Dialeitic2,
;

t.rtia Rhetorics,

tantum exquirit.

C, 2.

Min.

I.

I.

I.

HERMES.

Ch.

I.

portions afpire not to the Intellect, but

being addreffed to the Imagination, the

become from

AffeBions, and the Senfe,

heightnings either

their different

toric

or

Nor

Poetry.

need

we

necelTarily

Arts diftinctly and apart

ferve,

we

if

every one of the

is

perfectly they

equally requi-

And though
without Rhe-

reft.

Logic may indeed fubfift

toric or Poetry, yet fo
thefe laft

a found

is

that without

it,

view thefe

we may ob-

how

pleafe,

Grammar

co-incide.
fite to

Rhe-

necerTary to

and correct Logic,

they are no better

than,

warbling Trifles.

Now

all

thefe

Inquiries (as

faid already)

and fuch ethers

them

of

as are

tion, (of

which

ftill

in

Inquiries

arifing

from

fubiimer Contempla-

the Sequel there

be pofiibly not a few)

deemed

we have

may with

may

juftice be

both interefling

and

liberal.

At

Book the First.

At prefent we mall poftpone the whole

fynthetical Part, (that

to fay, Logic

is

and

Rhetoric) and confine ourfelves to the

analytical,

that

Grammar.
dividing

to

fay,

we have above

Speech,

as a

usconstituentParts;
it,

Composite,

as a

and

Form;

Universal

In this -we mail follow

the Order, that

firft

is

into

laid

down,

Whole,

into

then refolving
its

Matter

two Methods of Analyfis

very different in their kind, and

which

lead to a variety of very different

Specu-

lations.

Should any one

object, that in the

courfe of our Inquiry

we fometimes de-

fcend to things, which appear

low

which

let

him look upon

trivial

and

the effects, to

thofe things contribute, then from

the Dignity of the Confequences, let

him

honour the Principles.

The

following Story

perly be here inferted.

"

B 4

may

not impro-

When

the

Fame

"of

Ch.

I.

"""
'

HERMES.

Ch.

I.

" of Heraclitus was celebrated throughout Greece, there were certain perfons,

"

that

had

a curiofity to

fee fo great a

" Man. They came, and, as it happen" ed, found him warming himfelf in a
" Kitchen. The meannefs of the place

" occafioned them

*'

to flop

upon which

them

the Philofopher thus accofted

" Enter

boldly, for here

& TOO THERE ARE GODS {e)."

We

(fays he)

mall only add, that as there

part of Nature too

Prefence

having

mean

fo there is

its

is

no

Divine

for the

no kind of Subjecl,

foundation in Nature, that

below the Dignity of

a philofophical

is

In-

quiry.

(e)

See

Jrifiot. de

Part. Animal.

\.

C. 5.

CHAP.

Book the First.

CHAP.

II.

Concerning the Analyfing of Speech Into

its

fmalkfi Farts,

THOSE

things

which arcfrj} to Na- Ch.

ture, are not Jirjl to

Man. Nature

begins from Caufes, and thence defcends

to Effects.

upon

Human

Effects,

Perceptions

open

firft:

and thence by flow degrees

Often had Mankind

afcend to Caufes.

feen the Sun in Eclipfe, before they

knew

Caufe to be the Moon's Interpofition

its

much

oftner

had they feen thofe unceafing

Revolutions of

Summer and

Day and Night,

Caufe

Winter, of

before they

to be the Earth's

knew

the

double Motion {a).

Even

(a)

This Diftin&ion offirjl

Nature, was greatly regarded

lofophy.
tius's
c. 2.

to

SeeJri/t. Phyf. Aufcult.

Comment on
Dc Anima, 1. 2.

Man,

and

firji to

in the Peripatetic
1.

I. c. I.

Themif-

the fame, Pojier. Analyt.

c. 2.

It leads us,

Pbi-

1.

when

I.

pro-

perly regarded, to a very important Diftinclion be-

tween

II.

HERMES.

I0

Ch.

II.

Even

Matters of Art and human Crea-

in

tion, if

we except

few

and

Artifts

critical

tween Intelligence Divine and Intelligence Human.

God may
Laft, as

be

laft

view the Firft, as

laid to

that

Man

their natural Order.

and the

Firft, as laft

an

in

Effects,

Meaning
rx ruv

the

yxp

oppctlx irpog to

rx

QxvspustxJx irxvluv.

<pv<rti

to

the Light of the

to thofe Objecls,

Day,

that are by

7. c. 4.

1.

is

1.

^t to

^ 8?

'

V PS

As are

the Eyes of
Intelligence

the brightefl

Metaph.

and Ethic. Nicom.

r,g

Man's

Nature

mofl confpicuous of all Things.

alio

fo

<piy\(y>

xtu) Kj t?? rifAtTipas 4^ v

tj

utnrsp

fittf Yip'spc-v,

Bats

firft

And hence

Arljlotle

in

as

he views Canfis thro'

Order.

Paflage

vvxltptSuv

is,

and the

firft \

thro' Caufes in

views the Laft,

that

inverfe

of that

Efeels

he views

is,

1.

and
See

c. I.

2.

Jmmonius,

I. c. 4.

reafoning in the fame way, fays very pertinently to

the Subject of this Treatife
<pV(Tl,

"7TIVY!
1

irXafipx

'AyaTruTcv

tv

iX TU1V XTtAlfipUV Kj (T'OVViTUV

s

'

Xj rtXiio-Tipx

Treonvxi

ITVi

'

thtci/ S\ dvxXvcrxi

ture

may

hnperfecl

for

s7q

to

Thus

kneivi

how

Xy

Xy

7rx7g
otcTf

txm-xx

i\q

Human Na-

advance from the more

the ?nore fimple

the complex Subjects are

bettti

Xj

pr^x,

?o\yf7x, sixirr

be well contented to

and complex

"*

XuxpXTni; TUDiirxlii,

tU ovopa

cvaaxQxs, y.xKi7vx

TX X-

fl

jx yxp cvvvitx pixA-,

A.WGvmvny-~v>'Xy yvupipuTEpx' 'O'jru yav

iipxi pin ?.oycv, x] iiTriTv,

x\Qpu-

and perfct
to us, and
>

more familiar

therefore it

is

to put a Sentence together;

that even a Child

and fay, Socrates

wallceth

Book the First.

ii

Obftrvers, the reft look no higher Ch.

tical

than

to

mere Work,

Practice and

the

knowing nothing of

on

thofe Principles,

which the whole depends.

Thus

in

Speech

men, even the

for

example

All

loweft, can fpeak their

Mother-Tongue. Yet how many of this

multitude can neither write, nor even
read

How many

of thofe,

know nothing

far literate,

mar, which

refpects the

who

are thus

of that

Gram-

Genius of

their

own Language ? How few then muft be

thofe, who know Grammar universal

Grammar, which without

that

re-

garding the feveral Idioms of particular

Languages,

only refpebls thofe Principles,

that are ejential to them all ?

'Tis our prefent Defign to inquire

about this

Grammar

-,

in

doing which

we

mall
walketh

but

and Verb, find

into

how

to rcfolve this

thefe

again into

Letters or Elements, here be

Com.

de Prxdic.

p.

29.

Sentence into a

Syllables,
is

at a

and
lofs.

Noun

Syllables

Am.

II.

H E R M

12

Ch.

II.

fliall

S.

follow the Order confonant to

human

Perception, as being for that reafon the

more

eafy to be understood.

We

fliall

begin therefore

from a

firft

Pernod or Sentence, that combination in

Speech, which
thence pafs,

is

obvious to

if polTible, to

and

all;

thofe

mary Parts, which, however

its

pri-

effential,

are only obvious to a few.

With

refpect

therefore to the

ferent Species of Sentences,

we

who

is

dif-

there

him in his
Mother-Tongue, not to know when 'tis
we ajjert, and when we quefiion ; when 'tis
we command, and when we fray or ivifi f
fo ignorant, as if

For

example,

addrefs

when we

read in Shake-

fpeare *,

TZv Man, that hath no mufic

And is

not

in himfclf,

mov'd with concord offive ei

founds,
Is ft for

Treafns

Or
* Merchant o

Venice,

Book the First.

Or

Ch.

Milton *,

in

13

Friends,

I hear

feet,

Hajling

this

way

the tread of nimble

obvious that thefe are ajfertive Sen-

'tis

tences ,

one founded upon Judgment, the

other upon Senfation.

When

the

Witch

in

Macbeth

fays to

her Companions,

When flail we

three meet again

In thunder y lightning, and in rain ?

this

evident

'tis

is

an interrogative Sen-

tence.

When

Macbeth

to the

fays

Ghofl of

Banquo,
Hence, horrible Shadow,

Unreal Mock'ry hence

he fpeaks an imperative Sentence, founded

upon the paffion of hatred.

When
P. L. IV. 866.

II.

HERMES.

i4
Ch.

When

II.

Milton fays in the character of

his Allegro,

Hajie
yejl

thee,

Nymph, and bring with

and youthful

thee

yol/ity,

he too fpeaks an imperative Sentence, tho'

founded on the paflion, not of hatred but

of love.

When
dife

Lojl

in the

we

beginning of the Para-

read the following addrefs,

And chiejly thou, O Spirit, that dojl prefer

Before all temples tfr upright heart, and
pure,

InfiruB me, for thou know'Ji

this

is

not

to

be called an imperative

Sentence, tho' perhaps

Form, but
'tis

rather (if I

it

bear the fame

may

ufe the

Word)

a Sentence precative or optative*

What then mall we fay

ces to be quoted in this

ceafmg,

all differing

Are Senten-

manner without

from each other

in

their

Book the First.

their ftamp

way

and character

15

Are they no Ch.

reducible to certain definite dalles

If not, they can be no objects of rational

compreheniion.

Let

us

however

try.

'Tis a phrafe often applied to a man,

when fpeaking, that he /peaks his mind

as much as to fay, that his Speech or Dif-

courfe

is

a publijhing of Jbme Energie or

Motion of bis

Soul.

So

it

indeed

is

in every

one that fpeaks, excepting alone the Diffembler or Hypocrite

and he

too, as far

as poffible, affects the appearance.

Now the Powers

of

the soul

(over

may be
included all of them in thofe of Perception, and thofe of Volition. By
the Powers of Perception, I mean the
and above the meer

Senfes

and the

Volition,

-f nutritive)

Intellect

mean,

in

by the Powers of
an extended

fenfe,

not only the Will> but the fevzvulPaJJions

and Appetites

in fbort, all that

ABion, whether rational or

moves to

irrational.

If
f Vid.'Ariftot. de An.

II. 4.

II.

HERMES.

i6

Ch.

II.

If then the leading Powers of the Soul

be thefe two,

plain that every Speech

'tis

or Sentence, as far as

mini of courfe

it

refpecl:

exhibits the Soul,

one or other of

thefe.

If vrzaffert, then
refpects the

what indeed

is it

which

a Sentence

Powers of Perception. For

is

to ajjert, if we consider the

examples above alleged, but

Jome Perception

either

to publifo

of the

Scnfes

or

the Intellect $

Again, if we
mand, if we pray,
in terms of

Art

we com -

interrogate, if

or if

is

we

wifi,

(which

to fpeak Sentences in-

terrogative, imperative, precativc, or op-

what do we but publifh

tative)

fo

For who

dirTerentVoLiTioNS ?
quejiions $

He

obey'd.

is it

that

that has a Defire to be in-

Who
a
What

formed.

that has

many

Will,

is

it

that

commands

He

which he would have

are

thofe

either wifi or pray ?

Beings,

Thofe,

who

who
feel

certain

Book the First.

17

either for themfelves, or

certain wants
others.

If then the Soul's leading Powers be the

two above mentioned, and

all Speech is

be true that

it

a publication of

thefe

Powers,

every Sentence
WILL BE EITHER A SENTENCE OF ASSERTION, or a Sentence of Volition. And thus, by referring all of

it

will

them

follow that

to one of thefe

we found

two

have

claries,

an expedient to reduce their

infinitude (b).

The

t^xa-ris ouvajw.fi?,

raj

optxjixxg

}Cj

t?

Xeyo[AEVix.<;'

Ka0 kg yivucxoy.ev
voiocVj

xaO*

ikszs-ov

ccg

(xiyu

ruv

^oav, <pavT<x,<nav ny

Oujuiai/) tos

-rrj? '4/U

il

di C,toTixa?,

yvufixxg

ovtcov, olou vxv>

tcoi/

x\o tuv

tiJri

o\-

ovtuv, n tuv
n? iiri-

t hoyu (ret ztocpx tqv

opsxJixuv Svvxpzuv zrpotpy^ov-

?C^> x* dvryg

*<*6'

dvrnv ivspyxirn?,

T&po; iTigou XTTOTBivoyivrig (tov cujaCaAAjaOa*

upo; Tj TV%siv t^>

[aiv,

oPx]ixocg Jt,

Xiyu, srpoa.iptiriv, Svyov,

MEN Tirjocotx

et.7ro(pxvTuiovj

tk{

ociaQntriv'

oaiyoySx tuv dyaQuv,

ooxjsi/twv, oiov pHXvi<riv

rxi

fxiv <y]/urix.oi,$ }

opifcsug') k) titoi

Koyov

xXXx

Soxsvrx

-urxp

xvia

Ch.

II.

HERMES.

18

Ch.

The

II.

Extenfions of Speech are quite

indefinite, as

may be

k^n. if

we compare
the

HaOaTTfp

jitso"/k,

Itt\

EPX2THMATIKOT
Hj

wj

A&y^,

srap'

utTTTip

iir\

tv%e7v iCpupiVYis, zrgos

xu/i5

tuvtyiS,

tfayhXTiHov

rrtg

<p<x,ivofjt.iv(io<;,

aA*50a? v

Meaning of
Text,

we

^ tufas,

nvog

take

its

tranflation

igitur

ejl,

tto

ruvur^xy-

y.ovcv

tbto

J"f k7*

kXKuv

xfiv.

The

from the Latin Interpre-

cum

&

titionis ac cupiditatis appellation

qua

tfi

to

the above paiTage being implied in the

Dicendum

ejl,

iTe

Tif

h,

yvcioTtwg

10

twi/

potejlatem babeat, cognitionis,

vis

r\

x.(>bit1ov(&>,
>

yvotfixuv,

ytvQpiwq Iv^Tv

(axtuv txhnQuS) n
sj-ji'

w? zragol

r>

-*

AIIO<I>ANTIKON uno tuv

ter.

KAHTIKOT,

tS

^
ETXHS, j ts-ocpx x ^f>0l'J wf 7rt
xaA*/xi/>?? nPOSTAHEXlS* po AE

aula zjgtx.feus'

S7rt T*if

xgv

>c)

Aoya, ^ ur^ay^a,

xaAajusj/g

zrga.yfMic, wtoi civlx \v.i\va

ov

I1YSMATIKOT

anuria nojira ditplicem

vita,

qua etiam appe-

qua vero

cognitionis e/l,

res fmgulas cognojcimus, ut mens-, cogitatia,

opinio, pbantafia,fenfus

appetitus vero facultas

ejl,

qua

bona, vel quce funt, vcl que? videntur, concupifcimus, ut

Junt voluntas, confdium,

ira, cupiditas

quatuor orationis

/pedes, prater enunciantem, a partibus animi profcifcuntur,

qua

concupifcunt

fed cum ad aliumfe

quod

non cum animus

convertit, qui ei

per fe agit,
id,

atque etiam vel ra-

eo exquirit, ut in orationc,

quam Percun&an-

cupit, conducere pojfe videatur

tionem ab

ipfe

ad conjequendum

Book the First.

the Eneid to an

Epigram of Martial, But Ch.

the longeft Extenjion, with

mar

has to do,

is

conlidered, that

is

The

19

which Gram-

the Extenfion here

to fay, a

Sentence.

greater Extenfions (fuch as Syllo-

gifms, Paragraphs, Sections, and complete

Works) belong not

to

Arts of higher order

of

all

them

Grammar, but

to

not to mention that

are but Sentences repeated.

Now a Sentence

(c)

may be

a compound

in the following defcription

tern, aui In.terrogantem vacant

lketch'd

>ua?itity

vel rem

fique rcmf

vel cum ipfum confequi cupit, quicum loquitur, ut in optante oratione, vel aliquam ejus aclionem

vel ut a prcejlantiore, ut in Deprecatione

feriore, ut in

eo,

rerum cognitionem, qua

veram, aut fimulatam.

que

capit

vel ut ah in-

qui proprie Julius nominatur.

autem Enuncians a cognofcendi facilitate

heccque nunciat

atque in hue,
;

Sola

proficifcitur

in nobis

ejl,

aid

verum fallumAramon. in Libr. de

Itaque Haec fola

prater ea vcro nulla.

Interpretatione.

jui^j]

See

xafi*

alfo

aura cn[xenni

de Interpret,

c. 4,

rt.

Arift. Poet.

c.

20.

II.

HERMES.

20

Ch.

II.

Quantity of Soundfignificant y of which certain

Parts are themje/ves

Thus when

alfo fig?iificant

I fay [the

Sunjhineth] not

only the whole qua?itity of found has a

meaning, but certain Parts

fuch as

alfo,

[Sun] and [Jhineth.]

But what

we

mall

Parts again other Parts,

manner

fignificant,

which are

and

all

Meaning,

then muft

we

in like

the pro-

Body, to be divi-

like

Meanings without end

thefe

Can we fup-

and to include within

fible,

is

may

fo

grefs be purfued to infinite

pofe

Have

fay?

itfelf

other

If this be abfurd,

necelTarily admit, that there

fuch a thing as a Sound fignifcant, of

which no Part
this

is

is

what we

of a (d)

of itfelffignificant
call

Word.

And

the proper character

For

thus,

though the

Words

(d)

$>uvri o-Ti/xauTixr,

r,g

(*{(& $iv

ifl

x6' dura

De Interpret, c. 2
De Poetic, c
er.pxvriY.lv.
& 3. Prifcian's Definition of a Word (Lib. 2. ) is as
20.

follow?

Book the First.

Words [Sun] and
Meaning, yet

[JJjineth]

have each a Ch.

there certainly no

is

2j

Mean-

ing in any of their Parts, neither in the

Syllables of the one, nor in the Letters of

the other.

all Speech, whether

If therefore

Whole, every Sec-

profe or verfe, every

every

tion,

Paragraph, every Sentence,

imply a certain Meaning,

other

Meanings,

as

Diclio

follows

ejl

autem

idco

divider e, hoc

ejl,

gendum h esc fit

dore

Gaza.

Xoya.

cjl,

in vi

Ae^i?

s?

nothing

lefs

has

To

<2

totius fenfus intelUtlum.

Hoc

res

non enim ad totum intelli-

To Prifcian wc may add Theo-

Si, (*(?

Gram.

chara&eriiric of a
Serr.

fol-

nequis conetur vires in duas partes

divifio.

Introd.

it

Pars autem, quantum ad totum

ad

eft,

dictum

pars minima orationis conjiruclcc, id

hi ordine compofeta:.

inteiiigendum, id

imply a

at all.

eft,

into

will be thefmallejl parts

much

offpeech, in as

any Meaning

not fo divifible

is

Words

divifible

Words

but

Meaning, which
lows that

in

1.

Word

4.

iXa^ifov

hcctoc <tvi/tx%ii>

Plato ihswed them this

See

Cratylus, p. 385. Edit.

II.

HERMES.

22

Ch.

II.

To know

therefore the fpecies of

muft needs contribute

Speech, as

it

to the

Wordsy

knowledge of

implies a knowledge of

its

mlnutejl Parts.

This

therefore

mull become our next

Inquiry,

CHAP.

Book the First.

CHAP.

23

III.

Concerning the /pedes of Words, the fmallefi

Parts of Speech,

LE T Words
us

of

Speech,

fearch for the Species

nrft

among thofe Parts of

commonly received by Gram-

marians.

For example,

in

one of the

palTages above cited.

The Man, that hath no mufic

And

is

not

movd

founds.
Is fit for treafons

in himfelf

with concord offweet

Here the Word [The]

is

an

Article;

[Man] [No] [Mufic] [Concord] [Sweet]

[Sounds] [Fit] [Treafons] are

all

Nouns,

fome Subfianthe, and fome Adjec7ive

[Hath] and
an Adverb
Participle
Conjunction
[And]
:

Pronouns
Verbs
[moved]

[That] and [Himfelf] are

[is]

are

[Not]

[In]

[with]

and

Ch.IIL

24

HERMES.

Ch.IIL and [For]

are

*"""*

fentence

'

which

Prepositions.

we have all

the Greek

The

are found

Latins only dif-

having no Article, and in feparat-

fer in

ing the
felf,

thofe Parts of Speech,

Grammarians

acknowledge.

to

In one

Interjection,

as a Part of it-

which the Greeks include among the

Species of Adverbs.

What
are

why

there
fo

then mall

To

determine

not more Species of

many

why

fewer,

we

or if neither

why-

Words

more nor

thefe and not others

refolve, if pofTible,

thefe feveral

Queries, let us examine any Sentence that

comes
-

in

rences

our way, and fee what difTe-

we can

difcover in

its

Parts.

For

example, the fame Sentence above,

The Alan that hath no

One

Mitfic,

&c.

Difference foon occurs, that fome

Words are variable, and others invariable.

Thus the Word Man may be varied into
Man's and Men
*

Hath, into Have, Haji,

Had.

Book the First.

Sweet into Sweeter and Sweet' Ch.III.

Had, &c.
ejf

25

On

Fit into Fitter and Fitteft.

Words

contrary, the

T^he,

fome others, remain as they

the

In,

And, and

are,

and can-

not be altered.

And

yet

may be

it

this Difference

queftioned,

For

is efTential.

place, there are Variations,

how far

in the firft

which can be

hardly called necellary, becaufe only fome

Languages have them, and others have

them

not.

Variation,
JVloderns,

Thus
which
and

the Greeks have the dual

unknown both

to the

to the ancient Latins.

Thus

is

the Greeks and Latins vary their Adjectives

by the

Cafe, and

triple Variation

Number 5

of Gender,

whereas the Englijh

never vary them in any of thofe ways, but

thro'
flill

all

kinds of Concord preferve

the fame.

Nay even

thofe very

which appear moft

riations,

them

Va-

neceflary,

may have

their places fupplied

by other

methods

fome by Auxiliars,

as

for Bruti, or Bruto,

we

fay, oj

when

Brutus, to

Brutus

-,

HERMES.

26

Ch.III. Brutus y fome by meer Pojition, as

-

~*

%m

'

Brutum

amcroit

Latin

in

Variation,

its

from

its

fay,

for

CaJ/ius

For here the Accufative*

lov'd Brutus.

which

we

CaJJius,

when

known any where from

in EngliJJj only known

is

is

Pofition or place.

If then the Distinction of Variable and

Invariable will not anfwer our purpofe,
us look farther for

let

fome other more

effential.

Suppose then we mould

diifolve

Sentence above cited, and view

Parts
ed.

feveral

its

they ftandfeparate and detach-

as

Some

ing (fuch

plain Ji ill preferve a

'tis

as

Man, Mujic,

Mean-

Sweet, &c.)

others on the contrary immediately

(fuch

as,

that thefe

tion,

if

it

it

Not

have no meaning

at all,

laft

company, or

Now

lofe

And, The, With, &c.)

but in fact they never have

in

the

it,

but

when

ajjociat-ech

lhould feem that this Diftinc-

any,

was

e Hernial.

For

all

Words

Book the First.

27

Words

are fignificant, or elfe they

not be

Words and
;

every thing not ab-

of courfe relative, then will

is

filute,

if

would Ch.III.

^-^

all

fignificant either abfolutely or

Words be
relatively.

With

refpecl: therefore

tinftion, the firft fort of

to this Dif-

Words may be

call'd fignificant by themfelves

may be
we like

The

the latter

call 'd fignificant by relation

it

better, the

Principals,

calVd

firft

fort

firft

the latter

or if

may be

Acceffories.

bafis
are like thofe ftones in the

to fupport
of an Arch, which are able
themfelves, even when the Arch is de-

ftroyed
in its

the latter are like thofe ftones

Summit

or Curve,

which can no

fublonger ftand, than while the whole

fifts (,).

This

of Alexandria (one of the acuteft

Grammar)
Authors that ever wrote on the fubjea of
by the different
illuftrates the different power of Words,
(*) Apellonius

power of
<7<*>s>

Letters.

"Et,

rporrov

rm fnyftm

m $MWTx> ^x0* iwT <puw >*

rso

HERMES.

28

This DifHnction being admitted, we

*v-^> thus purfue pur Speculations. All
things

Ch.III.

what-

~
N t>\
/
'
i!
' "1
1
M
r
\
too oi (rvpipwVKy xttb^ gcvsv tojv tpuvr.ivluv ay. t^ei pnrriv

tK^WVtKTlV. T9V CCUTOV

*T?t/

*"./*
TW AEgeWP.

Cit JtA^

y&O

TC/7T0l' J-|f iTTlVOr,(Tl

KX

TTi
,

KuiWJj TGQTTQV TlUX T(J> Cw^fJ/-

pJ7Tl iOV Xa&7T> E7 TWJ/ p\fXXTUV, 01/G{J.CCTUV

y

TCt-V,

CatTUWjAiUVy l7TippV\y.(XTXV'

OU Sly UGTTtptl

<T'.)

U(pXVXy

ce..xu.iv&Ci

t (pwviwra, a

XXVX7TBO

;V^J

c\.v6i<T^(iv

t5Wa/xt/a

urpCD(rU)^,

7r; TW1/

tx yxp toixvtx aa

kt' tViay p\roi

TW>

CKpVpUIVy

T(X)V

-ruv ptooicov <rv<r<TY\pxivti.

In the fame manner y as of the Elements or Letters, fome

are Vowehy which ofthemflves complete a Sound ; others
are Co'fonartSy which without the help of Towels have no
exprefs Vocality ;fo likewife

Some ofthemy

ture of Words.

felves exprejfive, es

nauns,

and Adverbs

own proper fircngth,

ways

like

as

and Conjunctions

is

to

fomething

the cafe ofFrepcftions, Arti-

for

clfe.

thefe parts

of Speech are al-

when

of-

Apollon. do Syntaxi. L.

Itaque quibufdam philofophis placuit

c. 3.

wait for

become exprejfive by their

Canfignificanty that isy are only jignifi'cant,

ficiated

na-

Nouns, Pro-

others, like Co?fonants,

to

to the

Vowels, are of hem-

tht caj" of Verbs,

is
;

their Vowels, being unable

cles,

may wc conceive as

i.

nomen

&f

esse partes Orationis , cetera

Ad.Vw'niculaw/Juncturas earum : quomodo

yerbum Solas
verc,

navium

partesfunt tabula t3 trahes, cater a autem (id

ccra, fluppdy

Eff

ejl,

clavi ?S" fimilia) vinculo &f conglutination

Book the First.

whatever either

as the Energies, or

exifi

Affeft ions, offome

29

Ch.TIL
or without *v

other thing,

being the Energies or Affeclions of fome

If they exift as the Energies

other thing.

offome thing

or Affections

they

called

think

is

to

Attributes.
Swan

be four-footed,

exift not after this

to

Swan,

them

Eagle,

manner, then are they

Thus Man,

and Horfe, are none of

but

exift in

and Place, yet neither of

do they

Subftances,

all

may

becaufe however they

elfe,

be

If they

of a Horfe.

Attributes,

any thing

to

to

of an Eagle

fly,

Substances*.

call'd

Thus

Man

the attribute of a

white, of a

then arc

elfe,

thefe,

exift as

Time

nor of

Energies

or Affections.

And

tioties

partlum navis (hoc

non partes navis dicuntur.

* Substances.] Thus
ii^y\rxi i
fAiua,

-rt

sror iftv

etXhfi

p. 106.

jca6'

d. Sylb,

eji,

iabitlarum

Prifc.

L.

Iff

XL

trabium)

913.

Ariftotlc. Nui/ yXv

zirix,

on

to

tk xKKx,

ju.11

xa&'

IVletaph.

h tvttu
nroxuZ. y

HERMES.

30

And

Ch.III.

^- ^v

either

thus

(J)

all'

things whatfoever, being

Subfiances or Attributes,

as

fol-

Words, which are

Principals, mutt needs be

lows of courfe that

Jigntficant

it

all

iigniflcant of either the one or the other.

If they zxq Jigntficant of Sub/lances, they

are

Subjlantives

call'd

they are

if

of Attributes,

call'd Attributives.

Words

So that

all

whatever, Jigntficant as Princi-

pals, are either

Substantives

or

At-

tributives.

Again,

as to

Words, which

as Accejfories, they acquire

fignificant

'Signification either
to one

Word, or

Word alone,

elfe

from being

in

they

may

many.

to

affociated

If to one

then as they can do no more

fome manner

than

are only

define or determine,

juftly for that reafon

be called

De-

(/) This divifkm of things into Subfance and Attriby Philofophers of all

bute feems to have been admitted

Seds and Ages.

VII.

c. i.

De

See Categor.

Cceky L. III.

c.

c. 2.
I.

Metaphyf. L.

Book the First.

Definitives.

31

many Words at Ch.III.

If to

then as they ferve to no other pur-

once,

pofe than

reafon by the

that

they are called for

to connecl,

name of Connec-

tives.

And

thus

it is

that

all

Words

what-

ever are either Principals or Acceffories

Names,

or under other

from

either fignijicant

themfelves, or Jignificant by relation.

If fignijicant

either

from

Subftantives

fignificant

by

themfelves, they are

or Attributives-,

relation,

they

one

of thefe

four

either

are

So that un-

Definitives or Connectives.

der

if

Species,

Sub-

stantives, Attributives, Definitives, and Connectives, are all

Words,

however

different,

in

a manner

included.

If any of thefe
unufual,
ufual,

we may

Names feem new and

introduce others

by calling the Subftantives,

the Attributives,

Verbs

more

Nouns

the Definitives,

Arti-

-~v-

HERMES.

32
Ch.III.

Articles; and

*~~*

JUNCTIONS.

'

Shou'd

the Connectives,

Con-

be afk'd,what then becomes

it

of Pronouns, Adverbs, Prepofitions, and

Interjections

the anfwer

is,

either they

muft be found included within the Species

above-mentioned, or

many

admitted for fo

elfe

mufl be

Species by

them-

felves.

There

were various opinions

cient days, as to the

in an-

number of thefe Parts,

or Elements of Speech.

Plato in his * Sophifk mention? only

two, the Noun and the Verb.

mentions no more, where he
f

Prepofitions.

Not

Arijiotle
treats

of

that thofe acute Phi-

lofophers were ignorant of the other Parts,

but they fpoke with reference to Logic or

Dia~
*

Tom.

De

I. p.

261. Edit. Ser.

Interpr. c. 2

&

3.

Book the First.

DialcBlc (g), confidering the Effcnce of Ch.III.

Speech

as contained in thefe two, beeaufe

tbefe alone

true

combined make

Sentence,

a perfect djfer-

which none of the

without them are able to

reft

Hence

effect.

therefore Arijloik in his * treatife of Pee-*

try (where

he was

to

lay

down

the ele-

ments
is) Partes igitur orationis funt fecundam Diakclicos
<//Wj

Nomen

Verbum

ha Jolts

quia

etiam per

fe conjunfla plenamfaciunt orationem; alias autern partes

a-vfaotlnyogrifAOLTOiy hoc ejl, confignificantia appellabant*

Prifcian.

1.

2. p.

574. Edit. Putfchii.

darn quaflio, cur duo tantum,

qua-

Exijlit hie

& Verbum,

Nomen

Je (drifhtelesfc.) determinare promittat, cumplurcs par^htibus hoc dicendum tf?y

tes orationis ejje videantur.

tantum Arijlotelem hoc

libro diffinijfe^

quod injlituerat traclare, fuffecit.

fimplici enuntiativa 01'atione^

quantum

quafcilicet hujufmodi cjl,

j unci is tantum Verbis etNominibus componatur.

fuperfatum

ejl

ad

till

id.,

Traclat namque de

quarere, cur alias qusque,

ut

hiare

qua vidsntur

orationis partes, nonpropofuerit, qui non totius fimpliciter

orationis, fed tantumfimplicis orationis injlituit elementa

Boetius in Libr. de

parti'ri.

Interpretat.

p.

295.

JpoL'onius from the above principles elegantly calls the

NoUN

and Veke, t iy.^vyfrxra

the rnoji

animated parts of Speech.

c. 3. p.

24. See

* Poet.

alfo Plutarch, ghtaft.

Cap. 20.

pigr;

De

m fijyuj

Syntaxi,

P Lion. p.

1.

1,

1009,

HERMES.
ments of a more variegated fpeech) adds
the Article and Conjunction to the

and Verb, and

fo adopts the

with thofe eftablifhed

To

Noun

fame Parts,
Treatife.

in this

Arijlotles authority (if indeed better

may be added

can be required)
of the elder Stoics

The
made

(/>).

latter Stoics inftead

five,

into the

Others increafed

Appellative and Proper.

from the

of four Parts

by dividing the Noun

the number,

that alio

by detaching the Pronoun

Noun

-,

the Participle and

verb from the Verb

Ad-

and the Prepojition

from the Conjunction. The Latin Grammarians went farther, and detached the
Interjection

from

Adverb,

the

which by the Greeks

within

was always

it

in-

cluded, as a Species.

We
(h) For this

we

have the authority of Dionyjius of

HalicarnaJ]uS)De StruSi,
tilian folio ws, In/I.

Prifcian
Parts.

I.

Orat.

I. c.

4.

make them always

Sett. i.

>uin-

Diogenes Laertius and

to

have admitted rive

See Prijcian^ as before, and

VII. Segm. 57.

whom

L^crtius^ Lib,

Book the First.

We are

by

told indeed

(/)

35

Dionyjius of Ch.TII.

Halicamajjus and ^uintilian, that AriJlor

tie,

with Tbeodeffes, and the more

early-

writers, held but three Parts of fpeech,

the Nomty the Verb, and the Conjunction.

This,

muft be ow ned, accords with

T

it

whofe Grammars

the oriental Tongues,

(we

admit no other.

are (k) told)

as to Arijlotky

own authoricontrary, who not only

four Species which we

we have

ty to arTert the

enumerates the

But

his

have adopted, but afcertains them each

by a proper Definition

D
1

(/)

*.

To

...

1.,.

'

See the places quoted in the note immediately

preceding.
(k)

Antiqw.jjima eorum

<quoque (qui,
rent,

ejl opinio,

qui tres

clajjes fa~

Arahum quoque fententia Hebrai

cum Arabes Grammalicam fcribere define-

EJlque bac

ciunt.

artem earn demurn fcribere cceperunt, quod ante

annos ccntigit circiter quadringentos) Hebrai, inq;ca?n,

bac in re fecuti funt magifiros fuos Arabes.

Immo vera

trium clajjium numerum alia etiam Orienth lingua

Dubium, utrum ea

retinent.

in re Orientates imitati

funt antiquos Gracorum, an hi potius fecuti funt Qrientalium exemplum.

JJtut ejl, etiam veteres

tantum partes agnovijfe, non folum autor

&c. VolT. de Analog.

Minerv.

I.

Sup.

I. c. 2.

p.

34.

1.

I.

c,

i.

See

Graces

ejl

tres

Dionyfius y

alfo Sanclii

36

Ch.III.
<

,*

To

E R

conclude

S.

the Subject of the fol-

lowing Chapters will be a

dirtinct

and fe-

Ncun, the
Verb, the Article, and the Conjunction; which four, the better (as we

parate

consideration of the

apprehend)

to

exprefs

their

refpective

we chufe to call Substantives, Attributives, Definitives,

and Connectives.
natures,

CHAP.

Book the First.

H A

P.

37

IV.

Concerning Subjlantives, properly fo

SUbstantives
Words

are all thofe principal

which are fignificant

called.

Ch.IV.
-^v
of Sub*

'

fiances, conf.dcred, as Subjlances.

The

fir ft

natural,

fort

of Sub/ lances are

the

fueh as Animal, Vegetable,

Man, Oak.

There
making.

are other Subftances of our

Thus by

own

giving a Figure not

natural to natural Materials,

we

create

fuch Subftances, as Houfe, Ship, Watch,

Telefcope,

&c

Again, by a more refned operation of

our Mind alone, we abJiraSt any Attribute
from

its

neceflary fubject,

apart, devoid of

its

and coniider

dependence.
3

it

For

example,

HERMES.

38

Ch.IV. example, from Body we

from Surface,

the being

abstract to Fly

White

from Soul,

the being Temperate.

And

thus

we

it is

convert even Attri-

them on

butes into Subflances, denoting

this occafion

by proper

Subjiaritives,

as Flight, Whitenefs, Temperance

by others more
Colour

Thefe we

stract Substances
we

Now

all

dividuals.

cies

the fecond fort

and their In-

their Species,

For example,

Animal

is

in natural

Genus

Man,

Alexander, an Individual.

tificial

ab-

thofe feveral Subflances have

Genus,

fiances,

call

artificial.

call

their

or elfe

-,

fuch as Motion,

general,

Virtue.

',

fuch

Subflances, Edifice

Palace, a Species
dividual.

tion

is

this

Flight

In

Genus

Subflances,

Flight,

that Flight

are

Spe-

In ar-

the Vatican, an

abjlracl

Genus
or

-,

is

Sub-

In-

Mo-

Species
Indivi-

duals.

As

Book the First.

As

Species

them

in each one of its

intire

Man, Horfe, and Dog,

(for thus

are each of

diftineHy a complete and

Animal) and

intire

Genus maybe Ch.IV.

therefore every [a)

found whole and

as every

be found whole and intire

Individuals

39

Species may

in each one

of its

(for thus Socrates, Plato,

and

Xenophon, are each of them completely

and

distinctly

Man)

hence

every Genus, tho' One,

Many

and every

alio multiplied into

to thofe beings,

multiplied into

Many,

it

nefs be considered as

Individual

by

is

reference

can never in

Many,

ftrict-

and

as well in

fo

is

Nature

Name.

'

(a) This

is

From

what Plato feems

to

have exprefled in a

manner fomewhat myfterious, when he

tdzxv Six tzqXXuv,

pa?

One,

Species, tho*

which are their proper fub^

anyfuch fubordinates,

as in

that

Since then no individual has

ordinates.

truly an

is

is,

it

tvoq

ixccm

ifaQtv -Erecjf^o^eW?.

Serrani.

For the common

talks of y.ix

xsifxivts p^wtfif,

Sophi/i. p.

definition of

-s-aYJ*}

253. Edit.

Genus and

Species, fee the Ifagoge or Introduction of Porphyry

to driftot/e's Logic.

40

PI

From

Ch.TV.

E R

theie Principles

S.

it is,

thatWords

following the nature and genius of Things,

Number

fuch Sub/iantizes admit of

Genera cr

denote

which denote
nefs admit

it

while thofe,

Species,

Individuals,

(b)

as

in

flricT:-

not.

Besides
______

'

Yet fometimes

(b)

Number, from

have plurality or

Individual;

In the

the caufes following.

the Individuals of the

human

tude, even in the fmalleft nation, that

difficult

to invent a

Individual.
call'd

new Name

Hence then

Marcus, and

firft

place

race are fo large a multi-

for

it

would be

every new- born

inftead of one only being

one only Antonius,

happens that

it

Marcus and many called Antonius

and thus 'tis the Romans had their Plurals, Marciznd
Antonii, as we in later days have ou; Marks and our
Now the Plurals of this fort may be well
Anthonies.
many

are called

called accidental, becaufe

the

Names

it

is

merely by chance that

coincide.

There feems more

reafon for fuch Plurals, as the

Ptolemies^ Scipios, Catos, or

modern

(to infrance in

names) the Howards, Pclhams, and Montagues

caufe a Race or Family
that the'family

fpecihe

Name

third

is

like a

Naife extends

jmaUer fort of
to the

be;

Kindred, as the

extends to the Individuals.

caufe which contributed to

Names become

Species

Plural,

make

proper

was the high Character or Emi-

Name became

af-

terwards a kind of common Appeuc.ii-je, to denote

all

nence

oi'

feme Gne Individual, whole

thofe,

Book the First.

Besides Number, another
Subflances,

iflic, vilible in

Every Subftance
or both

is

either

character-

Ch.IV.
v
that of Sex.
'

is

Male or Female

Male and Female

ox neither one

-,

So that with

nor the other.

41

refpecr.

to

Sexes and their Negation, all Subjlances

comprehended under

conceiveable are

this

fourfold confideration.

Now

the exigence of Hermaphrodites

being rare,

if

not doubtful

hence Lan-

guage,

thofe,

Thus

who had

pretenfions to merit in the fame way.

every great Critic was call'd an Arijlarchus

every great Warrior, an Alexander', every great Beauty,

a Helen, ike.

A Daniel

come

to

Judgment

cries Sbjlock in the Play,

when

yea a

Daniel,

he would exprefs the

wifdom of the young Lawyer.

So Martial
Sint

in that well

M.E nates,

So

known

verfe,

nan deerunt, Flacce,

Marones.

Luciiius,

AiriAIIIOI

mantes,

JEthhje

omnes,

a/peri

Athones.
zTotroi

in

$AE0ONTE2,

Timon. T.

I. p.

108.

AETKAAinNEZ.

Lupian

HERMES.

42

Ch.IV. guage, only regarding thole

which

more obvious,

are

diftinctions

Mascu-

Neuter

line, Feminine, or

As

to our

own

Words

confiders

denoting Subjiances to be either

Species, and

*.

all

thofe

animal Species, which have rej'ermce

common

Life, or of

which the Male and

the Female, by their

&c. are eminently

to

fize,

form, colour,

molt Lan-

dijlinguified,

guages have different Subftantives, to denote the Male and the Female.
thofe animal

Species,

frequently occur, or of
lefs

But

which

as to

either

lefs

which one Sex

is

apparently dijiinguified from the other,

in thefe a fingle Subflantive

ferves for

commonly

both Sexes.
In

After
tU.

this

manner they

Td>!/ OVOfXCiTUU

fji.iTtx'o.

are diiringuiflied

Protagoras before him had

fame DiftiniHon, calling them uppwx,

x? <rxevij.

Ariftot. Rhet. L. III. c. 5.

mark what were afterwards

ters,

were by

by Ar'tjio-

[iXv Kf^iVOCj tcc 1 SyiXsoc, rot S(

Poet. cap. 21.

eftablifhed the

SrMxy

called a'Jrrf^a,

thefe called roi ptTccfcu

Where

or Neu-

<rxU.

Book the First.

f*

In the Englijh

Tongue

neral rule (except only

it

43

feems a ge- Ch.IV.

when infringed by

a figure of Speech) that no Subftantive

is

Mafculine, but what denotes a Male ani-

mal Subjiance

none Feminine, but what

denotes a Female afiimal Subjiance-, and

that where the Subftance has no Sex, the

Subftantive

But
many

is

always Neuter.

not fo in Greek, Latin, and

'tis

Thefe

of the modern Tongues.

all

of them have Words, fome mafculine,

fome feminine (and thofe too

multitudes)
fiances,

To
is

is

which have reference

in great

to

Sub-

where Sex never had existence.

give one inftance for many.

Mind

furely neither male, nor female

NOTE,

in Greek, mafculine,

yet

and mens,

in Latin, feminine.

In
f

Nam quicquid per Naturam

neutrum haberi

oporteret,

apud Putfch.

2023, 2024.

The whole

p.

Sexui non aifignatur,

fed id Ars, Sic.

Palfage from Genera

turaliafunt, Sec.

is

worth perufing.

Confent.

Hominum, qua na-

'

v^mJ

HERMES.

44

Ch.IV.

In fome Words thefe diftinetions feem

_
"

owing

to nothing elfe, than

cafual ftructure of the

offuch

Word

to the

mere

itfelf :

It is

Gender, from having luch a

Termination

or

from belonging perhaps

to iuch a Declenfion.

In others

we may

imagine a more fubtle kind of reaibning,

a reasoning

without

which

difcerns, even in things

Sl'x, a diflant

analogy to that great

natural Distinction,

which

(ac-

cording to Milton) animates the World

J.

In

this

view we

may

conceive fuch

Substantives to have been confidered

as Masculine, which were " confpicu" ous for the Attributes of imparting or
" communicating or which were by naj

" ture active, ftrong, and efficacious, and

" that indifcriminately whether to good
" or to ill ; or which had claim to Emi-

" nence,

either laudable or otherwile."

The
X

Mr. Linnaus,

the celebrated Botanift, has traced

the Diftiticlim of Sexes throughout the whole Vegetable

World, and made

Method.

it

the

Balis of his Botanic

Book the Fut st.

The Feminine

45

on the contrary were Ch.IV.

" fuch, as were confpicuous for the At" tributes either of receiving, of con" taining, or of producing and bringing
" forth

"

or

which had more of the paf-

five in their nature,

" or which

were

" and amiable

or

than of the active

peculiarly

beautiful

which had

refpeel to

" fuch ExcerTes, as were rather Femi-

"

nine, than

Upon

Mafculine."

thefe Principles the

two greater

Mafculine, the other as Feminine; the Sun

('H\i&>, Sol) as Mafculine from communicating Light, which was native a::d
Luminaries were conlidered, one

as

original,

as

warmth and

Moon

well

as

from the vigorous

efficacy

{ZsKyvrj,

Luna)

of his Rays
as Feminine,

the

from

being the Receptaoje only of another's

Light, and from mining with rays more
delicate

and

foft.

Thus

*~~*
'

46

Ch.IV.

Thus

E R

S.

Milton,

Firji in his Eaft the glorious Lamp

Regent of Day, and

His

longitude thro

Horizon round

all tti

Invefted with bright rays

wasfen,

jocund

Heavns

run

to

high road

the gray

Dawn, and the Pleiades before him

Shedding fweet

danc'd,

Lefs bright the

influence.

Moon
But

oppoflte, in levell'd

His

mirrour, with fullface borrowing

Weft was ft,

her

Light

From him ;for other light she

needed none.

P. L. VII. 370.

Ky

Virgil they

and

ther

fame

Sifter,

were confidered

which

ftill

as

Bro-

preferves the

difti notion.

Nee F R a t r 1 s

radiis obnoxiafurgere

G.

THESKYorETHER
tin Mafculine, as

is

in

I.

Luna.
396.

Gree&andLa-

being the fource of thofe

fhowers, which impregnate the Earth.

The

Book the First.

* The Earth on the contrary is univerfally

Feminine, from being the grand Re-

ceiver, the

grand Container, but abo\^

11

from being the Mother (either mediately

or immediately) of every fublunary Subfiance,

whether animal or vegatable.

Thus Virgil,
Ttum Pater omn ipot en sfcecundis
hribus /Ether
Conjugis

in

gremium l^etje

im-

defcendit,

& omnes
Magnus

a/it

magno commix t us

corporefcetus.

G.

II.

Thus Shakefpear,
% Common Mother, I'hou
Whofe Womb unmeafurable, and

325.

infinite

Breaji
*Teems

andfeeds

Tim. of Athens.

all

So Milton,

Whatever Earth,

all-bearing Mo-

ther, yields.

P. L.

V.
So

Senecae Nat. J^W/?. ///. 14.

EU/xjU7iTc/j yr\ yjx.~(>i Grace.

Anth.

p.

281.

47
Ch.IV.

48

Ch.IV.

So

E.

S.

Virgil,

mater

Non jam

alit

Tell us,

Among

artificial

Navis)

(N#u,

is

virefque

JEn.Xl.yi.

minijlrat (c).

Subftances the Ship

feminine, as being fo

eminently a Receiver and Container of va-

Men, Arms, Provifions,

Goods, &c> Hence Sailors, fpeaking of

rious things, of

their Veflel,

fay always,

" anchor," " she'

A City
try,

is

"she

under fail."

Chitas) and

(TloXtg,

rides at

Coun-

{UuTpig, PatriaJ are feminine alfo,

by being

(like the

Ship) Containers and

Receivers, and farther

by being

as

it

were

the Mothers and Nurfes of their refpedtive

Inhabitants.

Thus

(<:)

k
k-,

Xj

<?&

MHTEPA
a

ti

TUT, $v<rw, us HAT

OTPANON # ^ HAION,
tohituii ug TENHNTAS *^

t:j vA:o rr,v

twp aAXuv tuv

EIATEPA2
I. C. 2.

si/

wjfcw'^o-iv

isrocrysoV3<n.

Arid, de Gener. Anim.

Book the First.

Thus
Sahe,

49

Ch.IV,

Virgil,

magna Parens frugum,

Sa-

turnia Tellus,

Magna Virum

Geor.

cz JJcctqi;

Tcci'ex,

173.

Epigram on thofe

So, in that Heroic

brave Greeks,

II.

who

fell at

\^

kcXttois

Chceronea,
tcov

TrXtlga, kgc->

(AOVTOOV

Their

parent Country

in

her

bofom

holds

Their wearied bodies,

So Milton*

which Thou f: eft, no other deem

'Than great and glorious Rome, Queen of
'The City,

the Earth.

As

to the

Par.

Ocean,

the Receiver of

all

tho'

Reg. L. IV.
from

its

being

Rivers, as well as the

Container

..

* Demofh

in Orat. de Corona,

HERMES.

50

Ch.IV. Container and ProduBrefs of

v"*"

v
'

getables and Animals,

it

fo

many Ve-

might juflly have

been made (like the Earth) Feminine-, yet

deep Voice and boiflerous

its

Nature have,

in

make
Indeed the very found of Homers

fpight of thefe reafons, prevailed to

Male.

it

y.zyoe,

would fugged
of

its

(Tow* 'Qkc<xvoTo,

even ignorant

to a hearer,

meaning, that the Subject was in-

compatible With, female delicacy and foftnefs.

Time

(Xpcv-) from bis mighty Efficacy

upon every thing around us,

and Engli/h

Thus

line.

is

by the Greeks

juftly conlidered as

Mafcu-

in that elegant diftich,

fpoken

by a decrepit old Man,

*

yocp Xpoi/<&>

" AirccvToc. c

Me Time

fji

gjcapl's,

tbktuv i

pyapyAv'&> curBevefepx

<7c<pog,
"j-.

hath bent, thatforry Art ifi,

That furely makes, whatever he

he

handles,

ivorje.

So

Graec. Anth. p. 290.

*f

Stob. Eel. p. 591.

Book the First.

So too Shake/pear, fpeaking

51

like wife

of Ch.IV.

Time,

Whom

Orl.

he galhp

doth

ivithal?

Rof. With a thief to the gallows.

As you

The
Englijh

Greek

Qcivotr^ or AtSWj

Death, feem from

reiiuible

Power

accuflomed

Take
line

the fame ir-

us

they would treat as

(//).

few examples of the mafcu*

Death.

Well

CallU

therefore did Milton in his Paradife Loft-

not only adopt

Death

as Mafculine; in

and the

have been considered

E
(d)

it*

to this notion, that a

Female Death
ridiculous

like

Even the Vulgar with

as Mafculine.

are fo

to

Phantom of

his

as a Pcrfon, but ccnfider

which he was

fo far

own, or from giving

it

a Gender not

fupported by Cuflom s that perhaps he had as

much

Sanclion of national Opinion for his Mafculine

as the ancient Poets had for

many

him

from introducing

the

Deathy

of their Deities.

HERMES.

52

Ch.IV.

^^

upon the Elegies of

Callimachiis

Friend Heraclitus
At

oe r&cci Quvcriv otydovs;, y<riv o

his

ttuvtuv

yet thy fweet warbling Jl rains

Still live immortal, nor on themftall

His hand eer

In the
or

lay, tho

Alcejiis

Death

is

of

Death

Ravager of all.
'Euripides,

Quvolt<&>

one of the Perfons of the

made

drama; the beginning of the play

is

up of dialogue between Him and

Apollo

and towards
tween

Hercules, in

a right be-

which Her-

conqueror, and refcues Alcejiis

is

well

Death
was

ed,

is

his hands.

It
It

end, there

Him and

cules is

from

its

are

known too, that Sleep and

made Brothers by Homer

to this old Gorgias elegantly allud-

when

at the

extremity of a long

he lay numbering on
Friend afked him,

<f

his

Death-bed.

How

he

didV

life

Book the First.

" Sleep

" upon

bis

Brother

Thus

Man)

(replied the old

me over

delivering

53
is

jufl

to the care

of

(e)."

Shake/pear, fpeaking of Life,

merely T'bou art Death's Foo/;

For him

T'bou labourJl by thy Jligbt to

Jldun,

And yet

run'Jl towards

him Jlilh
Meaf. for Meaf.

So Milton,

Dire was

the toj/ing, deep the groans;

Defpair

Tended tbejick, bufiejlfrom couch

'

And over

them triumphant

to

couch;

Death

his

dart

Shook

but delay

tojlrike

P.-L. XI. 489 (/).

The
(e)

H<JV)

QwQxi T'

y.e

O TIINOS

AAEA$m.

(f ) Suppofe

in

a.^yjToa

any one of

troduce a female Death

zroc^ocnaTari-

Stob. Eel. p. 600.

thefe

fuppofe

we

examples

we

in-

read,

And

Ch.IV.

HERME

54

The

Ch.IV.

uipreme Being (God,Qbo$, Deus,

DicUj &c.)
in as

in all languages Mafculine,

is

much

as the mafculine

more

fuperior and
is

the Creator of

with fuch

Deity

join

as

fay

this

To

U^urov,
la ft

faying

we

He

is

Qtlcv,

Englijh

Deity

it/elf)

thefe

rc'fon in thefe inftances

God

is

prior to all

both in dignity and

Priority

To

we meet with

feems to be, that as

things,

the

Gods

the Father of

(which

neuter,

The

Neuters.

is

excellent; and as

all,

words

Numen,

fome times

Sex

Sometimes indeed we meet

and Men.

to

S.

in

time,

better characterized

exprcft by a Negation, than

thofe Diftindtipns

which

and

by any of

are co-ordinate

with Jome Oppo/ite, as Male for example

is

J. d over them triumphant

Death HER. dart

Shook, &c.

How are

What

a falling off

of the

whole Sentiment weakened

the nerves and ftrength

!

Book the First.

55

co-ordinate with Female, Right with Ch.IV.

is

&c. &c.

Left,

Virtue
moll: of

its

{g).

Virtus) as well as

('Aqetw,

Species, are all Feminine, per-

haps from their Beauty and amiable

pearance, which are not without

Apeffect.

even upon the moil reprobate ana corr

pt.

E 4

Yd

Thus Ammonias,

(g)

TO lTPnTON

c, a

fpeaking on the fame Subject

Xiyoptv, ip

pr\

S\

uvvoXoytxs zjxxSovtocv -n^v rag SzoXoyixs

rig

yj

appj/cd7roi/, \ ^vAt]7roi7rr!

fj.op(p'jo<nv

pivi

All

to

(ptotiv'

S'^iAu

AH 2

dpetviv.u;

:--

AITII2I

CVfOl^OV

yzwv ra

piv yxo ap-

t'jO

to (lege tw)

TON 0RON

ftpvoTtcov ru)v

(lege SVvUtt^tt;;) Six~

t3'to EixoTw;*

<rv?oi%ov'

sSbv.

Si

xXXx

ovo[/.xi^ofj.tu,

v<pzi[Aiv}i

I1ANTHI
X.

OTXV
to

[ureas']

wPCTiu.ui/TSS,

Primum dicimus,

ctvrcv T!rco<7xyccivo[A<v.

Six

twj/

iroX'j.riGi

ztu$

quod nemo

etiam eorum, qui theologiam nobisfab u la rum inicgumentk

obvolutam

tradidcrunt, vel maris vel fcemina fpecie

idque

fingere aufus eft;

mari fgemininum

eji.

merito

conjugatum enim

Causae autem

omnino abso-

lute AC simplici nihil eft conjuration. Immovero

cum Deum mafculino genere appellamus, Ita ipfum nominamus, genus praftantius fubmiffo atone humlll praferentes.

s
p.

yxo

Ammon.

tvxvTicv tw

210. Sylb.

in Lib. de lnterpr.

n^wrw

zSiv,

Ariftot.

p.

30.

b.

Metapn.

HERMES.

56

Ch.IV.

abaft d the

Devilfood,

Andjelt how awful Goodn-fs

Virtue

her fiape how

in

andfaw

is,

lovely

Jaw,

and pin 'd

His

lofs

P.L. IV. 846.

This being

allowed,

comes Feminine of
the

cvccr/jcty

Vice

courfe, as being, in

or Co-ordination of things.

Virtue's natural O^pofite

The

Fancies,

(/6).

and

Caprices,

Fortune would

Changes of

awkwardly under

Male

(KcckU) be-

appear but

Cha racier

was

that

but taken together they

fickle

make

very

They arc

(b)

both reprefcnted as Females by Xeno-

phon, in the celebrated Story of H.rcules^ taken from

Prodicus.

See Memorab.

L.

II.

c.

1.

(rvfoi^oc here mentioned, thus Varro

S ami us ait omnium rerum

infinitum,

notlem.
taph.

L.

bonum

De

Ling. Lat. L. IV.

I. c. 5.

and

Eccleftajlicus,

eff

See

to the

Pythagoras

initio effq bina:

& malum, vitam

As

ut fin i turn

mortem, diem
al

Chap.

o drift
lxii.

W
&

Me-

ver. 24,

Book the First.

$j

very natural Female, which has no fmall Ch.IV.

~ ~
refembiance to the Coquette of a modern - w ,uJ
1

Comedy, beflowing, withdrawing, and

drifting her favours, as

different Beatis

fucceed to her good graces.

Uranfmutat incertos honores,

Nunc

mihi,

Why
is

the

nunc

alii

Hon

benigna.

Furies were made Female,

not fo eafy to explain, unlefs

female Paffions of

ail

it

be that

kinds were confi-

deredas fufceptible of greater excefs, than

male Paffions

-,

and that the Furies were

to be reprefented, as

Things fuperlatively

outrageous.

Talibus Aleclo diSiis exarfit in iras.

At

J'uveni cranti jubitus tremor occupat

artus

Diriguere

ocidi

tot

Frinnys fib Hat

Ry-

dris,

Tantaque fe facia aperit

turn

Jlammca

torquens

Lamina

58

Ch.IV.

P.

Lumina cunSiantem

^""v^

S.

&? quarentem dicere

plura
Repality

&

gcminos crexit crhribus an-

guesy

Verieraquc

rabidoque hcec ad-

infcmiit,

didit ore

En

Ego

&c.

viol;a fit n,

He,

(/)

The Words

above mentioned, Time, Death,

Fortune, Virtue, Sec. in Greek, Latin, French, and molt

modern Languages, though they are diverfified with

Genders in the manner defcribed, yet never vary the
Gender which they have once acquired, except in a
few inftances, where the Gender is doubtful. We
cannot fay

vi

it is

fay,

otherwife

Virtue

Reward

or

ctPt\r\

Virtus, la Vertu or

le

f/7?i,

We

in EnglijJi.

is its

Time

hcec

Virtus or hie

Vertu, and fo of the

own Reward,
maintains

its

in

our

own

or Virtue

But

reft.

is

language
her

wonted Pace, or

own

Time

maintains Lis wonted Pace.

There

is

a finguiar advantage in this liberty, as

it

enables us to mark, with a peculiar force, the Diftinction between the fevere or Logical Stile, and the orna-

mental or Rhetorical.

above Words, and of

For thus when we fpeak of the

all

others naturally devoid of

Sex 3

Book the First.

He, that would fee more on
jecc, may confult Ammonius the

59

Suh- Ch.IV.

this

Peripatetic,

we

Sex, as Neuters.)

becomes a

fpeak of tuem as they are, and as

logical Inquiry.

by making then
from thenceforth

When we

give them Sex,

MafcuUne or Feminine, they

iire

personified \ are a kind of intelligent

Beings, and become, as fuch, the proper ornaments

either of Rhetoric or of Poetry.

Thus

Milton,

The Thunder,

Wirgd with

red light' ning and impetuous rage,

Perhaps hath /pent HIS Jhafts

P. Loft.

I. 1

74.

The

Poet, having juft before called the Hail, and

Thunder, God's Minijlers of Vengeance, and (o perfothem, had he afterwards laid its Shafts for his

nified

Shafts,

would have deftroyed

proached withal

The

fo

much

following Faflage

his

own Image,

and ap-

nearer to Pr.ofe.

is

from the fame Poem.

Should intermitted Vengeance arm again

His red

right

In this Place His

to Hcr's or
bimjelf, the

It's,

band

Hand

P. L. II. 174.

is

clearly preferable either

by immediately

referring us to

God

Avenger.
I (hall

HERMES.

6o
Ch.IV.

Commentary on the

in his

tic,

Treatife

where the Subject

de Interf relatione,

is

treated at large with refpect to the Greek

We

Tongue.
all

mall only obferve, that as

fuch Speculations are

jectures, they

mould

at beft

but Con-

therefore be receiv-

ed

1 fhall only give

one inftance more, and quit

this

Subject.

At

his

Each

command

th' up-rooted Hills retir'd

and went
Heav'n His wonted face renezv'dy
And with frejl) flourets Hill and Valley fmifd.
to

HlS,pIace: they heard his voice

Obftquious

P. L. VI.

See

alfo ver.

Here
Valleys

all

54, 55, of the fame Book.

things are pcrfonified

fmile,

the Hills hear, the

and the Face of Heaven

is

renewed.

Suppole then the Poet had been neceflitated by the

laws of his Language to have
to

Place Heaven

its

how

profaic and lifelefs

peared

how

was aiming

faid

Each Hill retir'd

renew'd its wonted face

would

thefe

detrimental to the
to eftablifh

In

Neuters have ap-

P rofopopeia, which

this

therefore

he

he was

happy, that the Language, in which he wrote, impofed no fuch neceflity

to impofe

it

on himfelf.

and he was too wife a Writer,

It

were to be wifhed,

Correctors had been as wife on their parts.

his,

Book the First.

6i

cd with candour, rather than fcrutinized Ch.IV.

with rigour.

Varro\ words on

Sub- '-v

ject near akin, are for their aptnefs

elegance

Non

worth attending.

well

and

mediocres enim tenebrce hi Jilva, ubi hcec

captanda

neque

mus, femitce

quo pervenire volu-

eh,

tritce

neque

tramiti-

?ion in

bus que?dam objedia, qucs euntem retiners

pojjimt *.

To

conclude

collect

both

this

Chapter.

from what has been

Number and Gender

Words,

becaufe in the

appertain to

Things

caufe Subjlances are

Sex, or no Sex

that

faid,

appertain to

firft

that

We may

is

place they
to fay, be-

Many, and have

either

therefore Subjlantrces

have

Number, and are Mafcidine, Feminine,

Neuter.

There

is

however

this differ-

ence between the two Attributes:

ber

in flrictnefs defcends

or

Num-

no lower, than
to

De

Ling.

La1 L. IV,
*

'

HERMES.

62

ChJV.

to the hfi

Rank cf Species

(k)

Gender

on the contrary Mops not here, but descends to every Individual, however di-

And fo much for Substantives, PROPERLY SO CALLED.

veriified.

(k)
that

it

The

reafon

why Number

goes no lowerj

is

dees not naturally appertain to Individuals 5

the caufe of which fee before, p. 39.

CHAP.

Book the First.

CHAP.

63

V.

Concerning Subflantrves of the Secondary

Order.

TTTEare

now

daryRace

Race quite

Secon- Ch.V.
~ ~y~"J
of Substantives,

to proceed to a

different

from any already

mentioned, and whofe Nature may be explained in the following manner.

Every

ObjecT:

which

prefents itfelf to

the Senfes or the Intellect,

either then

is

perceived for the frjl time, or elfe

re-

is

cognized as having been perceived beIn the former cafe it is called an

fore.

Object t?

TTatar^

of the

yvatreug,

knowledge or acquaintance (a)

firjl

in the latter

(<?)

See JpolL dc Syntaxi,

c. 3. p. 103.

demonjlrationcm

1.

r.

c. 16.

p.

49-

Thus Prifcian Inter ejl autem

& relationem hoc

interrogationi reddita,

2-

inter

quod demonflratio,

Primam Cognitionem

ojienditi

Quis

HER M

64
Ch. V.

'

'

tcr

ft is

S.

Object t??

called an

0/* //?

o-e?,

Ssurs^xg yvJ>~

fecond knowledge or acquaint-

ance.

Now as all Converfation

pafiesbetween

"Particulars or Individuals, thefe will often

happen iobe reciprocally Objedts

(hat

tr.q Yjuo-tuts,

is

to fay,

////

unacquainted with each other.

is

to be done

How

rys Trou-

that injiant

What

then

(hail the Speaker ad-

drefs the other,

when he knows

Name

explain himfelf by his

or

how

own Name, of which

ignorant

Nouns,

as they

is

wholly

have been de-

anfwer the purpoie.

fcribed. cannot
firft

the other

not his

The

expedient upon this o~caiion feems

to have been
Indication
traces of

Ael'fic,

that

is,

Pointing, or

by tie Finger or Hand, iome

which

i^re ftill

to be obferved, as

a part of that Action,

which

tends our fpeaking.

But the Authors of

naturally at-

Language

Quis

nem
-p.

fecit?

Ego:

fignificat^

936.

ut,

relatio vero
Is,

Edit. Putfchii,

Seeundam Cognitiodixi.
Lib. XII,

de quo jam

Book the First.

65

Language were not content with

They

invented

a race

of Words tojupply

which Words,

this Pointing-,

as they cd-

way's floodfor Subjiantives or Nouns,

characterized by the

or

Pronouns

were

Name oVAvruwpUi,
Thefe

(h).

this.

they dif-

alfo

tinguifhed into three feveral forts, calling

them Pronouns of the Firjl, the

and the 'Third Per/on, with a view
tain distinctions,

Second,
to cer-

which may be explained

as follows.

Suppose the

Parties converting to be

wholly unacquainted, neither

Countenance on either

iide

Name

nor

known, and
the

[b)

de Synt. L.
fider

*A9TUpvy.ix to uitci AEIHEHS

'ANTONOMAZOMENON, Apoll.

Ev.sTuo iv

MOMpofZs

them

II. c. 5.

p.

106.

Prifcidn fecms to con-

fo peculiarly deftined to the expteflion of

Individuals, that he does not fay they iupply the place

of any Noun, but that of the proper

Name

only.

And

undoubtedly was their original, and ftill is their

true and natural ufe.
Pronomen ejl pars orationis?
this

qua: pro

nomine proprio uniufcujufque

L. XII.

See

alfo Apoll.

L.

II. c. 9.

accipntur..

p.

Prifo

117, 118.

G^.-V.

HERMES.

66
Ch. V.

the Subject of the Converfation to be the

Speaker himfelf.

Here,

iupply the

ro

Word

place of Pointing by a

of equal

Power, they furnifhed the Speaker with

the Pronoun ,
6cc.

and

I write, Ifay, I dejire,

I.

as the

Speaker

always princi-

is

pal with refpect to his

own

difcourfe,

this they called for that reafon the

noun of the Firfl

Again,
for

be

to

fimilar

the Pronoun,
walkefl,

Perfon.

fuppofe the Subject of the

Converfation

Here

Pro-

Party addreJL

reafons they invented

Thou.

&c. and

the

Thou

writejl,

Thou

as the Party addrefc.

next in dignity to the Speaker, or at

comes next with reference

to

is

lean:

the dif-

courfe; this Pronoun they therefore call-

ed the Pronoun of the Second Perfon,

Lastly,
verfation

fuppofe the Subject of Con-

neither the

Speaker,

nor the

Party addreft, but fome T/x'rd Qbjefi, different from both.

other Pronoun.
2

Here they provided an-

He, She,

or It,

which
in

Book the First.

in diitin&ion to

67

the two former was call-

ed the Pronoun of the Third PerJon.

And
be

to

thus

it

was that Pronouns came

by their refpective

diftinffuifhed

Persons

(r).

As

(c)

llie Defcription of the different

taken from PrifciaH%

who

given

is

nius.

Perfona Pronomiman Junt

tertia.

tiat;

Prima

p.

Persons
it

here

from Apollo-

tres\ prima-yfecunda,

cum ipfa^ ques loquitur^ de fe pronunSecunda, cum de ed pronunciat, ad quam directo

*/?,

icrmone loquitur
nee ad

tur,

took

fe

Theodore

940.

Tertia,

cum

de ed, quae nee loqui-

directum accipit Sermonem.

Gaza

gives the fame

L.

XIL

Di functions.

Jl^wToi/ (zrgoc-wirGV 1C.) w zrsgi tavjx Qpdfyi o Afyuc*

dsvjsgoir,

'n'ioa.

Gaz. Gram. L. IV.

uTf^t

ra, zrco; ov

Xoy(&"
p.

rp(rjiv t

tz ep\

152.

This account of Perfons is far preferable to the

one, which makes the Firft the Speaker; the

common

Second, the Party addrcft

For

tho' the Firft and

fcribed,

and the Third, the Subjecl.

Second be

as

commonly de-

one the Speaker, the other the Party addreft

become fubjeds of the di/courfe, they have

no exiftence. Again as to the Third Perfon's being

yet

till

they

the fubjefl, this

is

a character,

which
2

it

farts

in

common
with

Ch. V.

HERMES.

68

Ch. V.

As

to

Number,

Perfon has

it

(I)

the Pronoun of each

has the plural (we),

becaufe

with both the other Perfons, and which can never

therefore be called a peculiarity of
plain

by an inftance cr two.

its

When

own.

To

imme-

narrative of his adventures, the fechnd Perfon

diately appears, becaufe he
drejfes,

ex-

Eneas begins the

makes Dido, whom he ad-

the immediate fubjecr. of his Difcourfe.

Jnfandum, Regina, jubes, renovare dolorem.

From

hence forward for 1500 Verfes (tho' fhe be

that time the party addreft)

we

all

hear nothing farther

of this Second Perfon, a variety of other Subjects

fill-

ing up the Narrative.

In the mean time the Fir(I Perfon may be ken

every where, becaufe the Speaker every where
felf the Subjeft.

They were

is

hrm-

indeed Events, as he

fays himfelf,

quaque

ipfe

milcrrhna vidi,

Et quorum pars magna fui

Second Perfon docs not often occur in
the courfe of this Narrative; but then it is always by
a Figure of Speech, when thofe, who by their ab-

Not

that the

sence are in fact fo

many Third

Perfons, are converted

into

Book the First.

becaufe there

69

may be many Speakers

once of the fame Sentiment

at

as well as

one, who, including himfelf, fpeaks the

(Thou) has

Sentiment of many.

the

(you), becaufe a Speech may

plural

be fpoken to many,

(He)

as well as to

has the plural

one.

(they), becaufe

the Subject of difcourfe

is

often

many

at

once.

But
ber,

it

tho'

all

thefe Pronouns have

does not appear either in Greek, or

Latin, or any
thofe of the

modern Language,

firft

The

The reafon

feems
to

Second Perfons by being introduced

real

that

and fecond Perfon carry

the diflincl:ions of Sex.

into

Num-

Second Perfon (Dido)

is

as prefent.

never once hinted.

Thus far as to Virgil. But when we read Euciid

we find neither Firjl Perfon, nor Second, in any Pare
of the whole Work.
The reafon is, that neither
Speaker nor Party addreft (in which light we may alr

ways view the Writer and his Reader} can poilibly

become the Subject of pure Mathematics, nor indeed
can any thing

elfe,

neither fpeaks

itfelf,

except abftract Quantity, which

nor

is

fpoken to by another.

Ch.V.

-vJ

*"**

HERMES,

70
Ch. V.
'

'

Hearer being

to be, that the Speaker and

generally prefent to each other,

have been fuperflupus

diftinclion

to

would

it

have marked a

by Art, which from Nature

and even Drefs was commonly

rent on both

But

fides.

appa-

(d)

this does nut

held with refpecl to the third Perfcn, of

whefe Character and

cluding Sex

know

among

Difti notions,

we

the reft)

(in-

often

no more, than what we learn from

And hence

the difcoune.

meft Languages the third

it

that in

is

Perfon

has

its

Genders, and that even Englifo (which al-

lows

its

Adjectives no Genders at

has in this Pronoun the triple

tion of

He, She, and

all)

(e) diffrac-

It.

Hence

(d) Demonjlratlo ipfa fecum gin us oftendit.

L. XII.

p.

942.

See ApoIL de Syntax. L.

Prifcian.
c. 7.

II.

p. 109.

(c)

Tli- Utility of

tpofmg

it

this Diftincliori

away.

'u hiftory thefe

Suppofe

words

may be

for

He

better

example

we

caujed

him
tf

Book the First.

Hence
Jingle

too

we

yi

why

fee the reafon

Pronoun (f)

each Perfon, an /

to

F 4

himand

to dejlroy

[He], which

is

Woman,

and

manner, diverted of

its

Man, for
Names were Alex-

Taking

was deftroyed
and which the caufe,

ftroyer

that

hear the

in
it

which was the de-

moved

to the de-

But there are not fuch doubts, when we

Genders diltinguifhed when inftead of the
?

He

ambiguous Sentence,

we

Pronoun

how would

the

Genders,

appear, which

frrucYion

be informed the

to fay, for a

is

whofc

for a City,

ander^ Thais, and Perfpolis.

this

to

here thrice repeated, flood each time

for fomething different, that

to

we were

that

caufed him to deftroy him,

are told with the proper diftinclion?, that

him

dejlroy

it.

certainty, v/hat before

we

caufed

to

Woman

could not

she
with

that the Pro-

that her Inftrument

was the

that the Subject of their Cruelty

was the

moter was the

Hero; and

Then we know

unfortunate City.

if)

^Jtteritttr

tamen cur prima quidem Perfona

iif

fetunda fingula Prononv.ua habeant, tertiam vera fex

diverfa; indiceni voces?

prima quidem
vocibus-i

Jlrativa:
ut,

ff

fecunda Perfona

quod femper
;

& demon-

Perfona rnodo demonjlrativa

modo rflstiva, ut

L. XII. P 933.

quod

idea non egent diver/is

pra2fenr.es inter fe funt,

tertia vera

Hie, Ifle

Ad quod refpsndendum ejl,

Is, Ipfe,

ej? t

&c. Prifcian.

Ch. V.
'

'

'

HER M

72
Ch. V.

^^

to the Firji,

abundantly

and a Tkcu

fufricient

But

of Speech.

it is

to the Third Peribn.

S.

to the Second, are

to

the purpofes

all

not fo with refpedt

The

various rela-

tions of the varipus Objects exhibited by

this (I

mean

relations of near

prefent and abfent, fame

and

and

diftant,

different,

and indefinite, &e.J made

definite

it

ne-

ceflary that here there fhculd not be one,

but many Pronouns, fuch as He,

'This,

That, Other, Any, Some, &c.

It muft be
thefe

confefTed indeed, that all

Words do

not always appear as

When

Pronouns.

th:y ftand by them-

and reprefent fome

felves,

when we
Give me

fay,

This

That)

is

Noun,

Virtue, or $enj.T<Kag9

then arc they Pronouns.

But when they

are

affociated

Noun

(as

we

fay,

Virtue

frauded

-.when

or

hwrDtug.,

me) then

place of a

(as

to

fome

This Habit

That Man

is

de-

as they fupply not the

Noun, but only

ferve to afcer-

tain one, they fall rather into the Species

of Definitives or Articles,

That there

is

indeed

Book the First.

73

indeed a near relation between Pronouns

Ch. V".
Grammarians have -""v-
acknowledged, and fome words it has

and
all

Articles, the old

been doubtful

to

which Clafs

to refer.

The beft rule to difLnguifh them is this

The genuine Pronoun always ftands

by

affuming the Power of a Noun,

itfelf,

and fjpplying

its

place

Article

never Jtands

appears at

all

thing

requiring a

elfe,

much

port, as

The
by

genuine

but

itfelf,

times affociated to fome-

Noun

its

fup-

as Attributives or {g)

Ad-

for

jectives.

As

To "AgQsov

(g)

auT

wooq

THE pROXOUN

but

Apoll.

rx

CV0U.xl>, x} v 'Aflmvpiot

The Article

o'voac/l^P.

Nun

(Al&

c. 3.

I.

Gvoy.ctlz

p.

22.

tles

tbemjehes,

'Aula xv ret acQix, rrx

x7tq?xvtx,

(Ti'sctgTr.veui;

cccqfton. Ibid.

/*kt^

when

into

they quit their

fucb Pronoun, as

Again

FOR a Noun,

jTror-rxyy.ivnv xutuvvuiciv pttXTrnrlzi.

Nouns, pafs

with

Jiands

y?u'Wj

'Otxvto

is

jf

Now

rr,v

A> ti-

Connexion with
proper upon the

Aotypou y.y

TXCcgxKxjj.tzvnTXi, txqiy\7%\cci $1

pir qvq-

gwtx^x

o\o-

74
As

Qh. V,

the

to

nouns,

it

E R

S.

of thefe Pro-

Coalefcence

The

as follows.

is,

Firft or

Second

^ar^'JiK
Mfxiccv

ureGc'MtbtipiQx) EX
$r\<j~xi i

[J.i\x}<.r
l

JWa/xa

y.ccr^y>

the Article

zrcctrvis

ays

ivopxr

ccvti

afijumed without the

is

ocvxyxn; a; clvju-

iyUvo^ivov

ax.

/^jt* cvo-

TrctgiXvKpQyi.

When

Naun^ and has (as we

explained before) the fame Syntax, zvbich the

Noun

has;

mufl of abfolate neccjfity be admitted for a Pronoun,

lecaufe it appears without a Noun-, and yet is in power
it

affumedfor
p. 96.

one.

Ejufd. L. II.

Inter Pronomina

c. 8. p.

& Articiths

Pronomina ea putantur, qua, cum

Prifcian,

L.

I. c.

45.

Articuli vera

Notninibus, out Pariicipiis ad-,

Donut. Gram.

jungttntur.

3.

f.ia fint, vicem no-

minis cornplent, ut &UIS, ille, iste

cum Pronomimbus, aut

hoc inter eft, quod

p.

leaking of the

1753.

Stoics, fays as follows:

Articults autem Pronomina connumer antes, yiNITOS sa Articclos appellabant ; ipfos autem Ariicuks, quibus ties caremus, IKTFIlCITOS ARTICUI03
dieeb ant.

Vd,

Prone?, linibus,

ut alii dicunt, Articulos connumerabant

Iff

vocabant^cViz.

Articularia

Frit".

L.I.

p.

eos

574.

ci Quijque and Hie, calls them both

fefft

indefinite,

L. VII.
his

See

Analogia

ciufe

the ficond
alfo

( L.

Hie has not

L. IX.
I.

c. 1.)

the fame

definite.

PitONmiiNA

Varrex (peaking

Articles,

Dc

Ling.

the

Left.

p. 132.
Voffim indeed in.
oppofes this Dofrrinc, be-

power with

the Greek

Ar-

ticle,

Book the First.

Second

them, by them-

will, either of

felves coalefce

75

with the Third, but not

with each other.

For example,

good

fenfe, as well as

fay in

any Language-

it

is

good Grammar,

to

I am He Tmvj

art He but we cannot fay

Thou nor Thou art I. The

is,

there

is

am

reafpn

no abfurdity for the Speaker to

be the Subject alfo of the Difcourfe, as

when we
addreji

But

fay,

as

for the

/ am He

when we

and the Party addreft,

fo therefore

Firft

fay,

fame Perfon,

cumfiances, to be at

and

or for the Per/on

is

&ou

in the

art He.

fame

cir-

once the Speaker,

this

is

impofijblej

the Coalefeence of the

and Second Perfon,

And now perhaps we have fcen enough

of Pronoun.^ to perceive

how

they

differ

from

tick,

0.

But he

Writers on
as
not

did not

this Subject,

Articles, which

enough attend to the antient

who

epniidered

being officiated

to

all

Words,

Nouns (and

Jlanding in their place) fervid in any manner

afiertain^

and determine

their Signification.

t$

Ch. V.

HERMES.

76

Ch.V. from

The

other Subftantives.

Primary y thefe

their

are

others are

Subjlitutes

kind of fecondary Race, which were ta-

ken

in aid,

when

for re^fons already (h)

mentioned the others could net be ufed.

It

moreover by means of

is

which

Articles^

thefe,

and of

are nearly allied to them,

that

(h) See thefe rcafons at the beginning of this chap-

of which reafons the principal cne

ter,
44

Noun,

properly fo called, implies

its

is,

own

that

ne>

Frefence.

" It is therefore to ascertain fucb Prefenee y that the

M Pronoun is taken in aid and hence it is it becomes
u equivalent to c?ai?, that is, to Pointing or Indication
;

"

by the Finger."

It is

worth remarking in

that Yerfe

of Perfiusy

Sed pule brum

ejl

digito monstrari,

& dicier

HlC EST.

how

the diT^ic,

ther,

and made to co-operate to the fame end.

and the Pronoun are introduced toge-

Sometimes by virtue of hfy; the Pronoun of the

third }?exfon Hands for th.cf.rjL

Shiedft militibus farces,

That

is,

alfo

erit

Hie quoque Miles.

will be a Soldier.

Tibuli L.

II.

El. 6. v. 7.

See Fulpius.
ft

Book the First.

" Language,

that

"

" down

tho' in itfelf only

of general

ii^nificant

/&#

to denote

jj

is

brought

infinitude

of Par-

Ideas,

*'

ticularsj

which

are for ever ariiing, and

'*

ceafing to be."

But more of this here-

to the three orders of

ready mentioned, they

pofitive,

as

may

Pronouns

may be

indeed

all

called

al-

Pre-

Subftantives,

becaufe they are capable of introducing

or leading

Sentence, without having

reference to any thing previous.

iides thofe there is

But be-

another Pronoun
(in

It

may be

obferved too, that even in Epiftolary

Correfpondence, and indeed

where the Pronouns

ance, there

is

and

of Writing,

in all kinds

You make

their appear-

a fort of implied Prejence, which they

are fuppofed to indicate, though the parties are in fact

at ever fo great a drftance.

And

that diftiniHon in Apolioniiis, rscg

Jiifceis,

lar,

t?

$i

tz

and fome are

p. 104.

proper place.

after in a

As

Ch. V.
' v~"*

1/3,

hence the

ph

rriv

rife

of

o^tuu uvat

that feme Indications are ocu-

mental.

De

Syntax;, L.

II.

c. 3*

Greek

Ch. V.

On

^-

Englifkj

-1

c;,

E R

PI

78

oftg

(/)

Lathi

in

S.

Who, Which, T^hat)

having a character peculiar to

may

nature of which

Qui-, in

Pronoun
the

itfelf,

be explained as

follows.

Suppose

Light

Body,

was

Light

to lay

moves with great

is

celerity.

Thcfe

The

(/)

noun
as

it

Greeks-,

it

muft be

confeft, call this

V7roT<xxiiy.QV aoO^ov, thefuljunclive Artiele.

fhould feem, this

Apollonian

is

Yet,

but an improper Appellation.

when he compares

it t'-

the uT^oTaxlixov

or true prepcjltive Article^ not only confrffes

fer, as

Pro-

being expreft by a different

to dif-

it

Word, and having

a different place in every Sentence; but in Syntax he

adds,
p.

it is

91.

Theodore

Syntax. L.

Gaza acknowledges

therefore adds
tv7i

De

wholly different.

'6vj $r)

x,

'for thefe reafons this

xvploog

fays, xvpixg

ye

jur.v oioQcoi/

however properly fpeaking

Article.

Gram.

Introd.

fore have undoubtedly

the Pronouns.

it

is

43.

the fame, and

a.v

a^pov

emi

(meaning the Subjunc-

And

tive) cannot properly be an Article.

he

c.

I.

jiiu before

to zrfOTa.Kltx.ov

>

the Prepofitive is the

L. IV.

dons better

The
in

Latins there-

ranging

it

with

Book the First.

79

Thefe would apparently be two

Suppofe, inflead of the Sc-

Sentences.

cond,

Body

Light,

great

and)

it

moves with great

faying

the

and two.

(as for

Example

Light

an

celerity

is

diftincl;

add a ConneBroe

if I

Light

fay

be

frill

prepo-

to place the

T moves with

Sentences would

But

were

Pronoun, it, and

sitive

diftinct

is

celerity

make the two

by cementing many Stones
Connection

a Body,

and

then by

into one, as
I

make one

Wall.

Now
nective,

it is

in the united

and another Pronoun, that we may

fee the force,

noun here
in

and character of the Pro-

Thus

treated.

the place of

and

that, or which,
Body, which moves

Powers of a Con-

the Sentence

Perfection, and

compact than

frill

we

it,

faying

fubftitute

Light

with great

before.
call

is

celerity

retains its Unity

becomes

reafon therefore

therefore, if

if poffible

and

more

We

may with juft

this

Pronoun the

Subjunctive, becaufe

it

cannot (like
the

Ch. V,
-""v~~-'

<fc

HERMES.

80

Ch.V.

^^ "'

'

the

Sentence, b

Jome

other,

an

introduce

Prepoiitive)

original

o [yjerves to jubjoin one to

it

which

is

previous (k).

The

Hence we

(<f)

ed

fee

why the

ronoun here mention-

always necejfarlly the Part of i'one complex Sen-

is

tence, which Sentence contains, either

xpreft or

un-

derftood, two Verb?, and two Nominatives*

Thus

in that Verfe of

Qui
non

lite

is

Horace,

metuens vlvit, liber mibi non erh unquam.

er'it

liber

another,

llle

is

one Sentence

and

Erit and Fruity the

<j>hti

tzuo

qui metuens vivit

are the two Nominatives

faros

and

other

fo in all

inflances.

The

following

from ufpoUonius (though

pafiage

fome what corrupt

in

to fhew,

the above Speculations are

To

whence

more

VliOTilllKOV CCCV^QV S7TI

3tfAi0 Jia
ivrivfysv

TJ5J

places than one) will ferve

\ir.UZ.

UVXQOOXq TU

xttXhv Xoyiv a sraeirccvzi

p;[ACtTU)V CVVlOzfciU (Aj'yi) TYIV iU

CUTU

Tl)

sivpa.

ilOV ^HPS^Ott,

ZTOOKSt

p9^w)
ILoivov

TM

--

TO

ken.

(TVVOf-

QVOfACVtl*

v.xlot tyiv

tuv

Xy
<?ue

QVQfJ.tX.Tl) X, T*)I/ tv

G7T SrOiXnt ZTCtpilTTLTO

p\v (lege

TW KAI CUV

ICAI yai^ kqwov /*>)

wage-

Book the 'First.

The

8i

Subjunc- Ch. V.

Application of this

tive, like the other Pronouns, is univerfal.

It

W&PtXdf/.xi/E TO QVOp.% TO ZT^OKU^iVOV,

Xoyov sroivTuq

Si treoov

pwpx

x) 'irtoov

(TVpTrXlKOV

zs-acsXa[x^a.v t

k) bt to, nAPErENETO O rPAMMATIKOS,

OS AIEAEKATO, Svvoip.ii rov ccvtov onrorsXu th
O TPAMMATIKOS nAPErENETO,
(forf. Tftj)

KAI AIEAEHATO.

TbefubjunCtive Article, (that

Pronoun here mentioned)

is,

?/;*

its

own, and yet

Hence

Noun.

is

it

applied

is

connected tvithal

can never [erve

to

a Verb of

to

the antecedent

to corjiitute

afimple

Sentence, by reafon of the Syntax of the tivo Verbs, I mean

that which rejpecls the

which

Noun

or Antecedent,

to the

lows as

Conjunction,

AND.

fumes the Antecedent Noun, which

plied to

many

Subjecls,

tence, of necej/ity
it is

that the

form

difcourfed

iftwe were
courfed.
alfo

to

is

fay

in

the

fol-

af

capable of being ap-

and by connecting

ton

This Copulative

to it

a new Sen-

And

hence

Grammarian came,

who

ajfumes a neiu Verb

Words

and that

Thefame

rejpecls the Article or Relative.

power nearly

the fame fentence, as

the Grammarian

Apcll. de Syntaxi, L. J.

alfo.

c.

came,

and

43. p. 92.

dif-

See

an ingenious French Treatife, called Grammaire

&

generale

The

raijonnee,

Chap. IX.

Latins, in their Structure of this Subjuncrive,

feem to have well reprefented

its

compound Nature of

part Pronoun, and part Connective, in forming their

QUI

*****
'

HERMES.
may be

It

the Subftitute of

kinds of

all

Subftantives, natural, artificial, or abftract;

as well as general, fpecial, or particular.

We

may

fay, the

Animal, Which, &c. the

Man, Whom, &c. the

Alexander, Who, 6cc.

&c.

Ship, Which,

Bucephalus, 'That,

&c. Virtue, Which, &c. &c.

Nay,
all

it

may even

be the Subftitute of

the other Pronouns, and

therefore expreiTive of

Thus we

fay, I,

readeji

And

a Pronoun

is

have near

Thou, who now

He, who now

thus

three Perfons.

all

who now read,

Chapter-,

finiJJ:ed this

of courfe

is

rcadeth,

&c.

&c

this Subjunctive

from

its Subfiitution,

truly

there be-

ing
qui and quis from Cy and
Scaliger to the Greek)

"O.

from

is,

KAI

Seal, de Cauf. Ling. Lai.

c.

or (if

and 'OX,

Article,

See

Iliad,

and

Subjunfiive,

by help of the Prepofitive and a

Conneifive^ exactly confonant to the

blimed.

with

KAI

I2J.

Homer alfo expreffes the Force of this

Pronoun or

we go

A.

Theory here

ver. 270, 553.

efta-

N. 571. n.

Book the First.

ing no

Subftantive exifting,

in

place

it

may

the fame

time,

it is ejfentially

At

not ftand.

diftinguified

whofe

from the

other Pronouns, by this peculiar, that

is

it

not only a Subftitute y but withal a Con-

?ielive (/),

And
Before

(/)

we

quit this Subject,

it

may

not be im-

proper to remark, that in the Greek and Latin Tongues

the

two

principal Pronouns, that

is

to fay, the Firft

and Second Perfon^the Ego and the 7w, are implied in

the very

Form

fcribo, fcribis)

unlefs

k be

Verb

of the

and are

to

mark

(y^apu, y^apaf,

itfelf

for that reafon never exprefty

a Contradistinction

fuch as

in,

FirgiU

Nos pciriam fagimus ; Tu,

Formojam refonare

This however
reftus, or

is

doces-,

true with refpecl: only to the Cafus

added, becaufe tho'

in

umbra

Nominative of thefe Pronouns, but not with

refpecl: to their oblique Cafes,

Tu

Tityre, lentus in

&c.

Ama$y we

fee

we

which muft always be

fee the

not the

Ego

Te

or

in

Amo, and the

Me

in

Amat> or

Amant.

Yet even

thefe oblique Cafes appear in a different

manner, according
or not.

as

they

mark

Cont.radiftinc~t.ion,

If they contradiftinguifh, then are they com~

monly placed at the beginning of the Sentence, or at

leaft before the

Verb, or leading Subftantive.

Thus

HERMES.

84

Ch. V.

v-

^-

And now

to conclude

what we have

Sub-

All

concerning Subftantives.

faid

stantives
Thus

Virgily

magnum
mi genus ch Jov~efummo,
Et
ghiid memorem Alciden?
hiid Thefea,

Thus Homer,

'TMIN

S-ecI

fv>

TIx7$oc o\

$onv

AIOI AucraT

where the 'YpTv and the Moi

IX.

<pl\r,i>

A.

fraud, as contradiftin-

guifhed, and both have precedence of their refpeclive

Verbs, the

even leading the whole Sentence.

'Yy.7v

In other inftances,thefe Pronouns

place behind the Verb, as

every where obvious.

farther

frill.

happened

may

The

commonly take

their

be feen in example?

Greek Language went

When the oblique Cafe of thefe Pronouns

to contradiftinguifh, they

aflumed a peculiar

Accent of their own, which gave them the

lcoTovxy.ivu.i, or

name

Pronouns uprightly accented.

of

When

they marked no fuch oppofition, they not only took

their place behind the

Accent^ and (as

it

Verb, but even gave

it

their

were) inclined themfelves upon

it.

And hence they acquired the name of Ey/.Ai-nv.a),

The Greeks
that is, Leaning or Inclining Pronouns.
too had in the

fir ft

^nclives, and

hence

it

was

perfon 'E^a, 'Ejuot, 'E^ti for Con-

Ma, Mo), Ml

for Enclitics.

And

that Apollcnius contended, that in the paf-

fage above quoted from the

firft Iliad,

we

fliould read
sriziSoL

Book the First.

stantives
condary, that

85

are either Primary, or Seis

to fay, according to a

Lan-

guage more familiar and known, are

ei-

The Nouns
denote Subfiances, and thofe either NaThey
tural, Artificial, or Abjlraft #>

ther

Nouns

or

Pronouns.

moreover denote Things either General,

or

Special,

or

The Pro-

Particular,

nouns, their Substitutes, are either Pre-

The

pojitive, or Subjunctive.

tive

is

diftinguiihed into three Orders,

called the Firft, the Second,

and the Third

The Subjunctive

Perfon.

G
vtoaSo. <T

Preposi-

'EMOI,

includes

the

for ztouSx St

MOI, on

account of

the Contradiftinction, which there occurs between the

Grecians and Cbryfes,

c. 3.

p. 20.

L. II.

See Jpoll. de Syntaxi, L.

c.

2.

I.

102, 103.

p.

This Diverfity between the Contradiftinctive Pronouns, and the Enclitic,

Englijh
the

Tongue.

(Me)

is

unknown even

not

When we

fay,

to the

Give me Content,

in this cafe is a perfect Enclitic.

But when

we fay, Give Me Content, Give Him bis tboufands, the

(Me) and (Him) are no Enclitics, but as they ftand
in oppofition, afiume an

become

Accent of

the true o^oToimy.ivxi.

* See before, p. 37, 38.

their

own, and

fo

Ch. V.

HERMES.

Ch. V. the powers of

U-V^J

all

Juperadded, as of

thofe three,

its

having

own, the peculiar

force of a Connective.

Having
we now

done with Substantives,

proceed to

Attributives.

CHAP.

Book the

First..

CHAP.

87

VI.

Concerning Attributives

Ttributives

are all thofe princi-

pal Words, that denote Attributes,

cojijidered as Attributes.

for

exam-

Words, Blacky White, Great,

ple are the

Little,

Such

Wife,

Eloquent,

Writeth,

Wrote,

Writing, &c. (a).

How(a) In the above

Grammarians
in as

much

lift

of

Words

as all of

of Sub/lance.

predicated of

what

and Participles,

them equally denote the Attributes

Hence

it is,

that as they are

their very nature the Predicates in a

all

are included

called Adjectives, Verbs,

all

from

Proportion (being

fome Subject or Subflance, Snow

is

white, Cicero writeth, &c.) hence I fay the Appellation

PHMA or Verb

extended Senfe

to

is

employed by Logicians

denote them

plaining the reafon,

why

all.

Thus

Arijlotle in his Tracl: de

terpretatione calls Xivxoq a Verb, tells us

xocTnyofJupti/ov opov

tv

in

ZTPoratrn

xxXucQxi, that every Sound

an

Atwnonius ex-

srscc-ccv

zsoixtrccv,

In-

tpurtv,

'PHMA

articulate, that forms the

Pre-

Ch.VI.

HERMES.

83

However,

Ch.VI.
v

v
'

previoufly to thefe, and to

every other poflible Attribute, whatever a

thing

may

be, whether black or white,

fquare or round, wife or eloquent, writ-

ing or thinking,

exist, before

it

it

mull: firjl of neceffity

can poffibly be anything

For Existence maybe confidered

elfe.

as

an unruerfal Genus, to which

of

all

kinds are at

The Verbs

claim precedence of

it,

others, as being

very being of every Pro-

either expreji, or

when we

which denote

all

portion, in which they

as

things

times to be referred.

all

therefore,

efTentjal to the

all

lay,

by

may ftill

implication

The Sun

be found,
;

expreft,

is bright

by

-,

im-

Predicate in a Proportion,

Ven.

Edit.

another occafion,

Non

called

Verb,

is

L.

p.

24.

very pertinent to the prefent.

Didinatic, jed proprietas excutienda

ihnis.
fays

is

Prifcians obfervation, though made on

II.

p.

576.

And

in

ejl fignifica-

another place he

ncn fimiiitudo dedinationis omnimodo conjungit

vel difcernit partes orationis inter Je, fed vis ipfius figViftcat'unis,

L. XiH.

p.

970,

Book the First.

when we
which means, when

implication, as
rifes,

Sun

The Sun Ch.VI.

refolved, The

fay,

is rifing {b).

The

Verbs,

Eft, Fit, V7rccp^ei

Groweth, Becometh,

Is,
eg-},

yiyvsrou,

TreXeiy

of them ufed to exprefs

all

89

The

Genus.

are

this general

Latins have called them

Verba Subftantiva, Verbs Subftantive, but

the Greeks
Exijlence,

'Y'ttczoktikcx,,

'PypocTcx,

Name more

Verbs of

apt, as being

of greater latitude, and comprehending

equally as well Attribute, as SLubftance.

The principal of thofe Verbs, and which

we mail particularly here confider, is the
Verb,

'Efi,

Now

all

Eft, Is.

Existence

is

either abfo-

when we
fay, B is; qualified, as when we fay, B
is an Animal; B is black, is round,

lute or qualified

abfolute,

as

&c.

With
(*)

See Metapbyf,

Jriftot,

L. V.

c. 7. Edit.

>u- Fall.

HERMES.

9o

With

Ch.VI.
'

^""-;

Verb

refpect to this difference, the

can by

(is)

itfelf

but never the

Exijlence,

exprefs abfolute
qualified,

with-

out fubjoining the particular Form, be-

Forms of Exiftence being

caufe the

number

infinite,

the particular

if

in

Form

we cannot know which is

And hence it follows, that

be not expreft,
intended.

when

fubjoin fome

(is) only ferves to

fuch Form,

it

has

little

that of a mere Affertion.

fame character, that

it

more

force, than

It is

under the

becomes

a latent

part in every other Verb, by exprefiing

that Affertion,

Thus,

fentials.

fore,

which
as

is

one of their Ef-

was obferved

Rifeth means,

is

rifingi

juft

be-

JVritetb,

is 'writing.

Again

As

ral, it is either

table, as

to

Existence

in

gene-

mutable, or immutable ;

in the Objects of Senfation

muim-

mutable, as in the Objects of Intellection

and
all

Science.

in Time,

Now

mutable Objects exift

and admit the

feveral Dis-

tinctions

Book the First.

of prefent,

tinctions

But immutable

ObjeSls

paft,

and future. Ch.VI.

know no fuch Dif-

but rather ftand oppofed to

tinttions,

all

things temporary.

And

hence two different Significations

of the fubftantive Verb (is) according

as

denotes mutable, or immutable Be-

it

ing.

is

For

example,

ripe,

(is)

now

if

we

fay, '"This

meaneth, that

Orange

exifieth

it

fo

at this prefent, in oppofition to paji

time,
time,

when
when

But
Square

if

is

it

it

we

was green, and

to future

will be rotten.

fay,

The Diameter of the

incommenfurable with

its fide,

we

incom-

do not intend by

(is) that

menfurable now,

having been formerly

it is

commenfurable, or being to become fo

hereafter

-,

on the contrary

we

Perfection of Exijimce, to

and
It

is

intend that

which Time

DiJlinBions are utterly

unknown.

under the fame meaning

we employ

its

this

HERMES.

92
Ch.VI.

this

or,

when we fay, Truth'

God is. The oppoiition is not
Verb,

Time prefent

is,

of

to other Times, but of necef-

fary Exijience to all temporary Exijience

whatever

And

{c).

fo

much

for Verbs

of Exijience, commonly called Verbs Sub^

Jlantive,

We

are

mon Herd
and white,

now

com-

to defcend to the

of Attributives, fuch as black

to

write,

to

fpeak, to walk,

&c. among which, when compared and

oppofed to each other, one of the

mod

eminent diftinctions appears to be

this.

Some, by being joined to

proper Subftantive

(c)

nunc
hoc

Cum

enim dicimus,

ad immutabilitatem pctius fubjlantia, quam ad tempus

aliquod referatur.
Icnn

Deus est, non cum dicimus

Substantia esse, ut

esse, fed tantum in

Si autem dicimus, dies est, ad nul-

did fubjlantiam pertinct, nifi tantum ad temper is con-

lliiutionem

ft dicamus,

',

hoc enim, quod fignifcat, tale

nunc

est.

ejl,

tanquam

ghiare cum dicimus esse, ut

fubjlantiam dejignemus, fimpliciter

est addimus

cum.

vera ita ut aliquid prafens fignificetur,fecundumTempus%

Boeth. in Lib. de Intcrpr. p. 307.

Tim.

p.

37, 38.

Edit. Serrani.

See

alfo

Plat.

Book the First.

ftantive

93

make without farther help a per- Ch.VI.

Sentence; while the

feci afertive

reft,

tho' other wife perfect, are in this refpetl

deficient.

To
we

When

by an example.

explain

fay, Cicero eloquent, Cicero wife, thefe

are imperfect Sentences,

though they de-

The

note a Sundance and an Attribute.

reafon

mew

is,

want an

that they

Afjertion, to

that fuch Attribute appertains

We

fuch Subftance.

muft therefore

to
call

in the help of an AlTertion elfewhere,

(is) or a

(was)

faying Cicero

On

quent.

Cicero

complete the Sentence,

to

is

wife,

Cicero

flances like thefe there

fion,

f walketh J imply

elo-

when we

fay,

walketh,
is

Words

becaufe the

was

Cicero

the contrary,

writeth,

an

in their

in

in-

no fuch occafwritetbj and

own Form

not

an Attribute only, but an Aflertion likewife.

Hence

it is

they

may be

refolved,

the one into Is and Writing, the other

into Is

and Walking,

Now

HERMES.

94

Ch.VI.
^""""^

'

Now all thofe Attributives, which havecomplex Power of denoting both an

this

make

Attribute and an. AfTertion,

that

Words, which Grammarians

Verbs. If we refolve this complex

Species of
call

Power

into

its diflincl:

and take the

Parts,

without

Attribute

alone

the

AfTertion,

then have

we Participles.

All other

Attributives, belides the

two Species be-

fore, are included together in the general

Name

of Adjectives.,

And
tives
or

thus

it

is,

are either

that

all Attribu-

Verbs, Participles,

Adjectives.
Besides the

Distinctions

tioned, there are others,

Some

notice.

abovemen-

which

deferve

Attributes have their Ef-

fence in Motion; fuch are to walk,

to ftrike,

to live.

Others have

privation of Motion

fuch are

And

it

to

fly y

in the

to flop, to

laftly,

others

rejl, to

ceafe, to die.

have

in fubjects, which have nothing to

it

da

Book the First.

do with either Motion or

fuch are the Attributes

of,

its

95

Privation

Great and Lit-

White and Black, Wife and

tle,

and

in a

word the

Adjectives

are

Motions,

Verbs

or

or

And

Fooiifi,

and

feveral Quantities

Now

Things.

Qualities of all

thofe

thefe laft

which denote

Privation, are either

their

Participles.
Circumftance leads to a

this

farther Diftinction,

which may be ex-

plained as follows.

That

''Time,

all

Motion

and therefore, wherever

implies Time as

dent to

all,

its

in

exifts,

it

concomitant,

is

is

evi-

and requires no proving. But

MoFor how can

befides this, all Rejl or Privation of

tion implies

Time

Iike wife.

a thing be faid to reft or ftop,

by being

in one Place for one Inftant only?

is

which moves with the

that thing,

greateft velocity,
reft, is to

fo too

-f

To

ftop therefore or

be in one Place for more than

o?ze

Inftant,
f Thus Proclus

in the

Beginning of

his Treatife

concerning Motion, HgipHv sn to tt^otsoov

Ti)

UTU) T07TX

01/,

X^

UVT9 ,

Xy

fAiCY}.

hj

vftpw

Ch.VI.

HERMES.

96

Ch.VI. Xnftant, that

<""""

'

to fay, during

is

an Extenjion

between two In/iants, and this of courfe

Time. As

gives us the Idea of

therefore

Motions and their Privation imply Time as

Verbs, which de-

their concomitant, fo

Time

note them,

come

And hence

the origin and ufe of

" which

to denote

many

are fo

alfo {d).

Tenses,

different forms, af-

"

figned to each Verb, to (hew, without

"

altering its principal

"

rious

may

Times
exift."

in

meaning, the va-

which fuch meaning

Thus

Scribit,

and Scribet t denote

Scripferaty

Scrip/it,

equally

all

the Attribute, To Write, while the difference between them,

note Writing

that they de-

is,

in different Times,

Should

(d)

The

anticnt

have well defcribed

Authors of Dialectic or Logic

part of their Definition of a

zrPC<T<rr,y.cuvov
nifies

and above

the Prepofition, IT^o;.)

and above what F

its

Verb

^covovy a Verb

Time over

It

If

may be

principal Signification,

terpret,

c. 3.

following

p/xa

is jomethingy

(for fuch

it

is

<5*

eY

is

to

vijhieh fig-

the force of

fhould be afked, over

anfwered, over and above

which

moving and energizing Attribute.

together with his

nias and Boethius.

The

this Property.

is

to denote

fome

See Arijl. de In-

Commentators Ammo-

Book the First.

Shoui>d
felf

may

it

97

be afked, whether Time

it-

not become upon occafion the

Verb's principal Signification

And
the fame Time may
fwered, No.

is

it

an-

this appears, becaufe

be denoted by differ-

ent verbs (as in the words, ivritcth and

fpeaketh) and different Times by the fame

Verb

words, writetb and wrote)

(as in the

neither of

which could happen, were

Time any thing more, than

Add

mitant.

mere Conco-

to this, that

when words

denote Time, not collaterally, but principally, they ceafe to

come

be verbs, and be-

either adjectives,

Of the

or

fubflantives.

adjective kind are Timely, Yearly,

Dayly, Hourly, &c. of the fubftantive kind

are Time, Tear,

The

Day, Hour, &c.

moll: obvious divifion

into Prefent, Paft,

language
not

of

Time

and Future, nor

complete, whofe verbs

Tenses,

to

But we may go

mark
itill

any

have

thefe diftinclions.

farther.

and future are both

is

is

infinitely

Time pad
extended.

Hence

Ch.VI.

HERMES.

93

Ch.VI. Hence it is that in univerfal Time paft we

~ ma y a flume many particular 'Times paft,

-~-v

and

in univerfal

Time future, many parti-

fome more, fome

cular Times future,

lefs

remote, and correfponding to each other

under different

Time

itfelf

is

relations.

Even

prefent

not exempt from thefe dif-

ferences, and as neceiTarily implies

degree of ILxtenfion,
line,

r.s

however minute.

Here
reafon,

then

which

we

are to feek for the

nrft introduced into lan-

guage that variety of Tenies.

it

fome

does every given

feems enough to denote

by Aorifts) mere
ture, but

it

It

was not

indefinitely (or

Prefent, Pad, or

Fu-

was neceffary on many occa-

lions to define

with more precifion, what

kind of Pair, Prefent, or Future.

And

hence the multiplicity of Futures, Preterits,

which

and even Prefent Tenfes, with

all

languages are found to abound,

and without which

it

would be

difficult

to afcertain our Ideas.

How-

Book the First,

However

Tenses depends
Time, and this is
fpeculation,

the

as

99

knowledge

of Ch.VI.

on the Theory of
a fubject

we mall

referve

of no mean
it

by

itfelf

for the following chapter

CHAP.

HERMES.

loo

H A

VII.

P.

Concerning Time, and Tenfes.

C. VII.
v -- v ~*
;

^ime and Space have this in common, that they are both of them by

nature things continuous, and as fuch they

Thus

both of them imply Extenjion.

tween London and Salijbury there

is

bethe

Extenfion of Space, and between Yefierday

and To-morrow, the Extenfion of Time.

But

in this they differ, that ail the parts

of Space

exifl at cnce

thofe of

Time

and

only exift

while

together,

in Tranfition

or

Hence then we may gain

fome Idea of Time, by confidering it
SucceJ/ion [a).

under
See Vol.

(a)

we may

^0

J
%f '
6V

NTN'
Time
Fmgle

iv

I.

what

add,

p.
is

by Ammaniui

, U(p{,-arwj

ycco to yivsv^su

>t-

aAA'

r,

ovSl

xxTu

<pG;crOa

which
yoip

cr Inst/.nT; for

bo

be.

it

hcth

its

A mm.

y.ovov r

ro fiVat iyjn*

doth net fulfill tht whole at onct, but enly in

Now

hecmning and in ceajzg:

p. t'2.

To

275. Note XIlI.

faid

Exigence in

in

Prcdicam.

Book the First.

joi

under the notion of a tranjient Continuity. C. VII.

Hence

the affections and

alfo, as far as

Time

properties of Tranjition go,

from Space

ferent

but

is

dif-

to thofe

as

Extenjion and Continuity, they

of

perfectly

coincide.

Let
>f

us take, for example, fuch a part

Space, as a Line. In every given

we may

Line

aiTume any where a Point, and

therefore in every given Line there

be affumed

Time we may
Now or Injlant, and

a flume

given

may

given Time there

Nows

So in every

Points.

infinite

may

any where

therefore in every

be alTumed infinite

or Injlants.

Farther

flill

A Point

Line

of every

finite

stant,

of every

and A

finite

is

the B?nnd

Now

Time.

But

or Inaltho'

they are Bounds, they are neither of them

Parts, neither the Point of any Line, nor
the

Now

or Injlant of any Time.

appear ftrange,

If

we may remember,

this;

that

the parts of any thing extended are necej-

firiiy

w*v~

HERME

102
C.VII.
*

*****

farily extended alfo,

it

S.

being effential to

their character, that they jhould meafure

Whole.

their

a Point or

Now

were

and

itfelf infinite other Points,

within

finite other

Nows

infinitely

fion)

if

each of them would contain

extended,

ed

But

and

(for thefe

in-

may be aflum-

within the minuteft Exten-

this,

it is

evident,

would be ab-

furd and impofiible.

These

afTertions therefore

mitted, and both Points and

being ad-

Nows

being

taken as Bounds, but not as Parts (6),

it

will

f$)

<?

8<T at riyfAXi ttk

toa-rnp

ovo

(pavepov orl

'

ty\<; jw,ijt?

Injlant

poPiot..

it

/xo^icp to

NTN

ygapfAys' at
it

evident that

no mere a part of Time, than

is

ts

$1

JtPotus,

ypappxi

A Now or
Points are

of a Line. The parts indeed of one Line are two other

And not long
Natur. Aufc L. IV. c. 17.
Lines.

beforeTo
uecQt ,

r.-,

XFCNOS

Now
fure
its

is

its

NTN

a f^sp^r" pupil,

-ri

yeep

1 Soxe? crvyxiidixi

ruv

NTN.

to
$\

Part of Time-, for a Part is able to meaWhole, and the Whole is necejjdrily made up of

Parts

Nows.

01

viyHSHrQoLi oeT to oXov tx ruv (abpooV

no

but

Time

Ibid. c. 14.

dcth not appear to bt

made up of

Book the First.

will follow, that in the

thefame Point

may be

the

fame manner

or Injlant

may

as

End of one Line,

and the Beginning of another,

Now

103

fo the fame

End

be the

of one

Time, and the Beginning of another. Let us

fuppofe for example, the Lines,

A B, B C.

C
the Point

I fay that

is

End

the

of the

Line AJ3, and the Beginning of the Line,

B C. In the fame manner let us fuppofe

AB,
let

BC

B be

Now

I fay that

Times, and

to reprefent certain

or Injlant.

the Infant

is

In fuch cafe
the

End of the

Time A B, and the Beginning of the

Time B C. I fay likewife of thefe two
Times, that with refpect

Now

to the

Infant^ which they include, the

them

is

necefTarily

previous to

ture,

it;

firft

Past Time, as

the other

is

As

of

being

neceffarily

as being fubfequent.

or

Fu-

therefore

every

C.VII.

^^

HERMES.

io 4

Now

C. VII. every
[

">

'

or

Instant

always

Time, and without being Time,

Bound ; the Bound of

Pa/?, and the

exiits in
is

Time's

Completion to the

Bound of Commencement

to

we may conceive
which is to be the Me-

the Future: from hence

nature or end,

its

dium

of Continuity

Future,

fo as to

between the Paji and the

render Time, thro all

Parts, one Intire and Perfect Whole

From

its

{/).

the above fpcculations, there

which may be

follow lbme conclulions,

perhaps called paradoxes,

they have

till

been attentively confidered.

In the nrft

place there cannot (ftrictly fpeaking) be

any
To

(f )
Qn.

$\

vvviyji

i<to<j.zi/0\>,

x-j

NTN
yxs

rev

yccvov,

tov

o?\u; ufiPtz; ygoiiz triv

dcyjiy ts 1 TfAeuTJi.

sA^-

Gvv'iyjux yj>Qvx, L<nrto

A Now

"BrotpiMtvcot
f

xj

yao ra utv

or Injlant

is

(as

was

fjid before) the Continuity or holding together of Time ;

for it makes Time continuous, the pajl and the future,

and
one

is

in

general

Tunc and

L. IV.

c. 19.

its

boundary, as being the beginning of

the ending of another.

EwSa

in this place

Natur. Aufcult.

means not Con-

tinuity, as (landing for Extenfton, but rather that

tion or

Holding together, by which ]xtenfion

parted to other things

Junc-

is

im-

Book the First.

For

any fuch Thing as Time prefent.

Time

it

toge-

all

but part will neceifarily be gone,

and part be coming.

portion of

at once,

portion of

how

any

continuity were to be prefent

its

would

it

If therefore

fo far quit

its

nature, and be Time no longer.

fent,

if all

be tranjient as well as continuous,

cannot like a Line be present

ther,

105

its

tranfient

But

if

no

continuity can be tbus pre-

can Time poffibly be prefent y to

which fuch Continuity

Farther

than

is

effential

this

If there be

no

fuch thing as Time Prefent, there can be no

Senfation

For
ly,

a.l

lime by any one of the

oj

l Se n s a t ion u

oj the

fenfes.

* Prefent on-

the Pair, being preferved not by Senfe but

by Memory, and the Future being anticipated by Prudence only and wife Fonfight.

But

if

no Portion of

Time be

ject of any Senfation-, farther,

the ob-

if the

Prefent

Ta-JTVJ y&(> (ai<r9>rm fc.)

owe

to ^eAAoj*, outs

to yiyvopsucu yvuci^opzv, aAAos to -urxDov

Aaij.

irto\ Mi/rijU.

A.

as.

auw.

C. VII.

""'"

io6
C.VII. fent never
if

E R

S.

Pad

exiftj if the

the Future be not as yet

are

compounded

how

we

a Being do

and

which

the parts, out of

all

be no mere

ftrange and

rind

How

it ?

thefe

if

Time

nearly ap-

us,

we have

if

power, to feize

fail

not faculties of higher

this fleeting Being.

The World
riety

(el)

however, fince the fenfes

try

is

fhadowy

proaching to a perfect Non-entity

Let us

has been likened to a va-

of Things, but

appears to refem-

it

no one more, than fome moving fpec-

ble

tacle

(d) 'Oti
tv

Jpoos, X

ysyovs,

T2TUV

Sv oXu;

ax

Ej*r,

rig a.v UTTQirlivfHZ'

sx

Xy

to \

ift'

Xj 8 CtTTSlg(y

TO J

C\j[y.tlTdl'

av

fjt.lv

Xy

(j-iXXti,

poyig

to

[xlu

mtuv

may fufpeel from

been,

and

is

yet

and

out of thefe

is

ever

to

no more

is

%P6l>(&*
0,3'oVX.TOV

is

made that

and

A fart

objeure

of

it

has

coming,

and

infinite

Time, which

is

and farther.

not as

Novj

made up of nothing but Non- entities,

Jhouldfeem was

impojfible

Natural. Aufc. L.
in

is

be affumed Jlill farther

that which

Com.

hence.

a part of it

i*.

That therefore^!'ime

exifis not at all, or at leaf} has but a faint

txijlence, one

yxp dv"U

eriV

h, uttco

iTvfy.iiasvov,

Jofceu y.a.T'c-^iiv ztqti zcriccq.

a^wu-

x^

Xct^XVOUiV^3

Q.il

fJ.'/\

r\

V.

Nicomach.

ever

c. 14.

p. ic.

to

it

participate of Entity.

See

alfo Philop.

M. S.

Book the irst.

(fuch as a proceffion or a triumph)

tacie

that

C.V1I.
every part with fplendid ""V

abounds in

objects,

fome of which are

make

as fail as others

The

departing,

flill

their appearance.

Senfes look on, while the fight paffes,

perceiving as
fent,

107

much

which they

as

is

immediately pre'-

report with tolerable accu-

Hav-

racy to the Soul's fuperior powers.

ing done

this,

they have done their duty>

being concerned with nothing, fave what

is

But

prefent and inftantaneous.

Memory,

to the Imagination,

to the Intellect , the feveral

to th

and above

all

Nows ovlnjiants

are not loft, as to the Senfes, but are pre-

ferved and

made

objecls of Jleady

hension, however in their

may be

tranfitory

compre-

own nature

and pajjing.

"

they

Now it

is

K from contemplating two or more of thefe

" Inflants under one view, together with
t(

that Interval of Continuity,

" fids between them, that

we

" fenfibly the Idea of Time

which fubacquire in-

(*>)."

For example

(c")
k,

Terf

vfi^a

iv

<ptx.fjt.lv

yiyovlpxi yoovov, otuv th

ry xur.vsi

Gmrfintrif Ka,ex\usv.

iircoricS.

'OgtC^oy.ty

HERMES.

io8

C.VII. ample: The Sun

rifes

it rifes again-, this

remember:

this I

remember. Thefe

too I

Events are not together

there

an

is

Ex-

tenjion

il

tm a\Xo

avruy
(AtVj

x,

aAAo nro?.xQuv
yup

itipov' orccv

Xj

Juo

4' U

tl7TVI

TO $1 VflOOX, TCT
iV

d'jrcc,

ret ccxpet srsaet

/C

>1

Ta

THTO

H^

acquire a Senfation of prior

NTN}

TO [AV ZTPOTZOOV,
JJ/a

Time,

then

Nows,

we fay

it is

one prier

there

often as zve cone ewe

and

Mean, and the Soul

the other fubfequent,

Time, and this

is

in Motion.

with an interval between

the Extretncs to be differentfrom the

talis of tzuo

XPONON.

zvhen zee can

and fubfequent

For as

both.

voritru-

thefe two,J>y confidering one

firjl, then the other"., together

them different from

fj.i<r%

U.y.\'J

then zvefay there has been

But we dijlinguijh andfettle

fx-rcc^u t

th

it is

we

call

Time. Natural. Aufcult. L.I V. c. 1 6. Themifiiius's

Comment upon this palTage is to the fame purpofe.
'

Orav yap
iTEOCV

NTN

tuv Vo

clllOtf

TExaJtza

TO TT.y.EPOV, TOT!

thTTVj

v7ro

Iviyoncsii)

VSPUTUU

?C,

tfPUVy

t\

NTN,

o vts$ ccW[/.uvj<rQei$

ZJX\W

t/

Ky

opicoy-EiioVj

ixxxiov/.x, oiov i% onrupx

Mind, remembering

the

Now, which

day, talks again of another

Now

immediately has an idea of

Time,

Nczus, as by two Boundaries

to fay,

as if

that the Quantity

it

were

to

Qiaj/
t

'I

yf

Cxi

>

XTU) AiyZlV /*> 0T ZT0Q~QV tfi ZSIV-

zrr,yyona.v $vo cnu-ioi; diroTiuvot^tv^'.

tzvo

yQU Mre9
y OQ'jOV EllP'Jf

is

it

ypapuy;

For when

the

talked of yejler-

to-day, then

it is it

terminated by thefe

and thus

it is

enabled

offifteen, or offixteen hours,

fever a Cubit's length from an infinite

Line by two Points.

Thcmift. Op.

edit, Aldi. p.

45. b.

Book the First.

109

between them- not however of C.VII.

Space, for we may fuppofe the place of '^-

tenjion

rifing the fame, or at lead to exhibit

fenfible

Yet

difference.

/till

we

recog-

Now

nize feme Extenfion between them.

what

is

this

And what
after the

no

Extenfion, but a natural Day?

that,

is

but pure Time ?

It is

fame manner, by recognizing

two new Moons, and the Extenfion between

thefe

two vernal Equinoxes, and

the Extenfion between thefe

that

we

gain Ideas of other Times, fuch as Months

and Tears, which

vals, defcribed as

are

all

above

many

fo
;

that

is

Interto fay,

paffing Intervals of Continuity between

two

Injlants viewed together.

the Mind acquires the

Idea of Time. But this Time it mud be
remembered is Past Time only, which

And

is

thus

always

it is

t\\cjirjl Species, that

human

How

occurs to

we
acquire the Idea of Time Future ? The

the

anfwer

is,

Should

it

intellect.

we

acquire

be demanded

it

then do

by Anticipation.

flill

farther,

And
what-

HERMES.

no
C.VII. what

We

Anticipation f

is

this cafe

it is

anfwer,

a kind of reafoning

triat in

by ana-

logy from fimilar to fimilar ; from fucceffions

of events, that are pad already, to

For example

hereafter.

back

that

fucceilions,

fimilar

my memory

as

are

prefumed

obferve as far

can carry me,

how

every day has been fucceeded by a night;

that night,

by another day
;

and

Day

that

another night

der to the

that day,

downwards

fo
is

now.

by

in or-

Hence then

I anticipate afimilarfuccejjion from the pre-

fent

Day, and thus gain the Idea of days

and nights

in futurity.

manner, by attending
turns of

After the fame

to the periodical re-

New and Full Moons;

of Springs,

Summers, Autumns and Winters,

which

in

Time

paft I find never to

failed, I anticipate

like orderly

all

of

have

and diver-

fjiedfuc ce/fion, which makes Months, and

Seafons, and Years, in T^ime future.

We

go farther than

this,

and not only

thus anticipate in thefe natural Periods,

but even in matters of human and

9

civil

concern*

Book the First.

hi

For example: Having obferved C.VII.

many pari: inftances how health had * v

concern.
in

fucceeded to exercife,and ficknefs to floth;

we

anticipate future health to thofe,who,

being now fickly, ufe exercife

iicknefs to thofe,
are flothful.

and future

who, being now healthy,

It is a

variety of fuch obfer-

which

vations, all refpecling one fubject,

when
made

fyflematized by

juft reafoning, and

habitual by due practice, form the

character of a Matter- Artifl, or

practical

Wifdom.

human body
Phyfician
ral

if

(as

If they

Man

refpect

the,

above) they form the

matters military, the

Gene-

matters national, the Statefman

if

if matters

of private

life,

All thefe ie-

veral characters in their refpeclive

be

faid to poffefs a

the Moralift; and

the fame in other fubjects.

may

of

ways

kind of prophetic

difcernment, which not only prefents

them

the baf-ren profpeSt of futurity (a prefpect

not hid from the meaneft of men) but

ihews withal thofe events, which are

likely io attend

to act

tude.

it,

and thus enables them

with fuperior certainty and

And hence

it is,

that (if

recti-

we except
thofe,

HERMES.

H2
C.VII.

*~*

'

who have had diviner

we may jiiftly fay, as was faid
thofe,

He's the

beji

affiftances)

of old,

Prophet, ivho conjectures

well {f).

From
So Milton.
Till old Experience do attain

Tofomething

Etfacile
trtodo

Prophetic Strain.

like

exijlimari potefl,

Prudentiam

Corn. Ncp.

There

ejfe

quodam-

Droinatione?n.

is

in Vit. Attici.

nothing appears fo clearly an object of the

Mino

or Intellect only, as the Future does, finer

we can find no place for its exiftence any where elfc.
Not but the farne^ if we confider, is equally true of the
Pad. For tho' it may have once had another kind of
being, when (according to common Phrafe) it aclzially

was, yet was

it

ihing Paji.

As Paf,

Mind

or

then fomething Prefentj and not fome-

Memory,

it

has

no exigence but

fnce had

it

the

in

fad any other,

in

it

could not properly be called Paft. It was this intimate

connection between

Time, and

there could be any T.mr, fince

Being
art

uj

In
o

Aufcult. L.

IV.

Time

20.

$i y-n

TOIV'JV

fjLWbV, to

OlVd&S XiytTXi TOTl

jLtV

'x<rr,s

h. t. A*

Themijlius,

the above pafTage, exprefles himfelf

E*

made

appears to have

<x,t:oci\<thiv ch/ tj?,

c.

that

if there ivas no Soul,

no other region. Ylonpov

ypQvos,

Soul,

the

Tome Philofophers doubt, whether

its

^vyjit;

rsatur.

who comment*
more

CcpityuriTO'J ;U

pofuivelr.

TO dpiQp.2'

to a^ivi/.nrcv oyAaori Suvotptl) to ot

tv

tcyitx, ravTct ot ax av irror&ir,, u.n cvrc$ ra azivy.?)(T0VT6C-

Book the First.

From
pears,

?lj

what has been reafoned

knowledge

that

Future

of the

comes from knowledge of

ap-

it

the Paji

does knowledge of the Paji from

-,

as

know-

ledge of the Prefenty fo that their Order

to us

is

that of

Present, Past, and

Future.

Of

thefe Species of knowledge, that of

the Prefent

is

in perception,

the lowefr., not only asjirjl

but

as far the

being neceflarily

live,

more exten-

common

to all ani~

mal Beings, and reaching even

Zoo-

to

phytes, as far as they poiTefs Senfation,

Knowledge of the Paji comes next,

which is fuperior to the former, as being
confined to thofe animals, that have

mory as well as

Senfes.

Me-

Knowledge of the
Future

VOVTQS

ay

{/.'ATI

Xfoi/o?,

OVVXptl p.TE htftytilXy (pMtOOV

thy

f*ri

Edit. Aldi. Vid. etiam

^u^g. Them.
ejufd. Comm. in Lib.

x<rri$

p. 94.

Cc'f

OVK

p.

48.

de An*

C.Vlf.

HERMES.

!i4

C.VII. Future comes

Ar-Hl^de'

An.

II. 3.

^e

ot ^ er

two

being derived from

laft, as

anc*

v^ich

for that rea-

is

fon the moji excellent as well as the mojl

p. 28.

rare, fince
rifes

Nature

in her fuperadditions

from worfe always

and

to better,

never found to link from better

down

is

to

worfe *.

And now

knowledge of Time

quire the

Time future-, which

which

firft.

them both

is firfl

in dignity;

mon, which more

rare

and

in perception,

let

us

Now

compare

or Infant,

relations they maintain

it.

In the

firfr.

place there

both pajl and future,

Now

paj},

ac-

which more com-

to the prefent

and examine what

towards

how we

having feen,

in

may be

which the

Times

prefent

has no exiftence, as for example in

Tejlerday,

and To-morrow.

Again,

* See below. Note (r) of

this

Chapter,

Book the First.

115

Again, the prefent Now may fb far

long to Time of either

End of the
future

pail,

but

it

fort,

and the Beginning of the

cannot be included 'within

the limits of either. For if

fuppofe

let us

be- C.VII,
t--v^
as to be the

it

the prefent

poffible,

Now included

were

within the limits of the pafi Time

In fnch cafe C D, part of the pail

A D,

will be fubfequent to

Now, and

fo

it is

both Paft and Future

that

Time

the prefent

of courfe be future.

by the Hypothecs

abfurd.

A D.

paft,
at

But

and fo will be

once, which

In the fame manner

we

prove

cannot be included within the

mits of a future Ti?ne, fuch as

is

li-

BE.

What then (hall we fay of fuch Times,

as this

Day,

this

Month,
I

this

Year, this

Cen-

HER M

n6
C. VII".

**'

Century,

all

the prefent

S.

which include within them

Now

They cannot be

paft

Times or future, from what has been proved

and prefent Time has no

exi/Ience, as

Or

has been proved like wife *.

allow them to be prefent, from

AW,

which

exijis

from the prefence of that we

conformity to cuitom

Times prefent,

as prefent

lb that

call thefe

among them

has infinite parts always abfent

in

we

prej&it

tibe

within them

alfo prefent, tho' the fhorteft

mall

we

If fo, and

allow fuch

Days, Months,

Years, and Centuries, each mult, of neceflity be a

compound of the Paji and the Future,

divided from each other by fome prefent

Now or IniVant,andy'?//7//}/ called Pr ese n t,

while that Now remains within them

fuppofe for example the

Time

X Y,

XABCDEY
_

Le

us

which

let

* Sup.

p.

104.

Book the First.

Now

prefent

the

in

fay,

XY,

let

C.VII.

or Injlant exift at

A.

*-

much

as

as

Time

X A, AY,

XA

that therefore

AY

and

Century; and

Day, or

call a

let us

117

within

exifts

Time

is

pail,

and the whole

future,

The fame

Time prefent.

Now

holds, if

we

exift

B, or C, or D, or E, or any

at

fuppofe the prefent

When

where before Y.
exiils at

Y, then

and

paft,

gets to

ftill

more

example when

XY

the whole

fame,

X.

Now

XY

Time

the

Now

when

fo,

In like manner

or onwards.

Now

before the Prefent

for

the prefent

the whole

is

when

When

entered X, as

was

at

Time future

the
it

it

then was
it

Now

prefent

is

present, while

present

was the

was

Now

fame indeed here,

as

it

that

it is

paffing, in

Instant.

or

is

It

at

XY

had pad that, then

became Time prefent. And thus

Time

to

is

in Space.

its

the

Sphere paffing over a Plane, and being

for that reafon prefent to

ient to that Plane in

I

it,

is

only pre-

afmgle Point at
3

once,

while

HERMES.

i;8

C.VII. while during the whole progreflion

its

parts abfent are infinite {g).

From
perceive

what has been

triat

we may

faid,

all Time,

of every deno r
mination,

(g)

Place, according

becaufe
Jlnre

am

in

to the antients,

I am

mediate, or immediate.

England,

was

either

(for example) in Europe^

in England-) becaufe in

in Wiltjhire, becaufe in Salijbury

Wilt-

in Salifbury y

own houfe in my own houfe, becaufe in

wyjludy. Thus far Mediate Place. And what is
my immediate Place It is the internal Boundof

becaufe in my

that containing Body (whatever

it

be)

which

with the external Bound of my own Body.

to? crt'^a?, xaO

the former Places,

is

it is

co-incides

ursgit^ov-

Now

as

included within the limits of

all

o izioiiy^ii

this imniedifite Place

Ta

to zjiph^o^d/ov.

from

this relation that thofe

diate Places alfo are called each of them

my Place,

metho'

among them fo far exceed my magnitude. To

Time. The Prefent Century is prefent in
that, in the prefent Month
that, in
the prefent Tear
the prefent Day ; that, in the prefent Hour, that, in the

the lead

apply this to

prefent Minute.

It is thus

circumfcription that

we

by circumfcription within

arrive at

that real and

indivisible Instant, which by being

Effena cf the Prefent

difFufes

itfelf

theory

Presence throughout
'

all

Book te First.
mination,

is

divijible

then whenever

fo,

Time, even though

119

and

extended.

we

fuppofe a

But

definite

be a Time prejent,

it

if

it

mufl needs have a Beginning, a Middle,

And

and an 'End.

much

fo

Time.

for

Now from the above doctrine of Time,

we

way of Hypothecs
lowing Theorie of Tenses.
propofe by

The Tenses

are ufed to

Future Time, either

Paft, and

all

even the

clude

mark

largeft of

the fol-

Prefent,

indefinitely

with-

Times, which are found

to

in-

within their refpeclive limits. Nicephorus Blem-

it

inides fpeaks

yjiwoz

iftv o

much
tp

to the

fame purpofe.

'Evsfug

ur^a>t^ v.^of

ixccrigoi

tw

Zv

jcuaiwf

NTN*

xgovos /xfcixo?, Ix-ara^sAjiXuOsTo?

cwtrcoSy xj $i%

NTN
fore

is

tyiv z?go<;

Xtyopivog
that

stant

which

TO XU0JW?

k} u]oj.

^.ihKovroq
yti\vi<x.(riv,

Present Time therereal Now or In-

adjoins to the

on either fide, being a limited

Pajl and Future, and from

"Nowfaidto Z't'Now
See

xj

NTN

its

alfo itfelf.

alfo Jrj/l. Phyfic.

L. VI.

Time made up of

vicinity to that
'Ejt/J.

real

puo-ucJijKfp.

c. 2, 3,

&V.

0'o

C.VII.
L""~^J

120

E R

C. VII. without reference

or

dle,

End; or

to

S.

any Beginning, Mid-

elfe defifiitely, in reference

to fuch diftin&ions.

If indefinitely, then have

Tenses, an

Aorift of the

we th&ee
Prefent, an

Aorift of the Paft, and an Aorift of the

Future.

\i definitely, then have

we

three

Tenfes to mark the Beginnings of thefe

Mid~

three

Times;

dies

and three to denote their Ends

all

three, to denote their

-,

in

Nine.

The
call

three

firft

of thefe Tenfes

we

the Inceptive Prefent, the Inceptive

Pali,

and

the

The

Inceptive Future.

three next, the Middle Prefent, the

dle Paft,

the three

and the Middle Future.

laft,

Mid-

And

the Completive Prefent,

the Completive Part, and the Completive

Future.

And
patural

thus

it is,

that the

number appear

Tenses

to

be

in their

twelve

three

Book the First.

three to denote

denote

it

under

Time
its

121

and nine to C.VII.

abfolute,

refpeclive diJlinBions.

Aorift of the Prefent.

I write.

Scribo.

Tf>u<pu,

Aorift of the Part.

Scripji.

"Eypoc\\/ot.

wrote.

Aorift of the Future.

Scribam.

r%a.$w.

I fhall write.

Inceptive Prefent.
MbKKu) yguQeiv.

Scripturus fum.

am

going to write.

Middle or extended Prefent.

Tvyxotvu ypoKpuv.

fum,

am

Scribo

or

Scribens

writing.

Completive Prefent.
riygxtpa.

Scripji.

have written.

Inceptive Paft.
"EfieXKov ygxQetv.

was beginning

Scripturus

eram.

to write.

Middle

HERMES.

122

C.VII.

Middle or extended

Pair.

EypxQov. or IrvyxpLvov yocttpuv. Sci'lbebam,

I

was writing.
Completive Paft.
'Eysypcttpciv.

Scripferam.

had done

writing.

Inceptive Future.

MeXX^cw
ihall be

Scripturus era.

ypa.(peiv.

beginning to write.

Middle or extended Future.

"Ecropau yputpuv.

Screens

ero.

fliull

fhall

be writing.

Completive Future.
'Earoy.oa

ysyputpcvg.

ScripferG.

have done writing.

It

H;

is

not to be expected that the above

pothefis

mould be

juftified

inftances in every language.

through

It fares

all

with

Tenfes,

Bqok the
Tcnfes,

as

Fijist.

i?3

with other affections of fpeech; C. VI

be the Language upon the vyho'e ever fo

perfect,
all

much muft be

left, in

defiance of

analogy, to the harm, laws of mere

authority and chance.

It may not however be improper

inquire,

what

traces

may be

to

difcovered in

favour of this fyftem, either in languages

themfelves, or in thofe authors

written upon this part of

laftly in

In

the

firft

ferred to the Pajl

them

Grammar,

or

the nature and reaibn of things.

place, as to

Aorijis are ufually

'iina-ov,

who have

I fell, &c.
in the

by Grammarians refuch are

-,

Aorists.

We

rjxQov,

I went

feldom hear of

Future, and more rarely

in the Prefent.
to reafon, that

Yet

it

flill

feems agreeable

wherever Time

is

fignified

without any farther circumfcription, than

that of Simple prefent, paji, or future, the

Tenje

is

an Aon is t.
Thus

I.

HERMES.

124

Thus

C>VIt.

Milton,

Millions of fpiritual creatures

walk

the

earth
both

XJnfeen,

when we wake, an J when

P. L. IV. 277.

wejleep.

Here the verb (walk) means not

that

they were walking at that injiant

only,

when Adam /poke, but

oiofeuQ indefinitely,

take any inftant whatever.

fame author

Hypocrijy,

emails

the only Evil, that

(walks) hath

or indefinite application.

be

of

faid in general

walks

God alone,

Invi/ible, except to

the Verb

So when the

all

the like aorifiical

The fame may

Sentences of the

Gnomologic kind, fuch as

Ad

pcenitendum

properat,

cito

qui

judicat.

Avarus,

nifi

cum moritur,

nil

rec~lc

FACIT, &C.

All

Book the First,

All thcfeTenfcs
OP THE PRESENT.

are fo

manyAoRisvrs C. VII,
U-v~**

Sentences

Gnomologic

125

the fame

after

manner makelikewife Aorists of the

Future.
Tu

admittes

nihil

in

fe,

formidine

Hor,

pcena.

So

too

Hialt

Legi/lative

not

kill,

for this

ture

Time, but

indefinitely to

ture

shalt

Thou

not Jieal,

means no one particular fu-

&c.

ed

Thou

Sentences,

is

a prohibition extend-

every part of

Time

(Jo),

(b)

fu-

The

Latin

Tongue

appears to be

We

more

ordinarily deficient, as to the article of dorifts,

has no peculiar

and therefore

Form even

for

tharj

It

an Aorift of th? PaJ?7

(as Prifcian tells us) the Prgteriturn is

forced to do the double duty both of that Aorift, and

of the perfe5l

Prefent-, its application in particular in-

stances being to be gathered

from the Content. Thus

126

We

C.VII.

E R

pafs from Aori/isy to

S.

the incep-

tive TENSES.

These may be found in part fupplied

(like many other Tenfes) by verbs auxiliar.
MEAAXi yaxtpw. Serif turns sum.
But the Latins
I am going to write.
go

farther,

and have a fpecies of Verbs,

derived from others, which do the duty

of thefe Tenfes, and are themfelves for

that reafon called Inchoatives or Inceptives.

Thus from Caleo, I am warm, comes Cakjco, I begin to grow warm ; from Tumco,
I fwelly comes Tumefco, I begin to /well.
Thefe Inchoative Verbs are

fo peculiarly

Time,

appropriated to the Beginnings of

that they are defective as to all Tenfes,

which denote

it

in

its

Completion, and

there-

that

it is

feci means

both

-577roV.a

did

;V,

it

fame author informs us)

viDfboth iuoxxx and

and Ifaw

838.

and

(as the

i-rroinira.,

it

once.

Edit. Putfcb.

Prifc.

I have done
ilSoVy

it,

and /

I have jujl feen

Gram. L. VIII.

p.

814,

the First.

Book,

127

neither PerfeBum, Phis

therefore have

quam-perfcolum, or PerfeB Future. There

is

likewife a fpecics of Verbs called in

Greek 'Epe-nxa, in Latin Dejiderativa, the

Dejideratives or Meditative* 9
are

not

which

Inccptives,

ftrictly

Greek and Latin have a near

Such

them.
have a

are

defire to

wdktfiqgrettd,

make war;

I long to eat (/'). And

Inceptive Tenses.

The

fo

if they

yet both in
affinity

with

Bel/aturio,

(2ca<reiu,

much

Efurio,

for

the

two laft orders of Tenfes which

re-

we called (k) theMiddle

Tenses (which exprefs Time as extended

main, are thofe

and

(/')

As

all

ture, hence

Beginnings have reference to what

we

the Greek ones

fee

\s

fu-

how properly thefe Verbs are formed,

from a future Verb, the Latin from a

future Participle.

From

sroAS/x^Vw and

fyuvu come

and 0f wem'w from Bellaturns and Efurus

come Bellaturio and Efurio. See Macrobius, p. 69 t.
&oX<(j.r\(TEia

Ed. Var.

*raw

iToiWa? ysXxexi.
()

Care

'

<y

V vv

<W

TEAASEIONTA

Plato in Phaedone.

mud be taken

not to confound thefe middle

Tenfes, with the Tenfes of thofe Verbs, which bear

the fame

name among Grammarians.

C.VIL

HERME

128

S.

C.VII. an&pajing) and thePERFECT or Completive, which exprefs

Completion on End.

its

Now for thefe the authorities are many.

They have been acknowledged already
in the ingenious Accidence of Mr. Hoadand explained and confirmed by Dr.

ly,

Samuel Clarke

Homer s

Iliad.

of thefe,

we

liger,

',

in his rational edition of

Nay, long before

find the

and by him

fame fcheme

Ex his percipimus

(I)

divijijfe, fed

The

Jic,

fens imperfefium>

Amaveram.

Amo.

male

quis hoc dicat?

fentit,

imperfeclum,
mail) inquam

rion

ff

Tria enim

ita

Amabo
:

P reefens

eft.

Preete-

Et Pracontinuat

perfeclum^

aute?n ut non

Futurum,

inquit^

Perfeclum^ Amavero.

Jignificat

abfolutum iri

At

De Futuro

controverfum

conjlituit,

Amabam

ReRe jane.

Recle haclenus

enim amorem, neque abfohit.

Amavi:

Gaza
(who

learned

PerfeRum &f Imperfec-

Preeteritum imperfcclwn,

ritum perfeclum,

Gro-

Grocinum acute admodum Tcm-

minus commode.

ut nos, fed quce bifariam fecat^

tum

in Sca-

(/) afcribed to -f

cinus, as its author.

pora

either

Non

enim Amavero, amoremfutu-

Amabo perfeRionem

nullam in-

De Cauf. Ling. Lat. c. 113.

His Name was JVilliamGrccin^zn EtJgliJhman^con-

dicat.

temporary with Erafmus, and celebrated

ing.

Was

He went

for his learn-

to Florence to ftudy under Landing and

Profeffor at Oxford.

Spec. Lit. Flor. p.

205.

Book the First.

(who was himfelf a

129

Greek, and one of the C.VII.

ableft restorers of that language in the

weftern world) characterizes the Tenfes

What

fame manner (m).

in nearly the

Apolknius hints,

exactly confonant

is

(;z).

Prifcian

The Present Tense

(m)

Grammar)

us in his excellent
*y

ursXU, that which

THE PERFECTUM,
th

Ivsg-urog, that

is

now

denotes to Iptruptvov
Injiant

zT&jiO(]ilu.ftivov

tended

and

which

is

now

is

\n)

cvvTsXtiocv
ivirw<ra,v

and

THE Plus-

TZxaO^nX^oq ZSaXxi,

to

that

which

zrziQoy.iQx,

cy\^.xivn

is pa/?

on

ctx^xy.h^^o^,

zrctgu%'4fJ-iyz
ty,v

which perfuaded him

L.

III.

then treating, and which, as

Contingence,

would

Ting, extended,
this

plete

afTort

it

<xv,

PRESENT

The

Reefon,

was the appli-

of which he was

denoted Potentiality or

(he fays) with any of the pat-

and incomplete Tenfes, but never with

Perfectum,
and

c. 6.

to this opinion,

cation and ufe of the Particle

ys pyv

that the Perfctluni

doth notfignify the completion of the Pajl, but

Apollon.

Jt,

long ago^and

Gram. L. IV.

Hence we are perfuaded

Completion.

and is

THE Imperfectum,

of the prateritum.

EvrtbQsv Js

mi\\$

h)

ts -a-a^wp^^jva, the ex-

x^ tzTsXtg

zTcc^xx.!t[J!.iVis,

the completion

incomplete

immediately pa/?,

incomplete part of the Pa/?',

qUAM-PERFECTUM,
ji/tsAej

and

to zrxgt\n\v(}ci<; d^rt,

the Completion of the Prefent;

to

Author informs

(as this

becaufe this implied fush a com-

indefeafible exijlence, as

into the nature of a Contingent.

never to be qualifiad

HERMES.

130

C.VII. Prifcian too advances the fame doctrine

u^r^' from

the Stoics, who fc authority

greater than

more

all

early age

the

not only from the

reft,

when

their fuperior fkill

they lived, but from

Philofophy, and

in

peculiar attachment

their

which naturally

we efteem

to

Dialectic,

them to great accuracy

led

Grammatical Speculations

in thefe

(<?).

Before
(o)

was

By

thefe Philofophers the vulgar prefent Tenfe

called

the Imperfect Present, and the

the Perfect Present,

vul-

than

gar Prateritum,

which nothing can be more confonant to the fyftem

that we favour. But let us hear Prifcian, from whom

we

learn thefe

fac"ts.

citur, cujus pars

jam

Prjesens tempus
prceteriit,

enim Tempus, fluvii more,

punclum habere

Maxima

velfutura

ejl.

sens etiam
eo

injlabili

Vr.de

(ficut

diclum

ejl,

ejl)

in injlanti.

velprateriit

Stoici jure hoc tempus pre-

Imperfectum

quod prior ejus purs, qua

deejl

Cum

ejl.

valvatur curfu, vix

pot ejl in prafenti, hoc

igitur pars ejus

proprie di-

pars futura

vocabant (ut diclum ejl)

P'-ateriit, tranfacla

ejl,

auiem [equens, id ejl, futura. Utfi in medio verfu

dicam, fcribo verfum, priory ejus parte fcriptd; cui ad-

hue

deejl extre?.ia pars, prafenti utor verbo,

huc verfui,

fed

fenti nafcitur etiam Perfeclum.

veniat inceptum, flatim utimur

FECTO
fcripfi

dicendo,

Imperfectum ejl, quod deejl adquod fcribaiur

Ex eodem igitur Pra-

fcribo verfur.

continuo enim, fcripto

verfum.-And foou

Si enim ad finem per-

PRJETERIto perad finem

verfu, dicoy

after fpeaking of the

Latin

Per-

Book the First.

Before we

few mifcellaneous
will be

mere

we

conclude,

13

fliall

which

obfervntions,

eafily intelligible

add a C.VII.

from the

hypothecs here advanced, andferve withal to

confirm

And

firft,

its

truth.

the Latins ufed their "Prate-*

ritum Perfeftum in fome inftances after a

very peculiar manner, fo as to imply the

very reverfe of the verb in
nification.

dead

Thus, Vixit,

Fuit,

no more.

It

fignified,

was

natural fig-

its

fignified,

now

is

had put to death the leaders

He

linarian Confpiracy.

arxfXKitptvo*;

ENE2TI2TA
accipitury

&c.

when he

in the

Cata-

appeared in the

Forum,

fciendum tamen, quod Romant

Pr^terito Perfecto
pleta utuntur, (in quo

is

in this fenfe that Cicero

addrefled the People of Rome,

Perfeilum, he fays

not,

is

non folum in re modo com-

vim habet

vacatur,

ejus, qui

apud Graces

qucm Stoici

TEAEION

nominaverunt) fed etiam pro 'Aotfr*

Lib. VIII. p. 812, 813, 814.

HERMES.

i 32

C.VII. Forum, and cried out with a loud voice,

Vixerunt.

So

Fuimus

||

Virgil,

fuit

Troes,

Ilium

&

ingens

Gloria

Dardanidum

JEn.

II.

And
* So among the Romans, when

in a

Caufe

all

Pleaders had fpoken, the Cryer ufed to proclaim

erunt,

i.

e.

the

Dix-

Afcon. Pad.

they have done fpeaking.

in Verr. II.

||

evil

So Tibullus fpeaking of certain Prodigies and

Omens.

Hac

Sed

fuerint ollm.

tu,

jam

mitis, Apollo,

Prodigia indomitis merge fub esquoribus.

Eleg.

Let

II.

5.

ver. 19.

have been in days of old; by

Ifor henceforth let thembs
therefore

Events

thefe

Implication
no more.

So Eneas

Hac

in Virgil prays to Phoebus.

Trojana tenus

{\izx\x.

Let Trojan Fortune (that

Troy, and

its

inhabitants,)

By implication
Here

let it

end,

is,

adverfe, like that of

have fofar followed

therefore, but

Hie fit

fortuna fecuta.

let it

us.

follow us no farther,

Finis, as Servius well obferves

in the place.

In which inftances, by the way, mark not only the

force of the Tenfe, but of the Mood, the

or

Imperative, not

Seep. 154,155^56.

Precative

in the Future but in the

Past.

Book the First.

And

again,

Locus Ardea quondam

&

DiSius avis,

nunc magnum manet

Ardea nomen,
* Sed'for tuna fuit

The

Mn.

reafon of theie fignincations

We

the Tenfe here mentioned.

maintained by the

fuccemon of

Contraries.

Calm

Temped

and

Night

de-

of

fee that

human

the periods of Nature, and of

are

is

THE COMPLETIVE POWER

rived from

fairs,

VIT.

af-

reciprocal

It is

thus with

Day and

with

with Profperity and Adverfity

with Life

with Glory and Ignominy;

Hence

and Death.

then,

in

the

in-

ftances above, the completion of one contrary

is

other,

put for the commencement of the

and

to

fay,

hath been, has

is

Dead,

or, is

lived,

or,

the fame meaning with,

no more.

K
* Certus

hath

It

in bofpitibus non eji a7nor\ errat^ ut ipji:

Cumque

nihilfperes firmius

ejfe,

FUIT.

Epift. Ovid. Helen. Pariui. ver. 190.

She

erimus, feu nos Fata fuisse volent.

Tibull. III. 5. 32.

HERMES.

,J34

It is remarkable in * Virgil, that he

C.VII.
<U~V""J
frequently joins in the fame fentence this
complete and per feci Prefent with the ex-

tended and pajjing Prefent

which proves

that he considered the two, as belonging

to the fame fpecies of Time, and therefore naturally

formed

with

to co-incide

each other.
Tibi jam brachia contrahit ardens

& coeJijujia plus parte reliquit.

Scorpiusy

Terra tremit ; fugereferte

G.

I.

G.

I.

Prcefertimji tempejlas a verticefylvis

Incubuit,* glomeratque ferens incendia

G.

vent us,
ilia

Ad

II.

noio citius, volucrique fagittd,

terram fugit,

& portu fe

alto.

condidit

Mn. V.
In

* See
St. 19.

Hi

alfo

C.

3.

Spencer'-i
St. 3>>

C.

F, iry Queen,
S.

be.

B.

I.

haih bis Shield redeem'dj undforth his

he diaws.

C.

3.

Sword

Book the First.

135

In the fame manner he joins the fame C.VII.

two modifications of Time

that

is

to fay,

in

the Pa/},

the complete and perfect

Part with the extended and

Inruerant Danai,

p offing.

&

teclum omne

JEn.

tenebant.

II.

Tris imbris torti radios, tris nubis aquofce

Addiderant, rutili

tris

ignis,

&

alitis

aujlri.

Fulgores nunc

terrificos,

fonitumque me'

tumque

Mifcebant

operi,

Jlammifque fequacibus

Mn.

iras (p).

VIII.

As
(p) The Intention of Virgil may be better feen, in
rendering one or two of the above paflages into Englijh.

Tib'i

Scorpius,

&

jam brachia
cceli jujla

contrahit ardens

plus parte reliquit.

and

NOW CONTRACTING his claws,

hath already left thee more than a juji por-

tion

of Heaven.

For

thee thefcorpion is

The

Poet,

from a high

ftrain

of poetic

adulation, fuppofes the fcorpion fo defirous of admit-

ting Jugujius

among

the heavenly figns, that

though

he has already made him more than room enough, yef

he

^~

*"

HERMES.

i 3 <5

As

C.VII.

to the

Imperfecta?,

times employed to denote what

and

was

bat fignify not only, he

The

used

ufual

to rife,

reafon of this

he

is,

used

th.it

he

rifing,

upon occafion they

writing, but

nify, he

is,

Thus furgebat and fcribe-

ciijiomary.

was

fome-

it is

fig-

to write.

whatever

is

muft be fomething which has

cuftomary,

beenfrequently repeated. But what has been

frequently repeated, muft needs require an
Exten/ion of'Timepaf, and thus
fenfibly into the

Tense

we

fall

in-

here mentioned.

Again,
htjiili continues to be

we

have two

aits,

making him more.

one

and

Some

edi-

hence the ufe of the two

tions read relinquit

Here then

perfect, the other pending,

different Tenfcs.

but reliquit has the authority of

the celebrated Medicean manufcript.

Ilia noio citius, volucrique [agitid,

Ad terrain

fugit, iff portufe condidit alto.

Thejhip, quicker than the wind, or afwift arrow, CON-

TINUES flying to land, and is hid ivitbin the lofty

harbour. We may fuppofe this Harbour, (like many
others) to have been furrounded with high Land.

Hence

the VefTel, immediately

on entering

twpletely hid from thofe fpedators,

who

it,

was

had gone out

to

Book the First.

Again, we

by

are told

authority likewife

is

gems and marbles

Pliny,

names

pen dent i

in

tituio,

scription,

ftill

to their

when

works, did

or fecit.

Apciles facickat,

By

avoided the

it

for that purpofe

Polycletus faciebat,

7ro/et,

they

a fufpenfive kind of In-

and employed

7raii,

many

extant) that the

the Tenfe here mentioned.

Xr,t;

(whofe C.VII.

confirmed by

ancient painters and fculptors,

fixed their

137

was 'A^sX-

It

TloXv'A.Xsir^>

and never

Ittoitjcts

this

they imagined that they

mew

of arrogance, and had in

cafe of cenfure an apology (as it were) pre-

pared, fince
felf,

that

it

it

appeared from the work

was

pretenfion that

once indeed in hand, but

it

was everfmijhed

it-

no

(g).

It
to fee the Ship-race, but yet mighty?/// continue fail-

ing towards the

more

within.

Inruerant Danai,

& teHum omne tenebant.

The Greeks had entered and were then possessing the ivhole Houfe', as much as to fay, they had
entered,

and that was

over, but their PolTeflion con-

tinuedjlill.

{q)

PUn. Nat.

Hijl. L.

7.

Thefirft Printers (who

were moll of them Scholars and Critics)

in imitation

of

the

HERMES.

33

It

C. VII.
'

is

remarkable that the very manner,

which the Lathis

in

derive thefe Tenfes

from one another, (hews a plain reference

to the fyrtem here advanced.
pa/fing Prefent

Future.

From

come

Scribo,

Scribebum,

the perfect Prefent

feci Pari:,

and Future,

Scripfero.

And

Froi

the palling P

come

Scrip/i,

the

^cripfen

fo in all instances, e^ in

where the verbs

7W; come Tuleram and

the

from

Tuiero.

conclude by obferving, that

lliall

Order

from

are irregular, as

Fero come Ferebam and Feram

We

of the Tenfes, as they ftand

ranged by the old Grammarians,

fortuitous Order, but

is

is

confonant to our

perceptions, in the recognition of

according to what

not a

we have

Time,

explained al-

ready

the antient Artifts ufed the Time Tenfe.

Excudebai

H.

Jbfolvcbat

Stephanus.

Excudebct Gull. Moretius.

'Joan. Benenatus,

Taykr

which has been followed by Dr>

in his late valuable edition of Demojlhenes.

Book the First.

Hence

ready (r).
J'enfe ftands

firft

it is,

239

that the Prefent

then the Paji Tenfes

and hftly the Future.

And
ties

now, having feen what authori-

there are fcr Aorifts, or thofe Tenfes,

which denote Time

Tenfes, oppofed

thofe

for

which mark

it definitely,

Verb

in

Aorifts,

(fuch as the In-

Time

here fmifh the fuhject of

Tenses, and proceed

to coniider

and

the

other Attributes, which

be neceffary to deduce from other

will

it

to

and the Completive)

ceptive, the Middle,

we

and what

indefinitely;

principles.
(r) See before p. 109,
ger's obfeivation

upon

no,

this

autem (Tsmporum fcil.)

loco

1, 1

12,

is

Scali-

13.

Orda

elegant.

quam natura eorum.

quam quod ejidtaque pri-

aliter ejl,

Sfyjoder.im prater i it, prius

ma

11

occafuui

eft,

Verum, quod prima quoque

debere foni videbatur.

tempore off'rtur nobis, id creat primas /pedes in

ammo:

quamobrem P'afens Temp us primum locum occupavit\

eft

enint

commune omnibus animalibus. Prateritum au-

qua memorid

pr<tdita funt.

Futurum

verb etiam pr.uc.o ibus, quippe quibus datum

(ft pruden-

tem

iis

tantum,

tly officium.

Seneca Epi/i.
frafentia

De
1

24.

Cauf. Ling. Lat.

Mutum

c.

113.

See

alio

animal fenfu comprehendit

prateri:orujn9 &c.

CHAP.

C.VII.
*v

HE

140

CHAP.

S.

VIII.

Concerning Modes.

C.VIII.

TXJE
VV

hivt obferved already

{a) that

the Soul's leading powers arethofe

of Perception and thofe of

words we have taken

in their moir.

prehenfive acceptation.
alfo, that all

which

Volition,

com-

We have obferved

Speech or Difcourfe

is

pub-

exhibiting fome part of our foul,

lifting or

either a certain Perception, or a certain

Hence

Volition.

exhibit

it

then, according as

either in a different part, or af-

ter a different manner,

riety

of

we

Modes

or

hence

Moods

fay the va-

[b).

I?

(a)

See Chapter

(b)

Gaza

doftrine.

He

^uvrif, <5W
tion

II.

defines a
fays

it

Mode
is

exactly confonant to this

fixXr./xx,

tpuwYis <rrifA!Xiiioij.vov

iCf

Bradjj^as

Volition or Affec-

of the Soul, ftgnified through feme Foice, cr Sound

articulate.

Gram. L. IV. As therefore this is the

Modes belong to Verbs, hence

nature of Modes, and

it

Book the First.

If

we

limply declare, or indicate fome- C.VIIL

thing to be, or not to

this conftitutes

Declarative

the

Nosco

it

is

equally the

Mode

that

called

Indicative.

or

Perception.

crinis,

incanaque menta

Virg. JEn. VI.

Regis Romani

A
In nova

(whether a

t>L%

Perception or Volition)

fame)

141

Volition.

fert animus

mutatas dicer

format
Ovid. Metam.

Corpora

If

we do

not

ftriclly aiTert, as

I.

of fome-

thing abfolute and certain, but as of fomething p^Jible only, and in the

number of
Con-

it is

Abollonlus bferves

pccxtirxi

in

fi

tojV pf.pa.triv Itxigtrus sra-

iJ/u^jxtj cIkzQzvk;

the Soul's difpofition is

an eminent degree attached

to

Verbs.

De

Synt.

Thus too Prijclan: Modifunt divcrja

INCLINATIONES Animi, quas varia confequitur DEci.TNATio Verbi. L. VUI. p. 82*

L.

III.

c. 13.

HERMES.

42

C.VIIf . Contingents, this makes that Mode, which

*"""v"
'

Grammarians

call the

Potential; and

whkh

becomes on fuch occafions the

leading

Mode

Sed

of the fentence.

tacitus pafci fi pojjet Corvus,

HA-

BERET
Hor.

Plus Jap's, &c.

Yet

fometimes

Mode, but only

tive.

it

is

not the leading

fubjoined to the Indica-

In fuch cafe,

it

is

moftly ufed to

denote the End, or final Caufe

End,

which

human Life it is always a Conand may never perhaps happen

as in

tingent,

in defpite of all our forefight,

is

expreft moft naturally by the

Mode

mentioned.

therefore

For example,

U/jugulent

homines, furgunt de nocle

latrones.

Thieves

here

rife

by ?iight, that they

Hor.
may cut

mens throats*

Here

Book the First.

Here

that they

143

poftively offerted C.VIII.

rife, is

in the Declarative or Indicative

Mode

v"""-

*""""

but as to their cutting mens throats, this

is

only delivered potentially, becaufe

truly foever
rifing, it is

may

it

but a Contingent, that

flill

called

but

manner

in this

may

fubjoined,

by Grammarians not the

is

Potentials,

the Subjunctive.

But
of

it is

their

This Mode, as

never perhaps happen.

often as

End of

be the

how

fo

it

human

fufficient

others.

happens, in the conftitution

that

affairs,

merely

We find

to
it

is

it

not always

declare ourfelves

to

often expedient, from

a confioufnefs of our inability, to addrefe

them

after a

ourfelves,

manner more

whether to have fome Percep-

informed, or

tion

intereiling to

fome

Volition gratified.

Hence then new Modes of fpeaking

if

Interrogative Mode ; if we require, it is the Re-

we

interrogate,

quisitive.
hath

it

the

Even the

it is

Requilitive itfelf

With refpec^an Imperative Mode;

its fub ordinate

to inferiors,

is

Species

with

-'

HERMES.

144

C.VIII. with refpe<5t to equals and fuperiors,

' v^-'
a Precative or Optative *.

And

we eftablifhed a variety
Indicative or Decla-

thus have

of Modes; the

rative,

what we think

to ajfert

Potential, for

the

the

terrogative, when we
procure us Information

sitive,

certain-,

Purpofes of

whatever we think Contingent ;

the

In-

are doubtful, to

and

the Requi-

to ejji/i us in the gratification

The Requiutive

our Fo/itions.

under two

of

too appears

diftinct Species, either as it is

Imperative
tive

it is

to

or

inferiors,

to fuperiors

Preca-

(<?).

As
*

was the confounding of

It

gave

rile

when he

c$y.i oUfAEMu;

on

is

Gramn
t;ie

iinTocilsi.

fays he)

a$ical i-'onn

Species
f'
t

fidej thote

'iu'/j-

A.ifiot. Poet. c. 19.

The

evident from the Divifion here eftabliihed,

being in both cafes the fame.

h. Species of Modes in gre

number

thinks to pray, in reality conmands.

Solution

(c)

Homer

S.ng^Muje, the Wrath,

in beginning his Iliad with

the

Diftin&ion, that

this

to a Sophifm of Protagoras.

<

Se

en ence;

mentioned

fences.
f

in

'\

beyond
Chapter

be St:

ncafure depend
cs increaied the

the Peripatetics.
Ii.

Note

Be-

(b) they had

Book the First.

As

therefore all thefe feveral

have their foundation

145

Modes

in nature, fo

have

certain

many more,
p.

may be

as

Teen in

Jmmonius

4. and Diogous Laertius, L. VII. 66.

patetics (and

it

de Interpret.

The

Peri-

fcems too with reafon) confidered

all

thefe additional Sentences as included within thofe,

which they themfelves acknowledged, and which they

made to be five in number, the Vocative, the Imperative, the Interrogative, the Precative,

There

tive.

is

no mention of a Potential Sentence,

which may be fuppofed

or Indicative.

Form

The

to co-incide

sr^oc-a.yo^t'jTtyiov^)

with which
it

we

more

was nothing more than the

of addrefs in point of names,

therefore

with the AiTertive,

Vocative (which the Peripate-

the ii$og xAri-nxoi*, but the Stoics

tics called

properly

and the AfTer-

titles,

and epithets,

As

apply ourfelves one to another.

feldom included any Verb within

could hardly contribute to form a verbal

it,

it

Mode. Am-

monium and BcethiiiS) the one a Greek Peripatetic, the

other a Latin, have illuftrated the Species of Sentences from

Homer and

Virgil, after the following

manner.

'AAAa t Xoyx
to,
ft,

th

Trifle e\J,

t 5 ts

fl [Axxxg 'AtoejJVi

nPOITAKTIKOT,

Bcc<rx

<0j,

Ici

va.yCtor.

to,

KAHTIKOT,

Jtf

C.VIIf.

HERMES.

46

C.VIII. certain
v""~-

'

marks or

figns of

them been

in-

we may

troduced into languages > that

be

enabled

x)

t5 'EPX2THMATIICOT, us to,
T/j, zroQsv

*,

Tz

tiq a.v$oti'J

'ETKTIKOT,

u$ to,

At yap Zsv ts vja.no

stti

tstok, t5

/a

q>xivoij.ivx

'AnO^ANTIKOT,

KaS*

dvo-

fa

<

sr?^ oTOuav

TWi/ Er>a'v uaTi>,

ooi/

01 0 T

&C.

a zyso) zjou/xoSy

Boetbius's

ZJUVTOC HTX<riU-~*

Account

'

Elf to st^j 'E^t*.

is

as follows.

Orationum partes quinque funt

Perfeilarwn verc

Deprecativa,

"Jupiter omnipotens, precibus ft Jiecleris

Da

ut y

ullis,

deinde auxilium, Pater, atque hcec omina firma.

Imperativa,

k/,

Fade age, Nate, voca

Interrogativa,

Zepbyros., C5 labere pennis.

Uty

Die mibif Damata, cujum

VoCATIVA,

O!

p, 4.

pecus ?

lit,

Pater,

bominum rerumque

externa potejlas,

EnuntIATIVA,/ qua Veritas velFalfitasinvenitur, ut,

Principio arboribus varia

efi

natura creandis.

Boeth. in Lib. dc intcrp,

p.

291.

In

Book the First.

14^

enabled by our difcourfe to fignify them, C.VI11.

one

And hence thofe

Moods, of which we

to another.

various

Modes or
common Grammars

find in

which
".

are in fact

literal

To prolix a detail,

no more than

Forms, intended

"

and

many

fo

to exprefs thefe

" natural Diftindtions " (d).

All

In Milton the fame Sentences

The

lows.

may be

found, as fol-

Precative,

Univerfal Lord ! be bounteousJIM

To give

us only

Good

The Imperative,
Go

then,

Thou

mightieft, in thy Father's might.

The Interrogative,
Whence, and ivhat art then, execrable Shape P

The Vocative,
Adam,

Of God

The

Assertive

The

or

conquer' d alfo

Shall,

(d)

earth's hallow' d

with

The

Mold,

infpir'd

Enunciative,
and enflav'd by war

their freedom

loft,

all virtue loft.

Greek Language, which

is

of all the moft

elegant and complete, exprefles thefe feveral

Modes,
and

HERMES.

48

All

C.VIIL

mon,

thefe

Modes

have

this in

fome way

that they exhibit

com-

or other

the

and

diftinclions of

all

Time

likewife,

by an adequate

number of Variations in each particular Verb. Thefe

Variations may be found, fome at the beginning of the
Verb, others

at

its

ending, and confift for the moft

part either in multiplying or diminijhing the

number of

Syllables, or elfe in lengthening or Jhortening their re-

fpe&ive Quantities, which two methods are called by

Grammarians
Latin, which

the Syllabic and the Temporal.

is

bafed, admits in like

manner

a large portion of thofe

Variations, which are chiefly to be found at the

ing of

Yet

its

in its

Deponents and

Paflives

it is

fo far defective,

have recourfe to the Auxiliary

The modern Languages, which have ftill

Variations, have been neceflitated
Auxiliars at leafr, that

prefs in

End-

Verbs, and but rarely at their Beginning.

as to be forced to

two

The

but a Species of Greek fomewhat de-

all

of them to aflumc

to fay, thofe

is

turn.

fewer of thofe

which ex-

each Language the'Verbs, Have, and Am.

to the Engli/h
to admit

Tongue,

no Variation

fo

it is

for

poor in

As

this refpect, as

Modes, and only one

for

Time, which we
Thus from Write cometh Wrote from Give,
Pair..
Gave; from Speak, Spake, &c. Hence to exprefs
Time, and Modes, we are "compelled to employ no
apply to exprefs an Aoiift of the
;

lefs

than feven Auxiliars, viz. Do, Am, Have, Shall,

Will,

May, and Can

which

\vc ufe

fometimes fingly,
:\3

Book the First.

the

Soul and

its

149

Affections.

Their C.VIII.

Peculiarities and Diftinctions are in part,

as follows.

The Requisitive
gative Modes

Interrofrom

are diftinguifhed.

and

the Indicative

and

Potential, that

whereas

thefe laji feldom call for a Return, to the

two former

always neceffary.

it is

the Req^jisitive
the Interrogative, we

If we compare

Mode
jfhall

with

thefe

find

and

diftinguifhed,

alfo

that not only in the Return, but in other

Peculiarities,

a->

when we

fay, I

am

The

writing, I have written

fome-

times two together, as, I have been writing, I Jhould

written

have been
thefe,

and

loft,
all

fometimes no

lefs

than three, as

he could have been preferved.

might

But

for

other fpeculations, relative to the Genius

of the EngiiJJ) Language,

we

refer the reader,

who

wifhes for the moft authentic information, to that excellent 7'reatife of the learned
jljcrt

Introduction

to

Englijh

Dr. Lowth^

Grammar.

intitled,

v
"

>

/~*"

HERMES.

150

C.VIIL

'

The Return

made

times

Tq

in

to the

Requifithe

Words, fometimes

a prima

fome-

Deeds,

in

the requeft of Dido to Eneas

-t

is

die, hofpes, origine nobis

Dandum

Injidias

the proper Return was in Words, that

in

To

an historical Narrative.

is,

Re

the

quefl of the unfortunate Chief

date

was

obolum Belifirio
jn a

Deed, that

But with
Return
in

the proper Return

is,

in a charitable Relief.

refpecf to the Interrogative, the

necejjarily

is

Words, which

made

in

Words

alone,

are called a Refponfe or

/Infwer, and which are always actually or

by implication fome

Take Examples. Whofe

Sentence.

are theje ?

the Return

is

Thefe are Verfes of Homer.

a worthy
tence

And

afferthe

definitive

Man

the

Veffes

a Sentence

IVas Brutus

Return

is

a Sen-

Brutus was a worthy Man,

we may be
we may perceive

hence

to digrefs)

(if

permitted
the near
affinity

Book the First.

of

affinity

this Interrogative

the Indicative, in which

or Return

deed

is

Modes

Form

is

Mode

with C.VIII.
Refponie U-^^*J

lafl its

moflly made.

151

So near in-

two

this Affinity, that in thefe

alone the Verb retains the fame

nor are they otherwife diftin-

(<?),

guimed, than either by the Addition or

Abfence of fome fmall

minute change

particle, or

by fome

in the collocation of the

words, or fometimes only by a change in

the Tone, or Accent (/).

But

iiye

ye )

tyxEipASVViv

xv "urpoKHuivr)

vr.oc s V7rocos(pci

rr g y.arx<px-

a.vcnr\r,owi7<ra. S\

s^ to

Tr,v

xkoQxaXhctx, ^.ihfxrxi t&

xoLTu<px<rn'

xxXutrQxi opifixv

ty^Ann?,

oPifix.fi

Sivoci

ostrwri.

The

Indicative

Mod., of which zve fpeak) by laying afide that Afertion,

which by its nature it i .plies , quits the name of Indi.

<ative~ivben
to its

it

reaffumes the Ajfertion,

proper Character.

Theodore

(f)

Gaza

It

fays the

may be

returns again
c.

21.

fame, Introd. Gram. L. IV.

Interrogative,

obferved of the

that as often as the Interrogation

the Refponfe

it

Apoll. de Synt. L. III.

may be made

is

fimple and definite^

in almoit the

yaw? Words,

by

But

C.VIII.

E R

PI

r$S

S.

companion be-

to return to our

Mode

tween the Interrogative

and the

Requijithe.

The
by converting them

into a fentence affirmative or ne-

gative, according as the

For example

other.

Refponfe

Virgil.

And

is

Homer ?

of

Homer.

of

Refponfe

one or the

either

thefe Ferfes

Verfes are

Thefc

Verfes of Virgil

Truth

Are

cles, to reprefentall fuch

But when
Are

fay

more, when

the Interrogation

it is

two Parti-

Yes,

for all the

as

when we

for all the negative.

is complex-,

indefinite, as

thefe

Verfes?

orof\
when we

irgil

much

fay in general

we cannot then

the manner above mentioned.

after

that

No,

Refponfes

thefe Verfes of Homer,

JVhofe are

thofe

here the Artifts of Language, for the

fake of brevity and difpatch, have provided

affirmative;

Are

Thofe are not Verfes of

The

no Interrogation can be anfwered by

r'elpond

Reafon

is,

Ample Tesx

or a fimple No, except only thofe, which are themfelves

fo fimple, as of

Now

two

poffible

anfwers to admit only one.

the leaft complexTnterrogation will admit of

four Anfwers,

two

perhaps of more.

affirmative,

The

reafon

gation cannot confift of

each of which

may be

lefs

two negative,

is,

if

not

complex Interro-

than two fimple ones

feparattly affirmed and Separately

Book the First.

The Interrogative

the Ian-

(in

guage of Grammarians) has

153

all

Perfons

of

For

rately denied.

or Virgil's
not

Homer's

not Virgil's

Are

inftance

indefinite Interrogations

m;

be anfwercd by

go

T hey

are Horace's, They are. Ovid's, C3V.

They are
not

affirmatively

not Virgil's,

then fhould

fingre

No, which particular

r

They are Virgil's,

here

we

Cuftom

is

meant among

which

Yet even

has confulted for Brevity, by returning

die Interrogator

the fngle effential characlerijiic

is left

are afked

angles of a triangle

Two

infinite

are Interrogations

and retrenching by an Ellipfis

fyllable,

or nega-

learn from a fingle Tes, or a

Thefe therefore

Anfwer only

when we

They are not Horace's,

muft be always anfwered by a Sentence.

for

infinite

Ovid's, and fo on, either way, to infinity.

How

PolTibles

and

IVhofe are thefe Verfes?

may anfwer

They are

They are

dill farther; for thefe

We
tively

Homer's,

(2.)

infinite affirmatives,

For inftance

negative?.

(3.) They are Virgil's (4..) They are

we may add, (5.) They are of neither.

The
y

thefe Ycrfes

(i.) They are Homer'

all

to fupply

from

Hovj many right

? we

Word,

the reft, which reft

himfelf.

Thus

angles equal the

anfwer in the fhort mono-

whereas, without the Ellipfis, the an-

fwer would have been

Two

right angles equal the

angles of a triangle.

The

C.VIII.

1J4

E R

CsVIii. of both Numbers.

Imperative

or

that

it is

E 1

The RequisiTiVE
has no

the fngular, and

reafori*

Per/on of

Jirji

that from

this

equally abfurd in Mcdes

for a perfon to requejl or give

to

himjelf as

is

it

plain

commands

Pronouns, for the

in

fpeaker to become the fubjeel of his own

addrefs *

AgAin, we may

interrogate as to all

Times, both Prelent,

Who was

Paft,

Founder of

King of China
the Longitude?

and Future*

Rome

Who

is

Who will discover

But Intr

eating

and Com*

(which are the erTence of the

nianding

Re-

The

Antients diiiingUiftled thefc two Species of

The

Interrogation by different names.

fimple they

complex,

called E^wnjjtAa, Interrogation the

urutr^.ix,

of thefe 'E^ wTJitrif

Pcrc'ontalid.

jfmmonius

'iii.Xv/C\\y.n

the other, 'E^wtvktj? arv<rpzTiHy.

calls the firft

Mm.

in Lib. de lnterpr.

66.

hunt U. Injh IX.

* Sup,

p. 74, 75

p.

2.

60.

Diog. Laert.

See

VI L

Book the First.

Mode) have

Requjfitive

155

a neceiiary re-

For indeed

ipecl to the Future [g) only.

what

Account

(s) Apollonius\
all

Imperatives,

yivofj.D/oiq

ti

ytvct/.i>x

tig

to io-E<rQxi,

[xii

r\

worth obferving.

yiyovcnx, iTTiT'nonoTYiTx

MEAAONTO-

to thofe

things

which

But

yxp

\E-7n

fj.r,

nPOSTAHTS" tx

ytyovoviv n

[j.yi

u.r,

has refpeft

is

or the Future, implied in

Js

evo>t*

$\

A Command

<ri.

either are not doings or

which being

have

not yet been done.

now

doing, or having not yet been done, have a natural

aptitude to'exijl hereafter,

tain

thofe things,

may

the Future. De

to

Soon before

this

EVft rt\V

llKtipiVYlV

yxo h "ura
TIMA20X2,
il/'/OiXV'

TY;

rxx]ui<ji/,

dijpcfition

he fays

fri

t,

be properly [aid to apper-

L.

Syntaxi,

tx

Aitxvtx

'

not

T8 jWSAAoi'TO?

I.

c.

36.

-argofx>ilutx

OIUVBITIV

J^Y^OV

re, 'O TTPANNOKTONHZA.S

TIMH0H2ETAI, jct tw x&*

iXxXKTZl

OiY[X'AX~/^oq,

XXVQ TO

jtXl/

ZTCO-

Ad IMPERATIVES have
within them, which refpecls the Future
to al oPifixov.

to Time, // is the fame thing to

Let
him,
that
kills a Tyrant, be hofey,
noured, or, HE, THAT KILLS ONE, SHALL BE HONOURED the difference being only in the Mode, in as

with regard therefore

much

as one

is

Imperative,

cr Declarative.

Apoll. de

the other

Syntaxi,

Indicative
L.

I.
c. 35.
Prifcian feems to allow Imperatives a fhare of Prefent

Time,

as well as Future.

But

if

we

attend,

we

fhall

find

C.VIII.
'

v*-"'

Hermes.

t$e

C.VIIL what have they

*

do with the prefent or

to

which

the paft, the natures of

table

and necefiary

are

immu-

It

find his Prefent to

be nothing

elfe

than an immediate

Future^ as oppofed to a more diftant one.

vcro Prafens if
ne'ceffitdte

qud

Eaetenim imperamus,

videlur pojfe accipere.

vel in prafenti jtaiim volutnus fieri fine aliqua di~

Lib. Vill.

latione, vel in future.

It is true the

tain

Jmperativu't

Futurum [Tcmpus'] naturali quddam

Greeks in their Imperatives admit cer-

Tenfes of the Pafr, fuch

and of the two

806.

p.

as thofe of the Perfeclum,

But then

Aor'ifii.

fo applied, either totally lofe their

when

thefe Tenfes,

temporary Character,

br elfe are ufed to ihfinuate fuch a Speed of execution,

that the deed fhould be (as
ihllant

to fubfift

between our

and thofe others

(if

we

pleafe)

of,

it

were)

The

when commanded.

in the very

done-,

fame difference feems

Be gone,

Englifl) Imperative,

Go>

may be {tiled

or

Be going.

The

the Imperative of the

ftrlt

Per-

firtaw, as calling in the very inftant for the completion of

bur

Commands

the others

tlves of the Future, as

to begin

firft,

and

may be
a

filled

Im-

reafonable time

finifh afterwardi

It is thus ApolloniuS)

iinguifhes between

The

in the

Chapter

<r?.X7r]iToo

digging the Vinei, and

lug.

allowing

tx;

cxa^aTM rxq

firft is

firft

cited, dif-

olftTreXaSj

Go

ctfjLirztes,

fpoken (as he

to

Get

calls it) ei{

xgXTxg-iv,

Book the First.

J57

conne&ion of Futurity C.VIII.

with Commands, that the Future Indka*

It

the

is

is

from

this

fometimes ufed for the Imperative,

and that to

do this, has

You shall

any one,

iay to

often the fame force with

Do this. So in the
Decalogue Thou shalt not kill
Thou shalt not bear false

the Imperative,

WITNESS

Time

ttcccztxciv, by

way of Extenfion, or

for the zvork

the fecond, iU (tv\/tbXsiuciv, with a

vieiu

to

allowance of

And

immediate Completion.

another place,

in

explaining the difference between the fame Tenfes ?

ExaVfc
y.i)

arid Y.y.J.^oy,

ysvttU-evov

~gj

he fays of the

otrrucra-Hy

a,?\X<y,

Tucc^xTOiVzi gnrGtyoosvEi, that

thingi

which has not been

which

is

it

Write

he

is

Hence,

we

is to fay,
if

man

in

has

are willing to haftea

rPA$F7
now, and has been long doing)

would be wrong
(for that

ly

commandsfome-

noiv doing in an Extenfton, that

been a long while writing, and

it

not only

a pcyev re

-p yivouti/oy

yet done., butforbids alfo thaf^

flow and lengthened progrefs.

him,

laft,

>c,

to fay in Greek,

butrPAf'ON, Get your writing done make

no delays. See Jpoll. L. III. c. 24. See alfo
j

M'-urobius de Diffl Verb. Grcec.

i'urior,

iff

Lat. p. 68o.

Latini non cefYunaverunt^ &c,

gMt,

158
C.VIII.

HERMES.
witness which denote (we
the ftrictelt and

mod

know)

Com-

authoritative

mands.

As

Potential Mode,

to the

diftinguimed from

the

all

it

by

reft,

Jubordinate or fubjunttive Nature.

alio farther
Jit

he and

is

its

It

is

diftinguimed from the Requi-

by implying a

Interrogative,

kind of feeble and weak AJfertion, and lb

becoming

fome degree

in

Truth and Falfhood.

potentially, This

have

been,

furdity, It

be

fquare the
cafe, it

is

Command
things

may

or,

be,

true, or It

if it

be faid

This might

is jalfe.

meaning, Fly

this,

this be done ?

Circle,

we

true or

it

But
to

if it

Hea-

meaning,

to

cannot fay in either

is

jalfe,

though the

and the Queftion are about

impoiiible.

does

tential
tive,

is

Can

ven, or,

Thus,

we may Remark without ab-

Do

faid,

fufceptible of

becaufe

Yet

not afpire
it

implies

ftill

to

the

the

Po-

Indica-

but a dubious

and conjectural Affertion, whereas that

of

Book the First.

of the Indicative

abfolute,

is

and without C.VIIL

\~-.^,'

referve,

This
mean)

therefore

is

is

firfl

this,

Indicative

(the

Mode, which,

the

Grammars
truly

it

the

is

as

I
all

in-

in order, fo

firfl

both in dignity and

ufe.

is

It

which publishes onr fublimeft

perceptions

which exhibits the Soul

jn her pared: Energies,

fuperior to the

Imperfection of deiires and wants; which

includes the whole of Time, and

nuted

diftinctions

Paji Tenfes,

is

mer Events

in

Prophecy, or

which,

its

mi-

in its various

employed by Hiftory,

Remembrance of

preferve to us the

its

Futures

(in default

to.

for^

ufed by

is

of this) by wife

Forefight, to inftruct and forewarn us, as

to that
in

its

which

is

coming

but above

all

Prefent Tenfe ferves Philofopfry

and the Sciences,

by

juft

Demonftra*

that

tions to eftablifh necejfary

Truth

Truth, which from

nature only ex^

ijis

59

in the

Prefent }

its

which knows no

dik-

tincljons

HERMES.

i6o
C.VIII.
'

r
.

'

tinctions

either of Pail

or of Future,

every where and always invariably

but

is

one

(/>).

Through

(b) See the quotation,

Cum

enim dicimus,
fed,

ej[[c,

Note

Deus

Chapter the Sixth.

(c)

est, noh eu?n dicimus nunc

&c.

Boethius, author of the fentiment there quoted,

by

Roman

birth a

Chriftian
tetic

was

of the nrft quality; by religion, a

and by philofophy, a Platonic and Peripa-

which two Sects,

Source, were

as they fprang

from the fame

in the latter ages of antiquity

adopted by the fame Perfons, fuch

commonly

as Themijiius^

Por-

phyry, Iamblicbus, Ammonius, and others. There were

no

SetSts

of Philofophy, that lav greater Strefs on the

distinction

between things exifting

in

Time and

Time, than the two above-mentioned.

of the Peripatetics on this Subject (fince
Boethius here follows)

may be

not in

The

Doctrine

it is

thefe that

partly underftood

from

the following Sketch.

"

The

things,

that exist

in

Time, are thofe

" whofe Exijknce Tune can meafure. But if their

<c Exiftence may be meafurcd by Time, then there
lt
may be aflumed a Time greater than the Exiltence
" of any one of them, as there may be aflumed a
" number greater than the greatefl multitude, that is
" capable

Book the First.

Through

Modes, with C.VllT.

the above

all

261

their refpedtive Tenfes, the

Verb being
eon-

And

iC

capable of being numbered.

"

things temporary have their Exiftence, as

" mi ted by Time

it

it is

that

were

that they are confined within

" within fome bound

" other they allfubriiit

" common

hence

//-

it,

as

and that in fome degree or

to its

Phrafes, that

paver, according to thofe

Time

u things decay through Time

is

that

a dejiroyer

men forget

in

that

Time,

and lofe their abilities, and feldom that they improve,

" or grow young, or beautiful. The truth indeed is,
" Time always attends Motion'. Now the natural ef-

**

"

feci:

of

Motion

is to

put fmething, which

**

of ihatjlate, in which

"

to deftroy that ftate.

it

nov>

is,

and

now

is,

out

fo far therefore

" The reverfe of all this holds with things that

" exist eternally. Thele exift not in Time, be" caufe Time is fo far from being able to meafure their
" Exiftence, that no Time can be affumed, which their
" Exiftence doth not furpafs. To v. hich we may addj
" that they feel none of its ejficls, being no w :..y ob" noxious

To

either to

damage or

diflblution:.

inftance in examples of either kind of Being.

There are fuch things at this inftant, as Stonehtnge

and the Pyramids. Jt is likevvife true at this inftant,
" that the Diameter of the fqt&re is commenfurabh
u with its fide. What then fhall we fay ? Was there

ever

*"*""*""

HERMES.

162

GV'I T

urv"^

Attribute,

confldered as denoting an

has always reference to fome Perfon, or

Substance. Thus

if

we

Went, or,

fay,

Go, or Whither goeth, or, Might have gone,

we muft add a Perfon or Subftance, to

make the Sentence complete. Cicero
went

Caefar might have gone

goeth the

Wind ? Go! Thou

there

is

Mode

whither

Traitor ! But

Form, under which

or

Verbs fometimes appear, where they have

no reference

For example

ftances.

Sub-

at all to Perfons or

To

eat

is

pkajant;
but

et

Time, when

ever a

*' it is

certain there

was

it

was

"
u

incommenfurable, as

"

thofe marly Structures r"

Stonehenge, or Pyramids

Truths,

we may

we

The
TOU

J/ttJ

Ncu

aXXit.

Du

From

c.

ally

''Wtvi-xa.

fjl.lv

VCilV

e7,

i,

j*h

5 -ma-jra, 5 epa.
Ed. Lond.
Kurr ail

Decays

thefe

lefs

in both

unchangeable

Region;

to the

Mind, ever per-

Metaph. L. XIV.
I. p.

262.

c.

6,7,

Note VII.

deferve Attention.

<37E<|>UXEV,

veXec?,

was no

growing

remiffions, languors, l$c.

19.

may

there

daily

univerfal

Val. and Vol.

euro; ovttu

x)

is it

are afTmed of

knowing no

following Paffage

T:;T.

incommenfarable, as

pafs to their Place, or

See Nat. Aufc. L. IV.

8, 9, 10. Edit.

or

unceafmg Intellection of the

fect, ever full,

not

Time, when

ay

x)

(An

fxh

aXX&TE iXXa.

VSX'V

-5e

vx^s-6nq
S;?l

tin

*J

'wi'^VM,

dvrS ro
ay

xj

IL

vcz~y

EVTEXE^-aTOf a

Max. Tyr. DUT. XVII.

p. aoi,

Book the First.

hut
eat,

to

aft

is

To

and,

felves,

nor

Here the Verbs, To

wholefome.

ftand alone by

faft,

is it

them-

requilite or even practica-

Hence
the Latin and modern Grammarians have
called Verbs under this Mode, from this

ble to prefix a Perfon or Subitance.

their

Sanclius has given

perfonals
(pocrot,

Infinitives.

nature,

indefinite

them the name of Im-

and the Greeks that of 'ATraoe^-

from the fame reafon of

difcovering either Perfon or

These Infinitives

their not

Number.

gofarther.

They

not only lay afide the character of Attribu*

arTume that of Subftan^

tivesy

but they

trees ,

and as fuch themfelves become

alfo

dif-

tinguimed with their feveral Attributes*

Thus

in the inftance

Attribute,

above, Pleqfant

attending

the

is

Infinitive,

the

To

Eat-, Wholefome the attribute attending the

Infinitive,

To Faft.

and Latin of
Dulce

like

in

Greek

kind are innumerable.

& decorum

Scire tuum

Examples

eft

pro

p atria MORX.

nihil eft-

*Ou

HERMES.

164
C.VIII.

Ov

The
ries

yap

xcLT@ctve7v

Setvcv,

Stoics in their

had this

aXk

cticr%puf

grammatical inqui-

Infinitive in fuch efteem, that

they

k from

It

(/)

the nature of a

the

Infinitive thus

Noun

Grammarians have

participating

or Subftantive, that the

called

it

fometimes Oi/o^a

belt:

pV,/x-

A verbal Noun; fometimes Ovo^u p^fxaro;,

the Verb's Noun. The Reafon of this Appellation is in Greek more evident, from its taking the pre-

Ttx.lv,

pofitive Article before

it

unknown

Thus

in all cafes

The

y^xtpnv, tw ygoaptiv.

not to

tx SavtTv.

have been

dipt in

Lethe

not

is

In

like

YoK.

faid.

manner we

He did it, for to be

He did

it for

gain

lake.

from to die

where we mull fupply by an

pofition,

we had

r~.

in EngliJ}).

Could fave the Son of Thetis

cctto

to yi>ci<puv,

Spencer,

For

be rich,

fame conftruciion

He did

it, to

Ellipfis the

Pre-

fay,

rich, the

fame

z*

if

mehcc tb wABTSiV,

in French, pour Cenricher. Even

tvtxot tz x:'^?
when we fpeak fuch Sentences, as the following, /
choofe TO philosophize, rather than to be etch,

to pAo<ro$*V fizXopcu,
tives are in nature as

to fay,

%-irt^

much

to TshzTiiv, the Infin"-

Accufatives, as

if

we

wer-;

I choofe philosophy rather than Riches,

tw

Book the First.

165

they held this alone to be the genuine C.VIII.

PHMA
nied to

or

Verb,

all

a name,

which they de-

Modes.

the other

Their rea-

foning was, they confidered the true verbal character to he contained Jimple and

unmixed in the

Thus

Infinitive only.

Infinitives, Ui^ttoctuv,

the

Ambulare, To walk,

mean /imply that energy, and Jiothing more.

The other Modes, befides expreffing this
energy ,fuper add certain Affections, which
refpect perfbns

and circumftances.

Thus

Ambulo and Ambula mean not limply To

walk, but mean,

I walk,

M
tpiXG<roqn<zv j3aAo]Wj,

tittsp

CuRSUS,
(ff aliis

&

Walk Thou.

And

rov tsXhtov.

Prijcian, fpeaking of Infinitives

Lectio.

and,

ScRIBERE, ScRIPTURAj

Itaquefrequenter

cajualibus, more

Sed pulcrum

iff

&

too
eji

LeGERE,

Nominibus adjunguntur,

Nominum ;

eji digito

Thus

Currere enim

monftrariz

ut.

Perjius,

iff

dicier, bic eji.

Cum enim dico, Bonum EST lefoon after

gere, nihil aliud fignifico, nifi, Bona est lectio.
L. XVIII. p. 1 1 30. See alfo Apoll L. I. c. 8. Gaza

And

Gram. L. IV. To
T0 x. T. Ao

ot ci-n-ccoiytparcv, euoy.ee. tfi py\y.at,~

WvW

HERMES.

i66
C.VIII.

And hence

they are

all

of them refblvable

into the Infinitive, as their Prototype, to-

gether with fomefentence or word, exprcf-

Ambulo^

five of their proper CharacJer.

I walk

this is, Indico

me ambulare, I de-

myfelf to walk. Ambula, Walk Thoui

that is, Impero te ambulare, I command thee
to walk ; and fo with the Modes of every
other fpecies.
Take away therefore the

clare

AJjertion, the

Command, or whatever

elfe

gives a CharacJer to any one of theie

Modes, and there remains nothing more

than

the mere Infinitive, which

quam

Prifcian fays) fignificat ipfam rem,

continet

Verbum

(as

(k).

The

(k) See Apollon. L. III. 13.

fxivov d7to tji/c? x.

before,

A.

See

KaOoAa
alfo

Gaza,

a C.nfiruclione auoque

lgit'ir

zrccv

vragyiy-

in the

Vim

rei

note

Ver-

borum (id eft, Nomini:, quod fignificat iffam rem) ha~

Infinitivum pojfumus dignofcere; res aaterrj in

here

Perfonas Jiwributa

omnes modi

in

fgcit

hum,

five refolvuntur.

id

Prifc.

alios

tfl.,

vcrbi motus.

Infinitivum, tranfumuntur

L. XVIII.

p.

1131.

thefe Principles rfpollonius calls the infinitive

yEi/nioorxTov,
4

Ltdq'ue

and Prifcian, Ferbum generate.'

t

From
'P/aaj

Book the First.

The

application of this Infinitive

fomewhat
with

167

It naturally coalefces

fingular.

thofe

all

is

Verbs, that denote any

Tendence, Defire, or Volition of the Soul,

Thus

but not readily with others.

it is

fenfe as well as fyntax, to fay fivXopou

Cupio vivere,
fay

lipfis,

Edo

?">

'E<r8i'co

Eng/ijh,

defire to live

inftead of

but not to

-,

or even in

vivere,

unlefs

eat to live,

I eat for

%>jv,

by an El-

to live

we

as

The

rea-

that though different Actions

may

fay

evezcx.

fon

is,

tx

fiji/,

unite in the

or pour vivre.

fame

Subject,

be coupled together

(as

and therefore

when we

fay,

He

walked and difcourfed) yet the Actions

notwithftanding remain feparate and dif-

But

tinct.

Volitions,

cence

is

it

is

not fo with refpect to

lam

till

the Action

we

I want

What

fee, are defective

ii 4

be

I
The fen-

Cupio, Volo, De/idero

willing,

tences,

coalef-

often fo intimate, that the Voli-

tion is unintelligible,

expreft.

Here the

and Ablions.

defire,

and imperfeet,

C.VIII.

HERMES.

*6$
C.VIII.

We mud

feet.

which

nitives,

exprefs the proper Actions

which they

to

help them then by Infi*

difcere, Dejidero wider*,

am
is

I defire

I want

willing to live,

Vok
ready I
Thus

Cupio kgere,

tend.

to

to fee.

the whole rendered complete, as well

in fentiment, as in fyntax (/)

And

fo

much

for

We

Species.

feveral

Modes, and

their

are to attempt to

denominate them according to their mofl

eminent characters,

it

may be done

in the

As every necelfary

following manner.

truth, and every demonstrative fyllogifm

(which

laft is

no more than a combina-

tion of fuch truths)

muit always be ex-

prefl under ppfitive aflertions, and as poiitivjs

(/) Prijeian calls thefe

Verbs, which naturally pre-

cede Infinitives, Verba roluntativq \ they are called

in Greek YlgcxigiTixci.

See L. XVIII. 1129. but

rnore particularly fee Apoiloniits, L. III.

this

whole doctrine

See

alfo

is

c. 13.

where

explained with great Accuracy.

Macrobius de Diff. Verb. Gr.

& Lat.

p. 685.

Ed. Var.
1

Nee

ensue

cwra^paTOV

cuicunque Verio, &c,

Book the First.

169

only belong to the Indi- C.VIII.

fitive affertions

we may denominate it for that reaAgain,

the Mode of Science (m).

cative,

fan

as the Potential

is

only converfant about

which we cannot

Contingents, of

certainty that they wil]

may call

this

jecture.

happen or

Mode, the
Again,

as

Mode

with

fay

we
Con~

not,

op

thofe that are ig-

norant and would be informed, muft afk

of thofe that already knew,

way of becoming

natural

hence we may

Mode

this

call

being the

Proficients

TH$

the Interrogative,

of Proficiency.

Jnter cunEia leges,

&

percontaeere

doclos,

!%ua ratione queas traducere leniter cevum,

Quid purl
Farther

tranmiillet)

Mill, as

&c.

Kor.

the higbeft and moft ex-

cellent ufe of the Reyuijitive

Mode

is

le-

giilative

(m) Oh

Moans

nobilitatem praivit

Indicativus,

aptus Scientiis, folus Pater feritatis.

de Cauf. L. Lat.

c,

126.

folus
Seal.

"

i7

HERMES.

C.VIII. giilative
***>""
'

command, we may

Ad Divos adeunto

Be

it

Roman law-

therefore enabled, fay the laws

of 'England ; and

in the

fame Mode fpeak

the laws of every other nation.

in this

Mode

bifecled,

legiilator, orders

and

circles

lir

defcribed

which he

preparatives to that fcience,

about to

It is alfo

that the geometrician, with

the authority of a
to be

for

Ci-

cafle, fays

cero in the character of a

giver

it

the Mode of Legisla-

this reafon

ture.

ftile

is

eftabliih.

There

are other fuppofed affections of

Verbs, fuch as

Number and

Perfon.

But

thefe furely cannot be called a part of

nor indeed are

their effence,

they the

effence of any other Attribute, being ia

fact:

the properties, not of Attributes, but

of Subftances.
faid, is,

that

The mod:

Verbs

in the

that

can be

more elegant

languages are provided with certain terminations, which refpect the

Perfon of every Subjtantive,

Number and
that we may

know

Book the First.

know with more

preciiion, in a

171

complex C.VIIL

fentence, each particular fubftance, with

its

The fame
with refpect to Ad-

attendant verbal Attributes.

may

be faid of Sex,

They have

jectives.

terminations

which

vary, as they refped: Beings male or fe-

male, tho' Subftances pail difpute are alone

fufceptible of fex ().

We

over theie matters, and

therefore pafs

of like kind,

all

as

It is

()

rational a

fomewhat extraordinary,

Grammarian

Gender ;, or the

make

yet

juftly

and

deny

of Sex to Adjectives, and

His commentator Perizonius

to Verbs.

ipfis

diftin'Stion

that (o acute

mould

Persons appertain, not to Subjiantives, but

confiftcnt,

who

Nominibus

ineft ipfa

as Sanftius,

At vera ft rem

fays

is

much more

redl"e confideres,

& Pronominibus vcl maxim},

unicc
& Verba fe babe?it in Perfonarum
inib

Perfona

ad Nomina plan} ficuti Adjecliva

in ratione

Gc-

nerum ad Subjtantiva, quibus foils autor (San&ius

fcil.

rati one

L.

c. 7.)

I.

& redte Genus adferibit, exclufis Adjeclivis,

3anl Minerv. L.I.

act

fon.

c. 12.
There is indeed an exAnalogy between the Accidents of Sex and Per-

There

are but

and the Female

two

Sexes, that

is

to fay, the

and but two Perfons (or Characters

effential to difcourfe) that is to fay, the

the Party addreffed.

The

third

Sex and

Speaker, and
third Perfon

are improperly fo called, being in fail but

pf the other two.

Male

Negations

HERMES.

172
C.VIII. as
w""""

v"""

among

being rather

than the

effentials (0)

efTentials are

the elegancies,

of language, which

the fubjecl "of our prefent

The principal of thefe now remainingis the Difference of Verbs,

AS TO*THEIR SEVERAL SPECIES, which
we endeavour to explain in the following
inquiry.

manner.

(<?)

Whoever would

fee

portance, referred to in
particularly in note

(/;)

more upon

many

a fubject. of

im-

parts of this treatife,

and

may confult
an Octavo Volume publiflied

of this chapter,

Letters concerning Mind-,

J75O, the Author Mr. John Pctvin, Vicar of Ilfington

in Devon, a perfon who, though from his retired fitua-

known, was deeply flailed in the Philofophy

both of the Antients and Moderns, and, more than
this, was valued by all that knew him for his virtue
tion

little

and worth.

h a

p.

Book the First,

H A

173

IX.

P.

Concerning the Species of Verbs, and their

other remaining Properties.

LL Verbs, that are ftri&ly called, Ch. IX.

denote (a) Energies.
Now as aii -^
i'o

Energies are Attributes, they have reference

of courfe

Thus

to certain energizing Subjlances*

it is

impoffible there

Energies, as To love, to fly,

if there

mould be fuch
to

wound, &c.

were not fuch beings as Men,

Birds, Swords,

&c. Farther, every Ener-

gy doth not only require an Energizer,

but is neceifarily converfant about ibme

For example,

Subject*
loves

if

we

fay,

we muft needs fupply

Brutus

loves Cato,
Caflius,

We ufe this word Energy",

{<:)

tion,

a fort

and

rather than

Mo-

more comprehendve meaning; it being

of Genus, which includes within it both Motion

from

its

its

Privation.

See before,

p.

94, 95.

HER M

17^
Ch. IX.

CaJ/lus, Portia, or

wounds

i.

e.

two

S.

fome one.

rfhe

Sword

wounds Hetfor, Sarpedon,

And

Priam, or fome one.

every Energy

is

thus

is it,

that

between

neceffarily iituate

which

Subftantives, an Energizer

is

aStive,

and a Subject which

Hence

then, if the Energizer lead the

fentence, the
ter,

Energy follows

and becomes what we

active.
Brutus

Thus
On

loves.

five Subject

we

pajjive.

charac-

its

a Verb

call

Brutus amat,

fay

the contrary,

be principal,

is

it

if

the paf-

follows the

character of this too, and then becomes

what we

we
It

is

fay,

call

a Verb passive.

Portia amaturl Portia

in like

Thus
is

loved*

manner that the fame Road

between the fummit and

foot of the

fame

mountain, with refpect to the fummit

Afcent, with refpect to the foot

is

is

Defcent.

Since then every Energy refpects an Energizer or a pallive

Reafon

why

Subject

-,

hence the

every Verb, whether active

or paflive, has in language a necefFary

reference

Book the First.

reference to

fome Noun

for

175

Nominative Ch. IX.

its

<-v

Cafe {i).

But

to proceed

ftill

has been already obferved.

Portia,

Here Brutus
Energy

loved, the

But

ject.

is

Brutus loved

the Energizer

might have been, Brutus

it

the Energy

for

is

Roman Rereferable to

Now among

Subjects infinite.

nite Subjects, when that

which

thefe infi-

happens

the Energizer alfo, as

is

and Portia, the Sub-

loved Cato, or CaJJius, or the

public-,

from what

farther

to occur,

when we

fay Brutus loved himfelf, flew himfelf,

in fuch Cafe the

Energy hath

&c.

to the fame

being a double Relation, both active and

And

paffive.

this

it

is

which gave

rife

among

()

The

do&rine of Imperfonal Verbs has been

juftly reje&ed by the beft Grammarians, both antient

and modern.
c. I.

L. IV.

Apoll.

L.

See Sanft. Min.

L.

L. XVIII.

3.

Prifcian.

III. fub. fin.

I.

c. .12.

III.

134.

In which places the reader

will fee a proper Nominative fupplied to

this fuppofed Character.

L.
p. 1

all

Verbs of

HERMES.

176
Ch. IX.
'

'

/** *""'

among
called

the Greeks to that fpecies of Verbs,

Verbs middle

their true

many

and original

inftances they

pened

deviate.

to

the Verb

and fuch was

(c),

however

ufe,

may have

hap-

In other languages

retains its active

flill

fince

in

Form, and

the prill ve Subject ffe or himfelf)

ex~

is

prefled like other accufatives.

Again,

in

fome Verbs

happens that

it

the Energy always keeps wkhifi the Energizer,

and never

pajj'es

extraneous Subject.

any foreign

out to

Thus when we

Ctefar walketh, Ccefarjitteth,

it is

fiy,

impoffible

\C)

Tx

yap

Y.xXn:j.tvx y.nroTr,ro;

vi^iPvxv.v xveSi^xro ivsgyiTixw;

The Verbs,

$?(*>$.

incidence of the atlive

L.

III.

c. 7.

He

called

^rijxaTX

zrzQriTty.r,;

<ri>-

<$\a-

Verb: middle, admit a Co-

and pa[five Char after. Apollon.

that

would

concerning the power of

fee this

whole Do&rine

the middle verb

ex-

plained and confirmed with great Ingenuity and Learn-

ing,

may

confult a fmall Treatife of that able Critic

Kujler, entitled,

De

vera Ufu Verborum Mediorum.

neat edition of this fcarce piece has been lately

published.

Book the First.

177

Energy Jhould pafs

out (as in the

cafe of thofe Verbs called

by the Gram-

ble the

Verbs transitive)

marians

becaufe

both the Energizer and the PaJJive Subject are united in the

what
ling

made

Subject,
is

fit-

the Will and Vital Powers

It is

And what

belonging to Ctvfar.

It

For

Per/on.

the caufe of this walkirg or

is

fame

move

fo to

or to

is

the

fit ?

the Body and Limbs belonging alfo to

the fame Ccsfar.

fpecies of

thought

V^

fit

It

is

this

rbs, which

to call

then forms that

grammarians have

Verbs neuter,

as if

indeed they were void both of Attion and

when perhaps (like Verbs middle)

they may be rather laid to imply both. Not
Pajjion,

however
Neuters

to difpute
in their

their paJJive

about names, as thefe

Energizer always difcover

SnbjeB

(c),

which other
Verbs

(c)

This Character of Neuters the Greeks very

happily exprefs by the

7ra9fia,

intrinfecus Paffto.

Putfih,

Terms,

'AvT07rc*,Qi <.

which Prifcian renders,

p.

L. VIII. 790.

and 'Iojg-

qua; ex fe in feipja fit

Cmfentii

An

apud

2051.

It

Ch. IX.
"*"

E R

rf

178

S.

Ch. IX. Verbs cannot, their paffive Subjects being

infinite

why it

hence the reafon

is

as fu-

perflueus in thefe Neuters to have the

Subject expreiTcd, as in other Verbs

it is

And
common

neceffary, and cannot be omitted.

thus

it

that

is

we

are taught in

grammars

It

may

be here obferved, that even thofe Verbs,

called Aclives, can

itive character;

upon occafion

that

is

lay afide their tranf-

to fay, can drop their fubfe-

quent Accufativc, and ajjume

the

Fern cf Neuters,

fa

Difccurfe rcfpecXs

This happen?, when the

the mere Energy or Affection only,

and has no regard

to the Subject,

as to fland by themfdves.

Thus we

that.

This

Energy,

;)

-w

hew

how

him
ts

read

thing or

...

o;:.'y

deficient.

of the

Hud

the

of reading, we" rrmft

-

:.v z</.

'Oy.-^o-.i,

or Virgil) or 6Y-

&c.

Thus Horace
S$hti

cur it out metuit, juvat

aid

JJt

to

this

read, fpeaking

....-,,

add...

lie knows not

ceroy

the

it

ai'xyivwtry.?iu .kroqy

olosv

to

fuppofe

Difcourfe bee?

have

sx

fay,

Man km

be

ilium fie do:nus

rcc,

lifpum fid it tabula

He that

desires

or

fears

cular nor that, but in general

(not this thin^ in partilie

within whofe breaft

thefe

Book the First.

grammars

that Verbs Active require an

Accufative, while Neuters require none,*

Of

the above fpecies of Verbs, the

Middle cannot be called neceflary, becaufe

mod
The

done without

languages have

Species of Verbs therefore

it.

rz-

mainm^; are the Active, the Passive;

Neuter,

and the

and thofe feem efTen-

languages whatever (d).

tial to all

There

thefc affections prevail) has the fame jay in a

EJlatc^as the

Man

Houfe or

with bad Eyes has in fine Piclurcs.

So Cafar in his celebrated Laconic Zpi.tie o Vekt,

Vidi, Vici, where two Actives we fee follow one
Neuter

the lame detaqhed

in

The Glory

itfelf.

the Everts.

it

Form,

as that

Conqueft eame.

as

quick, as he could

come himfelf, and look about him. JVhcm he

whom

Neuter

feems was in the rapid Sequel of

faw, and

he conquered, was not the thing, of which he

boafted.

SeQ.JpoH. L. III.

c.

31. p. 279.

(<7)

as

The Stoics,

making

in their logical

view of Verbs,

part in Proportions, considered

them under

the four following Sorts.

When

79

Ch. IX.

HERMES.

180

Ch.IX.

There

remains a remark or two far-

and then we quit the Subject of

ther,

Verbs.

It

true

is

general that the

in

them denote Attributes of

greater part of

Energy

When

a Verb, co-inciding with the Nominative of

fome Noun-,

made

vjith outfarther help a perfect aflertive

Sentence, as Xu)Xt>i? TZSf>nrxTiL, Socrates tualketh;

then as the Verb in fuch cafe implied the Power of a

perfect Predicate, they called

yopnu.Xy a Predlcable; or

Cxwuv,

to

co-lncide

tence, they called

When

a Verb

with

it

elfe,

its

was

Noun

its

readinefs

<ru^i-

in completing the Sen-

Co-lnclder.

Noun

to

form a per-

yet could not aflbciate with

oblique Cafe, as

Zukoxth

Such a Verb, from its

Co-Incidence, and Predication, they

Socratem pasnltet

near approach tojufl

a.

able with a

Noun, but under fome

iXiTocr/.iKtfy

for that reafon KaTJi-.

from

ZvpQxpx,

fect allertive Sentence,

fuch

it

called Hapa,c-v;j.xy.x or Ilxgx>ixT7iy6giip.&.

When
Noun

in

a Verb, though regularly co-inciding with-*

its

Nominative, fill required,

Sentiment, fome other

nXaT&

Noun under an

to

complete the

oblique CaJ'e, as

fiXtT Aluvx, Plato loveth Dlo (where without

Dlo or fome

other, the

Verb

loveth

would

reft indefi-

nite:)

Book the First.

But there

Energy and Motion,

which appear

181

fome Ch.IX.

are

more,

to denote nothing

than a mere Jimple Adjeciive, joined to an

Thus

AfTertion.

ri

Such Verb, from

:)

Greek, and

mean nothing more

Equalletb in Englijh,

nite

in

lo-ufyi

than

this

Defect, they called

<ru^a|U&, or v xarnyo^/Aa, fiomething

Co-incider, or

Laftly,

lefs

when

than a Preduable.

Verb required two Nouns

Cafes, to render the

foy

Such Verb they

(rvfxSxpci, or

in oblique

Sentiment complete; as when wc

Zwx^a-m 'AAxj&aJiff

like

yitJop

than a

lefs

piXei, Tadet

me Vita, or the

called 'hrlov, or t\on1ov n

zrxox-

zj-ocgxxocTnyogriij.x, fomcthing lefs

-/)

than

en imperfecl Co-incider, or an imperfett Predicable.

Thefe were the

which they gave to

appellations

Verbs, when employed along with

As

ing of Proportions.

Verb,

they denied

Infinitive, as

See

alfo

295.

From

to

them

we have (hewn

Amman,

de Syntaxi, L.
p.

it

to the

I.

Nouns

Name

all,

of

giving

already.

to the form-

it

'PHMA,

See page

in Lib. de Interpret, p. 37.

c. 8.

Theod. Gaz.

L.

III.

c.

164..

Apollon.

31. p. 279. c. 32.

Gram. L. IV.

the above Doctrine

it

appears, that

all

Neuter are 2v^/A]a; Verbs Active, nrjovz

dpoilot,.

or

only to the

jj

Verbs
<rvp-

182

HE

Ch. IX.

than
is

rfe \gi,

S.

So Albeo in Latin

equal.

no more than a/bus Ju;u.

Camplque
-

is

Pv

The

tumet,

fame may be
e.

i.

muft have recourfe

Fluffus

up prima

faid of 1'umeo.

Mans

To

ex-

in thefe inflances,

we

tumulus

Energy

prefs the

Virg.

ingentes cjjibus albent.

ejl, is

tumid.

to the Inceptiyes.

ccepit

cum albescere
Virg.

Vento.

Freta ponti

Incipiuht agitata

There
which

are

are

tumescere.

Verbs

alfo to

be found,

formed out of Nouns.

as in Abjtraft

Nouns (fuch

Vi r g

So that

as Whitenefs

from White, Goodnefs from Good)

as alio

in the Iiifinitive Modes of Verbs, the Attri-

butive

is

con-verted into

a Subftantrue; here

the Subjhmtive on the contrary

into

is

converted

an Attributive. Such are Kyvi&iv from

icvav, to

aft the

part of a Dog, or be a Cynic

Book the First.

nlc

$tXi7nr{leiv

0/Ai7T7r@^, to Philip-

favour Philip

plze, or
Sylla,

from

Syllaturire

to meditate acting the

Sylladid.

Thus

opos.

f&vj

as

too the wife and virtuous

aTrozMi(rotpt$t!q,

bec^sar'd

not

from

fame part

Emperour, by way of counfel

183

as

to

himfelf

beware thou

though he

bereft

Be-

laid,

ware, that by being Emperor, thou

doft

not

a mere Caesar (e). In

manner one of our own witty Poets,

dwindle Into
like

Sternhold

himfelf he

Out-Stern-

HOLDED.

And

long before

him

the facetious Fullerf

fpeaking of one Morgan, a fanguinary Bi-

fhop in the Reign of Queen Mary,

of him, that he

Bonner

And

out-bonner'd

fays

even

himfelf*.

much for that Species of

Attributes, called Verbs in the
strictest Sense.
(<?)

fo

Marc.

Anton'in.

L. VI. 30.

* Church Hid. B. VIII.

p. 21,

CHAP.

Ch. IX.
*

<r"

i$4

E R

CHAP.

S.

X.

Concerning tbofe other Attributives,

and

Participles

Ch. X.

'

^HE

nature of Verbs being under-

flood, that of

JL

way

Adjectives.

Participles

Every complete Verb

difficult.

cxpreffive of an Attribute ; of Time;

of an AJJertion.
the AJJertion,

no

is

Now

if

we

take

is

and

awav

and thus deftroy the Verb,

there will remain the Attribute and the

Time, which

ticiple.
tion

make
Thus

the efTence of a
take

from the Verb,

Par-

away the AfTer-

Y^u,

Writctht and

there remains the Participle, r^a<puv,Writing>

which (without the AJJertion ) denotes

the

fame Attribute, and

the

fame Time,

After the fame manner, by withdrawing

.the Affertion,
ij/s,

we

difcover

Tpcc^ccv in r^u-lei, for

fer to the Greek, as

.5

Y^a;
we

being of

in'K^a-

chufe to reall

languages
thc

Book the First.

1S5

the moft complete, as well in this

refpecT:,

as in others.

And

much

fo

Participles

for

(<?).

The

The

(a)

Latins are defective in this Article of Par-

Their Active Verbs, ending

in or, (commonly called Deponents) have Active Participles of all

ticiples.

Times
of the

(fuch as Loquens, Locutus, Locuturus) but none

Their Actives ending

Paffive.

ciples of the Prefent and

in

O, have Parti-

Future (fuch as Scribens y and

On

Scripturus) but none of the Paftr

the contrary,

their Paftives have Participles of thePaft (fuch as Scrip-

tus) but none of the Prefent or Future, unlefs

we

ad-

mit fuch as Scribcndus and Docendtis for Futures, which

Grammarians

fay,

The want

controvert.

ciples they fupply

cum fcripfijjet

by a Periphrafis

f thefe Parti-

for

yga^ug they

for ygatpepu/osy dumfcribitur,

&c,

Jn Englijh we have fometimes recourfe to the fame

Periphrafis; and fometimes

we

avail ourfelves of the

fame Auxiliars, which form our Modes and Tenfes.

The

Englijh

refpect to

minate
liable

its

in

D, T,

to as

therefore

Grammar

lays

down

good

rule

Participles of the Paft, that they

or

N.

This Analogy

few Exceptions,

how

little

as any.

is

all

with
ter-

perhaps

Confidering

Analogy of any kind we have

Ch. X.

HER M E

if 6

The

Ch. X.
'

'

S.

nature cf Verbs and Participles

Adjectives
Verb implies (as we

being underftood, that of

becomes
have

eafy.

both an Attribute, and Time,

faid)

and an Affertion; a Participle only implies

an Attribute, and Time ; and an

tive only

Adjec-

implies an Attribute; that

is

Words, an Adjective

to fay, in other

has no Aijcrtion, and only denotes fuch an

Attribute

',

Motion or

as has not
its

r/jence

its

Thus

Privation.

either in

in general

the Attributes of quantity, quality, and

many 2X\&jew, great and

relation (fuch as

little,

in our

Language,

Traces, that
fore,

would

if all

may

be found.

writers,

It

who endeavour

to be accurate,

be careful to avoid a corruption, at prefent fo

prevalent, of faying,

he

few
would be well there-

itfeerr.s \vr0n2; to annihilate the

was

/ have

was wrote,
was driven

for, it

//

drove, for, he

was written;

/ have went,

which inftances a Verb

for,

is

ab-

furdly ufed to fupply the proper Participle, without

any

gone, 5:e. in

neceffity

all

from the want of fuch Word.

Book the First

little,

black

and white,

treble, quadruple,

Adjeci

187

goo. /ana bad, double,

&c.) are

II

dem

l\ LS.

It muft indeed be confe fled, that fometimes even thofe Attrit

wholly foreign

fume an

Of

fuch

albeo,

tumco,

and appear

few

are

as

Verbs*

gave inilances before, in

l<r^ca,

however, compared
are but

which

to the idea of Motion, af-

alter tion,

we

tes,

in

and ethers.
to the reft

Thefe

of Verbs,

number, and may be

call-

ed, if thought proper, Verbal Adjectives.

It

is

in like

manner, that Participles in-

fenlibly pafs too into Adjectives,

Thus

doft us in Latin, and learned in ILngliJh*

lofe their

power, as Participles, and mean

a Perlbn pollened of an habitual Quality.

Thus Vir

eloQuens

jpeaking, but a
bit of

man, who

pojjejjes

the ha-

Jpeaking, whether he fpeak or no.

So when we fay
ing

means not a man now

Man, an

in Engli/h,

he

is

a think-

Man, we mean
whole mind is in aUuaT

under/landing

net a perion,

Energy,

CIi

HERMES.
Energy, but whofe mind

is

enriched with

larger portion of thofe powers.

no wonder,

indeed

It is

as all Attributives are

homo-

geneous, that at times the feveral ipecies

fhould appear to interfere, and the difference between

Even

tible.

are

fcarcely percep-

natural fpecies, which

congenial and of kin,

difference

and

in

them be

in

the

fpecinc

not always to be difcerned,

is

appearance

at

lead they feem to

run into each other.

We have fhewn already [h)

stances of

QiXiTTTTifyiv,

tives

may be

tribatives.

Syllaturire,

and others,

xca<rciQu(jy}vai f

in the In-

how

'Atto-

Subjlan-

transformed into Verbal At-

We

fhall

now mew, how

may be converted into Adjectives

When we fay the party of Pompey, the

they

ftile

of Cicero, the philofophy of Socrates,

in

{h) Sup. p. 182, 183-

Book The First.

189

in thefe cafes the party, the fKle,

philofophy fpoken

and the

receive a ftamp

of,

whom

and character from the perfons,

they

Thofe perfons therefore

refpecft.

perform the part of Attributes, that

and characterize

i-tamp

Subjects.

Hence then

And

form of Adjectives.

refpective

they actually pafs.

and aifume,

into Attributes,

as fuch, the

thus

it

is

we

the Powpeian party, the Ciceronian

fay,
ftile,

and the Socratic philofophy.

manner

in like

we

their

is,

fay, a

of Goldy

2l

for a

brazen
golden

Thus

trumpet of Brafs,

Trumpet ;

for a

Crown

Crown, &c. Even Pro?w-

rninal Subliantives
tion.

It is

admit the like muta-

inftead of faying, the

of Me, of Thee, and of Him,

we

Book

fay,

My

Book, Thy Book, and His Book; inflsad

of faying the Country

we

of*

Us, of Tou, and

Our Country, Tour

Country, and "Their Country, which
Words may be called fo many Pronomi-

of Them,

fay,

nal Adjeftives*

It

ch x.
#

190

E R

II

It has been obferved

Ch. X.

needs be obvious to
as

'

fex (r).
tions

rig

already,

all,

no

have

can

yc' their having termina-

conformable to the

and cafe of

ard muff

that Adjectives,

Attributes,

And

S.

fex,

nuirber,

their Subftantive*

feems to

have led grammarians into that ftrange

abfurdity of ranging

them with Nouns,

and feparating them from Verbs, tho'

with refpeel

thefe they are perfectly

to

homogeneous; with

They

quite contrary.

with

refpecl: to

refpect to the others,

Verbs,

as

both

forts

de-

they are heterogeneous

note Attribittes

with refpect

Nouns,

to

homogeneous

are

denoting Subfiances.

as-

never properly

But of

this

we have

fpoken before (d).

The

(c)
{(1)

p. 28,

Sup.

&c.

C. VI.

Sup. p. 171.

Note

(a).

See

alfo

C.

III.

Book the First.

The
that

is

Attributives
to fay,

hitherto

191

treated,

Verbs, Participles,

and Adjectives, may be called

At-

tributives of the first Order.

The reaibn of this name will be better
underftood, when we have more fully

Attributives of the second Order, to which we now proceed

diicuffed

in the following chapter.

PI

P.

Ch. X*

'

jgz

E R

CHAP.

S.

XL

Concerning Attributives of the

fcond

Order.

\
Jljl

Ch.XI.
*~~v

S the Attributives hitherto

denote

tioned

'

Sub/lances, (o there

is

the

men-

Attributes

an inferior

clafs

them, which denote the Attributes

only

of
of
of

Attributes.

To

explain by examples in either kind

when we

of them

lay, Cicero

eloquent

them wrote \

and Pliny were both

Statins

and Virgil both of

in thefe inflances the Attribu-

tives, eloquent,

and wrote, are immediately

referable to the fubftantives, Cicero, Virgil',

&c. As therefore denoting the

At tri-

butes of Subs tan CES,we call them Attributives of the first Order. But
when we fay, Pliny was moderately eloquent,
but Cicero exceedingly eloquent ; Statins wrote
indifferently y

but Virgil wrote admirably

in

Book the First.

193

Mo- Ch.XI.
Ad-

in thefe inftances, the Attributives,

Exceedingly,

derately,

mirably

Indifferently>

are not referable to Subjiantives,

',

but to other Attributives, that

words, Eloquent, and Wrote.

is,

to the

As there-

fore denoting Attributes of Attributes ,

we

them Attributives of the second ORDER.

call

Grammarians
Name

Adverbia, Adif we take the word

of 'Eiri^jpctTa,

And

verbs.
'PYjucty

have given them the

indeed

Verb, in

or,

its

moft comprehenfive

Signification, as including

not only Verbs

properly fo called, but alfo Participles and

Adjeclives [an ufage,
fied

which may be j uni-

by the beft authorities

{a)

we

fhali

find

[a)

Thus

Arijlotle"in his

inltances' Av8^w7ro? as a

So Ammonius

KAAOS

K,

AE-y<rda x)

xto

Treatifed? Interpretatione,

Noun, andAfuxo?

tsto to

as a Verb*

<rr,y.<x.i>o^svov,

to

(*\v

ATKAIOS ^ oV toi*ut* 'PHMATA

ax 'ONOMATA. According to this Signi-

fication (that is

of denoting the Attributes of Subftance

and

HERMES.

194
Ch.XI.

find the

name,

or

Eiriffifix,

be a very juft appellation,

Part

of Verbs.

dependence

to

denoting a

as

the natural Ap-

of Speech,

pendage

Adverb,

So great

is

this

Grammatical Syntax, that

in

an Adverb can no more fubfift without

its

Verb, than a Verb can fublift without

its

It is the

Subftantrce.

fame here,

Every Colour

certain natural Subjects.

for

its

exiftence as

as in

much

requires a Su-

perficies, as the Superficies for its exift-

ence requires a

Body

folid

{b).

Among
and the Predicate

in Propofitions) the words,

Just, and the

Am. in libr. de

are called

c. 1.

See

alfo

like,

Verbs, and

not

Fair,

Nouns.

Interp. p. 37. b. Arijl. de Intcrp.

of

this Treatife, c. 6.

In the fame manner the

Note

L.

I.

[a) p. 87.

Stoics talked of the Parti-

Nam Participium connumerantes Verbis,

ciple.
Participiale Verbum vocabant vel Casuale.
Prifcian, L.
(b)

I.

p.

574.

This notion of ranging

the

Adverb under the

f/ime Genus with the Verb (by calling

tributives) and of explaining

it to

them both At-

be the Verb's Epithet

Book the First.

Among

195

the Attributes of Subftance are

reckoned Quantities, and Qualities.

we fay, a white Garment,

Now

a high Mountain*

fome of thefe Quantities and Qualicapable of Inteniion, and Remif-

ties are

Thus we

fion.

ingly

white

a Mountain

or Adjeclive (by calling

butive)

is

exceed-

a Garment

fay,

dore

Thus

tolerably
high,

the Attributive of an Attri-

it

conformable to the beft authorities.

Gaza defines an Adverb, as follows

airlocrov, kxtoc.

Xtyopivov,

pnfj.xro<;

/*f

Theo-

Xoys

o?

nriXtyousvov

*)

A Part of Speech

pYtfAXTi, Xy o\ov 7n0Toi/ pr)[xcx,To<;.

devoid of Cafes , predicated of a Verb, or

and being as it were the Verb's

L. I V. (where

AdjeStive.

libjoined to it,

by the way we may obferve, how properly the Adverb

is

made an

Aptote, fince

its

cafes, as in Valde Sapiens

Valde amat.)
follows

principal fometimes has

fometimes has none, as in

Prifcian's definition of an

Adverbium

eft

Adverb

is

as

pars orationis indeclinabilis,

cujus fignificatio Verbis adjicitur.

Hoc enim perficit Ad-

verbium Verbis additum, quod adjecliva nomina appellativis nominibus adjuncla; ut

egit; felix

Vir;

prudens homo; prudenter

XV.

And
AdverVerbis connumerabant, &

feliciter vivit.

L.

before, fpeaking of the Stoics, he fays

bia Nominibus vel

quafi
p.

adjectiva Verborum

574.

See

alfo Apoll. de Synt.

p. 1 003.

Eiiam

nominabant.

L.

I.

c.

L.

I.

^.fubfin.

Cb.XI.
'

V***J

196

Ch.XI.

E R

moderately

high, or

S.

high.

It is plain

therefore that Intention and Remiffion are

among
Hence

the Attributes of fuch Attributes.

then one copious Source of fecon-

dary Attributives, or Adverbs, to denote

thefe two, that

The
vrccw,

is,

Intenfion,

and Kemijjion,

Greeks have their ^xo^ocguq, paXifa,

vjKig-a, ;

the Latins their valde, vehe-

menter,

maxime, fatis, mediocriter

Engli/Jj

their

Jufficiently',
ently,

vajily,

greatly,

moderately,

the

extremely,

tolerably,

i?idiff'er-

&c.

Farther

than

this,

where there

different Intentions of the

they

may

fame Attribute,

Thus

be compared together.

are

exceedingly
White, and the Garment B be moderately White, we may fay, the Garment A is more white than the Gar-

if the

Garment

be

ment B.

In thefe inftances the Adverb

More

not only denotes Intention, but relative

Intenjion.

Nay we

'flop

not here.

We
not

Book the First.

397

not only denote Intention merely relative Ch.XI.

but relative Intenfion, than which there

Thus we

none greater.

Mountain
tain

more

By but that

it is

Even

Mountains.
as

is

not only fay the

high than the

the

is

most

Moun-

high of all

Verbs, properly fo called,

they admit Jimpk Intentions, fo they

admit

alfo thefe

in the

Thus
Fame he

comparative ones.

following

Example

lovbth more than Riches, but Virtue of

all things he loveth most
th e Word
more and most denote the different

comparative

of the Verbal At-

'Intenfions

tributive, Loveth.

And
and of

hence the
its

of

rife

Comparison,

different Degrees

-,

which can-

not well be more, than the two Species

above mentioned, one to denote Simple

Excefs,

and one

Were we

why

denote

Superlative.

indeed to introduce more de-

grees than thefe,

introduce

to

infinite ,

we ought perhaps
which

abfurd.

For

Number, when

ftop at a limited

all fubjects,

is

to

in

fufceptible ,of Intention, the

inter-

HERMES.
intermediate Excefles
infinite

There

more White,

are in

manner

Degrees of

are infinite

between the

Simple

Jirft

White , and the Superlative, Whiteft

fame may be

faid

the

of more Great, more

The

Strong, more Minute, &c.

Doctrine

of Grammarians about three fuch Degrees,

which they

call

the Pofitive, the

Comparative, and the Superlative, mull:

both becaufe in their

needs be abiurd

Pofitive there

-j-

is

no Comparifon

and becaufe their Superlative

rative, as
felf.

much

Examples

as their

Compa-

Comparative

to evince

found every where.

is

at all,

this

Socrates

it-

may be
was

the

most wise of all the Athenians Homer

<was the most sublime of all Poets.

Cadit

et

Ripheus,

uifuit in Veneris

justissimus unus
Virg.

It

t Qlil

(fcil-

Gradus Pojitivus) quonicm perfelus

a quibufdam in numcro
fentii

eji,

Qraduum non cuntutatur. Cqn^

Ars apud Putlch.

p.

2022.

Book the First.

It muft be
tives, as

confefled thefe

Compara- Ch-XI.

well the fimple, as the fuperlative,

feem fometimes
lative

199

to part

with their re-

Nature, and only retain their in-

ten/ive.

Thus

in the Degree, denoting

Jimple Excefs,
Triflior, et lacrymis

oculos fuffufa ni-

ton tes.

Virg.

Rufticior^>W<?

eft

In the Superlative

Hor.
this

is

more

ufual.

Vir doBiJJimusy Virfortijftmus, a moft learned

Many

a moft brave

Man,

that

not the bravejt and moft learned

ever exifled, but a

Man

is

to fay,

Man,

that

poneffing thofe

Qualities in an eminent Degree,

The
trived a

Authors of Language have con-

method

to retrench thefe

rative Adverbs,

Compa-

by expreffing their force

in the

Primary Attributive.

Thus

in-

ftead of

More fairy they fay Fa i r e r ;

in-

ftead of Moftfair,

Fairest, and the fame

holds

HERMES.

200

Ch.XI. holds true both in the Greek and Latin,

u""'*
This Practice however has reached no

'

farther than to Adjeclives, or at leaft to

Participles, /baring the nature

of Adjec-

Verbs perhaps were thought too

tives.

much

diverfmed already, to admit more

Variations without perplexity.

As

there are fome Attributives,

admit of Comparifon,

fo there are others,

which admit cf none.

are thofe,

Such

which denote

fay, a Circular

Court,

The

that Quality of
as

when

Table, a Quadrangular

a Conical Piece

reafon

example

for

Bodies arifingfrcm their Figure

we

which

of Metal, &c.

that a million of things,

is,

participating the fame Figure, participate

it

equally, if they participate

fay therefore that while

quadrangular,
gular than B,

true in

all

Quantities,

whether

A
is

is

To

at all.

A and B

more or

abfurd.

it

lefs

are both

quadran-

The fame

holds

Attributives, denoting definite

whether continuous or

abfolute or relative.

difcrete,

Thus

the

two-

Book the First.

wofbot Rule A cannot be more

201
a two*-

foot Rule, than any other of the fame

Twenty Lions cannot be more

length.

twenty than twenty Flies.

both

triple , or

be more

and

be

quadruple to C, they cannot

triple, or ?nore

the other.

If

The

quadruple, one than

reafon of all this

is,

there

can be no Comparifon without Intenfion

and

RemiJJion

and Remiffion

there can be
in things

no Intenfion

always

and fuch are the Attributives,

have

laft

which we

mentioned.

In the fame reafoning we

why

definite

no Subjlantive

is

Comparative Degrees.
not be faid

of

thefe

A Mountain

can-

fufceptible

more to Be,

than a Mole-hill,

mutt be fought
In like manner

fee the caufe,

to Exist,
but the More and Lejs
or

for in their Quantities.

when we

refer

dividuals to one Species, the

many

Lion

In-

A can-

not be called more a Lion, than the Lion

B, but

if

more any thing, he

is

morefierce,

more pee Jy, or exceeding in fome fuch

Attribute.

So again,

in referring

many

Species

Ch.XL

^^~ ,J

HERME

202

Ch.XI. Species to one Genus,

* v

>

more an Animal, than

S.

Crocodile
a Lizard

Tiger, more than a Cat, but

if

is

not

nor a

any thing,

they are more bulky, more fir-ong, &c. the

Excels,

being derived

before,

as

So true

their Attributes.

of the acute Stagirite

is

not fitfceptible of

But

this

is

that

More

from

that faying

Substance

and Less

by way of digreffion

(c).

to return

to the fubjecl of Adverbs.

Of

the Adverbs, or feeondary Attribu-

tives already

Intenfion or

mentioned, thefe denoting

Re million may

be called

Ad-

verbs of Quantity continuous j Once, Twice,

Thrice, are

More and

may

Adverbs of Quantity

difcrete

Mofi, Left and Leafi, to which

be added Equally, Proportionally, &c.

are

C)

ax uv iiridi^ciro
See

r\

atria,

to ^.xXaqv

L.I.

tJo,

Categor. c. 5.

L.

II.

c.

is

treated in a very mafterly and philofophical

ner.

See

io, 11.

alfo Sanftius,

jc,

c.

to
II.

where the fubject of Comparatives

alfo Prifcian, p.

598.

man-

Derivantur igitur

Ccnparativa a No/tiinibus Adjetiivh, &c.

Book the First,

Adverbs of Relation,

are

when we

others of Quality, as

nestly

induftrious,

There

203
are

"
Ho- u v
"

fay,

Prudently^w,

bravely, he painted finely,

a Portico formed Circularly, a Plain
theyfought

^Triangularly,
And
how

here

to obferve,

the fame thing, participating the

fame EiTence, afTumes

tical

&c.

worth while

it is

Forms from

its

For example, fuppofe

different

gramma-

different relations.
it

ihould be afked,

how differ Honeft, Honeftly, and Hcnefty.

The Anfwer is, they are in Efence the
fame, but they differ, in as much as Honejl

is

the Attributive of a Subftantive

Honeftly, of

a Verb; and Honefty, being

diverted of thefe

its

attributive Relations,

afiumes the Power of a Subftantive, fo as

by

to ftand

The

itfelf.

Adverbs, hitherto mentioned, are

common

to

Ch.XI.

Verbs of every Species; but

there

HER M

204
Ch.XI. there

are

fome which

S.

are peculiar to Verbs

properly fo called, that

to fay, to

is

fuch as

denote Motion or Energy y with their Pri*

All

nations.

Time

Motion

and Place,

exprefs the Place or

imply

kind of necerTary

as a

Hence

Coincidents.

Rest

and

we would
Time of either, we

then,

mufl needs have recourfe

if

to the proper

when we fay, he
fiood there; he went hence; he travelled far, &c. : of Time, as when we fay, he
Adverbs

of Place, as

then he went afterward be

Should it be
travelled formerly, &v.
why Adverbs of Time, when
afked
Verbs have Tenfcs ? The Anfwer is, tho*

Jiood

Tenfes

may be

fufficient to

Time, yet

to de-

by Tenfes would be

a per-

greater Diftinclions of

them

note

all

plexity without end.

Forms,

Now,
after,

What

to denote Tejlerday,

morrow,

denote the

Formerly,

Lately,

a variety of

To-day , ToJujl now,

Immediately, Prefently, Soon, Here-

&c.

It

was

this

then that

made
the

the First.

Book,

fco$

the Temporal Adverbs necefTary, over and

above the

To the

'Tenfes.

Adverbs

juft

mentioned may be

added thofe, which denote the Intenfions

and

RemiJJions peculiar to Motion, fuch as

Jpeedily, haJlily,fwiftly,flowly,

&c.

as alfo

^Adverbs of Place, made out of Prepq/itions,

fuch as

tccctcc,

in Englijh

a,vu

and xara from

ocva.

and

upward and downward,

from up and down. In fome instances the

Prepofition fuffers no change, but be-

comes an Adverb by nothing more than

its

e quitat, he rides

he

was

near

when we

fay,

circa

about; prope

cecidit,

Application, as

falling

conferas culpam in me,

lay the blame on

me

Verum ne post

But

do not

after

{d).

There

(d)

Aa.

Sofip. Chartfii Inji,

11,

Sc

3.

Gram,

p. 170. Tcrent.

Etau

Qfo xi.

HERMES.

2o6

Ch.XI.
K-'~^~*-f

There

Adverbs of Inter-

are likewife

fuch as Where, Whence, Whi-

rogation,

How-, of which there

ther,

when

markable, that

is

this re-

they lofe their In-

terrogative power, they afTume that of a

Relative,

{o

as

even to reprefent the

Thus

Relative or SubjunBive Pronoun.

Ovid,

Et

Seges

eft,

ubi Trojafuit

tranflated in our old Englijh Ballad,

And Corn doth grow, where

Troy town

flood.

That

&c

is

to fay, Seges

Corn groweth

eji

plied in the Adverb.

Ubi me
where ubi

in quo,

in

which,

in that place,

&c. the power of the

Hujufmodi mihi

in eo loco,

Relative, being

Thus

im-

Terence,

res femper comminifcere,

excarnufices

relates to res,

Heaut. IV. 6.

and ftands for

quibus rebus*

It

the First.

Book,

It

is

in like

manner

207

that the Relative

Pronoun upon occafion becomes an In-

and Englijb.

terrogative, at lead in Latin

Thus Horace,

Quem

Virum aut Heroa

Tibia fumes celebrare, Clio

lyrd, vel aeri

<

So Milton,

W"ho

Jirfi feduc 'a

them

to that foul re-

volt ?

The

reafon of

all

this is

as follows.

The Pronoun and Adverbs here mentioned

their original character.

are all alike, in

Even when they become

Relatives.

Interrogatives, they lofe not this charac-

but are

ter,

The

ever.

frill

Relatives, as

difference

is,

much

as

that without an

Interrogation, they have reference to a

Subject,

which

known

with an Interrogation , to a Sub-

ject

which

is

antecedent, definite,

is fubfequent, indefinite,

and

and unknown,

Ch.Xf.

2o8

E R

8.

Ch.XI. kn3rwj2, and which it is expected that

-^v Anfwer mould exprefs and afcertain.

the*

W ho
The

Jirjl feduc *d

very Queftlon

them ?
fuppofes a Se-

itfelf

ducer, to which, tho' unknown, the Pro-

Who,

noun,

has a reference,

Tlo infernal Serpent

Here

which was
the
as

//

was

it

fo that

(we

fee)

had been

faid

the Interrogation

a Relative, as if

originally,

the Subjectj

indefinite, afcertained

Who in

much

all,

Anfwer we have

in the

is

without any Interrogation at

the infernal

Serpent,

who

firjl feduced them.

And

thus

is it

that Interrogates and

Relatives mutually pafs into each other.

And fo much for Adverbs, peculiar to

Verbs properly

fo called.

We have al-

ready fpoken of thofe, which are

to all Attributives.

common

We have likewife

at-

tempted

Book the First.

tempted to explain

209

their general Nature,

which we have found

to confifr. in being

the Attributes of Attributes.

There

re-

Adverbs may be

mains only to add, that

derived from almoji every Part of Speech

when from After

from Partici-

from Prepositions,

as

we

derive Afterwards

ples, and through thefe from Verbs,

when from Know we

thence Knowingly
thence

-,

from

from

Scio, Sciens,

and

and

Adjectives,

Virtuous and Vicious,

rive Virtuoujly

as

derive Knowing, and

Scienter-

when from

Vicioujly

we

as

de-

from Sub-

stantives, as when from n*19ijx-, an

Ape, we derive UArpuov (3xb7Tiv, to look
Apishly from Abuv, a Lion, Asovtu;

&ug,

Leoninely

Names,
mojlhenes,

fay

-,

Proper

when from Socrates and Dewe derive Somatically and De-

as

mofhenically.

we

nay even from

it

It

was Somatically

reafoned,

was Demofhenically fpoken

*.

Of

* AriJiotle\a% Ku>cAo7rxw?
a

Cyclops.

Cyclopically^ froip

th. N4C. X. 9.

KvkX4<

Ch.XI.

-*-v?

HERMES.

2io

Ch.XL Of the fame

^""v

'

fort are

many others,

cited

by

the old Grammarians, fuch as Catiliniter

from

Cati/ina,

from Sfenna,

Sifenniter

Tu/iiane from Tu/Iius, 6cc.

Nor

(<?).

are they thus extenfive only in

but

"Derivation,
'Theodore

in

alfo.

Signification

Grammar informs
Adverbs may be found in

Gaza

us (^/), that

in his

every one of the Predicaments, and that

the readied

was

tude,

way

to refer

ten uriiverfal

Tlczv&itTysy

them by

claries to

The

Genera.

Adverb bv

the

called

to reduce their Infini-

the

thole

Stoics

name

top

of

and that from a view to the

fame multiform Nature.

Omnia infe cap it

quaji collata per fat tram, conceffa fibi rerum

varid potejiate.

It

thus that Sojipatcr

is

explains

(e)

See Prifc. L.

XV.

p.

1022.

Sof. Charif.

161.

Edit. Putfcbii,

y.UTuv

yti/Yi

srge's rij

S^VOai

x. r. A.

sxtTvet.

Gram.

xrtxv,

Introd.

L.

uTcjcv,
II.

zcoc^j

Book the First.

explains the

we know

thority

of

this

Word

211

(g), from whofe auto be Stoical.

it

But

enough.

And now

having finimed thefe prin-

cipal Parts of Speech, the Substantive and the Attributive, which are

significant when alone, we proceed to thofe auxiliary PARTS,which

are only significant, when associated. But as thefe make the Subject
of a Book by themfelves, we here conclude the firft. Book of this Treatife.

iS)

Seftp.

Char. p. J75. Edit. Putfchiu

HE R-

Ch.XL
<\^

213

HERMES
OR A PHILOSOPHICAL INQUIRY
CONCERNING UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR.

BOOK
CHAP.

II.

I.

Concerning Definitives,

WHAT

remains of our

Work, Ch.

is

a matter of lefs difficulty,

it

being the fame here, as in

fbme Hiftorical Picture; when the principal Figures are

once formed,

it

is

an

eafy labour to defign the reft.

De-

I.

*-"v"^"'

HERMES.

214

Ch.

I.

Definitives, the Subject of die prefent Chapter, are commonly called by

Grammarians, Articles, Articuli,

They

"AoQpct.

thole properly

are of

two

kinds, either

andjlriflly fo

the Pronominal Articles,

called,

or elte

fuch as

'This,

That, Any, &c.

We

mall

firft

treat

of thofe Articles

more Jlriclly Jb denominated, the reafon and

ufe of

which may be explained,

as fol-

lows.

The

vifible

and individual Subftances

of Nature are infinitely more numerous,

than for each to admit of a particular

To

Name.

fupply this defect,

Individual occurs,

proper

Name,

not known,

we

afcertain

can,

or,

if the Species

to

4-

either

or whofe proper

we

leaft

which

when any

by referring

it

it,

wants a

Name

is

as well as

to its

Species

be unknown, then at

fome Genus.

For example

certain

Rook the Second.

215

certain Object occurs, with a head

pow-

limbs, and appearing to poffefs the

of Self-motion and Senfation.

ers

know
it

proper Species, and

to its

and

Names

call it,

But

call it

Dog,

If none

this

is

nor

Species,

then

An

not enough.

The Things

are looking,

is

Individual.

or feen

time,

membered

ception,

known

fee

now for the

and now re-

here

we

fhall difcover

(A) and

(A) refpects our primary Per-

and denotes Individuals

(The)

Perception,

known.

kind

it

Seen

the ufe of the two Articles

(The).

is

Of what

before,

It is

neither a

What

Genus.

Known, or unknown
firfi

Genus ?

to the

Animal,

which we

at

we go

fit,

we

refer

or Horfe, or Lion, or the like.

of thefe

If

we

not as an Individual,

it

and

To

refpects

as

un-

our fecondary

and denotes Individuals as

explain

by an example

an object pafs by, which

P 4

never

faw

Ch.

I.

fit

faw

till

goes

What

now.

a Beggar

Man

do

fay then

Beggar with
ticle

only

'with

is

do

S.
I

the

fay

There

long Beard.

and returns

departs,

What

P.

Week

There goes

long Beard.

changed, the

reft

The
after.

the

The Arremains

unaltered.

Yet mark

the force of this apparently

The

minute Change.
vague,

is

now

Individual, once

recognized as Jbmething

known, and that merely by the efficacy of

this latter Article,
ates a

which

tacitly infinu^

kind of previous acquaintance, by

referring the prefent Perception to a like

Perception already paft (a).

The
(The)

Truth
are

is,

the Articles (A) and

both of them

definitives, as

they circumfcribe the latitude of Genera

and Species, by reducing them for the

moft

(a) See B.

I.

c. 5.

p.

63, 64.

Book, the Second.

The

molt part to denote Individuals.

difference

however between them

this

is

the Article (A) leaves the Individual

felf

(The) afcertains
is

whereas

unafcertainedy

is

manner,

more accurate De-

perhaps owing to the imperfect

in

which the

that the

place,

its
c

their Article,

The

e7rnrev,

e7TE<rev,

but fupply

it,

by a negation of
avQpco7r&>

Article (A) de-

Greeks have no Article

correfpondent to

Bga7r

and

of the two.

finitive

fines,

Article

the Individual aIfo,

for that reafon the

It

the

man

A Man fell,

O.

fell

'O

m-

without

any-

thing prefixed, but only the Article with-

drawn

(b).

Even

in Englijk,

where the
Article

(Jb)

Ta

uTcc^aOfm?
things,

yoi(>

u7ro

ao^ruSus
ogHTy.lv

zrort vozpti>x,

tx

TzrooaooTra

which are at times underjlood

r\

ra

uysi.

a^a
Thsje

indefinitely,

the

addition of the Article makes to be definite as to their

Per/on.

it-

Apoll. L. IV.

thor, L. I. c. 6, 36.

c. I.

See of the fame au-

worn (to *Ac0ov

fc.) <T

dvx-

VOXlifftV

21 8

Ch.
**~~*

E R

S.

Article (A) cannot be ufed, as in plu-

I.
'

force

rals, its

is

the Men, means thofe

of which we poffefs fome

Thofe are

gation.

are Individuals,

previous Knowledge.

they are fo

Thofe are Me?i> the

means no more than

Article apart,

many vague and

that

uncertain In-

dividuals, juft as the Phrafe,

the

Ne-

expreft by the fame

A Man,

in

implies one of the fame

lingular,

number.

But

zr^osyvutrfxiv^ -ns

Trohritriv
fj.\v

uv^poottov

yvucrjjAvcv

j3sAevta
tyis

yxg

rivet

av^PUTrov Xiya,

Xj o> tpzirxovTts

yvu<riu$

>t,

Man

The

JfUT^a?.

came

if he fays

then

it is

is

together*.

evident

And

before.

ocv

Tztq

Je olvro

<rr, ^jlocvti-aIv

tsou-

Article caufes a

Thus ifany

known

Re-

before the

onefays ''Av9o v-n^Sf

{which isthefamey as zuhen we fay in

A man came) it is not

But

Article

r <xpvpov

the A'Tind of fomething

texture ofthe Difcourfc.

7j>tf,

tm cvvtoc^bi'

riff,

view within

Englifh

tv

AN0PI2IIOS HKE, ahXov rlvoi

Xtya. u $t O AN0Pf2IIO2, JVjAov, "stpoi-

Kiyoi

a,v$puir(&>
;

evident, ofwhom hefpeaks*.

rixty

The MAN CAME,

for he fpeaks of fame Perfon knoiun

this is

what

thofe ?nean,

exprejfive of the Firjl

who fay

that the

and Second Knowledge

Theod. Gazze, L. IV.

Book the Second.

But

219

have no Article

tho' the Greeks

correfpondent to the Article

(A,)

yet

nothing can be more nearly related, than

f

their O, to the Article,

The
Nor

TO

King;
is

The. O

The

Sugov,

this only to be proved

fiariXsv;,

&c.

Gift,

by

parallel

examples, but by the Attributes of the

Greek Article,

they are defcribed by

as

and moil

Apollonius, one of the earliefb

now

acute of the old Grammarians,

re-

maining.

'

EfiV

rdiov

'dv

apQpwv

KotQo

avu.(popa,

r,

ztrpoKKTSiXey-

eg*

Attribute of the Article, as

we have

srctoa.gccriYJri .

elfewhere,

implies

fome

tioned.

that Reference, which

is

certain

Again

avruv uva'popav

caXa&oitv ro
ex.

the pecu-

fiewn

tx.ni$'faocpe&iz i

Now

pevv wpotruirv
liar

ctWotg

ev

)^

ccpQoov,

P erfon

Ov yap

or,ye

T-aotg-yrtv,
fcr

For Nouns of

men-

already

e'roupSTog

roc

ovoy.ci.~a.

u \m
etfiv

ij

(T'j^ttcla,vcc<po~

themfelves imply not

Reference, unlefs they take to them the

Article,

Ch.

I.

HM E

tick, ivhofe peculiar

Again

To

The

S.

Character

is

Reference*

apOpcv nrpoutpeg-utrccv yvuxriv orjXot

Article indicates a pre-ejlablifted

acquaintance (c).

His

reaibning upon Proper

worth remarking.
tells
is,

often

us)

Proper

Names

we have

folve this ambiguity,

who bore

there

were two Grecian

name of Ajax.

the

(he

go by the fame

recourfe to Adjectives or Epithets,

example

is

into Homo?iy?nie i that

fall

different Perfons often

Name. To

Names

For

chiefs,

was not

It

therefore without reafon, that Mefiejlheus

ufes Epithets,
diftinguifh

when

the one

this intent

was

to

of them from the

other.

'hKkcL

(c) Apoll. de Synt. L.

Reference is as
TraXzypivs

follows

I.

tz^o<tutt^ ^ivricoc,

characler of Reference

is

His account of

c. 6, 7.

'lSiiopcc

a.u<z.<pogoc<;

yvw<rig,

17je peculiar

the fecond or repeated

ledge of fome Perfon already mentioned.

r^oxa-

L.

II.

Knowc. 3.

Book the Second.

AKXx

itu TtXctpuvi* aXittpJ&j

ot->

"sri>

Horn.

Atag.

If both Ajaxes

(fays he) cannot be /pared%

at

leafi

Let mighty Telamonian Ajax

Subjects,
jective

diffufed

are

in as

may be

much

alone

co??te.

Even Epithets

Apollonius proceeds

themfelves

221

as the

referred to

various

thro'

fame Ad-

many

Subftan-

tives.

In order therefore to render both Parts

of Speech equally definite, that

is

to fay

the Adjective as well as the Subftantive,

the Adjective
fore

it,

that

it

itfelf

affumes an Article be-

may

indicate a Reference to

fome fmgle Per/on

only,

t^ovct^M^

according to the Author's

And

own

dvotipoocc,

Phrafe.

we fay, TguQuv rgctppctTiK05

Trypho the Grammarian; AmroXXoKvorjmi^, Apollodorus the Cy re&><&
man, See. The Author's Conclulion of
thus

it is

this

Ch.

I.

HERMES,

222
Ch.

I.

this Section

ruq

a^oc

cvofjiocTt

ko&tu.

>c,

T Oi^^H,

worth remarking.

is

to toixtov

the Article

is

TU KVOiU

with reafon therefore that

here alfo added, as

is

ep

nrpetrQso-it;

TO 7Ti9sTiXCV

(TVVl0lGiiS(r0C

It

r,

Aeov~

bj'ings

it

the Adjective to an Individuality, as precife,

as the proper

Name

(d).

We

may carry this reafoning

and mew, how by help of the

farther,

even common Appellatives come

to

Article

have

the force of proper Names, and that unaffifted

Among

by epithets of any kinds.

r,

the Athenians

Eleven

TlXoTov

meant Ship ; Ev^zu t

and "Av^wrr*, Man.

but the Article, and To

meant that particular

Yl\o7ov,

the

annually to Delos ; 'Oi Ev$&K<x,

the eleven,

certain Officers of Jujlice

"Av^7ro,

the man, meant

'Executioner,

Ship,

Ship, which theyfent

meant

Yet add

and 'O

their public

So in Englifi, City,

is

Name

{(1)

nelaus

See Apll. L.
is

I.

c. 12.

put for Mcnejibcus,

where by

raiftake

Me*

Book the Second.

223

Name common to many places and

Speaker, a Name common to many Men.
Yet if we prefix the Article, the City
means our Metropolis; and the Speak;

er, a high

Officer in the Britifi Parlia-

ment.

And

thus

is

it

by an eafy

tranfition,

that the Article,

from denoting Reference,

comes

Eminence

to denote

alfo; that

is

to

from implying an ordinary pre-ac-

fay,

quaintance, to prefume a kind of general

and univerfal
c

the Greeks

Thus among

Notoriety,

the poet, meant

and O Sraye^m^, the staYloiyryjr,

Homer (e) ,
girite, meant

Arijlotle

not that there

were

There

(e)

tion, that

Yet
e

Arijlotle

tiroinlr^,

his

L.
(p.

are fo

we may

few exceptions

fairly

admit

it

to this

Obferva-

to be generally true.

twice denotes Euripides by the Phrafe

once

at the

end of the feventh Book of

Nicomacbian Ethics, and again in his Phyfics,

II.

2.

Plato alfo in his

tenth

Book

of

Laws

901. Edit. Serr.) denotes Hcfiod after the fame

ananner.

Ch.

I.

224
Ch.

I.

were not many

many

E R

S.

Homer; and

Poets, befide

Stagirites, befide Ariftotk;

but none

equally illuftrious for their Poetry and

Philofophy.

It

on a

is

by no means the fame thing

tells us, it is

to affert
etyuBov

like principle that Arifloile

sivoti

that, Pleafure

The Good.
common
with

The

our wifhes

firfi:

a Good,

is

only makes

or,
it

of Defire, upon a level

Objet~i

many

TO

vpovyv dyuQov, or,

tv\v

others,

which

the

fuppofes

laft

freme and

fovereign

Scope of

all

daily

raife

that fa-

it

Good, the ultimate

our Actions and Endea-

vours (/).

But to purfue our Subject.

faid already that the Article

ing, but

word.

when

aifociated

To fuch

has been

has no

mean-

fome other

aflbciated to

To what words

It

then

may

it

be

as require defining,

for

(/)

Analyt. Prior. L,

I.

c.

40.

Book the Second.

225

by nature a Definitive. And

what Words are thefe ? Not thofe which
For

is

it

already are as

definite,

as

may

Nor

he.

yet thofe, which, being indefinite, cannot

properly be made otherwife.

then they mufl be

definite,
cle,

thofe,

remains

It

which though in-

are yet capable, through the Arti-

of becoming

definite.

Upon thefe Principles we fee the reafon,

why it is abfurd to fay, O EI\G, The I, or
O ZT, The Thou, becaufe nothing can
make

thofe Pronouns

more

definite,

The fame may

they are (g).

than

be afferted

of

(g) Apolhnius makes

to refufe

finition,

EjIVo av

it

part of the Pronoun's

Ai>rwjiijW.a,

to [Xirx $e(%su)$ n dvxipopccs

dvTMOiAoiQvpivov, w a cj]/ifi to uoQpov.

fore

is

De-

with the Article.

co-alefcence

That there-

a Pronoun, which with Indication or Reference

put for a Noun, and with which the Article

doth not associate. L. II. c. 5. So Gaza,

is

(peaking of Pronouns
toffi^ov.

L. IV.

-Tloivln

$\

a'*

zirififtoiHou

Prifcian fays the fame. Jureigitur

Q_

apud

Ch.

I.

HERME

226
Ch.

L '~
*

I.

S.

of Proper Names, and though the Greeks:

fay

XuKfiocTVjg,

vj

yet the Article

perhaps

is

and the

Bocv9i7T7rv]j

mere Pleonafrn,

unlef*

ferve to diftinguifh Sexes.

it

like,,

By

we cannot fay in Greek

OI AMTOTEPOI, or in Englifi, The
both,, becaufe thefe Words in their own

the fame rule

nature are each of them perfectly defined,

fo that to define

them

Thus,

quite fupernuous.

have read

both

pAv'/i,

read

be

faid,

made

whom

already

fome menAvas iyvur-

known Duad, as

Apollonius expreffes

when he

fpeaks of this Sub-

himfelf, (h)
ject.

if it

would be

Poets, this plainly indi-

cates a definite pair, of

tion has been

farther

On the contrary, if it be faid, I have

Two Poets, this may mean any Pair
out

apud Gra'cos prima etfecunda perfona pronominum-, qua

fine dubis demonjlrativa funt, articulis adjungi non pof-

funt
p.

nee tertia, quando devionjirativa

938.

In

the beginning of the fame

the true reafon of

tienis

this.

Supra omncs

I.

c.

L. XII..

alias partes ora~

Finit personas Pronomen.

(b) Jpollon. L.

eji.

Book, he gives

i6

Book the Second.

out of

all

Numeral, being

this

nite (as

indeed are

it is,

ATO

Senfe indefi-

others, as well as it-

all

would become

it

thus

this

in

when-

forced to ajjlime the Article,

felf) is

ever

And hence

that ever exifled.

The Two

thing, as

Both

alfo it

that as

is,

and OI

in Englifl,

mean

Greek,

in

And

definite *.

fame

nearly the

AM$OTEPOI; Hence
Two, when taken alone,

or

has reference to fome primary and

indefi-

Perception, while the Article,

The*

nite

has reference to {omefecondary and

nite
is

hence

-j- ;

I fay the Reafon,

ATO

bad Greek to fay

and bad Engli/b,

Such Syntax

is

in fact a Blending

Q^ 2

men.
of In-

compatibles

* This explains Servtus on the XII cil

V.

511. where he

us that

Duorum

is

i^Eneid.

put for

Am-

In Englijh or Greek the Article would have

bormn.

done the
valent

tells

it

OI ANGPXinOI,

Two the

to fay

defi-

why

bufinefs, for the

to Both or

feccaufe the Latins

Two) or

ctfj.?Q]i(>uu,

roTu ovoTv are equi-

but not fo Duorum^

have no Articles to prefix.

f Sup.

p.

215,216.

HERMES.
compatibles, that

fantive with

On

is

to fay of a defined

an

undefined Attributive.

AMOO--

the contrary to fay in Greek

TEPOI OI ANGPnnOI,

Both the Men,

is

or

in

Englijh,

good and allowable,

pombly

becaufe the Subftantive cannot

be

lefs apt,

by being defined, to coalefce

with an Attributive, which

well as

Sub-

is

So likewife,

itfelf.

defined as

it is

correct

ATO ANGPXinOI, The two

to fay,

OI

Men,

becaufe here the Article, being

placed in the beginning, extends

as well
tive,

through Subflantive

its

Power

as Attribu-

and equally contributes

to

define

them both.

As fome
no

of the words above admit of

an

Article, becaufe they

definite

as

may

which admit

it

be,

fo

by Nature as

there are others,

not, becaufe they are not

to be defined at all.

Of

this fort are all

Interrcgatives. If we queftion about

Subfances, we cannot fay O TI OTTOS, The who is this ; but TI
g

OTTOS,

Book the Second.

OTTOS,

Who

as to Qualities

We

this

is

The fame Ch.

(/).

and both kinds

229

of Quantity*

nOIOS, no~
Efhglijh, what sort

fay without an Article

SOI, FIHAIKOr,

in

how many, how great.

of,

Reafon

The

is,

the,

that the Articles O, and

known

refpedt Beings, already

Interro-

gatives refpect Beings, about which

we are

what we know,

Inter-

ignorant-, for as to

rogation

is

fuperfiuous.

In a word the natural

Articles are all thofe

feveral

cies of Beings.

is

ming a different

[focia tors

Genera and Spe*

thefe,

which, by

upon

its

nrfl being per-

ceived, or elfe to indicate,upon

its

return,

Recognition, or repeated Knowledge

Apollonius calls

TI2,

ivxv]iuTot,Tov

a Part of Speech, mojl contrary,

L.IV.

arlu-

Article^ ferve either to ex-

plain an Individual

(/)

with

common Appellatives,

which denote the

It

jnoji

(/).

ruv cigfyw,

averfe

to Articles,

c.i.

{k What is here faid refpecls the txuo Articles which

we have in Englijh, In Greek, the Article does no more,
)

than imply a Recognition, See before p. 216,217,21$.

I.

*~"*J

230

Ch.

We

I.

~^'~"-/

fhall

fiances of the

E R

here

fubjoin

S.

few In-

Power of Ar-?

Peculiar

ticles.

Every
jeSfy

Proportion

of a Sub-.

conlifts

and a Predicate.

In Engli/Jj thefe

are diflinguifhed by their Pofition, the

Subject ilanding

Happinefs

is

the Subject

is

Happinefs

Subject,

lafl,

Pleafure Here, Happinefs

Pleafure

we change

the Predicate

firjl,

the Predicate.

their order,
;

and

is

If

fay, Pleafure

then Pleafure becomes the

and Happinefs the Predicate.

In

Greek thefe are diflinguifhed not by any

Order or Pofition, but by help of the

Article,

furnes,

flances

Ha,

and the

Subject,

Predicate in moil in-

Pleafure

u Happinefs
tk

always af-

(fome few excepted)

's

PL
Ft

which the

j are difficult

-Difficult things

tj

IvSuipovioi

tjoopyj

&$ouuovia.

^Jowj

rejects.

%aA7T

are fine

toc

rcc

xuXoc.

%A7ra

hi

Book the Second.

In Greek

it is

worth attending,

231

how

in

the fame Sentence, the fame Article, by

Word, quite
whole meaning. For exam-

"being prefixed to a different

changes the
ple

'O ilroAe^a^

Ftdemy, having

yu(Ma,<rioc^)(vi<rocg

prejided over the

The

was pub lick iy honoured.

yvfjLvcHritx.o'xyiG-otg

eTiftrflrj

Games

Participle

has here no other force,

than to denote to us the Time, when Pto-

lemy was honoured,

Games.

prefided over the

we

of the Subftantive,
to the Article,

UroXs^oci^

viz.

and

lnpvi$r},

after

But

if,

having
inftead

join the Participle

fay, 'O yv^vota-tix^xK

our meaning

is

'^

then

The Ptolemy, who

prejided over the Games,

was honoured.

The

Participle

in

this

cafe, being joined to the Article, tends tacitly to indicate

not one Ptolemy but many,

of which number a particular one participated of honour (/).

I*

0.4

(/)

Afoilm. L.

I.

c.

33, 34.

Ch.

I.

V~"v~-J

HERMES.

*3 2

Ch. I.
~-"v ~ -J

In Englifi

fng^

like wife

h ow fat Senfe

it

defer ves

changed by chang-

is

ing of the Articles, tho'

other

Word of the

remark-

we

leave every

Sentence untouched.

And Nathan /aid unto David, Thou art

the Man*. In that fingle the, that
diminutive Particle,

cacy of the Reafon

all

the force and

effi-

By

that

contained.

is

alone are the Premifes applied, and fo

firmly fixed, as never to be fliaken.

may appear

polfible this Aflertion

fomewhat
doubis

it,

ftrange

but

let

It is

at

him,

firft

who

only change the Article, and

then fee what will become of the Pro-

phet and his re<.foning.

unto

David,

Might net
upon

the

Thou

And Nathanfaid
art a Man.

King well have demanded

fo impertinent a pofition,

Non

dices bodie,

quorfum hcec tarn futida,

pendant f

But

2T

EI

O ANHP.

Ear.A.

B\

xif. iC.

Book the Second.

But

enough of fuch Speculations. The

we

only remark, which

them,
4<

**

f*

is

thot

this;

Principles
Effects; fo

"

233

intitled to

mail

make on

" minute Change

in

mighty Change

in

leads to

wellarePRiNCiPLES

that

our regard, however

pearance they

may

The Articles

be

trivial

in

ap-

and low."

already mentioned are

thofe ftriStly fo called

but befides thefe

there are the

Pronominal Articles,

fuch

That, Any, Other, Some, All,

as, This,

No, or None, 6cc.

Of thefe we have

fpoken

already in our Chapter of Pronouns

{;;;),

where

(m) Sfe B.

I.

c.

5.

p.

It

72, 73.

been fome view of words, like

feems to have

that here given,

Nojier fermo Articuios non drfiderat

partes orationis jparguntur.

So

Scaliger.

His

Inft.

which

Tongue

induced >uinti!ian to fay of the Latin

idecque in alias

Orat.

L.

declaratis, fatis conftat

I.

c.

4.

Gracorum

Articuios nan negleclos a nobis, Jed cor urn ufum japer-

Jluum.

Nam ubi aliquid prafcribendum

pet articulum

effciunt (eAs^i/

Latinis per Is aut Ille

ejl,

JaAo?)

quod Gr&ci
expletur

Is, auty Ille fervus dixit,

Ch.

I.

HERMES.

234
CIl

I.

*-*-**>

where we have fhewn, when they may be

ia

when

^ en as Pronouns, and

Yet

in truth

muft be ccnfeffed,

it

EiTence of an Article be
tain, ihey are
cles,

as Articles.

to define

much more

if

the

and a/cer-

properly Arti-

than any thing elfe,andas fuch mould

be considered in

when we

us

prove, but

that

Grammar,

Univerfal

this

I apldijuke, what do we per-

fay,

Viciure

form by the help of thefe Definitives, but

bring

down

the

common

Appellative to

denote two Individuals, the one as the mors

more dijlantf So

when

are 'virtuous, but

All

vcaryVAQ. other as the

we

Some men

fay,

men are

inert a!,

of

All

this

what

is

the natural Effect

and Some, but to define

that TJnherfality, and Particularity,

would remain

indefinite,

were we

which

to take

them
de quo fervo antea facia menilo fit, aut qui alio quo pafia
notusfit.

Additur enhn Articulns ad

ucvandam, cujus antea non

hendam

cum

Nam

intellefi'tonem,

ret

nefcii fumus,

qua

latlus

memoriam re-

aut ad prajcri-

pater e qucat; vduti

dictmus, C. Csefar, Is qui poftea dictator flat.

alii fuer e Q.

TOioaiwo.

De

Cafares.

Sic

Grace KzTtrxg

Cauf. Ling. Lat.

c.

13L

o ecu*

Book the Second.

them away? The fame

others want it

fation ,

evident in fuch

Some fubfiances

Sentences, as

of

is

Chufe

have fen-

any way

and some men will find faulty

affing,

For here some, other, and any,

&c.

ferve all of

them

to defne different Parts

Whole; Some, to denote a

Part Any, to denote an indefi-

of a given
definite

nite

and

Other,

to denote the remain-

ing Part,

when

already,

Sometimes

a Part has
this

been aflumed
lafr.

Word

de-

notes a large indefinite Portion, fet in oppoiition to

fome

and re-

Jingle, definite,

maining Part, which receives from fuch

Oppofition no fmall degree of heightening.

Thus

Virgil,

Excudent al njpirantia

mollius

ara;

(Credo equidem) vivos ducent de marmorc

vultus

Qrabunt caufas
Defcribent

melius, cczlique

radio,

et

meatus

furgentia Jidera

dicent

Tu

regere imperio popuhs,

memento, &c.

Romane,
JEn.VI.

Nothing

HERMES,

236

Ch,

I.

V-^>

Nothing

can be Wronger or more fub-

lime, than this Antithefis

equal to many other Acls

and the Romanyfrzj//

one

-,

take?i

(f r it is

the

juir.

But
treat

oppofition of

together,

Men

and

trivial a caufe, as

Alii

Tu.

to

we conclude, and
of Connectives.
here

fet as

Tu Roma?2e,

not Vqs Romani) to all other

yet this performed by fo

Afi

proceed to

CHAP,

SoOK THE SECOND.

CHAP.

&27

II.

Concerning Connectives, and firjl tboje

called Conjunctions.

Connectives are the fubject of what

ch. IL

which, according as they

*-v-**

follows

connect either Sentences or Words, are

called

by the

Names of Con-

different

junctions, or Prepositions. Of thefe

Names,

that of the Prepofition

from a mere
{lands

in

which

it

its ejfential

Of

thefe

commonly
the

Part,

The name of

connects.
is

it

before

connection

Conjunction, as
to

as

accident,

taken

is

the

evident, has reference

character.

two we mall conilder the

Conjunction

firft,

becaufe

not Words, but Sentences.

it

connects,

This

is

con-

formable to the Analyfis, with which

began

this

inquiry *,

we

and which led

us,

* Sup.

p.

II, 12.

HERMES.

238
Ch.

II.

us,

by

fences

parity of reafon, to confider

Now

Words.

before

themfelocs

Sett-*

Conjunction

the Definition of a

is'

as

a Part of Speech, void of Sig-

follows

nification itfelf,

but fo formed as to help

Signification, by

making

nificant Sentences to be

two

or more fig-

one fignificant Sen-

tence [a).

This

(<? )

Grammarians have

ufually confidered the

Con-

junction as connecting rather Jingle Parts of Speech,

than zvbole Sentences, and that too with the addition of
like with like,

Tenfe with Tenfe, Number with

ber, Cafe with Cafe,

This Sanfiius

Num-

juifly ex-

ConjunCiio neque cafus, neque alias partes ora-

plodes.
tionis

iffc.

(ut imperlti docent) conjuigit, ipfts enim partes

inter fe conjunguntur
conjungit.

-fed conjunclio Orationes inter fe

Miner. L.

III. c. 14.

He

then eftablifhes

by a variety of examples. He had already

much, L. I. c. 18. and in this he appears to

his Joctrine
faid as

have followed Scaliger,

fore him.

who

had aflerted the fame be-

Conj unci ionis autem notionem veteres paullo

inconfultiits prodidere

neque cnim, quod aiunt, partes

alias conjungit (ipfs cnim partes

guntur)Jed Conjunclio
plures.

De

eji,

per fe interfe conjun-

qua

Cauf. Ling. Lat.

c.

conjungit Orationes

165.

This

Book the Second.

~y?

This therefore being the general Idea of Ch. II.

Conjunct ions, we deduce their Specirs *""* v~""J
in

This Doctrine of theirs

who

in the fevera! places,

is

junction, always confiders

Sentences, and not

L.

II.

c.

it

in

Syntax as connecting

Words, though

tant he has not given us

p. 14.

confirmed hy ApolloniuSy

where he mentions the Con-

L.

12. p. 124.

But we have ftronger

in his

is Arifiotle's

kuv

An

ty.

stqiziv

(31,

to

A Conjunction, according to him, is

zrsipv;iv~&

make one ftgnificant

In

Poet. c. 20.

fignificant articulate Sound,

which

articulate

Word, nor even

this

fanned

by the Conjunction^

of two or more

fimple Sentence, but of

one complex

from

twe or more

Sentence,

which

that Concatenation of

Conjunctions.

which follows.

For example,
If Men are

Interefl to be jufi, though

it

is fa

Sound out

Am-

not the Union of two or more Syllables in one

ple

in

<rr\p.xv\ix.w-.

which are each of them figview of things, the one

'

is

puvriv

[Aiocv

of feveral articulate Sounds,

nificant.

Definition,

teXziqv'jov [a\v tpcovwv [ak&$, (rriUociPii-

articulate Sound, devoid of Signification,

formed as

2,

234.

by the belt Critics

as the PalTagc has been corrected

<puv'A outyiucs,

I. c.

III. c. 15. p.

authority than this to fupport

Scaliger and Sanclius, and that

and Manufcripts.

works now ex-

Definition. See L.

its

is

one

confidered as one,
effected

by the

take the Sentence,

by nature focial,

were

in

ftmple Sentences

Meaning
let us

Words

it is

their

not fo ordained by the

Lava

24

E R

S.

manner. Conjunctions^

Ch. IL

ilithfe following

*****

while they conned fentences, cither conneB

'

alfi

Laws
(j.)

Here

of their Country.

Men

are three Sentences*

are by nature foetal,

ter-eft to be jnji.

3. )

[l

It is not

0:

Man's InLaws
The firft two

It is

dained by the

of every Country that ManJBould be juft.

ef thefe Sentences ate made One by the Conjunction,

If; thefe/Oite with the

junction,

Tho'j and

that $uvn
late Soundy

[/.ix

o->?

uav7ix;i, that one fignifie ant articu"

yap

itov ifcaigsfy-/],

tiqv 2j"i rl \v

wo^Xa. The

ONE

it

fo that if

SnXcv ort tzvocv~

Conjunction makes many$

many.

Rhet. III.

and thus made many out of

way the

where he

aviSitrpos

His inftance of a Sentence, divefted of

ft7rr7no-a,

the

be taken away-, it is then evident oh

the contrary that one will be

the

is

Power.

explains a pafiage in his Rhetoric,

"BOiU to zsoXKcc'

tions,

make

mentions the fame Subject.

by the Con-

cf which Arijiotle fpeaks, and which

fefult of the conjunctive

This

thiid Sentence,

the three, thus united,

c.

iz.

Conjunc-

it's

one,

is,

i&opivj vent, occur ri, regavi,

yt.Qov,

where by"

three Sentences, refulting from this Dif-

folution, (for v.Goi/, ivtvimVoiy

of them, when unconnected,

and ifeopw, are each

fo

many

perfect

Sen-

tences) prove that thefe are the proper Subjects of

the Conjuniion\ connective faculty.
y

Ammonius s

Book the Second.

pie

For exam- Ch.

their meanings , or not.

<ilfo
:

two Sentences

us take thefe

let

Rome was

enjlaved-^Ccefar

and connect them

was

ambitious

Con-

together by the

Because;

junction,

241

Rome was

e?ftaved,

because Cajar was ambitious. Here

the

Meanings, as well as the Sentences, appear

But

to be connected.

mujl be reformed,

Manners

if I fay,

or Liberty

will be

here the Conjunction, or, though

loft

it

join
the

Ammonius's account of the ufe of this Part of Speech

is

Aio

elegant.

cnuxivuv,
TtT u7)[Auy

>tj

uAcj>, Xy

vaq VTTScpfcu;
*;vcj<r0aj

JjiAwj/,

[Av

dvxAoy(&>

ha thto
wx (l"ge

i\> i

tm

%yXw,
tvcc<7iv.

one Exiflence funply,

V7ro

Of

Je

tx,v

vttocp^iv
jfm

twj>

rivx

vm

is

^auxv

[j.n^i7ria

Je srAfJO-

(r^iT^ov

$1

tv\

Ik ztoXXuv

yopQuv

(paii/oy.ivriv

Sentences that,

and which

tw

Asyopsi/w'

J'ta)

ssui doxuv, dvaAoyti ry

trvyxsi^ivv)

lyjurA

Xoyw

ruv

nvpiu/g n?,

which denotes

fir icily one, way be

a piece of Timber not yet feThat, which

vered, and called on this account One.
confidered as analogous

to

denotes feveral Exiflences,

one

and which appears

byfome Conjunclive Particle,

made up of many

pieces of

is

to be

analogous

to

made

a Ship

Timber, and zuhich by ?neans

of the nails has an apparent Unity,

Interpret, p. 54. 6,

Am.

in Lib,

de

II.

<-v

H E R M

242
Ch. IL

S.

the Sentences, yet as to their refpeclrve

Meanings,
thus

is

a perfect Disjunclive.

appears, that

it

though

tions conjoin Sentences, yet

And

Conjunc-

all

with refpect to

the Senfe, fome are Conjunctive-, and

fome Disjunctive
that

we

The

and hence (b)

it is

derive their different Species.

ConjunSiiens, which conjoin both

Sentences and their Meanings, are either

Copulatives,

Continuatives.

or

The principal Copulative in Englijh is,

And. The Continuatives are, If, Because, Therefore, That, &c. The
Difference between thefe

this

is

The

Copulative does no

more than barely couple

Sentences, and

therefore applicable to

all

Subjects,

patible.

is

whofe Natures are

Continuatives,

not incom-

on the contrary, by

more intimate connection,

confolidate

Sen-

(b)

Verba

Thus
;

Sealiger.

Aut ergo Senjum conjungunt, ac

aut Verba tantum conjungunt^ Senfum vero

jungunt.

De

C. L. Lat.

c.

167.

d'i[~

Book the Second.

243

Sentences into one continuous Whole, and

are therefore applicable only to Subjects,

which have an

To

explain by examples

improper

and

ejfential Co-incidence.

Sunfeineth,

was a Grammarian

and

the

Sky

things that

tliefe are

no way

It is

was a Statuary,

to fay, Lyfippus

Prifcian

is

clear

may

yet imply no abfurdity.

The

becanfe

co-exift,

But

and

would be

it

abfurd to fay, Lyfippus was a Statuary,

because

tho' not to fay, the

the Sky

is

was a Grammarian

Prifcian

The Reafon

clear.

is,

the Co-incidence

fpect to the

firft,

accidental-,

with refpect to the

efjential,

Sun fiineth, because

with reis

laft,

and founded in nature.

much

for the Diftinclion

latives

and Continuatives

merely
it

is

And

fo

between Copu-

(c).

As

(<:)

fum.

Copulatlva

Thus

explicit^//

eji,

qua

copulat tain Verba-,

Prifcian, p. 1026.

But

quam Sen 1
is more
-

Scaliger

Senfum conjungunt (conjunfiiones fc.) aut

necejfari}-,
2

Ch.

ijj

HERMES.

244

Ch.

II.

As

Suppositive, fuch
fuch

they are either

to Continuatives,

If; or Positive,

as,

Because, Therefore, As, &c.

as,

Take Examples of each

happily, if

you

live honejlly

you will

you

live

live

hap"

because you live honejlly. The Dif-

pily,

between thefe Continuatives

ference
this

The

but

affert

tives

is

Suppojitives denote ConneBion,

not actual Exijlence; the Po/i-

imply both the one and the other (d).

Farther

necejfar'ib,

punt

aut non

Copulatives,

f:an s

own

nccejfar'ib:

&c,

De

& Ji non

account of Continuatives

Ccniinnativafiint, qua continuationem

rerumpgnificant

ibid. Scaliger's

aut praftituunt, aut fubdunt.

Greek name

for the

-jrAExltxo?

for

necejjario, turn

C Ling. Lat.

c.

167. Prif-

is

as follows.

& confequentiam

account is

Ibid.

c.

cauffam

The

168.

Copulative was 'LvvSta-y.* e-vp-

the Continuative,

<rvva,7rJixot; j

the

Etymologies of which words juftly diftinguifh their

refpedtive characters.

(d)

The old Greek Grammarians confined the name

XwccttIixqi, and the Latins that of Continuativa, to

ft

thofe

Book the Second.

24J

Far t her than this, the Pofitives above

mentioned are either Causal, fuch

Because, Since, As, &c.

or

as,

Collec-

Therefore, Wherefore, Then, &c. The Difference between thefe is this The Caufah fubjoin
tive, fuch

as,

The Sun

Caufes to

is in Eclipfe,

Eff'effs

BE-

thofe Conjunctions,

or

which we have

called Suppofitivt

Conditional)Vj\ii\c the Pofitive they called nrccooctrw-

They

a-rrlmoiy or Subcontlnuatlvcs.

agree however

in deferibing their proper Characters.

cording to

Gaza

rwoc, j^ rcc'frv

are,

^nXavTig

The

ac-

firft

V7ra,giv jutv a, ajtoAaS/ai/ Je

ci

L. IV.
& natura rerum,
1027. And Sca-

Prifcian fays, they

figni fy to us, quails ejl ordinatlo

cum.

dubltatlone allqud ejfentla reru?n

p.

llger fays, they conjoin Jinefub/l/lcntid necejfarld\ potejl

enlmjubfijlere 13 non fub/ljiere

tunt.

On

Ibid. c. 168.

or Ts-x^xo-vvuTrlinot (to ufe his

US, OTl Xy U7TlX^iV

And

Prifcian

confequentem

[XETCX,

fays,

cum

own name) Gaza

TafWf

<TYI[J.XLVii<ni/

tells

iSTOiyt

caujam contlnuatlonis ojlcndunt

effentla

(x bypotheft, fed ex

utrumque enlm admit-

the contrary of the Poiit-ive,

rcrum

And

to, quodfubfiJlit
i

&

Scaliger^ nan

conjimgunt. Ibid.

It

Ch.

II.

HERMES.

46
Ck.

II.

because

Moon

intervenes

fubjoin Effects to

lecJives

Moon

the

The

Caufes-

Cof-,

The,

therefore the Sun is

Now we ufe Caufals in thofe

intervenes,

in Eclipfe.

instances,

where, the Effect being con-*

fpicuous,

We

feek

its

Caufe

Collec-

and Science pro-

tives, in Demonjlrations,

perly fo called,

and

where the Caufe

being-

known

It

may feem

fttive

at firft

fomewhat frrangc,

why the

I'o-

Conjunctions fhould have been confidered as

Subordinate to the Suppofitive, which by their antient

Names

appears to have been the

Pofitive are confined to

fitive

bles

extend to

Thus

unlefs

it

affirm,

If

it is falfe

be

we

(if

to affirm,

Day.

Day,

tends to Poflibles
help

Is

fact.

it,

that the

acluaily is; the

Suppo-

Pojfibles, nay. even as far as to ImpoJJi-

actually be
it

what

it is

alfo.

pleafe)

As

it is

But we

Day,

it is

Light,

may at midnight

Light, becaufe the, If, ex-

Nay we may

even Impoffibles.

affirm,

by

its

We may fay,

If the Sun be cubical, then is the Sun angular; If the

Sky fal^ then foallwe catch Larks. Thus too Scaliger

upon

the fame occafion

percipi ex
nit.

De

co, q:isd

amplitudincm

Continuativcs

eiiam i?npoibile aliquando prafuppo-

C. L. Lat. C. 168.

In this lenfe then the

Contiuuative, Suppofitive or Conditional Conjunction

is

(as

it

were} luperior to the Pofitive, as being of

greater latitude in

its

application.

'

Book the Second.

known

by

firft,

its

247

we diicern

help

confe-

cjuences (e).

All

thefe Continaatives are refolvable

In Head

into Copulatives.
is

Day,

and

Light.

Light,

it is

we may

it is light,

it is

Because

fay, It

Inflead of, If

we may

it

it

is

Day,

be

Day,

fay, It is at the fame

and to be Light-,
fo in other Inflances. The Reafon is,

time necejfary to be

and

of,

that the

Day,

Power of the

Copulative extends

tp all Connections, as well to the ejfential,

as to the cafual'or fortuitous.

fore theContinuative

Hence

there-

may be refolved

a Copulative andfomething more, that

fay, into a Copulative

implying an

into
is

to

effential

Co-incidence (/") in the Subjects conjoined.

R
(e)

The

As

Latins called the Caufals, Caufales or Cau:

The

Greeks called the former 'AmoAo^jxci, and the

latter

futiva', the Collectives, Colleftiva or lllatlvec

^jAAoyifixoi.
(_/")

Refolvuntur <autem in Copulatives s omncs ha,

propterea quod Caufa

juncla

eji.

Sca>. de

cum

Effeclu Suapte naturli con-

C, L, Lat.

c.

169.

Ch.

II.

HERMES.

248

Ch.

As

IT.

<v-*j

to Caiifal Conjunctions (of

have fpoken already) there

vve

is

which
no one

of the four Species of Caufes, which they

are not capable of denoting: for example,

The Trumpetmade ofMetal T h e

the Material Cause

founds, b e c a u s e

it is

formal jT^ Trumpetfunds because

,

it is

long

and hollow-T he efficient

The Trumpet founds, because an Artifl

blows it
The final The Trumpet

founds,

that

Where
three

it

firit

it

may

raife

our courage

worth obferving,

is

-that

the

Caufes are exprefl by the ftrong

affirmation of the Indicative Mode, becaufe

if the

Effect actually be, thefe muit o

But the kit Caufe has

necefTity be alfo.

a different Mode, namely, the Contingent

or Potential.

Final Caufe,
lation, is

fay,

The Reaibn is,

tho' it may befrjl

always

however

it

fet

the

an

End beyond

lafi in

Recent.

may be

Artifl: firft to

his

that the
in

Specu-

That

is

to

the End, which

work,

Power

it

may

ftill

to obtain,

be

and

which,

Book the Second.

which,

like other Contingents,

may either Ch.

Hence

happen, or not (:).

249

alio

it

is

connected by Conj auctions of a peculiar

kind, fuch as,

The Sum

That,
is,

both Sentences

Meanings, are either

Continuative;

or

ale Conjunc-

that

tions, which connect

their

Ut, &c.

I'vu,

and

Copulative,

the Continuatives

are either Conditional, or Pojitive; and the

Pofitives are either Caufal or Co/Jeclive,

Anp now we come

to the

Disjunc-

tive Conjunctions, a Species of

Words which bear this contradictor^

Name,

becaufe, while

they

disjoin

the

$enje, they conjoin the Sentences (h).

With
See alfo Vol. I.
(g) See B. I. c. 8. p. 142.
Note VIII. p. 271. For the four Caufes, fee Vol.1
Note XVII. p. 280.
(Jo) 'Oi $1 $ixtv>t]ix.Q) Tci
3<j

zrgayfAX

$rpoG-oo7TH

outch

Six^ivypivx

zx^xy^xT^j

SixQivywyTiS)

tjjw

(rvvTiQzxari

zrpoirwnrQ^

<ppx<nv

*.to

7n<rui<JW<i'.

Gaza

II.

HERMES.

250

Ch.

With refpect to thefe we may obferve,

II.

that as there

a Principle of

is

fufed throughout

this

Whole

is

all

dif-

by which

things,

kept together, and pre-

ferved from Diflipation

ib

Diversity

Principle of

Union

there

is

diffufed in like

manner, the Source of Diftinction, of

Number, and of Order

(/).

Now
Gtfz^Gram. L. IV.
dicliones conjungant,

XVI.

L.

Prifc.

Disjunctivesfunt, qua,

1029.

p.

quamvh

fenfum tamen aisjuntlum habent.

And

hence

it

is,

that a

Sentence, connected by Disjunctives, has a near re-

femblance to zjimple negative Truth. For though this

as to

its

Intellection be disjunctive (its end being to

from the Predicate) yet as

it

together into one Proportion,

it

disjoin the Subject

bines

Terms

truly [ynthetical, as

See Chap.
(/)

be

I.

Note

is

is

as

affirmative.

p. 3,

adorns Nature,

heighten by degrees, and as

ent Subjects, to

it

may

pafles to differ-

become more and more intenfe.

when considered as Indivi-

things only differ,

duals, but
all

(Z>).

The DivERsrTY, which

laid to

Some

any Truth, that

com-

if

we

Distinction

recur to their Species, immediately lofe

:

fuch for inirance are Socrates and;

Others differs to

Plato.

Species, but as to

Genus are
the

Book the Second.

Now

to exprefs in

it is

25*

fome degree the Gh.

Modifications of this Diverfity, that

junctive Conjunctions feem

Dis-

firfl

to

have been invented.

Of

Disjunctives, fome are

Simple, fome Adversative A)^,
fis when we fay, either // /; Day, or it
thefe

is

the fame

fuch are

Man

again, which differ as

to

and Lion. There are others

Genus, and co-incide only in

thofe tranjcendcntal Comprehenjions of

istence, and the like
as for

ties,

example an Ounce, and the Colour, White.

all Being whatever

Laftly

Ens, Being, Ex-

fuch are Quantities and Qualir

differs, as

Being, from

Non-beinz.
Farther, in

all

things different,

their Diverfity, there

with
it

fc If,

this

each other,

refpecl: to

and

not

any of the

Oppofition

is

in as

In

Double and

Son, Caufe and Effect,

in thefe

jn ordinary Subjects, beccufe

it is

as each thing

is

in all Subjects

Relatives,

fuch

Half, Father and

?norefiriking, than

thcf always fhew

it,

by

Contraries,
Black and White, Even and Odd, Good and

neccffarilj

fuch as

much

But yet

reft.

not thefame.

as Greater and Lefs,

however moderate

an appearance of Opposition"

is

inferring each other,

la

Bad,

II,

25 2

Ch.

II,

*~~*

'

is

Night

is

not

E R

AdverJ

alive, as

Day, but

when we

The

Night.

it is

ence between thefe

S,

Differ-

do

that the fimple

is,

no mere, than merely

fay, It

disjoin

the Adver-

Jative disjoin, with an Oppofition concomi-

Add

tant.

are definite

when we

to this, that the Adverfative

the Simple,

fay, 'The

Thus

indefinite.

Number of Three

not

is

an

Bad, Virtuous and Vitious, in thefe the Oppofition

goes

frill

farther, becaufe thefe

even defruclive of each

pofition is that of '!Aj?7ipayj,

when we

or

differ,

but are

Op-

the moj} potent

Contradiction,

oppofe Propcfition to Proportion, Ti nth to

Faljhood, aflerting of
not.

not only

But

other.

This indeed

is

felf to ail things, for

needs have

its

any Subject, either

it is,

or

it is

an Oppofition, which extends

it-

every thing conceiveable muft

Negative, though multitudes by nature

have neither Relatives, nor Contraries,

Befidss thefe

Modes of Diversity,

others that deferve notice

Diverfity between the

ffition

Name

of a thing, and

its

D>f.~

between the various Names, which belong to

$\sfame

thing, and the various things,

noted by ih?fa?ne

Name;

all

which are de-

which Diverftties upon

occaiion become a Part of our Difcourfc.

much,

there arc

fuch for inftance, as the

in fhort, for the Subject of

And

Diyr.RsiTY.

fo

Book the Second.

253

tin en) en

Number, but an

disjoin

two oppolite Attributes, but we

definitely affirm one,

But when we

odd,

we

not only Ch. II.

v-**

and deny the other.

The Number of the Stars

either even or odd, though we aflert

is

fay*

one Attribute
be,

and the other not

to be,

to

yet the Alternative notwithstanding

left indefinite.

Disjunctives

And

much

fo

is

for Jtmffc

k) .

As

The

{k)

fimple Disj unclive

ri,

or Vel,

is

moftlv

But

nfed indefinitely, fo as to leave an Alternative.

when
tive,

it is

it is

ufed definitely, fo as to leave

no Alterna-

then a perfect Disjunctive of the Subfequent

from the Previous, and has the fame force with

Et non.
Homer.
or,

It is thus

BaAo/A lyta Kaav

Gaza

cUv

Hpy.tvou,

r,

is

to fay,

I defire

A.

the people fiiould befaved,

hot be dejlroyedy the Conjunction

or fublative.

Verfe

is

It

z,

oi7ro\i<r$ici.

IA.

That

explains that Verfe of

ani>

n being aas;^T<xo?,

muft however be confeft,

that this

otherwise explained by an Ellipfis, either of

/AaAAov, or utV, concerning which fee the

mentators.

Com-

-***-*

2 54

Ch.

As

II.

been

to

E R

S.

Adverfathe Disjunctives,

faid already that they

sition.

it

has

imply Oppo-

Now there can be no Oppofition

of the fame Attribute,

as

when we

in the fame Subjetf,

Nireus was beautiful;

fay,

but the Oppofition

mud

be either of the

fame Attribute in different Subjecls, as when

we fay, Brutus was a Patriot, but Ccefar
was not

or of

different Attributes in the

fame Subject, as when we fay, Gorgias was

a Sopbift, but not a Pbilofopber
or of

different

as

Attributes in different SubjeBs,

when we

but

fay, Plato

was a

Pbilofopber,

Hippias was a Sophi/l.

The
purpofes

Conjunctions ufed

may be

called

for

all

thefe

Absolute Ad-

VERSATIVES.

But

there are other Adverfatives, be-

fides thefe

as

tnore beautiful,

when we

fay,

Nireus was

than Achilles

Virgil was

AS

Book the Second.

As grat a

The
go

Poet,

as

Cicero

Character of thefe

was an

latter

2$$
Orator*.

that they

is,

by marking

farther than the former,

not only Oppofition, but that Equality or

Excefi,

which

arifes

among

Subjects from

And hence it is
Adversatives op

their being compared.

may be called
Comparison.

they

Besides

tioned, there are

two other

which the mofl eminent

alt ho'.
unless

men-

the Adverfatives here

For example

are

Species, of

unless and

Troy will be taken r

Troy

the Palladium be preferred

will be taken, alt ho' Heftor defend it.

The

Nature of thefe Adverfatives may be thus

explained.

As

every Event

allied to its Caufe, fo

is

oppofed to

Caufe

is

its

naturally

is

by parity of reafon

Preventive.

And

as

it

every

either adequate (/) or in-adequate

(in-

(/)

This Diftin&ion has reference

to

common Opi-

nion, and the form of Language, confonaxt thereto.

ftrict
is

metaphyseal truth,

any Caufe at

al!.

No Caufe,

that

is

In

not adequate*

Ch.
%

v"""

II.

256
Ch.
V

^i

E R

S.

II. fin-adequate, when it endeavours, with*

HHm)
out being effectual) fo in like manner is

Now adequate Preven-

every Preventive.
tives are expreft

unless Troy

by fuch Adverfatives,

Palladium be preserved-, that

is fujjicient

are expreft

tho'

to

prove

it ;

prevent

it.

is,

the

This alone

The In- adequate

by fuch Adverfatives, as al-*

Troy

defend

unless

will be taken,

as

will be taken,

that

is,

alt ho'

Hector

Hector

Defence will

in- effectual.

The Names

given by the old

marians to denote thefe

laft

Gram*

Adverfatives,

appear -not fufficiently to exprefs their

Natures [m).

They may be

better per-

haps calledADVERSATivES Adequate,

and

In-adequate.

And thus it is that all Disjunctives*

that

is

Conjunctions, which conjoin Sentences>

(m) They called them

for the

moft

part,

without

fufficient Diftinclion of their Species, Adverfativa^

EpgVTiUfAaTtXW*'

or

the Second.

Book,

Meanings, are either Ch.

tences, but not their

Simple

or

Adversative

Ad vers ati ves

Comparative

are

and that

all

either Abfolute or

or elfe Adequate

>,

2$j

or In*

adequate.

We mall finim this Chapter with a few

mifcellany Obfervations.

In the nrfl place

through

all

it

may be

obferved,

the Species of Disjunctives,

that the fame Disjunctive appears to have

greater or
jects,

which

disjoined

we

fry,

force, according as the

lefs

it

disjoins, are

by Nature.

Every Number

Sub-

more or

lefs

For example,
is

even,

Every Proportion is true, orfalfe

if

or odd

nothing

feems to disjoin more Jirongly than the

Disjunctive, becaufe no things are in

Na-

ture more incompatible than the Subjects.

But

if

we

or Figure

fay,

That Objetf

is.

a Triangle,

contained wider three right lines

the (or) in this cafe hardly feems to

disjoin, or

indeed to do more, than

tinttly to exprefs

the Thing,

firft

dif->

by

its

Name,

'

II.

"**fc/
.

HERMES.

258
Ch.

II.

*-**-'

Name, and then by

'That Figure

fay,

or a Ball

is

its

Definition,

So

if

we

a Sphere, or a Globe,

the Disjunctive in

this cafe,

tends no farther to disjoin, than as

tinguifhes the feveral Names,

it

dif-

which be-

long to the fame Thing (#).

Again
and

the Words, When and Where,

others of the fame nature, fuch as,

ail

Whence, Whither, Whenever, Wherever,

&c. may be properly

Conjunctions,

called

Adverbial

becaufe they participate

the nature both of Adverbs and ConjuncofCoJijunSlions, as they conjoin Sen-

tions

tences

The

(u)

tive',

Latins had a peculiar Particle for this oc-

which they

eafion,

called Subdisjuncliva^ a Subdisjunc*

and that was Sive.

Alexander five Paris

Mars five Mavors. The Greek*EtT

fwer the fame end.

ef-)

tives.

Of thefe

zv feems to an-

Particles, Scaiiger thus

Et fane nomen Subdisjunftivarunr recle accepr.cque enim tarn plane disjungit^ quam Disjunc-

fpeaks
turn

y.

Nam

Dis]unliv<v funt in ContrariisSubdif-

junclivcc auttm ctiarn in non Contrariis, fed Diverfis-

tantum
c, 170.

ut9 Alexander five Paris,

De

C. L. Lat>

Book the Second.

259

tences; of Adverbs, as they denote the

tributes either of Time, or

Again

of Place.

Prepofitions (con-

trary to the Character of acceffory

when

ftridlly

Words,
but

Signification,

afTociated with other words)

kind of obfcure
alone,

no

Signification,

have a

when taken

by denoting thofe Attributes of

Time and

Place.

And hence

that

it is,

they appear in Grammar, like Zoophytes

in

Nature

-,

a kind of (0) middle Beings,

of amphibious character, which, by Glaring the Attributes of the higher and the
lower, conduce to link the

Whole

toge-

ther (p).

And

xgov lAiTxQxwxtrx, ufi ajUKpurSriTEKrOat

rtgov t^Zov

y\

alfo Arijl. de

(/>)

mod

It is

fjTov.

S7rl

tiVwv, zto-

Themi/l. p. 74. Ed. Aid.

Animal. Part.

p. 93.

1.

10.

Ed.

See
Syll.

fomevvhat furprizing that the politeft and

elegant of the Attic Writers, and Plato above

S 2

II.

i^- v -

thefe Adverbial Conjunctions,

and perhaps mofi of the

which have

At- Ch.

all

the

H E R M E

z6o

Ch.

II.

And
their

Conjunctions,

for

Genus, and their Species.

the reft,

of all

much

fo

S,

mould have

their

works

filled

with Particles

kinds, and with Conjunctions in particular; while

in the

modern

polite

works, as well of ourfelves as of

our neighbours, fcarce fuch a

Word

Conjunction

Is

is

to be found.

it,

Connexion in the Meaning, there

to conneft

as a Particle, or

that

mud

where there

but that where the Connection

none, fuch Connectives are of

of Cards, without cement,

little

may

ufe

is

be Words had

is little

or

That Houfes

well anfwer their end,

but not thofe Houfes, where one would chufe to dwell ?

Is this the

Caufe

the Antients

or have

unknown

we

attained an Elegance, t

Vitiimm adfummam fortunes > &c.

CHAP.

Book the Second,

CHAP.

261

III.

Concerning thofe Connectives, called

Prepofitions,

Prepositions
their Place,

by

their

name

but not their Character,

Their Definition

will

diftinguiih

them

Pre-

from the former Connectives.

position
of

is

exprefs

a Part of Speech, devoid itfelf

Signification, but

fo formed as

to unite

two Words that arefignifcant, and that refufe

to co-alefce or unite

of themfelves (a).

This

(a)

The

Stoic

Name for

a Prepofition was n^oQf-

-Tw.oq Suv^fo-juof,

Prcspofitiva Conjunclio,

tive Conjunction.

'X2j

fj.lv

zv x^

y.<x.-toc

ruq

a Prepcjio\\Xo>,t;

nn*-

pxtiitraq at n-^oSsVn? s ui'JW ujx?jj (rviljoi^suig ylvovloci

(

'urcc^s[j.(pxTtxon J

Xttexlou yi^mv' s uv Xj d<pogy,n ivpv\~

rfci stoogx toj?

2t&hxoV t xxXtTvQoii aula? n^oOf-

rmzg

2,vv$i<r[j.xs.

Now in what manner even in

other

applications (befides the prefent) Prepofitions give proof

pf their

Conjunctive Syntax,

we have mentioned already ;

S 3

whenct

ChJII.

HERMES.
This connective Power, (which

relates to

Words

only, and not Sentences) will be,

better

underftood

from

the

following

Speculations.

Some

things co-alefce

themfehes

and

help,

Works

as

and unite of

others refufe to do fo without

were compulfion. Thus in

it

of Art, the Morter and the Stone

co-alefce of themfelves; but the

Wainfcot

and the Wall not without Nails and Pins.

In nature
example;

this
all

is

more confpicuous.

Quantities, and Qualities co-

alefce immediately

Thus

it is

For

with their Subflances.

we fay, afierce Lion, a vafi Moun-

Natural Concord of
Subject and Accident, arifes the Grammatical

tain

and from

this

Concord of Subfiantive and Adjective.

In
like

ivber.ce too the Stoics took occafton to call

them Preposi-

tive Conjunctions, dpollon. L. IV. c. 5. p. 313.

Ytt is this in fadl rather a defcriptive Sketch, than a
complete Definition, fince there are other Conjunctions,

which are Prepofitive

U IV. de Prspoiit.

Prifc.

as well as thefe.

L. XIV.

p.

See

983.

Gaz }

Book the Second.

like

manner Actions co-alefce with

263
their

Agents, and Paffions with their Patients.

Thus

is

it

Darius

is

we

Alexander conquers

fay,

Nay,

conquered-.

as

every Ener-

gy is a kind of Medium between its

Agent and Patient, the whole three,
Agent,

Energy, and Patient,

with the fame

facility

as

Alexander conquers Darius.

that

is

from

thefe

alefcence, arifes the

of the Verb by
Accufative by

its

its

co-alefce

when we fay,
And hence,

Modes of natural CoGrammatical Regimen

Nominative, and of the

Verb.

Farther than

Attributives themfelves

them characterized

as

this,

may be moft of
when we fay of

fuch Attributives as ran, beautiful, learned,

he ran fwiftly, fhe was very

he was moderately learned, &c.

beautiful,

And hence

the Co-alefcence of the Adverb with Verbs,

Participles,

The

and Adjetlives.

general Concluiion appears to he

Those Parts of Speech unite

"of themselves i ngrammar, whose
"original Archetypes unite of
this.

"

S 4

" THEM-

Ch.III.

HERMES.
" THEMSELVES

NATURE."

IN

which we may add,

what has been

following from

as

faid, that the

great Objects

Substance and

of Natural Union are

Attribute, Now

tho' Subflances natu-

with their Attributes, yet

rally co-incide

they abfolutely refufe doing

another (b).

Maxims
ble

To

And hence

in Phyfics, that

fo, one

known

thofe

Body

is

with

impenetra-

that two Bodies cannot poffefs the fame

place

-,

that the fame Attribute cannot be-

long to different Subjlances, 6cc.

From

thefe Principles

when we form
without

it

follows, that

a Sentence, the Subftantive

difficulty

co-incides

with the

Verb, from the natural Co-incidence of

jS^ bjfiance

and Energy

heSun warm-

So like wife the Energy with the

TH.

Subject,

[b)

Caufa, propter

nuntur fine copula,

quam duo Sub/fantiva non poPbilojopbla petenda

enim duo fubjiantialiter unum

tt

eJJ'e

eji

Accidens; itaque non d:cas,C jES ar,C ato

cal. dc

Cauf. Ling. Lat.

c.

neque

poteJi,ftcut Subjiantia

177.

PUGNAX

Book the Second.

Subject, on

which

it

So likewife both

Energy with their proper

Subjiance and
Attributes.

warm-

operates

eth the Earth.

265

The Splendid Sun, ge-

THE FERTILE
nially WARMETH
Earth. But fuppofe we were deurous
to add other Subftantives, as for inftance,

Air,

or

incide,

How would

Beams.

thefe co-

what Character could

or under

they be introduced

Not

as Nominatives

or Acciifiitives, for both thofe places are

already filled

the Nominative by the

Subftance,

Sun

Subftance,

Earth.

to thefe

laft,

the Accufative by the

or to

Not

as Attributes

any other thing

for

Attributes by nature they neither are, nor

can be made.

Here then we perceive

Rife and Ufe of Prepositions.

thefe

we conned

Sentences,

which

the

By

thofe Subftantives to
at the

time are unable

to co-alefce of them/elves.

Let us aflume

for inftance a pair of thefe Connectives,

Thro', and With, and mark their Effect upon the Subftances here mentioned.
"The fplendid

Sun

with

his

Beams

genially

ivarmetb

Ch.III.
m*~~m>
'

266
Ch.III. warmetb

The

E R

thro'/^ Air

5.

the fertile Earth,

Sentence, as before, remains intire

and one ; the Subjlantives required are both

introduced ; and not a

there before,

is

Word, which was

detruded from

its

proper

place.

It mufl here be obfcrved

not

all

that moil,

Prepofitions feem originally form-

ed to denote the Relations of Place

The

reafon

which

if

is,

this

that grand Relation,

is

Bodies or natural Sub/lances

tain at all times

(c).

main-

one to another, whether

they are contiguous or remote, whether

in

motion or

It may be
tinuity

at reft.

faid indeed that in the

of Place they form

this

Con"

Universe
or

(c)

Omne

corpus aut movetur aut quiefcit

tpus fuit aliqud noia^ qua:

ejjet

TO

quart

IIOT fignificaret,

five

inter duo extrema^ inter

citero extremorum, in

qua mot us fit , five ejfct in

quibus fit quies.
Hinc eliciemus

Prtepofitionis ejjentiaicm definitionem.

Ling. Lat.

c.

152.

Seal, de Cauf.

Book the Second.

Whole,

or visible

much One by
fion, as

267

and are mads as Ch.III.

that general

Comprehen- r-~Y~
s

confident with their feveral

is

Thus

Natures, and fpecific DifHnctions.

it is

we have

Prepofitions to denote the

when we

contiguous Relation of Body, as

fay,

Cains walketh

with

upon a

Statue Jtcod

the

Staff',

Pedejial; the River

ran over ^ Sand ; others for the detached

when we

Relation, as
Italy

Sun

the

came

thefe Figs

fay,

He

is

rifm

above

from

'Turky.

is

going

to

the Hills;

So

as to

Motion and Re/2, only with this difference,

that here the Prepofition varies
racter

that

Thus

with the Verb.

Lamp

from the
From, aifumes

hangs

Prepofition,

But

of Quiefcence.
is jailing

from

if

we

cha-

its

if

we

fay,

Ceiling, the

a Character

fay, that

Lamp

the Ceiling, the Prepofi-

tion in fuch cafe aflumcs a Character

Motion.

So

in Milton,

Tofupport
Over

of

uneafie Steps

the burning

Marie

Par. L.

I.

Here over denotes Motion.

Again

H ERM

268

Ch.HI.

S.

Again

Hewith
Hung over

tions

of cordial Love

her enamour

Here over denotes

But

looks

Par. L. IV,

Reft.

though the original ufe of Prepofi-

was

to denote the Relations

of Place,

they could not be confined to this Office

They by

only.

degrees extended them-

felves to Subjects incorporeal,

denote Pvelaticns,

above, has

him, who

and
a

commonly

is

under

King we

of a

well intellectual as

as

Thus, becaufe

local.

is

the advantage over

he ruled
Soldier,

fuch a General.
;

who

we

transfer

over

Dominion and Obedience; of

fay,

common

Thought

in Place he,

below, hence
to

and came to

over

his People;

he ferved

So too we

without Attention

under

fay,' %-ith
;

thinking

over a Subject; under Anxiety ;from Fear;

cut of

Love ; through

Jealoufy, &c.

All

which inAances, with many others of

like

kind,

kind,

Book the Second.

mew that thzjirji Words of

269

Men, q^

had an immediate

like their Jirjl Ideas,

reference to fenfible ObjeSls, and that in afterdays,

when

their Intellect,

they began to difcern with

they took thofe Words,

which they found

transferred

them by metaphor
There

tual Conceptions.

Method
this

made,

already

to exprefs

new

is

and

to intellec-

indeed no

Ideas, but either

of Metaphor , or that of Coining new

Words, both which have been practifed

by Philofophers and wife Men, according to the nature, and exigence of the
occafion (d).
In,

(d)

Among

the "Words

new

to Anaxagorasy 'Opoiofxiasix,
Cicero, ^ualitas;

r
Stoics,

the

OuTi?,

Words

coined

to Plat o, TLoiomsi to

to Ariftotle,

xt^ocTiq,

transferred

'EuliXi^iix;

and many

others.

we may afcribe

to the Pythagoreans and Peripatetics,

;

to

to the

Among;

by Metaphor from common to

fpecial Meanings, to the Platonics

KctrvtyocETv

we may afcribe

the Stoics,
',

Ka-rccATuj/jf,

x9ffco>j to the PyrrboniJ?s i E;?i,

liiot

Konnyo^nn, and
uiroA?nJ/is,

IvSi^rx:, trrs^u,

&c.

And

ttj^

HERMES.

27

In the foregoing ufe of Prepofitions,

Ch.III.

we have

feen
by

B-upudeo-tv,

how

they are applied xa-ra

way of Juxta-pojitioft,

to fay, where they are prefixt to a

that

is

Word,
with-

And here I cannot but obferve, that

be

who

pretends

to difcufs the Sentiments of any one of thefe Philosophers, or even to cite and tranflate

him (except

in trite

and obvious Sentences) without accurately knowing

Tongue in general the nice differences of

Words
apparently fynonymrius ; the peculiar
many

the Greek

Stile of the

whom

Author

he prefumes to handle

the

new coined Words, and new Significations given to

old Words, ufed by fuch Authoi, and his Sectj the
whole Philofophy of fuch Seel:, together with the Connections and Dependencies of its feveral Parts, whether Logical, Ethical, or Phyfical
this previous

without

have

faid, will

He

petual blunders

will explain,
;

and

Man, will

wife ever pafs for a Fool.

and cenfure

may

poflibly to

hends a diflant Profpe.

among the
Man's Intellect:
his Eye compre-

certainly

Such

comprehends antient Philofophy,

as

He may fee

perhaps enough,

know Mountains from Plains, and

Woods but for an accurate difccrnment

to

..

and their character,

ipoflible

praife,

and though he

Fools appear as a wife

i:

what

(hoot in the dark} will be liable to per-

merely by chance

lars,

I fay y that,

preparation, attempts

this

he (hould attain.

Seas from

of particu-

without farther helps,

it

Book the Second.

without becoming a Part of

may

be ufed alio kxto,

Compofition, that

is,

But they Ch.III.

it.

by tvay of

<rwQe<riv,

they

271

may be

prefixt to

Word, fo as to become a real Part of

Thus in Greek we have 'Eirfcourdatt,
it (<?).
a

in Latin, Intelligere, in Eng/iJJj, to

So

jiand.

to

alfo,

undervalue, to

Under ~

foretel, to overact, to

<?z//g"<?,

&c. and in Greek and

In

Latin, other inftances innumerable.

commonly transfufe fomething of their own Meaning into

the Word, with which they are compounded ; and this imparted Meaning in
this cafe thePrepofitions

moft inftances will be found ultimately

refolvable into

Place, (f)

fome of the Relations of

as ufed either in its

proper

or metaphorical acceptation.

Lastly,

()

(/")

and

See Gaz. Gram. L. IV. Cap. de Prsepofitione,

For example,

Ex

from beginning

let

us fuppofe fome given Space.

fignify out of'that

Space

Per,

to end; In, within it;

throug

it,

Sub, under

it.

Hence

'

v^

272

Ch.III.

^~*mmJ

Lastly,

E R

S.

there are times, when Prepo-

connective Nature,

iitions totally lofe their

being

Hence then E and Per.

m compofition augment; Enor-

mis, fomething notfimplybig,but big inexcefs;

fome-

thing got out of the rule, and beyond the meafure; Dicoy
to [peak

Edico, to /peak out

whence Edifium, an

Edicl, fomething to effectually fpoken, as

pofed to hear, and

all

Dicoy Edico vobis

which

(as

Avri<ri;*

Donaius
Fari,

So

to obey.

Eun. V.

tells

us in his

to fpeak;

all

are fup-

Terence,

5.

20.

Comment)

Effari, tofpeak out-

is

an

hence

Effatum, an Axiom, or: felf-evident Proportion, fomething addreffed as

univerfal Afferit.
utllis,

On

it

were to

Cic.

Acad.

all

II.

men, and

calling for

29. Permagnus,

Per-

great throughout, ufeful through every part.

the contrary,

In and Sue diminifh and

leffen,

hijujlus, Iniquus, unjujl, inequitable, that lies within

Juftice and Equity, that reaches not {o

far,

that falls

fh:rt of them; Subnigcr, blackifi, Subrubicundus^ reddijh; tending to black, and tending to red, but yet

undir the ftandard, and below perfection.

Emo

originally fignified

to fignify

to

his purchafe.

to

take aivay, hence

buy, becaufe he,

who

Inter, Between,

it

buys, takes

came
away

implies Difcontinu-

ance7

Book the Second.

Adverbs, and ufed Ch.III.

beinp- converted into

Thus Homer

in Syntax accordingly.

TeXcr<re

And

<5s

273

-wava,

y$uv.

sregt

Earth fmird

all around.

T. 362.

IA.

But of this we have fpcken

in a preceding

however obferve, before we rinilh this Chapter> which is, that whatever we may be
told of Cases in modern Languages,

One

Chapter (g).

we

thing

there are in fad: no fuch things

force and

power

is

mu'ft

expreft by

but their

two

Me-

thods,

ance, for in things continuous there can nothing lie

between.
that
by

is

From

to fay,

thefe

To take a

two comes,

Man aivay

making a Difcontinuance of

alfo

Perimo,

to kill

avjay thoroughly

2.

Man,

for

that

is

'Avxic'Tv,

and the

Prepofitions

So
him

indeed what more thorough

EngliJJ)

p.

of Life,

to fay, to take

The

Greek Verb,

Verb, To take

allufion.

And

thus

become Parts of other Words.

(g) See before,

to kill,

Energy.

bis vital

taking away can well be fuppofed

both to carry the fame

Interimo,

in the midfl

205.

off,
it is

feem
that

HERMES.

274-

Ch.III.

thods, either by Situation, or by Prepo/itions

the Nominative

by Situation;
this

we

Chapter

J3y

But

and Accufative Cafes

the rejl y

by Prepofitions.

make

the Subject of a

mall

itfelf,

concluding here our

Inquiry concerning Prepofitions.

CHAP.

Book the Second,

CHAP.

275

IV,

Concerni?ig Cafes.

AS
partly

Cases, or

at leaft their various

Powers, depend on the knowledge

of Noilns,

partly of Prepofitions
ferved,

thofe

till

of Verbs, and

partly
;

they have be^n re-

Parts of Speech had

been examined and difcufTed, and are for

made

that reaibn

the Subject of fo late a

Chapter, as the prefent.

There

are

no Cases

in the

modern

Languages, except a few among the primitive Pronouns, fuch as

and

Moy

I,

and

from Lion, we form Lions

From

Je,

and the Englijh Genitive,

formed by the addition of

Ship's.

Me

this defect

s,
;

as

when

from Ship,

however we may

be enabled to difcover in fome infbnces

what a Cafe

is,

the Periphrafis, which iup-

plies

Ch-IV.
L*-v~ uJ

276
Ch.IV.
*- r~*~M-J

E R

Thus Equi

unfolded.

val,

To

that the

S,

being the Cafe (as

plies its place,

Cheval,

Of the

Horfe,

is

it

were)

analized into

Equo

into

Au

Du

Che-

And hence we fee

Genitive and Dative Cases
the Horfe.

imply the joint Power of a Noun and

Prepcfition, the Genitive's Prepofition

be-

ing A, De, or Ex, the Dative's Prepofition being

Ad, or

We have

Ferfus.

not this afTifrance as to the

Accusative, which

modern Lan-

in

guages (a few inftances excepted)

is

known from

to fay,

its

pofition, that

by being fubfequent

to

its

is

only

Verb, in the

collocation of the words.

The Vocative we
little ufe,

pafs over

being not only

modern Languages, but

tient

from

unknown

its

to the

often in the an-

being fupplied by the Nominative*

The Ablative

likewiie was ufed

by

tht Romans only ; a Cafe they feem to have

adopted

Book the Second.

V7

with their Prepo/itions, Ch.IV.

adopted

to officiate

as they

had deprived

their Genitive

Dative of that privilege

and

a Cafe certainly

not necefiary, becaufe the Greeks do as

well without

and becaufe with the

it,

Romans themfelves

it is

frequently undif-

tinguifhed.

There

remains

which whether

much

difputed

ripatetics

held

it

to be

the Noun, in this

Form,

were a Cafe or no, was

by the

it

Nominative,

the

Antients.

no

Cafe,

The Pe-

and likened

primary and original

its

to a perpendicular Line, fuch for

example,

as the line

AB.

The Variations from the Nominative, they

confidered as if A B were to fall from its
perpendicular, as for example, to

AD.

Hence then they only

A C,

or

called thefe

Varb-

zyZ
Cfr.IV.
v

v~
'

E R

Variations, irfXlSEIX,

Fallings. The

S.

Casus, Cases, or

Stoics

on the contrary,

and the Grammarians with them, made the

Nominative a Case aTo. Words they con fidered (as

it

were)

or difcurjme Faculty.
fell

thence in

its

to fallfrom

the

Mind,

Now when a Noun

primary Form, they then

Casus rectus, AN ERECT, or UPRIGHT CASE Or

Falling, fuch as AB, and by this name

called

it

iTTXU'IS OP0H,

they diftinguifhed the Nominative.

it

fellfrom the

tions, as for

nitive,

Mind under any of its

example

in the

When
varia-

form of a Ge-

a Dative, or the like, fuch varia-

tions they called

LTTXISEIS nAAriAI,CA-

SUS OBL1QUI, OBLIQUE CASES, Or SIDE-

AC, or AD) in
oppofition to the other (that is AB) which
was erect and perpendicular (a). Hence

LONG FALLINGS

(fuch as

Method of
enumerating the various Cafes of a Noun,
KA1EIE, Declinatio, a Declension,
too

Grammarians

called the

it

[a) See Ainmon. in Libr. de Interpr. p. 35.

Book the Second.

279

of progrejjive T)efcent from Ch.IV.

*~*r^
the Noun's upright Form thro' its 'various
it

being a

fort

declining

Forms, that

AB,

AC, AD,

Of

to

thefe

four, that

the

the

a Defccnt

is,

&c.

Cases we mall

is

to fay, the

Accusative,
Dative.

It has been

from

the

treat

but of

Nominative,

Genitive, and

faid already in the

preced-

ing Chapter, that the great Objects of

natural

Union

tribute.

are

Substance and At-

Now from

this

Natural Con-

cord arife s the Logical Concord of Subject

and Predicate, and the Grammatical

Concord of Subs t an tive and Attribu-

Thefe Concords

Speech
produce Propositions and Sentences,
tive

(b).

in

Concord in Nature
naturalBeings. This being

as that previous

produces

(b)

admitted,

See before,

p,

264.

HERMES.

s8o

Ch.IV. admitted, we proceed by obferving, that

when

a Sentence

Nature

regular and orderly,

is

s Subftance,

the Logician

and the Grammarian

SubjeBp

Subftantive are all

denoted by that Cafe, which

we

call

the

For example, Caesar

Nominative.

pugnat, JEs jingitur, Dom'us cedificatur.

We may remark too by the way, that the
Character of this Nominative may be learnt
from

its

The

Attributive.

in pugnat,

(hews

its

Action implied

Nominative Cjesar

to be an Active efficient Caufe

fi

on implied

in Jingitur,

mews

the Paf-

its

Nomi-

native JEs to be a Paffive Subject, as dees

the Paffion in adiftcatur prove

Domus

to

be an Effect.

As

therefore every Attributive

as far as pofTible

conform

itfelf to its

fiantive,

fo for this reafon,

Cafes,

imitates

it

its

QUENS

VlTIUM

when

Sub-

it

has

Subftantive, and ap-

pears as a Nominative alio.

in fuch inflances as

would

So

Cicero

eft

we
eft

find

it

elo-

TURPE; HoMO eft

ANIMAL,

Book the Second.

When

animal, &c.
(as

it

happens with Verbs)

content

281

has no Cafes,
it

is

forced to

with fuch affimilations

itfelf

as it

Number and Perfon * as

when we fay, Cicero loquitur ; nos
LOQUIMUR; HOMINES LOQUUNTUR.
has, thofe of

From what
make

has been

faid,

the following obfervations

we

may-

that as

there can be no Sentence without a Subftantive, fo that Subfcantive, if the Sen-

tence be regular,

Nominative

is

always denoted by a

that on this occafion all the

that have Cafes, appear as

Attributives,

Nominatives alfo

that there may be a

re-

gular and perfect Sentence without any of

the other Cafes, but that without one

native at leaf, this

Kence

therefore

is

utterly impoffible.

we form its Character and

the Nominative

Defcription
Cafe, without

Nomi-

is

that

which there can be no regular

What

fort

fee before, p.

of

Number and

170, 17

r.

Perfon Verbs have,

Ch.IV.

22
Ch.lV. Jar
*****

(c)

E R

and perfect

S.

We arc

Sentence,

now

to fearch after another Cafe.

When

the Attributive in any Sentence

fome Verb denoting Aclion, we may be

is

a fib red

aaive

the principal Subjlantive

efficient

Achilles and

Lyfppus

Achilles vulneravit,

though

this

its

call

in fuch Sentences as

Lyfippus

But

fecit.

be evident and clearly under-

Mind is

flood, the

feme

we may

So

Caufe.

is

ftill

infujpencc, and finds

conception incomplete.

Action,

it

well

knows, not only requires fome Agent, but

it

muft have

it

mufl produce fome

a Subject alfo to

work

on, and

It is

then to

EffeSl.

denote one of thefe (that

is,

the Subject

or the Eject J that the Authors of

Language

(c )

We

have added regular as well as perfefl, be-

cause there

may be

irregular Sentences,

be perfect without a Nominative.

Of

this

which may
kind are

ail

Sentences, made out of thofe Verbs, called by the

Sides
a$

n.ccc(.<rv[Jt.Qc>.[ACiTa,

2wxpaTi

/xET/L*Ar>,

before, p. 180.

or

Tia.pa.y.ccTr yoc?ifA(x.TOc 3
l

Socratem fcenitet^

Sic.

(uch

See

Book the Second.

guage have deftined

the Accusative. Ch.IV.

here the

Achilles vubieravit II e c tor e

Accusative denotes the Subject.

fecit

statu as

283

Lyfippus

here the Accufative

By thefe additional
Mind becomes fatisfied,

denotes the Effect*

Explanations the

and the Sentences acquire

which before they wanted.

other

manner, whether

Perfection,

In whatever

figuratively,

or

may have

with Prepofitions,

this

been ufed,

deftination feems to

its

firft.

Cafe

have been that here mentioned, and hence

therefore

we

form

(hall

Defcription*-the

its

Character and

Accusative

that

is

efficient

Nominathe and

a Verb of Atlion fubjoins

either the Effect

Cafe, which

to

an

or the paffive Subjecl.

We

have

left

frill

the Genitive and the Dative, which

we

inveftigate, as follows.

It has been
ter (d), that

faid in the

when

preceding Chap-

the Places of the

No-

minative

{d) See before, p. 265.

HERMES.

284
Ch.IV.

and the Accufative are

initiative

filled

by

proper Subfhmtives, other Subftantives are

annexed by the help of Prepofitions.

though

this

be fo

far true in the

Now,

modern

Languages, that (a very few inftances excepted) they

is

know no

other method; yet

not the rule of equal latitude with re-

fpec~t to

the Latin or Greek, and that from

reafons

which we

Among
ftantives

are about to offer.

the various Relations of Sub-^

denoted by Prepofitions, there

appear to be two principal ones; and tbefe

are, the 'Term or Point,

which fome thing

commences from, and the Term or Point,

which fomething tends to. Thefe Relations the Greeks and Lathis

thought of fo

great importance, as to diftinguiih them,

when
tions

force,

they occurred, by peculiar Termina-

of their own, which expreft their

without the help of a Prepofitioiu

Now it is

here

we

behold the Rife of the

antient Genitive, and Dative, the

tive

being

formed

Geni-

to exprefs all Relations

com-

Book the Second.

commencing

from

285

the Dative, Ch.IV.

to it/elf. Of this -^"v

itfelf-,

all Relations tending

there can be no ftronger proof, than the

modern

Analyfis of thefe Cafes in the

we have mentioned

Languages, which
already (^).

It
in

Greek

thee
s,

on thefe Principles that they fay

is

Aeo^a/

ajk,

SOT, #yp ZOI, Of

To thee I give. The reafon

whom

fomething

expected from

is

donations, the perfon prefented,

whom

fomething paries

nsTrotijTcu

(f)

xtt'd,

it

Stone was the paffive

it

one

in requefts the perfon requefted is

to.

in

is

one

So again

made of Stone.
Subject, and thus
is

appears in the Genitive, as being the

'Term from, or out of which.

Latin, where the Syntax

and

ftrict,

we

read

is

Even

in

more formal

Implentur

(e)

See before,

p.

275, 276.

(f) XgviToZ sinroiYipivo<;, *) iXitpocvloq, made of'Gold

and Ivory. So fays Paufanias of the Olympian "Jupiter^
,.

V.

p.

400.

See

alfo

Horn. Iliad. 2. 574.

"""""'

HERMES.

286
Ch.IV.

hnplentur veteris Bacchi, pinguifque feVirg.

rine?,

The old Wine and

or ftores, of or
filled.

Upon

v^ocroq,

is

Venifon were the funds

from which they were

the fame principles,

Phrafe in Greek

and Je

de i'eau, a Phrafe in French, as

to fay,

or

I take feme

out of

rS

Ylivoo

bois

much

as

from

or a certain party

a certain whole.

When we meet in Language fuch Genitives as the Son of a

of a Son

Father

the Picture of a Painter

Painter of a Piclure, &c. thefe are

*

Father

the

all

the

Re-

l at ives, and therefore each of them reciprocally a

from

or

Term

or Point to the other,

out of which

fence, or at

leaffc its

it

derives

its

Ef-

IntelleBion (g).

The

(g) All Relatives are

faid to reciprocate,

or mutually

infer each other, and therefore they are often expreft

this Cafe, that is to fay, the
licHCla.

Si

rx

zrcos

ti

Genitive.

zfpo$

by

Thus AriJlotley

ufiirpi^ovlix,

AtysTau,
010*

Book the Second.

The
is

Dative, as

employed among

the
to

implies Tendency

it

other ufes to denote

that being the

thus ufed in the follow-

faid to tend.

It

ing instances,

among innumerable

is

TiBiJuaveis dcedala
Submit tit jlores

Tib
S corplus

Caufe

may be

Events, not fortuitous,

all

to,

others.

tellus

L u cret.

brachia contrahit ardens

Virg.G.

I.

TiBiJerviat ultima Thuk.

Ibid.

And
and Uie

fo
;

much

for

Cases,

their Origin

a Sort of Forms, or

Terminations,

TTOTQS \iyt-oci
eiovy

>c,

to

iivtx.1, x,

ri[Aicrv

to nrXzTiov

(JWAatna

Yipio-v.

junt ad aliquid) refer untur ad

TJt

ri[jA<ri!f

Omnia

ei dominus-,

nccnon duplum, dimidii duplutn;

dupli dimidium.

Categor.

JWA-

vero^ quce

ea, qu<s rcclprocantur.

fcrvus dicitur domini fervus;

minus

Ch.IV,

wv
"'

its

Pinal Cause,

which

2S7

C VII.

ct

fervl do-

dunidium,

'""-^

HERMES.

238
Ch.IV.

tions,

which we could not well

from their great importance

pafs over,

() both in

the Greek and Latin Tongues; but

which

however, not being among the ErTentials

of Language, and therefore not to be
found

in

many

particular Languages, can

be hardly faid to

fall

within the limits of

our Inquiry.

(h) Annon

et

illud obfervatione

dignum

(licet nobis

mideniis fpiritus tionnihil redundot) antiquas Linguas

plenas dedinationum, cafuum^ conjugation^:^
juijje

modernas,

pojitiones et

his fere de/iitutas^

et fundi urn

plunma per pr<z-

verba auxiliaria fegnitcr exptdire ? Sane

facile quis conjiciat (utcanque nobis

genia priorum feculorum noftris

et fubriliora.

ipfi

placeamus) in-

fuiffe

multo acutiora

Bacon, de Augm, Scient. VI.

i.

CHAP.

Book the Second.

CHAP.
Concerning Interjections

289

V.

Recapitulation

Conclufion.

BESIDES

the Parts of Speech before

mentioned, there remains

Greeks are *l,

v
Ai, Sec.

among
Sec. among

<X>eu,

Ah! Hen I Hei !

Englifh, Ah! Alas! Fie!

Latins,

improperly,

verbial Nature,

it

we

the

Adthe Ad-

their

confider

which always co-incides

with fome Verb,

which

if

the

Thefe

&c.

among

the Greeks have ranged

verbs

Of this Kind among the

ter jection.

as

its

Principal, and to

always ferves in the character of

an Attributive.

Now

Interjections

Tart of Speech, hut are

uttered alone, or elfe thrown into a

CQ-incide with no
either

Sentence, without altering

in

Syntax or

feem therefore

its

Form,

Signification.

The

either

Latins

to have done better in

-j-

fc*

pa rating

Vid% Sgrvium in

Mneid XII.

v,

Ch. V.

the In- **"

486,

HERMES.

290

Ch. V. parating them by themfelves, and giving

them a name by way of diftindtion from
the

reft.

Should
what then

it

be afk'd,

are they

It

if

not Adverbs,

may be

anfwered,

not fo properly Parts of Speech, as adventitious Sounds;

Voices of

certain

Nature,

rather than Voices of Art,

expreffing

thofe

and

Paffions

natural

Emotions, which fpontaneoufly

human

the

Soul,

arife

upon the View or NarEvents {a),

rative of interefting

"

(a)

dem de

tits,

iist

quando cafum regunt.

Et

vix videntur

o.d clajfem

inflituto Jignificant.

Terjhctio

eji

Sed quando

exircma-,

oration:

me-

aliquam pertinere, ut qua.

vocum

non, aliarum

VofT.de

A nsl.

L.I.

Interjectio.

c'.

3.

Hujus

injlary

In-

c. I.

Fox affectum mentisJtgnificans^

verbi opemfententiSm ccmplcr.s. Ibid.

ftum

refe-

retle qui-

not a affcius^velat fufpirii aut

HATURALE3j~r:i notj'E
ex

And

Interjectiones a Greets ad Adverbia

runtar^ atque eosfequitur ci'iam Bocthius.

folum ihfertfntwr, ut

in

ac citra

Rejiat claf-

atfelL'tio

non

fimi*

Book the Second.

2gi

"

And thus we have found that all Ch. V.

" Words are either significant
" by themselves, or only signifi" CANT,
U2
Nam cum

fimilitcrfe habet ac Conjunclionis.

catur Conjunttio, quia conjungat

quia interjacet, fed quia

Nee tamen

de '<n ejus

hac di-

Interjeclio tamen,

non

interjicitur, nornen accepiti

eji,

ut interjiciatur

cum per fe.

eompleat fententiam, nee raro ab ed incipiat oratio. Ibid.

L. IV.

c.

Interjectionem non effe parte?n

: Quod naturale eft, idem eji apud

28.

Orationisfic ojlendo

emnes : Sed gemitus

ties :

& figna latitia idemfunt apud om~

Sunt igitur naturales.

Nam

partes Orationis.

ea

Si vera naturales, nonfunt

partes, fecundinn Arijlote-

lem, ex injiituto, non naturd, debent confiare.

iionem

Graci Adverbiis adnumerant ;

neque,

&c.

Sandt. Miner.

tionem Graci

L.

Nam

fedfalfo.

c. 2.

I.

Interjec-

Interjec-

inter Adverbia ponunt, quoniam hac.

quoque vel adjungitur verbis, vel verba eifubaudiuntur.

Ut fi dicam

Papas

quid video

Miror

etiamfi non addatur,

fignificationem,

Qua

res

velper fe

Papae

habet infe ipjius verbi

maximc fecit Romanarum ar-

tium Script ores feparatim banc partem ah Adverbiis accipere

quia videtur affeclum habere in fefe Verbi, et

plenam motus animi fignificationem, etiamfi non addatur

Virbum, demonjlrare.

qua

dicunt

voces,

Interjeclio

Graci ir^Thixa-fAov,

tamen non folum

fignificat

fed etiam

qua cujufcunque paffionis animi pulfu per

mationem

inter] iciuntur,

Prifc;

L.

XV,

ilia,

excla-

HERMES.

29a

Ch. V. " CANT,

WHEN ASSOCIATED^- that thofe

mfelves, denote either

or Attributes, and are
" called fir that reafon Substantives
" and Attributives
that the Sub" Jlanthes are either Nouns or Pronouns
"
that the Attributives are either
" Primary or Secondary
that the
I

fignificant

by

t he

" Substances

II

Primary Attributives are

either

Verbs,

"Participles, or Adjectives;
" Secondary, Adverbs Again, that

the

"
<f

when

af-

Definitives

or

Pai-ts of Speech, only fignificant

fociated,

are

either

the

" Connectives that the Definitives are

w either Articular ^Pronominal
" and that

the Conneclives are either

" positions

or

Pre-

Conjunctions."

And thus havewerefolvedLANGUAGE,

as a Whole into its constituent
Parts, which was

the

fir/ft

thing, that

we

propofed, in the dourfe of this Inquiry (b).

But

(b)

See before,

p. 7

Book the Secokd.

But now

we

293

conclude, methinks

Ch. V.
v-
hear fome Objector, demanding with an ~
air

as

of pleafantry, and ridicule

" no /peaking then without

" Do we
11

"

Is there

all this trouble?

not talk every one of us, as well

unlearned, as learned; as well poor

Pea-

?"

We

"Jants, as profound Philfbphers

may anfwer by

Do

interrogating on our part

not thofe fame poor Peafunts vSq

the Levar and the

Wedge, and many

other Inftruments, with

readinefs

And

much

habitual

yet have they any con-

ception of thofe Geometrical Principles,

from which thofe Machines derive

Efficacy and Forcer

And

is

their

the Ignorance

of thefe Peafants, a reafon for others to

remain ignorant j or to render the Subject

a

lefs

becoming Inquiry

Think of Ani-

mals, and Vegetables, that occur every

day

of Time, of Place, and of Motion

of Light, of Colours, and of Gravitation

of

our very Senfes and Intellect,

by which we perceive every thing

elfe

That

HERMES.

294
Ch. V.

That

perfectly fatisned

*-**

a Subject of

Were we to
caufe we are
all

world

(c).

But

know, and

all

What

much

they

are

are, is

obfcurity and doubt.

reject this laft Queflion,

certain of the

be-

we mould

firft,

Philofophy at once out of the

banifh

tc

we

they are,

a graver Objector

What

he)

(fays

" Whence

now

the

is

accofls us.

Utility

where the" Gain ?"

the Profit >

Every Science whatever (we may anfwer) has

Arithmetic

Uie.

its

is

excellent

(f) 'AAA' if zroXX tZv

ofijov, a, rr\v

p\v VTrapfyv

^vj yvu)oi[A(tiTctTyv } dytUfOTCcTriu t rnv atriav' utnrtp

JlTf

Xivrt(ng y

'Ejtara

Xj

tokos,

yap tutcm to

&

t*

(a\v eii/ou

pccA\ov

%povog

yvcopipov X; ai>a/x>i-

Xtxrov' rig $1 tct if iv dvTccy n ao*<a, twi> %a.Xt7rcotcctuw ooa^rniQii.

to

[Atv

yap avxi

''Ej-

<$ JV/

t/ tccv tquituv x)

tj

tl tt\v yu^V/V, yvupipuTOiTov

VipUTO-TCV

fl

*AKt%xva*.

'Atppoo*.

St

TSOTt

lflV }

TLtp\

feSlOV

'
4/U PC^^ B

P*

4/UPC

*
,]

<pct-

XOt.TOLptt.VUV*
J

4 2,

Book the Second.

lent for the gauging of Liquors

metry,

for

the meafuring

Aftronomy, for the

nacks

and

295
;

Geo- Ch. V.

of Eftates

making of Alma-

Grammar

perhaps, for the

drawing of Bonds and Conveyances.

If the

Liberal afk for fomething better

than

Thus much
this,

the

to the Sordid

we may anfwer and allure them from

belt,

authorities, that every Exercife

of the Mind upon Theorems of Science,

like generous

and manly Exercife of the

Body, tends to

call forth

Nature's original Vigour.

and ftrengthen

Be the Sub-

ject itfelf immediately lucrative or not,

the Nerves of Reafon are braced by the

mere

Employ, and we become abler

Actors in the

Drama

of Life, whether

our Part be of the bufier, or of the fedater kind.

Perhaps

HERMES.

tg6

Ch V.

Perhaps

too there

Science itfelf diftinct

which

it

may

a Tleafure even

is

in

from any End, to

Are

be farther conducive.

not Health and Strength of Body defirable

own

for their

fakes, tho'

we happen

to be fated either for Porters or

And have
Mind their

intrinfic

condemned

to the
?

a Good (could

it) in

tellect ,

as

degree

Good

Worth

alfo, tho'

low drudgery of

Why

not

fordid

fhould there not be

we have

the Grace to re-

the mere "Energy of our In-

much as in Energies of lower

The Sportfman believes there is

in his

Chace

in his Intrigue;

We

M^al.

Draymen;

not Health and Strength of

Emolument
cognize

not

the

Man

of Gaiety,

even the Glutton, in his

may juftly

they purfue fuch things

why

afk of thefe,

but if they an -

fwer, they purfue them, becaufe they are

Good,
ther,
Jt

it

would be

why

they

might well

folly to afk

pursue

in

ivbat

them
is

far-

Good.

fuch cafe be replied on

their

Book the Second.

(how

their behalf

ftrange foever

at firft appear) that if there

thing

Good, which was

was

297

may Ch. V.

it

not fome-

~~"mmJ

use-

in no refpecf

ful, even things ufeful themfehes could not

pojjibly

have

no more than
are

things are

tion was,

what

what

that which

ther

it

fa&

fome things

Means, and

e/fe,

is

the

Good
is

but for

Grand Quefthat

is

to fay,

defirable> not

for

itfelf\

for

whe-

be the Chace, or the Intrigue, or

the Meal,

Men

in

Means.

It mould feem then

fomething

is

were no Ends, there could

be of courfe no

is

this

to aflert, that

Ends, fome

that if there

For

exiftence*

may be

fairly queftioned, fince

in each inftance are far

from being

agreed.

In the mean time

it is

plain

from

daily

experience, there are infinite Pleafures,

Amufements, and Diverfions, fome

for

Summer,

for

others for

Winter; fome

Country,

HERMES.

29B

Ch. V. Country, others

indolent,
active,

and

for

foft

and rough;

Town

others,

for the time are

perfect Good,

enjoyed as

boifterous,

multitude diverfified

which

to every tafte, and

fome, eafy,

-,

without a

thought of any End, that may be farther

obtained.

at

Some Objects of

times fought by

all

this

kind are

men, excepting

alone that contemptible Tribe, who, from

Means of life wholly forget-

a love to the
ting

its

End, are truly

for that reafon,

called Mifers, or Miferable.

I f there

be fuppofed then a Pleafure,

a Satisfaction, a Good, a Something valu-

able for

its felf

farther, in fo

dinate kind

without view to any thing

many Objects of the fuborfhall we not allow the fame

praife to the fub/imefi of all Objects? Shall

the Intellect
in

its

Energy,

alone feel no pleafures

hen we allow them

grofleft Energies

to the

of Appetite, and Senfe?

Or if the Reality of all Pleafures and Goods

4

were

Book the Second.

were

to

299

be controverted, may not the In- Ch. V,

tclkblual Sort be defended, as rationally as

any of them

Whatever may be urged

we are
them) we may fafety

behilf of the
arraigning

reft

(for

Intellectual Good,

that

which

*'

Good of

*'

cellent within us; that

that Part,

now

affirm

it is

is

of

" the

moll; ex-

Good acand Times

it is

commodated to all Places

u which neither depends on

*'

not

in

-,

the will of

" others, nor on the afrluence of external

Good, which de-

*'

Fortune; that

"

cays not with decaying Appetites, but

f(

often rifes in vigour,

f*

more

it is

when

thofe are

no

(d)."

There

we muft own,
between this Intelletiual Virtue, and Moral Virtue. Moral Virtue, from its
Employment, may be called more Human,
is

a Difference,

{d) See Vol.

I.

p. 119, 120,

&c.

HERMES.

30O

Ch. V. man, as it tempers our Appetites to the

*^
purpofes of human Life.
But Intel-

'

lectual Virtue may be furely called

more Divine, if we confider the Nature
and Sublimity of

Indeed

for

its

End.

Moral

Virtue, as

it is

al-

moft wholly converfant about Appetites,

and Affections, either

to reduce the na-

tural ones to a proper

Mean, or

expel the unnatural and vitious,

any work of

for fuch
this

Yet

attention.

would
to

an Habit, or that

kind fhould

God

it

the Deity

be impious to fuppofe

have occafion

tota]ly to

Is,

call for his

and Lives.

So

we are aflured from Scripture it felf.

What then may we fuppofe the Divine
Life
Fables

to

be?

tell

Not

a Life of Sleep, as

us of Endymion.

If

we may

be allowed then to conjecture with a be-

coming

reverence,

what more

likely,

than

AperpetualEnergyofthe purest
Intellect about the first, allcomprehensive

Book the Second.

301

comprehensive objects of intel- ch. v.

lection, which objects are no *v

other than that intellect itSELF

For

Intellection

pure

in

holds the reverfe of

all

it

Senfdtion, that

THE PERCEIVER AND THING PERCEIVED are always one 'and the
SAME (<?).
It

a.Uy Sxvy.xru)/'

Wdf,

yfja,

W?T

xaO' auTJiv,

>t,

*Em7nog

o-v]/t%rig

Xy ccihog

Twv

able in Scripture that

A Living God,

ginary Deities, of

Life at

all

Jf,

rx

*i TZ-QTi, Q

x^n

<pv<r"

God

15

is

yxg Ns

15

Qxpiv

Je

Oslo

&>$"

It

is

than illuftrious

yxg

remarkand ima-

fome had no pretenfions to

others to none higher than that of

tables or Brutes

XiUV

peculiarly characterized

in oppofition to all falfe

whom

>^

TOTTO

A'. ' .

EJ/fP-

ivseytix 1

*? x\$io$.

f0i/*

0OJ

^oivuxtnarepo^*

Wipyux'

7)

virx^u tw

[Atx

tri

U7T^l

"}/

dlSlQVy

u)0!>

w?

pxAAov,

oon

Eitjjva

JJ/ai

EOS.

31

C,W?1

TCV 01/

as

t^h

tl XV HTUq VJ

e)

Vege-

and the beft were nothing better

Men, whofe

scribed by the fhort period of

exiftence

was circum-

Humanity.

To

HERMES.

%oz
p

Jt was

Ch. V.

cerning

Speculation of this kind con-

the Divine Nature, which

induced one of the wifeft among the

Antients to believe

"

That

Man>

the

"

who could live in the pure enjoyment

" of his Mind, and who properly culti" vated that divine Principle, was happiejl

"

" For
" what

Gods had any regard to

among Men (as it appeared

the

if

paft

" they had)

"

and mojl beloved by the Gods.

in himfelfy

was probable they mould

it

which was moji

excellentt

" and by nature the mojl nearly

allied tb

rejoice in that

"

themj'ehes

'

that they

and, as

-,

mould

Mind,
Man, who

was

this

requite the

" moll loved and honoured This, both

" from his regard to that which was
" dear

To

the pafTage above quoted, mayi be atlJeJ an-

other, which immediately precedes

c vug y.a.rz y.STa,\r tyiv
:

StyUvuv

*}

.vqW ure

NORTON*.

ra uovth'

it.

vjjjto?

Avw*
yap

St vos7

yivirotij

TAT TON NOT 2

K.AI

Book the Second.

<c

303

dear to themfelves, and from his at- Ch. V.

" ing a Part, which was laudable and

"

right (/)."

And

thus in

Science

there

is

becaufe

it

fomething which

is

all

fomething valuable for

contains within

it

it/elf,

divine*

(/")

'H?j>4'

End

Nixopoix' t

of the

K\

xi<p. n-

Second Book,

HER-

*^v-^->

35

HERMES
OR A PHILOSOPHICAL INQUIRY
CONCERNING UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR.

BOOK

III.

"

mm

'

CHAR
Introduction

Divi/ion of the Subject into

principal Parts,

its

OME

I.

things the

Mind

performs

Body; as for example,

various Works and Energies of

thro' the

the

Art.

Others

Medium ;
and

it

as for

reafons,

performs without fuch

example,

when

and concludes.

the Mind, in either cafe,

it

thinks,

Now

may be

tho*

called

the Principle or Source, yet are thefe

laft

more

Ch.

HER M E

3 oS

Ch.

I.

more properly

its

own

S.

peculiar Acls, as

being immediately referable to

innate Powers.

And

mately the Caufe of all

leafl:

that

is

Mind

own
ulti-

of every thing at

Fair and Gsod.

is

Among
mediately

thus

its

thofe Acts of

its

own,

Mind more im-

that of mental Separa-

may be

well reckoned one. Corporeal

Separations,

however accurate otherwife,

tion

are in one refpect incomplete, as they

be repeated without end.

Limb, fevered from the

cule (if

we

The

fmallefl

may

fmallefl

Animal-

could fuppofe any inflrument

equal to fuch direction) has

ftill

a triple

Extenfion of length, breadth, and thicknefs

-,

has a figure, a colour, with perhaps

many other

qualities;

and fo will continue

to have, tho' thus divided to infinity.

(d) the

Mind furmounts

all

But

power of Concretion,

(a)

It a que

Separatio

Natura facienda

ejl

prerfus Solutio

non per lgnem certe, fed per Mentem,

quam ignem divinum.

Bacon. Organ. Lib.

II.

(9*

-tan"

16.

BeoK the Third.

cretion,

and

can place in the fimpleft

manner every Attribute by

itfelf

-,

convex

without concave ; colour without fuperficies

fuperflcies without

without

its

Accidents

Body ; and Body

as distinctly

each

one, as tho' they had never been united.

And thus it is that it penetrates into the

receffes

of

all

things, not only dividing

them, as Wholes; into their more confpicuous

Parts, but perfifting,

till it

even feparate

thofe Elementary Principles, which, being

blended together after a more myfterious

manner, are united in the minutejl Part9

as

much

as in the mightiejl

Whole

(<).

Now if Matte Rand Form are among

thefe Elements, and deferve perhaps to be

efteemed as the principal

may

among them,

it

not be foreign to the Deiign of this

Treatife, to feek

whether

things analogous to them,

thefe,

may

[b) See below> p- 312.

or any

be found in

Speech

HERMES.

308
Ch.

I.

^J

S~~V

Speech oi-Language (c). This therefore we mall attempt after the following
method.

Every

See before,

(c)

Greek

Matter

p. 2. 7.

TAH and EIAOS)

and

rati.er at their

End. They have been but

when

laft

little

order of Subftance, that

regarded by modern

is

itfelf

about

to fay, the tangible,

which acknowledges no

corporeal or concrete^ and

parations even in this, but thofe

tical

things

beginning than at their

Philofophy, which almoft wholly employs

the

(in

were Terms of great im-

port in the days of antient Philcfophy,

were fcrutinized

Form

fe-

made by mathema-

Inftruments or Chemical Procefs.

The

original

meaning of the

Sylva, a Wood.

TLocj\v

U7r'

As Neptune

Thus

Word TAH, was

Horner^

dQxvccroHTi TIo(rEi$oc,u9o$ iovto;.

pajl^ the

Mountains and the

Wood

Trembled beneath the God's immortal Feet.

I

Hence

as

Wood

was perhaps the

firft

and raoft

Word "TArj, which decame to be by degrees extended, and at length

ufeful kind of Materials, the

noted

it,

to denote

Matter or Materials

this fenfe Brafs

was called

the'

in general.

In

TXn or Matter of a Sta-

tue; Stone, the"TAu or Matter of a Pillar j and fo in

other inftances.

The

Platonic Qmltidiusy and other

Author

Book the Third.

Every
natural or

309

thing in a manner, whether

artificial,

in

is

its

confutation

COm-

Authors of the

latter Latinity ufe

Sylva

under the

feme extended and comprehenfive Signification.

Now
(Stone,

Matter here mentioned,

as the Species of
ivietal,

common

life,

Wood, &c.)

and are

all

occur moll frequently in

nothing more than natural

Subftances or Bodies, hence by the Vulgar,

and

Body

Material

Matter.

have been taken to denote the fame thing;

to

mean

Corpora;'

Immaterial, Incorporeal^

But this was not the Sentiment of Philofophers

cf old, by whom the Term Matter was feldom ufed
under fo narrow an acceptation.
By thefe, every
&c.

thing was called

TAH,

or

Matter,

whether cor-

poreal or incorporeal, which was capable of becoming

fometbing

elfe>

or of being moulded into fomething

elfe,

whether from the operation of Art, of Nature, or a

higher Caufe.

In

this fenfe

they not only called Brafs the' YAti of

a Statue, and Timber of a Boat, but Letters and

Syllables they called the

iimple

"Thai of Words

rtions themfelves the "YAat of Syllogifms.

held

all

fuch as

Words

or

Terms, the"TAa of Propofitions; and Propo-

The Stoics

own power (joi sx 1$ v\yAv~)

Wealth and Poverty, Honour and Difhonaur,
things out of our

Health

c n#

j#

HERMES.

3io
Ch.

I.

compounded of fomething Common, and

iomethingPECULiARjof (omethingCom7)1011,

Health and Sicknefs, Life and Death, to be the^TAai,

Moral Gsodnefs,wbAch had its

or Materials of Virtue or

effence in a proper conduci with refpect to

(Vid. Arr. Epicl. L.

I. c.

all thefe,

Alio Vol. the

29.

thefe mifcellaneous Trealifes, p.

firft

of

M. Ant.

187,309.

XII. 29. VII. 29. X. 18, 19. where the Taixov and

The Peripatetics,

'AT<wd? are oppofedto each other).

tho' they exprefsly held the Soul to be acrw/ixaTo?, or

Incorporeal, yet
rial

Mind ox

fibly

ftill

Ns?

talked of a

Jntcllecl.

This

Yet if we

found fomewhat harfhly.

Wo/ds, Natural

"TAtxo;, a mate-

modern Ears may pof-

to

Capacity, and confider

tranflate the

them

as only

denoting that original and native Power of Intellection^

which

beiiig previous to all

neceilary to

its reception;

human Knowledge,

And

remain, that can give us offence.

the Idea of
de Anim.

YAH,

or

As

to

Form

Matter.

p. 144. b. 145.

122, 141. Edit. Sylb.

EIA02,

its

Prod,

fo

much

for

See Alex. Aphrod.

Arijl.

Metaph.

p.

121,

in Euclid, p. 22, 23.

original

meaning was

that

of

Symname from

or FiGURE,confidered as denoting vifible

metry, and Proportion ; and hence

Ewta

yet

is

there feems nothing then to

to fee,

it

had

its

Beauty of perfon being one of the noblclr,

and moll excellent Objects of Sight. Thus Euripides^

ITpwrov p\v EnJo; a.iov tvcumiJos.

fair

Form

to

Empire gave

the firfl pretence.

Book the Third.

mon, and belonging to

311

many other

Ch.

things

and of fomething Peculiar, by which

it
is

Now as

the

Form

or Figure of vifible Beings tended

principally to diflinguijh them, and to give to each its

Name

and Eflence

hence in a more general

fenfe,

whatever of any kind (whether corporeal or incorporeal)

was

peculiar, eflential, and diftin&ive, fo as

by

its

accelfion to any Beings, as to hs*T\ri or Matter, to

mark them with a Character, which they had not before,

was

Thus
the

by the Antients

called

EIA02

or

Form.

not only the Shape given to the Brafs was called

Eih? or Form of

Medicine

the Statue; but the Proportion

Drugs was

affigned to the

the Ei&j or Form of the

Motion of the human Body was

the orderly

the Etios or

Form of the Dance

thejufi Arrangement

of the Proportions, the ETJof or Form of the Syllogifm. In like

manner

the rational and accurate Conducl

of a wife and good man,

in all the various Relations

Occurrences of

made

life,

that EjJo? or

and

Formy de-

For mam quidam ipfam,

tanquam faciem Honesti vides : qua,

fcribed by Cicero to his Son,

Marce

fili, et

ftoculis cerncretur, mirabiles amores (ut ait Plato) ex-

&c.

De

farther

ftill

{itaret fapientice,

We

may go

ligence, which

Offic. I.

the supreme Intel-

pafFes thro'

all

things, and

the fame to our Capacities, as Light

is

which

is

to our Eves,
this

I.

HERMES.

$ii
Ch.

I.

is

diftinguifhed,

and proper

and made to be

its

true

felf.

Hence
fupreme Intelligence has been called

this

EIAX2N, the Form of Forms,

Fountain of

Truth j and

all

Symmetry, of

and

dijiinclive Attributes,

and

not any thing elfe.

And fo much
Matter.

concerning

We

ing

as being the

Good, and of

all

as imparting to every

Being thofe

which mak.e

Form,

it

all

ejfential

to be

as before

only add, that

(hall

EIA02

itfelfi

concern-

it is

in the

uniting of thefe, that every thing generable begins to

exift

in their Jeparating,

that while

the

two

'to

perijh,

and be at an end

co-exift, they co-exift not

by

juxta-pojhion, like the ftones in a wall, but by a

more
part

intimate Co-incidence, complete in the minuteft

that hence, if

any fubftance

would

ft ill

remain

Form, and
vifion

(for

we were'to

perfift in dividing

example Marble) to

infinity, there

after every fecTion both

Matter and

thefe as perfectly united, as before the

began

laftly,

Di-

that they are both pre-exijlent

to the Beings, which they conftitute; the Matter be-

ing to be found in the world at large

artificial,

the Form, if

pre-exifting within the Artificer, or if na-

tural, within the fupreme Caufe, the

Sovereign Artift

of the Univerfe,

*-~Pulchrum pulcherrimus

Mundum

ipfe

mente gerens,fmilique in imagine firmans*

Even

Book the Third.

Hence Language,

if

313

compared ac-

cording to this notion to the

murmurs of
a Foun-

Even without fpeculating fo high as this, we may fee

among all animal and vegetable Subftances, the Form
pre-exifting in theii immediate generating Caufe;

being the parent of Oak, Lion of Lion,

Oak

Man of Man,

&V.
Cicero's account of thefe Principles

is

as follows.

Matter.
Sed fubjetlam putant omnibusfine
rentem omni
tatius hoc

ilia

ullafpecie, atque ca-

qualitate (faciamus enim traclando uji-

verbum

materiam

et tritius)

qua omnia exprefjl: atque efjuiafnt: (quts

quan lam, ex

tota

omnia ac-

cipere pojjit, omnibufque modis ?nutari atque ex omni parte)

Acad.

eoque ctiani interire^ non in nihilum, &c.

I. 8.

Form.
Sed ego

Jic Jlatuo, nihil ejfe in ullo genere tarn pul-

chrum, quo non pulchrius idfit, unde

aliquo,

quafi imago,

exprimatur,

illud, ut

quod neque

neque auribus, neque ullo fenfu percipi potejl :

tione tantiwi et

FORMAS

mente compleclimur.-

appellat Ideas

ille

eafque gigni negat, et ait femper

contineri

jabi; nee diutius

ejfe

Has rerum

et magifler,

ejfe,

catera nafci,

uno

cogita-

non intelligendi folum, fed

etiam dicendi gravijfunus auclor

telligentid

ex ore
oculis,

et

Plato

ac ratione et inoccidere, fiuere^

eodem Jlatu.

^uidquid

Ch.

I*

HERME

3H
Ch.

I.

i*-v-^j

S.

a Fountain, or the dafhings of a Cataract,

^g

jn

common

a Sound.
has

that like them,

this,

But then on the contrary

in peculiar this,

Language a

cation

Meaning

to the

mals, has

in

//

Signification,

or

Signifi-

Again, Language,

is effential.

compared

it

that whereas thofe

Sounds have no Meaning or

to

it is

if

Voice of irrational Ani-

common

this, that like

But then

has a Meaning.

in peculiar to diftinguifh

it

them,

has this

from them,

it

that whereas the Meaning of thofe Ani-

mal Sounds
that of

is

derived

Language

Nature, but from

is

from Nature,

derived,

Compact

not from

(d).

From

eji igitur,

de quo ratione et via difputetur, ideji

ad

ul~

timamjui generis Formam fpeciemque ridigendum. Cic.

ad

M.
{d)

Brut. Orat.

The

Peripatetics (and with juft reafon) in

their definitions as well of

made

it

Words

all

as of Sentences,

a part of their character to be fjgnificant xa-roe

trvvQf.y.nvy

by Compact.

Boethius tranflates the

See

Arijlot. de Interp. c. 2. 4.

Words xutx evvQww, ad placitunti

Book the Third.

315

From hence it becomes evident, that

Language, taken in the moft comprehend ve view,

ing certain Meanings

two

Principles,

the

Matter, common
to

many

hav-

implies certain Sounds,

;

and that of thefe

Sound

(like other

different things; the

as that peculiar

and

as

is

the

Matter)

Meaning
Form,

charadteriftic

by which the Nature or Eifence of Language becomes complete.

citum, orfecundum placltum, and thus explains

his

comment Secundum placitum

vera

them
eji,

in

quod

fecundum quondam pojitionem, placitumque ponentis aptatur

nullum enhn nomrn naturaliicr conftitutum

neque unquam, ficut Jubjeiia res a naturd

que a naturd veniente vocabulo nuncupatur.

num

genus, quod

ita

ejl,

eft,

quo-

Sed bomi-

et ratione, et oratione vigeret,

nomina

pojuit, eaque quibus libuit iiteris fyllabifque conjungens,

fmgulis Jubjeftarum rerumfubjiantiis dedit.

Jjjb. de Interpret,

p.

Boeth. in

308.

CHAP.

Ch.

I.

HERMES.

ji-6

CHAP.

II.

Upon the Matter, or common Subject of

Language.
Cfe. II.

rpHE

TAH

or

Matter

guage comes

JL

ed, a Subject,

firft

of

Lan-

to be confider-

which Order

will not iuf-

we mall endeavour to be as concife as we can. Now

this TAH or Matter is Sound, and Sound

fer us to omit,

is

but in which

that Senfation peculiar to the Senfe

of

Hearing, when the Air hath felt a Percujjion,

adequate to the producing fuch

Ef-

fect (*).

As

Meaning when he
more properly true of Sound

(a) This appears to be Prifa'an's

fays of a

Voice, what

in general, that

it is

is

-fuumfenfibilc aurjutn, id eft, quod

froprie auribus accidit.

The

Lib.

I.

p.

537.

following account of the Stoics, which refers

the caufe of

Sound

to an Undulation in the Air propa-

gated circularly, as when

we drop a ftone into a Ciftern

of water, teems to accord with the modern Hypothecs,

and

Book the
As

Ti-i

irdJ

317

the Caufes of this PercufTion are

various, fo

from hence Sound derives the

Variety of

its

Species.

Farther,
ther

as all thefe

Caufes are ei-

Animal or Inanimate,

fo the

two

grand Species of Sounds are likewife Ani-

mal or Inanimate.

There

is

no peculiar

Name

for

Sound

Inanimate 1 nor even for that of Animals,

when made by the trampling of their Feet,

the fluttering of their Wings, or any other
Caufe, which

is

merely

But

accidental.

that,

and to be as plaunble as any

ts ts

(puvovvTog

vtpociftoiiouiqy

hrx

j<j

T2J

Anovii.u $t>

uxzovros uspog ZTXriTJo^iPiS

xvpctTovfLivis,

mTnovTog, wj xvy,aTZT(*i to

\v

Jt,

touq daoouq

Ty defay-ew

ytvuKovg v7to t IpSknQivroc; ,'jQz

is,

rz psrufcu

Porro

qui medius inter loquentem, et audientem

\iSuo

iapide*

et cijlernce

xutoL

andire,
eft,

cum

aer ver-

beratur orbiculariter, deinde agitatus auribus

quemadmodum

7rao<r-

infinity

aqua per orbes injefto agitatur

Dio.g. Laert. VII.

Ch. IL

HERMES.

31S
Ch.

II.

which they make by proper Organs,

that,

in confeque?ice

of Jome Senfation or inward

Impulfe, fuch

Animal Sound

is

called

Voice.

As Language
Sound

therefore implies that

Human

called

Voice

know

we may

Nature and

perceive that

to

Towers of

the

Human

know the

Matter or common Subject of

the

Voice, is in fact to

Language.

Now

the Voice of

feem of

Man, and

other Animals,

all

is

it

mould

formed by

Organs between the Mouth and

certain

the Lungs, and which Organs maintain

the intercourfe between thefe two.

Lungs
Voice

furnifh
is

formed

the Voice

is

Air, out
;

The

of which the

and the Mouth, when

formed, ferves to publifh

it

abroad.

What
are,

is

thefe Vocal Organs precjfely

not in

all

refpe&s agreed by Philofophers*

Book the Third.

Be

fophers and Anatomifts.

will,

it is

certain that the mere primary

fimple Voice
it

this as it

is

and

completelyjormed, before ever

reach the Month, and can therefore (as

well as Breathing) find a Paflage thro' the

Nofe,

when

Mouth

the

is

fo far flopt, as

to prevent the leafl utterance.

Now pure zndjimple Voice, being thus

produced,

(as

is

tranfmitted to the Mouth,

means of

was obferved)

before

Here

then, by-

certain different Organs,

do not change

its

which

primary Qualities, but

only fuperadd others,

it

receives the

Form

Articulation. For
Articulation is in fact nothing elfe,

or Character of

than that Form or Character, acquired to

fimple Voice, by means of the
its

Mouth and

feveral Organs, the Teeth, the Tongue,

the Lips,
ticulation

loud or
lities)

&c.

The Voice

Armade more grave or acute, more

foft

but

it

(which

are its

is

not by

primary Qua-

acquires to thefe Characters

certain

HERME

320
Ch.

II.

certain others additional,

S.

which

fectly adapted to exijl along with

are per-

them [b) +

The
{b)

The

feveral

Organs above mentioned not only

ferve the purpofes of Speech^ but thofe very different

ones likewife of Majiication and Refpiration\ fo frugal

is

Nature

in thus

aligning them double duty, and fo

careful to maintain her character of doing nothing in

vain.

He, that\vould be informed, how much

better the

Parts here mentioned are framed for Difcourfe in

who

Difcurfive Animal^ than they are in

Animals, who are not fo, may confult Arijlotle
is

Treatife de Animal. Part.

C. I. 3.

And

De

Anima.

L.

here by the way,

nius truly modern, he

Lib. II. c. 17.

II.
if

in

which he

reafon fo well.

lived,

But

if

antient literature, he

c. 8.

other
in his

Lib. III.

23, &c.

Ge-

fuch Inquirer be of a

may

Philofopher, considering (as

Age

A fan,

poflibly
it is

wonder how the

modeftly phrafed) the

mould know
he have any

fo

much, and

tafte or value for

may with much

jufter caufe

wonder at the Vanity of his Contemporaries, who

dream all Philofophy to be the Invention of their own
Age, knowing nothing of thofe Antients ftill remaining for their perufal, tho' they are fo ready on every
occafion to give the preference to themfelves.

The

following account from Ammonius will fliew

whence the Notions

in this chapter are taken,

and

what

Book the Third.

The

321

new Characters Ch.

Jimplefi of thefe

are thofe acquired thro' the mere Openings

of
what authority wc have

Voice from

to diftinguifh

mere Sound; and articulate Voice from sim-

ple Voice.
is.

0<I>OD

a)

<W2NH

[m.v ifi zrhriyr) ocipoq xl?$r,Tii uxor,'

^/oipef

J*,

iy.^u^v yivoprsos, qtxv Six rr ;

e'

SupXHOq

(TUfOXng TX

iX.Q\l&O USVOq U7T0

TZ

ETVVJ[AC'SOS

iMTTtVi^aq xr)p

dvpouq

-5TpoS"rr\7r\vi

"XJ.IX CCpTYiOliXy Xj Ti] VTFP'.')jC,

m; 'yVyjlS

Til/flS

QO [AW

~
^hcixoj?

x.xtx

rt^o'; otivvnTov,

07T3 7Tt TCOf ^TTl/^UfWl'

>

'

o^ys^wi/

>eaA8|U.ct'Wi/

tpx~

XCcXxftsM)

VT01 Til yxpyxpiUMl, Y^

Six thj ZuXriyr]g 7roTeAv? rivx

~
t&ij

t;j

,0

Z^XCX
<y

<nj '.x.bAiva,

eion

auAwv

Xj o-u^i'yywi**

oyrj tfgos

Cum per

rt;

twi/ ooVvto.^, x^

fj.lv

(rvtxQxXXofAivuv.
JitH fentitur :

tji? ^/Awt/^?,

THN AIAAEKTON gvayxaia*

THN 'AIIAi22 fcHNHN b Wvtuc

j^ejamov sr^o?

Ejlque

Vox

autem

Son'US, iclus acris quiauquern animans edit,

eft tonus,

thoracis cornerejjioncm aer attraftus a pulmone<

quam afperam

elijus fanul totus in arteriam,

palatum,aut gurgulionem imbingit,

dam fenjibilem pro an'nni quodam

et

vacant, et

ex iclufonum quen-

impetu perfeit.

Id qu od

in inftrumentis quce quia inftant, idco i[j.ir*vrx a mufi(is

dicuntur, nfu venit, ui in

cum

lingua, dentes, labiaque

tibiis,

ad vocemvero funplicem non ormuno

in Lib. de Irtferpr. p. 25. b.
inftitut.

Medic.

Sect. 626.

ac jiftulis contlngit,

ad loquclam

neeejjaria fint,

confer ant.

Amman.

Vid. etiam Bccrhaave

630.

it

II.
* "*-'
'

HERMES.

3 22

Ch.

II.

^vJ

f the Mouth, as thefe Openings

differ in

giving the Voice a ParTage.

the

It

is

riety of Configurations in thefe

which

only,

rive their

Openings

gives birth and origin to the

Vowels

feveral

Va-

and hence

Name, by being

Vocal (c) y and eafy

it is

they de-

thus eminently

to be founded

of them-

felves alone.

There are other articulate Forms, which

the

Mouth makes

but by
-parts

not by mere Openings,

different Contacts

fuch for inftance,

of
as

its

it

different

makes by

the Junction of the two Lips, of the Tongue

with

It appears that the Steles (contrary to the

the Peripatetics) ufed the

word

$.QNH

notion of
to denote

Sound in general. They defined it therefore to beTo 'i>cv diT^inov axor,;, which juftifies the definition
given by Prijcian, in the

Sound

impulfe\ and

y^

dno

utto

oo^v? sr7rA^y-

audible) by fame animal

$"ftNHENTA.

they de-

$icii>oi&; ix.7rs1j.Troy.U7j,

and derivedfrom

laert. VII. 55.

(c)

made

Animal

Human or Rational Sound

EvagQgcg

articulate

preceding.

'Aw,

they defined to be

pivog, Air jl nick (2nd fo

fined

Note

Sound

the difcurfivefaculty. Diog.

Book the Third.

323

with the Teeth, of the Tongue with the Ch.

and the

Palate,

Now
lefs

'

like.

as all thefe feveral Contacts,

fome Opening of the Mouth

un-

either

immediately precede, or immediately

fol-

low, would rather occafion Silence, than,

to produce a Voice; hence

fome fuch Opening,

it is,

that with

either previous or

fubfequent, they are always connected.

Hence

alfo it

that the Articulations fo

is,

produced are called

Consonant,

becaufe

they found not of themfelves, and from

their

own

powers, but at

all times in

com-

pany with fome auxiliary Vowel (d).

There
of

tions

which

to

are other fubordinate Diltinc-

primary

thefe

Articulations,

enumerate would be foreign to

the defign of this Treatife.

It
all

is

enough

to obferve, that they are

denoted by the

common Name of Ele-

(d) 2TM$r2NA.

MENT

II.
'

HERMES.

324
Ch.

II.

me nt

much

(e), in as

tion of every other kind

rived,

from rhem de-

is

and into them refolve^. Under their

Combination they produce a

fmallejh

Syllables properly

ble-y

as every Articula-

Sylla^-

combined produce

Word; Words properly combined pro-

duce a Sentence ; and Sentences properly

combined produce an Oration or Difcourfe,

And

thus

that to Principles appa-

it is

rently fo trivial

(J), as about twenty plain

ele-

(<?)

lows

The

Efj

fAwcc,

Stoic Definition of
<i\

roi'^iiovy

i'fc

an

Element

ou zrguTi:

ywo-

An Element

tig o itrp^uTov a.vcc'kvnxi.

yi)

as fol-

is

yivirou ra.

is

that, out of which, as their firJi Principle, things gene-

rated are made, and into which, as their laji remains, they

are refolved.
fays

treated,

Diog. Laert. VII. 176.

Elements

upon
is

worth attending

Cvyy.njcci $u}vyI} x,
t fj.r,xir

.',-

a.

to

<l>a;i/?

aj etXhag <puvas irio&q tw hSu xvtxv.

out of which the

its laji

roj^sia, e Zv

Aiaipurxi IvyjnaL' ixsTvx

Elements of articulate Voice

as

What Arijlotle

with rcfpecl to the Subject here

Voice

remains,

it is

is

The

are thoji things,

compounded, and into which,

divided: the Elements them/elves

being no farther divifible into other articulate Prices,

differing in Spctics from than.

(/) The Egyptians

V. c. 3.
Honours to the In-

Alctaph.

paid divine

ventor of Letters, and Regulator of Language,

whom
they

Book the Third.

we owe

elementary Sounds,

325

that variety

of articulate Voices, which have been fufficient to explain the

Sentiments of fo in-

numerable a Multitude,

as all the prefent

and pall Generations of Men.

It
Theuth. By the Greeks he was worunder the Name of Hermes, and reprefented

they called
{hipped

commonly by a Head alone without other Limbs., {landing upon a quadrilateral Bafis.
The Head itfelf was
that of a beautiful Youth, naving

Bonnet^ adorned witn

There was

on

a Petafus> or

it

two Wings.

a peculiar reference in this Figure to

\EPMHI AOriOS, the Hermes of Language or Discourse. He pofTefTed no other part

the

human

of the

was deemed
at the

figure but the

Head,

requifite to rational

fame time, the medium of this Communication,

being (as Homer well defcribes them)

Winged Words, were

the

becaufe no other

Communication. Words

Wings

E-n-tx zjIspowtoC)

reprefented in their Velocity by

of his Bonnet.

Let us fuppofe fuch

Hermes,

having the Front

of his Bafis (the ufual place for Infcriptions) adorned

with feme old Alphabet ,and having a Veil Rung acrofs, by

which

that Alphabet

be feen drazuing

is

the Youth, tranferibing

Such

Let a Youth

partly covered.

off' this Veil;

and a

what She

Defign would

Nymph,

eafily indicate its

The Youth we might imagine

near

there difcovers.

to be

Meaning.

the Genius
OF

Ch.
1
"

'

II.

HERMES.

2^6

Ch.

It appears from what has been

II.

the Matter

that

faid,

common Sub-

or

ject of Language is that Species of

Sounds called Voices articulate.

What
of

Man

ftiles

MNHMOSTNH, or Me-

the Nymph to be
as much as to inftnuate

him;)

mory
"
"
"
M
M

(Natures Dens hwnancs, as Horace

"

that

Man,

ceffarily obliged to

that

Memory,

ency,

was glad

have reccurfe

to

for the

was

Prefervation of his Deeds and Inventions,

Letters

being confeious of her

own

ne-

and

Infuffici-

to avail herftlf of fo valuable

an Ac-

quifition."

Mr. STUART,well known for his accurate and elegant Edition of the Antiquities of Athens, has adorned
this

Work

with a Frontifpicce agreeable to the above

Ideas, and that in a tafle truly Attic and Simple,

no one
.

As

poffeiTes

to

Hermes,

gy, Figure, &c.

Edit.

more eminently than

his Hiftory,

Genealogy, Mytholo-

Vid. Platon. Phileb.

S err an. Diod.

Sic.

L.

I.

which

himfclf.

T.

II.

p. 18.

Horat. Od. X. L.

I.

V. 937. cum Comment. Joan. Dlaconi.

Pighlum apud
Thucid. VI. 27. et Schollajl. In he.
Gronov. Thefaur. T. IX. p. 1164.

Heficd. Theog.

For

the value and importance of Principles, and the

dlffcilty

El

inh.

in

attaining them, fee AriJIot. de Sophiji.

34.

The

Book the Third.

What remains to be
following Chapter,
characteriflic

to fay,

is

examined

327

in the

Language under

its

and peculiar Form, that

is

Language confidered, not with

refpect to Sound, but to Meaning.

The

following Paflage, taken from that able

Ma-

thematician Tacquet>wi\\ be found peculiarly pertinent

to what has been faid in this chapter concerning Ele-

mentary Sounds,

p.

324, 325.

Mille milliones fcriptorum mille annorum milliombus

nonfcribent omnes
licet

24 litter arum alphabet i permutationest

40 paginas, quarum

ftnguli quotidie abjolverent

unaquaque

contineret diverfos ordines litterarum

Tacquet Arithmetics Theor.

p.

381,

24.

Edit. Antverp.

pHAP,

Ch.

II.

HERMES.

328

CHAP.
Upon

Form,

the

III.

or peculiar Character of

hanguage\
Ch.III.
v """

"

'

IT7HEN
V

any articulate Voice

to

there accedes by compatl a

Mean-

ing or Signification, fuch Voice by fuch

acceffion

then called

is

many Words,
tions (as

it

Word

were) under the fame Compadl

a particu-

unite in conftituting

(a),

and

poiTe fling their Significa-

lar Language.
It

(a) See before

Treatife

The

(pucrsj,

(oiKi

fjGiV

(c)

Notes

p.

See

314.

a) and

alfo

fj.lv

ty v
;

r,

Ji

ot

S'jga,

Kara

v,

I.

is

remark-

tottov zii>i7<rQai> 'J<rn,

KXTX G'JMWW,

Siva' zru

ovo/xxrw

\xi\t

i'gj.w 9

>Cj

Vol.

(<).

following Quotation from Ammonias

tpvVBiyTO ot
>t.

Note

OOJflHTVai, $i<TSl

Ci

Aci/,

c. 1.

HcivxTTip sv 79

able

TO

II.

pxuzTuu

y-j

JC,

TO {AW u-

to y.tv

(pxi/iTv,

<rr.y.xiuziv i S'<rtt

$x\,v,riwv Jvi/xuiv, cpyavxv Zuxv txv

ouiVgUTr3

-cr^5j7rA>;triwj toij

dxlyoiq

Book the T^iird.

It appears from hence,

may

that

329

a Word

be defined a Voice articulate,

fignijicant

by CompaSi

guage may

and

that

and

Lan-

be defined a Syjiem offuch

Voices , Jojignfcant,

It

from notions like thefe concern-

is

Language and Words,

ing

may

that one

be
to

a'oij"

<$

<rvyxu[Ani{
(axsrj
roc,

Qv6y.ou7ii/ 3

Xoyoig

<puo"t xtfiv,

pV'jUatnv,

^rxrO&t

aXXoc S'sVfi)

pttiyjU 4/U X'' ? '

XIVYITX

W0i

xgii/nroci

Xj

ti>

cc'jrto

Ju^a a^f

T^HKWf

*)

tw Qwvuv

^Xa<n

roov

<rriy.a,<r[oiv

ty/uv zrpot;

Swtuu aVro-

$t rxvroi

ol t\g

manner

the fame
ture, but
exifis in

Dancing

is fometbing ;

Nature, but a Door

y.XX^

Motion

\tive

is

and

from Naas

Timber

is fometbing pofitive

the power of producing a vocal Sound founded in

ture,

fo

is

Na-

but that of explaining ourfelves by Nouns, or

Verbs, fometbing pofitive.

And

hence

the funple power of producing vocal

it

In

CCVIV {JLiTCUV,

Y]

therefore^ as local

VVX-

IVSgytTv

rsyvixri clurris cTja-

r\

<fVbT$tfiVOl AOyOl [AiToi [AiTgUV,

rirtriV

Ix.

rr\v

ifcoLiosTov

oiXoya i^ux, $loti x) (aov3

y.il/ns 3

toi?

r>

TJgog

were

the

Organ

that as to

Sound (which

is

as

or Lnflrument to the Soul''s faculties

of Knowledge or Volition) as

Manfeems

it is,

to poffefs it

to this

from Nature,

vocal power 1 fayy

in like manner as

irra-

Ch.III.
t|

~
V

HERMES.

330

Language

Ch.III. be tempted to call

*-~-v Picture of the

Words

a kind

Universe, where

'

are as the Figures or

of

the

Images of all

particulars.

And

yet

For

this is true.

are

all

that

may

it

be doubted,

if Pictures

of them Imitations,

whoever has natural

it

how

far

and Images
will follow,

faculties to

know
the

irrational animals : but as

to

the employing of Nouns , or

Verbs , or Sentences compofed out of them, in the explanation of our Sentiments (the thing thus employed being

founded not in Nature, but

peffefs by

in Pofition) this he feems to

way of peculiar eminence,

becaufe he alone of all

mortal Beings partakes of a Soul, ivhicb can move

and

operate artificially

Sound

his artificial

Power Jhews

itfelf;

elegant Compoftions both in A'letre,

abundantly prove.

itfelf,

fo that even in the Subjett of

Ammon. de

and

as the various
ivithout

Metre,

Interpr. p. 51. a.

muft be obferved,

that the operating artificially,

(Ji/ecytT* ri^vixZi;) of

which Ammonius here fpeaks,

It

Mark

peculiar

means fometning very

different

and which he confiders as a diftindlive

to the

Human

Sou!,

from the mere producing

clfe it

ivorfo of elegance

Man, and many

defign

other Species of Animals, luch as the

Eee, the Beaver, the Swallow, &c.

9, 10.

and

could never be a mark of Diftinction between

158, 159, C5V.

See Vol.

I.

p.

8?

Book the Third.

331

the Original, will by help of the fame Ch.TII.

know

faculties

The

But

Imitations.

it

who knows

know for
Latin Name.

that reafon

ftibuld

.3eing,

Greek or

its

its

follows, that he

by no means
any

alfo

Truth

is,

Medium

that every

through which we exhibit any thing to

another's Contemplation,

is

either derived

from Natural Attributes, and then

an Imitation;

and then

quite arbitrary y

bol

it

is

or elfe from Accidents

it

Sym-

a.

is

().

Now,

(b)

AOT,

Xa.tyi.VOV

to

is

Aia<p'iti

T9

^x

>

,>

j-JV

i<p

y\y.iv

>

Xy TO

(TkfAOV,

Siys

va.

-.

oyoiuyx, u

TO

cvpSsiXXuv

i<p

rip. ST eg

/iy.7v

y^

fj.w

yxg
tx, i >

as imvoixg*

to

T8

'l"XJl

to

ofA0iuy.ee'

(xy.<poTgx

ccXXr)Xo>s

tv tv\

i]rtO<pQxX[AOV

xuto ovofAZ^stj to oXcv

tx'oti ${1

to

Xiyono uvea

(T-JjuSoAoi-, yitoi VYiyiTov,

yovrtq vtp[foc.y.vou Trig

\\>~
yxp

ocuto y.Tot,irXcxo~ai

XooxpxTtsg, ax.iT xv &ut<j

cro(p J

TS

o^vvxtov X7rix.oviC<ruxi |3aATa,

tixovi yy^x\t.y.i\ix.Tz z,'xytpxTag

(pxXxX.gOV,

2TMBO-

ra

[XV OfAOlUfACL Tt)v (phtTlV CXVTrtV

zr^xyuxTog kxtx to
Xj

OMOIX2MA

(piXo-

^ TS

olov,

Tag ^aKty.avTxg,

*b

t&
<Ju-

VCXTXt

HERMES.

332

Ch.IlL
W
*v*-J

Now,

if it

be allowed that in

far the

greater part of things, net any of their

tiatural Attributes are to be

found in

arti-

culate Voices, and that yet through fuch

Voices things of every kind are exhibited,

will follow that

it

ccjjlty

be

Symbols,

Words

becaufe

it

muft of ne-

appears that

they cannot be Imitations,

But here occurs

ferves attention
**

intercourfe

a Queflion,

" Why,

in the

common

men with men, have

of

" Imitations been

which de-

neglected, and

Symbols
*'

Emi

tx.<pi$y\

nrvgcrog, ug rv^fnvix.ng'

'LoiXTnyfog nxS>

AuVTai
XJ
*;

pre-

^{* K

<P

oiViOV

H,cc X

yi

^'

i TiJ UVT00'8I Xj O*0P0C.T&> OiVXTCHflVj Xj fit'

a<p<Tiv,

aAXa /JivoU, A REPRESENTATION

differs from a Symbol, in as ?nuch

Resemblance

as the Refemblance aims as far as poffible to reprefent the

very nature of the thin*, nor

sr vary

it.

is it

in our

power

to jhift

Thus a Representation intendedfor

Socrates in aPiflure, if it have not thoje circumjiances

peculiar

Book the Third.

"

preferred,

333

although Symbols are only ChJII,

or Inftitution, while '- *v~-"J

" known by Habit

" Imitations

"

are recognized

natural Intuition ?"

To

by a kind of

this

it

may be

anfwered, that if the Sentiments of the

Mind,

like the Features

of the Face, were

immediately vinble to every beholder, the

Art of Speech or Difcourfe would have

been perfectly fuperfluous.
while our Minds

But now,

inveloped and hid,

lie

and the Body (like a Veil) conceals every

thing but itfelf,we are necefTarilv compelled,

when we communicate ourThoughts,

to

peculiar

to

Socrates, the bald, the fiat -ncfed,

and the Eyes

projecting, cannot properly he called a Representation of

him.

But a Symbol

or Sign* (for the Philofopher

Ariftotle ufes both names)

is

zvholly in

as depending jingly for

its

Thusfor example,

the time

as

to

our own power,

exiftence on our imagination.

engage, the Symbol or Sign

when two armies Jhould

may be the founding of a

Trumpet, the throwing of a Torch, (according

to

what

Euripidesy^)-*,

But when

the flaming Torch

Of purple fight,
or

elfe

in?;

as

when

the

was hurl'd, the fign

Trumpet founds, Sec.)

one mayfuppefe the elevating of a Spear, the dart-

of a Weapon, and a thousand ways be fides.

in Lib. de Interp. q.

l 7-

Amman,

HER M

334
Ch.III. t0 convey

them

to

each other through a

c -v-* Medium which is corporeal

And hence

(<;).

Marks, Imitations,

that all Signs,

is

it

S.

and Symbols mult needs be

Now

addrefled as fuch to the Senfes (d).

the

we know,

Senses,

their natural Limits

the

and

fenfible,

never exceed

Eye

perceives

no Sounds , the Ear perceives no Figures

nor Colours.

If therefore

we were

to

converfe, not by Symbols but by lmitations t

as far as things are characterized

by Figure

yvyju

\C) A:

rifAtTigxi, yvfAiroti

a.1

Ta,

Sikw

vitpxs

tzioixxXv

6vo[axtuv,

xcrxi

tuv

ccvtuv tuv voYt^druv <ry[AOtivau

IFUf/.c&TMVf r\vi/xi/T0 $i

#AAAaj; ra -cr^xyuxTx' RirziSn

Vr,<rxv rcov

ph

Si'

Si

tuuxti

;f\z<riv oZvtcov

uv

(rvvSiSsv-

to v&soqVj isn~

cr; uaii/H<r(V

aXXriXxis ret

zrgxy;j.xrx.
res vicijjim

Animi

noftri

auiem corporibus involuti

rum

a corporis campage fecreti

animl conceplionibui Jignificare

intelligent vis obtegitur

quacirca opus

nominibuS) quibus res inter fe Jignifiearent.

Przedicam. p. jS.

cum

eis

fuit

Amman,

in

a.

(d) Quicquid fclndi

rofaSy

pojfent

fint, peri\ide ac nebula^ ipfo-

pejjit in differentia* fatis

nume-

adnotionum varieiatem explicandam (modo diffr-

entice ilia fenfui p?rcept\b\\esjint)jieri potejt veb'tcu-

lum

cogitat'iohinn de

Augm.

Seient.

VI.

bomine in hotninem.
I.

Bacjn. de

Book the Third.

335

gure and Colour, our Imitation would be

neceffarily thro'

Figure and Colour

alio.

Again, as far as they are characterized by

Sounds,

it

Medium

thro' the

may

would

be faid of

Imitation

frill

all

we

along

with the

We fee then how com*

would prove.

Language

fet

like

the other Senfes, the

plicated fuch Imitation

If

The

of Sounds.

fluffing

Objects imitated.

fame reafon be

for the

therefore, as a

Symbol, in oppofition tofucb Imitation-, if

we

reflect

on the Simplicity of the one, and

the Multiplicity of the other

fider

if

we con-

the Eafe and Speed, with which

Words

are formed (an Eafe

no trouble or

which knows

and a * Speed, which

fatigue;

equals the Progrefs of our very Thoughts)

if

we oppofe

to this the difficulty

length of Imitations
that

we remember

fome Objects are capable of no Imi-

tations at
ially

if

and

all,

may be

but that

typified

all

Objects univer-

by Symbols; we

may

plainly

* H-zix u/Jsooivrx- See

before, p. 325.

Ch.III.
'""m>rmmt

HERME

336

S.

Ch.IIL plainly perceive an Anfwer

tion
'*

to the

here propofed, " Why,

mon

intercou'rfe

why

fon,

we may

too

in the

com-

men with men,

of

" Imitations have been

" Symbols prefen

Hence

Ques-

rejected,

and

perceive a Rea-

was a Language, nor

there never

indeed can pofjibly be framed one, to exprefs

the Properties

and real

EJfences of thingSi

Mirrour exhibit^ their Figures and

as a

For

their Colours.

Language of

if

imply nothing more,

of Sounds with certain Motions

if to

at all

if to

where Attributes, they

(fuch as the

are

many others,
no way efTen-

Murmurs and Wavings

of a Tree during a florin)

it is

co?2co?nitant ;

fome Beings Sound and Motion are

no Attributes

tial

itfelf

than certain Species

if this

be true

impoffible the Nature of fuch Beings

mould be

exprefled, or the lead: effential

Property be any way imitated, while be-

tween the Medium and themfehes there

nothing connatural (e).

is

It
(e)

See Vol.

I.

Treatife

II.

c. 3.

p. 70.

JBoofc

It

iis

the Third.

true indeed,

once eftabliihed,

it

when

337

Primitives were

was eafy

to follow the

Connection and Subordination of Nature,

ih the juft deduction of Derivatives

Thus

Compounds.

the

Sounds, Water,

and, Fire, being once annexed to thofe

Elements,

it

was

and

two

more natural

certainly

to call Beings participating of the firfb,

Watfy, of the

mute

the

reverfe.

laft,

Fiery, than to

Terms, and

com-

them by the
But why, and from what natucall

ral Connections the Primitives themfelves

might not be commuted,

it

will be found,

I believe, difficult to affign a

Reafon, as

well in the inftances before us, as in moft

others.

We may here alfo fee the Reafon,

why all Language is founded

Compact, and not in Nature; for fo
all

Symbols, of which

Words

in
are

are a cer-

tain Species.

The

Queftion remains

Symbols, then

if

Symbols of

Words

what

are
?

If

Ch.III.

*v

HERMES.

33 8
Ch.III.

uv~,w

If

be anfwered, of things, the Quef-

it

ton

returns,

of

what Things? If

it

be anfvvered, of the /.vera/ Individuals of

which

Senfe, the various particular Beings,

around us

exiji

be

failed

to ihis,

Word will

Now

if

it is

Doubts.

certain

place every

Name.

b$ in

replied,

may

In the

firffc

fact,

a proper

are

proper

Words

all

Names, how came Lexicographers, whofe

exprefs bufmefs is to explain Words,
either wholly to omit proper Names, or
at leaf! to explain

own

them, not from their

Art, but from IHilory

Again,

if all

Wyrds

then in ftriccnefs no

more than one

are proper

Word

then, as Individuals are

But

aljo*

But

if fo,

to

make

infinite',

Words mufl

if infinite,

Names,

can belong to

Individual.

a perfect Language,

be infinite

then incomprehen-

jibk, and never to be attained by the wileft

Men
this

whofe labours

in

Language upon

Hypothelis would be

as idle as that

ftudy of infinite written Symbols,

which

Minion-

Book the Third.

may be

Miffioflaries (if they

339

credited) at-

wv*

tribute to the Chinefe.

Again,
or (which

if all Words are proper Names,

is

viduals

are net only

the

will follow, as Individuals

Infinite,

bit ever paffing, that

Lm^ua^e

of thofe,

who

c as

unknown

now', as the

>,'

the fame) the Symbols of

it

ill

Voices of the Speakers.

2

lived ag-es

!^?.y

very

Lan-

the

of every Province* of every- Town*

Cottage, mufli be every v here

and every where changing,

Nature of

Iridh

//,

fi.ice

which

vs.

it

A*.

ij

all

Words are proper Nan&s,

the Symbols of Individuals,

that in

it

will follow

Language there can be no general

Proportion y becaufe upon the Hypothecs

all

Terms are

particular-, nor

any Affirma-

tive Propojiti'M, becaufe no one Individual

in nature

is

another.

It

rervuns, there can

be no Proportions, but Particular Nega-

Ch.IIL

tives.

HERME

34
Ch.III.
L"*~v ~~~/

tives.

But

then

if fo,

is

S.

Language inca-

pable of communicating General Affirmative truths

If fo, then of

ing Demonftration

municating

If

then of com-

lb,

which

Sciences,

communicat-

Syftems of Demonftrations

many

are fo

If fo, then

of communicating Arts, which are the

Theorems of Science applied

If fo,

we

mail be

little

practically

better for

it

either in Speculation or in Practice (e).

And fo much for this Hypothecs

us now try another.
If

Words

are not the

ternal Particulars,

they muft be

Ideas: For

it

let

Symbols of ex-

follows of courfe,

the Symbols of our

this

is

evident, If they are not

Symbols

(e)

Th

v h< le of Euclid

called the bafts of

(whofe Elements may be

Mathemati

ce)

is

founded

upon general Terms, and gene) at P. of- Jit ions, moil of

which are affirmative. So true are thole Verfes, however barbarous as to their
Syllogizari non

ejl

INtVi Negativity

ftile,

ex "Particularly

reig

concluden ft vis*

Book the Third.

341

Symbols of things without, they can only Ch.III.

*-""v~be Symbols of fome thing within,

Here

then the Queftion recurs,

Symbols of Ideas, then of

Ideas? Of sensible Ideas.

fo,

and what follows

fact,

if

what

Beit

Every thing

in

which has followed already from the

fuppofition of their being the Symbols of

external Particulars

>,

and that from

this

plain and obvious reafon, becaufe the feveral Ideas,

which

mufl needs be

Particulars imprint,

as infinite

and

inutable,

as

they are themfelves.

If then

Words

are neither the

Symbols

of external Particulars, nor yet of particular Ideas, they can be

thing

elfe,

excep% of

becaufe nothing

elfe,

Symbols of no-

general Ideas,
except thefe, re-

And what do we mean by general Ideas We mean such as

mains.

are common to many Individualsj

&ot only to Individuals wh ch exift now,
A

but

HERMES.
but which exifted in ages part, and will
exift in ages future

fuch for example, as

the Ideas belonging to the Words,

Lion, Cedar.

lows

Admit

it,

It follows, that

Man,

and what

fol-

if Words are the

Symbols of fuch general Ideas, Lexicogra-

may

phers

employ,

find

though they

meddle not with proper Names*

It

follows that one IVord

may

be, not

homonymoujly , but truly and cjjentially com-

mon

many

to

Particulars, paft prefent and

fo that

however

may be

infinite,

and ever fleeting, yet Lan-

future

thefe Particulars

guage notwithftanding may be

Jleady.

But

if fo,

definite

and

then attainable even

by ordinary Capacities, without danger of

incurring the Chinefe Abfurdity *.

Again, it
of thofe, who

follows that the

Language

lived ages ago, as far as it

flands

* See

p.

338, 339,

Book the Third,

343

may he ChJJI.
was then. The

ftands ;0r the fame general Ideas,

as

as intelligible noiv,

like

may be

faid

it

of the fame Language

being accommodated to diftant Regions,

and even

amid ft

to diftant Nations,

all

the variety of ever new, and ever changing

Objeds.

Again,

it

follows that Language

be expreffive of general Truths

may

a ad if fo,

then of Demonftration, and Sciences, and

Arts

and

if fo,

become

fubferyient to

purpofes of every kind (/).

Now if
"

it

be true " that none of theie

things could be aiferted of Language,

" were not Words the Symbols ofjw-

Ideas

and

it

be further true, that th-.e

" things may be

" of Language"

necefTariL) that

at

all
it

undeniably afferted
wiil follow (and that

Words are the Sym-

bols OF GENERAL IDEAS,

Z
(

And

f) See before Note

[e)

HERMES,

344

Ch.III.

And

-v

Objection.

'

maybe an

yet perhaps even here

It

may be

Words

urged, if

are

the Symbols of genera/ Ideas, Language

may

anfwer well enough the purpofe of

Philofophers,

and

who

reafon about general,

abjlraci Subjects

but what becomes

of the bufinefs of ordinary Life

know

is

merged

Life

we

in a multitude of Parti-

culars,whtre an Explanation by Language

is as

requisite, as in the higheft

Theorems.

The Vulgar indeed want it to no

How then can this End in any
anfwered,

if

otberEnd,
refpect be

Language be exprdTive of

nothing farther than general Ideas f

To

this

it

may be

anfwered, that Arts

furtly refpect the bufinefs of ordinary Life;

yet fo far are general forms

from being

an Obftacle here, that without them no

Art can be

rationally explained.

How

for inftance fhould the meafuring Artift

afcertain to the Reapers the price of their

labours,

had not he

firft

through general
'Terms

Book the Third.

345

Verms learnt thofe general Theorems, that Ch.III.

**^J
refpect the doctrine and practice of Men*
furation

But

fuppofe this not to

vering Objector

fatisfy a

fuppofe

him

perfe-

to infift,

that, admitting this to be true, there

fill a

for mere Generals

pofe,

we
jujt
tion
it

I fay,

that

not pofjible

to le fufceptible

fupwas

-That the Objection

it

was necefTary

to the

Perfec-

^/Language, that
exprejjive /Particulars,

and Completion

jhould be

as well as of Generals.

ever add, that

far

was

it

fuch an Objection, what mould

anfwer
'

minute

multitude of occajions for

particularizing, of which

were

its

fince

moft

its

" prehenfive

general

excellent

from thefe

it

We m u(i how-

and

derives

Terms
ejjential

are

by

Part,

" that com-

Univerfality, that juft pro-

M portion of Precifon and Permanence,

" without which it could not pombly
" be either learnt, or underftood, or ap**

plied to the purpofe* of Reafoning

and

" Science *

346
Ch.III. " Science

E R

that particular

;"

their Utility and

S.

Terms have

End, and that therefore

care too has been taken for a fupply of

thefe.

One Method of expreffing

Is

Proper Names.

that of

leaft artificial,

ing in eyery

may

This

district

is

the

Names be-

hecanfe proper

arbitrarily applied,

be unknown to thofe,

Language

Particulars,

perfectly well,

who know

the

and can hardly

therefore with propriety be confidered as

parts of

it.

Method
ticles

is

The

other and more

artificial

Definitives or Arwhether we afiume the pro-

that of

(g),

nominal, or thofe more Jlr icily fo called.

And

we cannot enough admire the

Art of Language, which, with-

here

exquifite

out wandering into infinitude, contrives

to denote things infinite

that

is

how

to fay in

other words, which, by the fmall Tribe

of Definitives properly applied

to

general

lerms^

(g) See before,

p.

72, &c. 233, 6cc a

Book the Third,

'Terms,

knows how

tbo* in

number forte,

to

347

employ thefe lad, Ch.IIL

to the accurate

ex-

preffion of infinity Particulars.

To
iingie

what has been

explain

faid

by a

Term be
apply this Term

example. L^t the general

Man.

have cccaiion to

to the Denoting of fon:e Particular.

Let

it

be required to express this Particular,

as

unknown;

known;
any Man

a Man

fay,

I fay,

the Man indefinite;

definite
acertain Manprejeut andnear ; t h i s
Man prefent and dijian t; that Man

';

like

tojome

other-,

finite Multitude

Multitude i
of

Man an hide-

many Men a

a thousand Men

a Multitude, taken throughout

Man

definite

the ones

every

thefame ones, taken with diflinclion;

each Man

taken in order ;

second Man,
ofi

such a

6c c

first Man,

the whole Multitude

Particulars taken collectively;

all Men

the Negation of this Multitude;

But. ol thi^

we

no Man.
we have fpoken already, when

inquired concerning Definitives.

The

HERMES.

$4*

Ch.IIL

The Sum

of

that

all is,

Words are

the Symbols of Ideas both general AND PARTICULAR; YE OF THE

GENERAL, PRIMARILY; ESSENTIALLY,
AND IMMEDIATELY OF THE PARTIG.ULAR, ONLY SECONDARILY, ACCIDENTALLY, AND MEDIATELY.
I

Should
" guage

it

be afked, "

this double

why

Capacity?"

has Lan-

May we

way of return, Is it not a kind

of reciprocal Commerce, or Inter'courfe of

not afk, by

Should

our Ideas t

it

not therefore be

framed, fo as to exprefs the whole of our

Perception

Now

can

we

call that

Per-

ception intire and whole, which implies

Intellection without Senfation,

or Sensation without Intelleclion ? If
not, how mould Language explain the
whole of our Perception, had it not Words
either

to exprefs the Objects, proper to each of

the two Faculties

To

Book the Thud,

To

conclude

As

in

the

349

preceding Ch.III.

Chapter we confidered Language with a '~v

Matter,

we have
confidered it with a view to its Form.
Its Matter is recognized, when it is
confidered as a Voice ; its Form, as it is
view to

its

Jignificant

fo here

of our federal Ideas ;

upon the whole

it

may

(o that

be defined

System of articulate Voices, the

Symbols of our Ideas, but of those
principally, which are general
or universal.

CHAP.

HERMES.

35

CHAR
Concern

'

g general

IV,

or unfaerfd

Ch.IV. *%

OR UNIVERSAL IDEAS,

it :^?,y

not per-

haps hi amifs to inquire, by what procefs

we cme

to

perceive them,

of Beings they are

men

fince the generality of

think fo meanly of their exiftence,

that they are

little

and what kind

commcn.y

better than Shadows,

considered, as

Thefe Sen-

timents are not unufual even

now

Philofopher

much

canfes

with the

a days, ani that from

the fame with thofe,

which

influence the Vulvar.

The Vulgar
their

earlieft

merged

to

from

and never once

Infancy,

dreaming any thing

in Senfi

be worthy of pur-

fuit,

but what either pampers the; r Appe-

tite,

or

fills

their Purfe,

imagine nothing
to

Book the Third-.

what may be

to be real, but

The Philosopher,

touched.

matters being of

much

25 t

tafied*

or Ch.IV.
r^J

as to thefe

the fame Opinion,

in Philoibphy looks no higher, than to

experimental Amufements, deeming nothing

Demonjlration, if

Thus

it

be not made ocular.

inftead of afcending

from Senje to

Intellect (the natural progrefs of all true

Learning) he hurries on the contrary into

the midft of Senfe, where he wanders at

random without any

Labyrinth of

end, and

is loft

Hence

infinite Particulars.

then the reafon

why

in a

the fublimer parts

Mind, Intellection, and intelligent Princi-

of Science, the Studies of

ples, are

in a

if the Criterion

manner neglected

and, as

of all Truth were an Alem-

bieor an Air-pump, what cannot be prov-

ed by Experiment,

is

deemed no

better

than mere Hypothejis.

And

yet

it

is

fomewhat remarkable,

amid the prevalence of fjch Notions, that

there fkould

ftill

remain fwo Sciences in

fafhion,

'

'

35 2

Ch.fV.

all

and thefe having

fafhlon,

of

E R

3.

their Certainty

the leaft controverted, which are not

in the minutejl article depending

By

riment.

and

thefe I

Geometry

(a)

and

fo

The many

mean Arithmetic.,-

(a).

Subject concerning

noble

upon Expe*

But

to

come

to our-

general Ideas*
Man'3

Theorems

(fo ufeful in life,

admirable in themlelves) with which thefe two

Science" fo eminently abound, arife originally frorri

Principles, the most obvious imaginable j
Principles, fo little wanting the pomp and apparatus of
Experiment, that they are f:lf- evident to every one,
pofTeffed of common fenfe. I would not be understood}
in what I have here faid, or may have laid clfewhere, to
undervalue Experiment j whofe importance and utility I freely

aclcnow ledge, in the

many curious N oft rums

and choice Receipts, with which

neccffary Arts of Life.
jujlif.ible

in

Nay,

.it

go

hold all

P rattice in every kind of Subject to be founded

Experience, which

is

no more than

many repeated Experiments. But

al,

has enriched the

farther

that the

he act ever

man who z&sfrom

fo well,

is

the refult of
muft add with-

Experience alone, tho*

but an Empiric or Sjhiack} and

that not only in Medicine, but in every other Subject.

then only that we recognize Art, and that the

Empiric quits his name for the more honourable one
of Artist, when to his Experience he adds

It is

Science^

Book the Third.

353

Man's first Perceptions are thofe Ch.IV\

f the Senses, in as much as they commence from

Thefe

his earliell Infancy.

Perceptions, if not infinite, are at lead

indefinite,

and more fieeting and

tranfient,

than the very Objects, which they exhibit,

becaufe

Science, and

is

thence enabled to

tell

us,

not only,

what is to be done, but WHY it is to he done; for

Art is a compofite of Experience and Science, Expeproviding

rience

them a

FoR M

it

Materials, and Science giving

In the mean time, while

Experiment

is

thus ne-

practical Wisdom, with refpecr. to

pure and speculative Science, as we have
hinted already, it has not the leaft to do.
For who
ceffary to

all

ever heard of Logic, or Geometry, or Arithmetic being

proved experimentally ?
of

It is

indeed by the application

thefe that Experiments are rendered ufeful

that,

they are afiumed into Philofophy, and in fome degree

made

a part of

it,

being otherwife nothing better than

puerile amufements.

But that thefe Sciences them-,

mould depend upon the Subjects, on which they
work, is, as if the Marble were tofaihion the CbjzzJe.

felves

Bftd

not the Chisxle the Marble.

354

E R

S.

Ch.IV. becaufe they not only depend upon the

v-*^'J

but becaufe

of thofe Objects,

etfifence

they cannot

fubfift,

without their imme-

Hence

diate Prefence.

therefore

it is,

that

there can be no Senfation of either Paji or

Future, and confequently had the Soul no*

other Faculties, than the Senfes,

could acquire the

leaft

BtJT happily for us

We

here.

Idea of

we

have in the

culty, called

both

which

or

as to its energies

in dignity

and

is

life.

retains the feci ing

(b),

place a Fa-

firit.

fubfequent to Senfe, yet

it

Time

are not deferted

Imagination

which however

never

it

Fancy,
it

may be

truly prior to

This

Forms of

it

is

things %

when Things

themfelves are gone, and

all Senfation at

an end.

That

this Faculty,however

with Senfe,

is ftill

connected

perfectly different,

may
be

{b) See before, p. 105.

See

alfo, p. J 12.

Note (/).

the Third.

Book:

We

be feen from hence.

have an Imagi- Ch.IV.

gone and ex-

nation of things, that are

tinct

but no fuch things can be

We

objects of Sen/at ion.

command
nation,

355

made

have an eafy

over the Objects of our Imagi-

and can

call

what manner we

them

pleafe

forth in almoft

but our Senja-

prefent, nor

when their Objects are

can we controul them, but

by removing

either the Objects, or our-

tions are necefTary,

felves (c).

As

(c) Befides the diftinguifhing of

Imagination,

there are

Sensation from

two other Faculties of the

Soul, which from their nearer alliance ought carefully

to be diftinguifhed from

and

it,

and thefe are

ANAMNH2I2, Memory,

and

MNHMH,

Recollec-

tion.

When we view fome relic! of fenfatron repofed within us, without thinking of its rife, or referring
fenfible Objccl, this

When we

is

or

it to

any

Ima-gination.

view fome fuch

to that fenfible Objecl,

nnd

Phansy

original, this is

relitl, and refer it withal

which in time pafl was its caufe

Memory.

a 2

Laftly

-^*

'

3S 6

Cn.IV.

As

E R

Wax

the

S.

would not be adequate

to its bufinefs of Signature,

Power

had

it

not a

to retain, as well as to receive

-,

the

fame holds of the Soul, with refpedl

Sense

and Imagination.

Senfe

is its

to

re-

ceptive

Laftly the Road, which leads

or cafually, this

is

Memory through a

Recollection.

is

cafually, as well as rationally,

tion

to

however connected, whether rationally

feries of Ideas,

have added

becaufe a cafual connec-

Thus from feeing a Garment,

Owner thence of his Habitation
Woods thence of Timber ; thence of

often fufficient.

j think of

thence of

its

Ships, Sea-fights, Admirals, &c.

If the Diftin&ion between

not fufBciently underftood,

it

Memory and Phanfy be.

may be illuftrated by

When we

being compared to the view of a Portrait.

contemplate a Portrait, without thinking of whom it is

the Portrait, fuch Contemplation is analogous to

Phansy.

When we
whom

Original,

analogous to

We
may

may go
is

it

with reference

farther*

is

the

here that

Imagination

or

is

Phangy

manner) even things that are

Hope and Fear

paint

all their

fant,andall their painful Piclures of Futurity.

mory

to

fuch Contemplation

Memory.

exhibit (after a

come. It

view

it represents,

confined in the ftricteft manner

to

to

plea-

But Me*
the pa/1.

What

Boo the Third.

Power; Imagination,

tcptive

Had

tentive.

nation,

it

would not be

they are as inftantly

Sense

taken
(if

we

re-

Wax,

but as

may
made

as foon as

loft.

from

then,

Powers

as

tho' all Impreffions

be inftantly made, yet

Thus

its

Scnfe without Imagi-

it

Water, where

357

view of the two

together,

we may

call

pleafe) a kind of tranjient

Imagination', and

Imagination on

the

contrary a kind of permanent Scnfe (d).

Now

What we have faid, may fufnce for our prcfent purHe that would learn more, may confult Arijiot.

pofe.

de Jnima, L. III.

c. 3, 4.

and

his Treatife de

Menu

et Remlnifc.

() Tt
est

votw

roc.y 0101/

Iv

tu

iv

TOivvv iflv r <pxv\a<rict wJf

npTv

rvmov

d-jrl

(lege

tuVov) nt/a

tc^wtcj) aio-OnTij^iw,

tlicrtiylz

yvwoic&iptv'

VTffOfAiVH Ti

-Xj

jc)

aio"9-c]-

y$ dvct^wyca,<pr fj.oc
l

lyy.cn dXtippd,

yivopivns xivnciw?,

Gr^dfTOf,

ccv

tuv ivspystwv tmv nxtP t

n rns

fxr\xiTi

tS

Crro

ts

cchtQyitz

GUt^iTOil) QV MfTwTfO tiKUV T<J

Aa

o-'ut?,

Ch-IV.

HERMES.

35 3

Now

Ch.IV.

as

our Feet in vain venture to

walk upon the River,

the Froft bind

till

the Current, and harden the yielding Surface

fo does the

-,

exert

Soul

in vain feek to

higher Powers, the Powers I

its

Reason and Intellect,

Imagination firft fix the fluency
mean

of

till

of

Sense, and thus provide a proper Balis

for the fupport of its higher Energies.

After

aura,

TO TOUiTOV

'

<tuo[aevov ailiov yivtTixi*

o Kj Ts5 [xi/riur $ f\p"v

TOV T01ZT0V UtTTTEg T'JTTOVy

iyX(Z,TX\il[A[ACCj Xj

ANTA2IAN

xxXxcriv.

Imagination

m,

Now what Phansy

we may explain

as follows.

or

We may

conceive to be formed within us, from the operations of

our Seufes about feifwle Subjecls, fame ImpreJJion (as

were) or Picture
relic!

objecl

in

of that motion cat/fed within us by the external

;

relict,

which when

longer prejent, remains and

it

were

its

is

the external ohjccl

becomes the caufe of our having

Phansy

is

no

fill preferved, being as

Image, and which, by being thus preferved,

fort of relic!

p.

it

our original Senforium, being a

or

and

(as

it

Imagination.

135. b. Edit. Aid,

Memory.

Now fuch a

were) Imprefjion they

Alex, Aphrod. de

call

Anhnay

Book the Third.

After

this

manner,

in the

admirable Ch.IV.

Oeconomy of the Whole, are Natures

fubordinate made fubfervient to the highWere there no things external, the
er.
Senfes could not operate

were there no

Senfations, the Imagination could not

ope-

and were there no Imagination, there

rate;

could be neither Reajbm'ng nor

fuch at

leaft as

Intellect ion,

they are found in

Man,

where they have their Intenfions and Re-

mimons

in alternate fucceffion,

at nrft nothing better, than

pacity
tellect

lion

a mere

Ca-

Power. Whether every Inbegins thus, may be perhaps a

;

of a nature
*-'

and are

or

queftion

elbecially if there be any one

v.ore d'rcine,to

which " Inten-

and Remiffion and mere Capacity

" are unknown

But not to

(<?)."

digrefs.

It

(<?)

See

Man's
the

p.

Deity.

The

162.

Exiftence

is

The

Life^

not a

Life of

Energy, or Manner of

little

different

Man

has

359

from that of

its

Effence in

Motion.

'

*" "'

HER M

8&&

Ch.IV.
*-~v-~>

1-

'
1S

tne n on thcfe pcrmanentPhanta.(m$

the human Mind

that

works, and

firfl

by

Motion.

This

is

not only true with

refpect. to that

lower and fubordinate Life, which he fhares

mon

than while the Fluids circulate, but

which

in that Life^
jects

com-

in

with Vegetables, and which can no longer fubfift

peculiar to

is

from without firji move our

likewife true

it is

him

Ob-

Man.

as

and thence

faculties,

~we move of onrfches either to Practice or Contempla-

Life

J3ut the

tion.

"or

Existence

God

of

(as far

as

we can

is

not only complete throughout Eternity, but

conjecture upon fo tranfcendent a Subject)

plete in every Inftant, and

is

for that reafon

com-

immu-

table and superior to all Motion.

It is to this diflinclion that Ariflotle alludes,

he

us

tells

', ,

iV

a>cji/50"a?

^CTaoA

Xilrjjfl-ft"

zroir.rr.v.

J"t

TJOVYIgOg, K,

7J

l?u/

y.\w<ziu.<;

~..-v

%6ovr\ [xocaaop

STO-lTCd/

6\a tzovtpiuv two.

U.ETaoAO?

ii,

yap pcvcv

'

gcAAot, Xj
7)

Ou

'A

/>\

'

r,ei[j.ix t?iv,

yAVXU, XaTCC JCV

yocg

awpuTTos

JtOfAiVYI

/U,TaeO-

cctyTTkg

pum?

when

ivigyiKit,

Atk*
tnly

a yoto

ctTTAV,-,

an Energy

and Pleasure
than in

cr

Motion;

(according
'in

c/"

to

cvS

nnsiKrig.

For there

is

not

Motion, but of Immobility;

Felicity exijls rather in Rest
Change of ail things being fweet
from a principle of Pravity

the Poet)

thofe vjho believe fo.

For

in the fame

manner as the

bad

The Third.

Booit
by an Energy
to

as fpontaneous

361

and familiar Ch.IV.

Nature, as the feeing of Colour

its

familiar to the Eye,

is

diiccrns at once

it

what

bad man

is

one fickle

and changeable, fo is that Nature

in as much as fitch Nature

lad that requireth Variety,

is

Eth. Nicom. VII. 14.

neither Jimple nor even.

Ethic.

Eudem. VI.

It 1S to this

Deity

&

fub.Jin.

UNALTERABLE NATURE OF THE

that Boethius refers,

when he

fays in thofe

elegant verfes,

Tempus ah
ire

jubes

Mvo

stabilisque

manens

das

cunSla

moveri.

From

this fingle principle

of Immobility-,

may bede-

rived fome of the nobleit of the Divine Attributes; fuch

as that of

real, &c.

XIV.

Impassive, Incorruptible, IncorpoVide Arijlot. Phyfic. VIII. Metaphyf.

c. 6, 7, 9,

10. Edit.

of thefe Treatifes,

p.

262

Du Val

to

266

See

alfo p.

alfo

Vol.

I.

295, where

the Verfes of Boethius are quoted at length.

Itmuftbe remembered however, that tho' we are not

Gods, yet as rational Beings

we have within us fomewe can become fupe-

thing Divine, and that the more

rior to our mutable, variable, and irrational part, and

place our welfare in that

Good, which

is

immutable,
per-

'

*~"oJ

HERMES.

.362

^^

many

one; what in things

DISSIMILAR andDIFFER EN T IS SIMILAR

Ch.IV. what

in

and the

same

is

By

(f).

this

comes to

it

behold

permanent, and

rational, the higher

real Happinefs

and Wifdom.

writer fays)

Ofioiooag

becoming

God,

yxo
tp

S"ok Turn;

toj

to

Energy.

ToXq

[jlIu

'

oIvQpwttois,

ToixvTr $ euspynxi; vircco^H*

t

(as fays another antient) the whole

one continued happinefs

far happy ^ as

in

an antient

(as

y.xra, to Svvxtou, the

[axxocpi^' roTg

o fit<f

the Gods

life is

0s

is

as far as in our power.

b<rov oiAoicopa. ri tyis

For
cf

like to

we (hall advance

This

it rifes to

but

to

Men,

it is fa

the refemblance of fo divine

See Plat, in Thesetet. Arijl. Eth. X.

an

8.

(/) This connective Act of the Soul, by

which it views one in many, is perhaps one of the
principal Acts of

removes

its

molt excellent Part.

that impenetrable mift,

It

is

this

which renders Objects

Were it
of Intelligence invifible to lower faculties.
not for this, even the fenfible World (with the help of
all

our Senfations) would appear as unconnected, as

the words of an Index.

alone, nor the

makes

Touch

the Rofs, but

other attributes

It is certainly

alone, nor the

it is

united

made up of

Iity

we

all

alone, that
thefe,

and

not an unknown Conftitu-

tion of infenftble Parts, but a

fenfible Parts, unlefs

not the Figure

Odour

known Conftitution of

chufe to extirpate the poffibi-

of natural Knowledge.

What

Book the Third.

behold a kind ofjiiperior Objects

363

new Ch.IV.

Race of Perceptions, more comprehenfive

than

What
Union

Were

Odour and
but

be any of the Senfes

it

we know, can

thefe,

vince.

ftances.

pafs the limits of

the Figure,

We

muft

it

alfo.

own

its

It is the

fame

in other in-

necefTarily therefore recur

tofomc

to give us a profpect

of Nature, even in thefe her fnb'ordinate Wholes,

in that comprehenfive

univerfal, and of

no more than

which

But no where

thefe fmaller

is this colleEling,

and

this unifying

spicuous, than in the fubjects of

virtue of this power the

Mind

many Individuals ; One

Ideas-,

much

Whole, whofe Sympathy

Wholes

(if I

maybe

pure Truth.

By

views One general Ideay

Propofition in

many general
till

at length,

by properly repeating and connecting Syllogifm

it

al-

Power more con-

One Syllogifm'mmany Proportions;

Syllogifm,

is

are all

Parts.

lowed the expreflion)

in

pro-

would not only be Smell,

higher collective Power,

more

or

No one of

the Smell to perceive the union of the

would be Sight

it

Constitution

then perceives this

Can

with,

afcend into thofe bright zndjleady regions

of Science,
>ua s neque concutiunt venti,
Adfpergunt) &c.

neqiie nubila

nimlis

Lucr.

Even

HERMES.

3H

Ch.IV. than thofe of Senfe

*"

Pv ace of Percep*

of which may be found

tions, each one

intire

and

Even
Cannot

Truths and negative Conclufions

negative

but by bringing

fubfifl,

tions together, fo neceffary

every Species of

Terms and Proporuniting Power to

is this

Knowledge.

See

p. 3,

25a

He that would better comprehend the di function between sensitive Perception, and intellective, may obferve that, when a Truth is fpoken, it
is

heard by our Ears, and underftood by our Minds.

That

two Acts

thefe

example of fuch,

are different,

is

plain,

from the

as hear the founds, without

But

ing the language.

Stronger, let us fuppofe

to

fhew

them

Man, who

fhall

propofed.

Let the Truth be

to

know-

their difference ftiH

concur

in the

fame

both hear and under/land the Truth

for

example, The Angles

cfa Triangle are equal to two right Angles. That this

one Truth, and not tivo or many Truths, I believe

is

Let mc afk then, in what manner

Truth become perceptible (if at all) to Sensation ? The Anfwer is obvious; it is by fucceffive

nor.e will deny.

does this

Portions of

Word
the

is

faft

little

and

little at

Time.

Word

is

fome

No more

abfent, as well of

exifls at

&emaineJer as
1

when

prefent, all the previous are abfent

when any of the middle Words

there

When the firfv

prifent, all the fubfequent are abjent

are prefent, then are

one

fort as the other.

once than a fingle Syllable, and the

much

is

not,

(to Senfatic-n at ieaft) as

tho*

Book the Third.

and whole

365
an Ch,IV.

in the feparate individuals of

andjleeting Multitude , without de-

infinite

parting

tho'

it

much

never had been, or never was to be.

for the perception

nothing can be mere

diffipatcd, fleeting,

-And

Mind

is

that of the

And fo
we fee

of Sense, than which

limiJar?

and detached,

Admit

it,

and

Mind would no
one Truth, by recognizing its Terms
fucc-jfively and apart, than many diftant Minds would
recognize it, were it diftributed among them, a dif
what follows ?
more recognize

It follows, that one

ferent part to each f

one,

tho' its

Terms

The cafe is, every Truth is

many. Jt is in no reipefc

are

true by parts at a time, but

wee

ar.d in

cognize
does

this

Oneness

with the Stugirite, To

NOTD

iK&rw

or

is

true of neceflity at

Unity

Si

Where

even

we anfwer
EN IIOIOTN rSro 9

what makes

reiide, or

it

it

an in/iant.^\V hat Powers therefore re~

it ?

Shall

If this be allowed,

it

fhould feem,

where Sensation and Intellection appear to

concur-, that Seufation was of Many, Intellection was
of

One;

fucccjfive

that Senfation

was temporary,

divifible

and

Intellection, biJlanUncous, indivifible,

and

at once.
If

we

confider the Radii of a Circle,

at the

Circumference that they are

Center

that they are

2nd
r

Mind

iew them

to

we

many

fhall find
;

at the

one. Let us then fuppofe Sense

view the fame Radii, only let Senfe

at the

Circumference,

Mind

at the Center;
38<j

HERMES.

366

Ch.IV. parting from

*-"-^

its

the unity

and permanence of

own nature.

And

and hence we may conceive, how

even where they jointly appear

Powers

thefe

differ,

to operate in percep-

tion of the fame object.

There

another Act of the Mind,

is

very reverfe of that here mentioned

which

it

one.

This

that menial Separation, of

is

in the

to investigate the Caufes?

itfelf

Were

it

we

this, that

we

are enabled

make

much

it

by

Subject of philofophical Contemplation,

not for

this, it

would be

difficult for

lar Sciences to exift; becaufe othei wife they

as

this

which enables us

to abftracr. any particular Attribute, and

the

INT

which

and Principles? and Elements of

by Virtue of

It is

many

Chapter of

firft

that Refolution or Analyfis

things.

the

an Acl, by

perceives not one in many? but

have given fome account

Book

particu-

would be

blended, as the feveral Attributes of fenfible

Sub fiances.

How,

for

example, could there be fuch

a Science as Optics? were

we

neceffitated to

plate Colour concreted with Figure?

which the Eye can never view, but

mention not a multitude of other

fome of which

ft

II

contem-

two Attributes,
aflbciated

fenfible qualities,

prcfent themfelves,

whenever

we

Jyk on any coloured Body.

Thofe

Book the Third.

And

thus

<we arrive at

we

367

fee the Procefs by

general Ideas

which Ch.IV.

for the

Per-

Thofe two noble Sciences, Arithmetic and

Geometry, would have no Eafis to ftand on, were
it

not for this fep a rative Power.

They

are both con-

Quantity ; Geometry about continuous Quantity, Arithmetic about Discrete. Extension is effential to continuous Quantity; Monads, or Units, to Difcrete. By feparating from
the infinite Individuals, with which we are furrounded,
verfant about

thofe infinite Accidents, by

which they are

all

dherfi-

we leave nothing but thofe simple and perfectly similar Units, which being combined
make Numeer, and are the Subject of Arithme-

fied,

Again, by feparating from Body every poflible

tic.

fubordinate Accident, and leaving

it

nothing but

its

Ext enfion of Lengthy Breadth^ and Thicknefs-, (of

which were it to be deprived, it would be Body no
longer) we arrive at that pure and unmixed Magnitriple

tude,

the contemplation of whole properties

makes

the Science of Geometry.

By

the fame analytical or feparate Power,

veftigate
is

Definitions

we

in-

of all kinds, each one of which

a developed IFord, as the fame

Word

is

an invehped

Definition.'

To

conclude

consists the
3

In Composition and Division

whole of Science, Compost-

tion

*- "'~ - '

HERMES.
Perceptions here mentioned are in fact no

In thefe too

other.

we

perceive the ob-

jectsofSciENCEandREAL Knowledge,
which can by no means be, but of that
which

is

general,

and

definite,

andjixt (g).

Here

MAKING AFFIRMATIVE TRUTH, AND

SHEWING US THINGS UNDER THEIR SIMILARI-

TION

and Identities; Division making Ne-

TIES

gative Truth, and presenting them to

us under their Dissimilarities and Diversities.

And here, by the way, there occurs a Queflion.

If all Wifdom be Science, and it be the bufmefs of
Science as well to compound as to feparate, may
fay that thofe Philofophers took:

the JVbsle,

dom

who

diftinguifhed

only feparaied^ and

Yet

from Wit, as

Wit only brought

fo held the Philofopher of

Author of the
(g)

it

we not
Half of Wifdom for

The

EjJ'ay on the

if

Wis-

together?

Malmjbury, and the

Human

Under/landing.

very Etymologies of the

Words

EITI-

2THMH,
ferve in

Scientia, and Understanding, may

fome degree to fhew the nature of thefe

Faculties, a3 well as of thofe Beings, their true and

proper Objects.

EUl 2TA2IN

EillLTHMH

*j ooov

uvofAOifxi,

^* r

tuu zr^xyy.ciruv o\yiw ^u,',

tiff

Book the Third.

369

iHere too even Individuals, however of Ch.IV.

themfelves unknowable, become objects of

Knowledge,

rvq ccosifixg
'/5

yxo

ixtrxZoX^q ruv

rx kxQoXx

i7ris"/]^ri tz-tgi

Itt\
x-,

pigx; XTrxysTX'

xfxirxTr\uTX

yusTxr Science (EIII2THMH) has

of things, taking us away from the un-

bounded nature and mutability of Particulars

Niceph. Blem. Epit. Logic,

for

it is

and inva-

converjant about Subjects, that are general,

riable.

xxtx-

name from

STASIN) to some Stop and

bri ging us (EFII

Boundary

its

p. 21.

This Etymology given by Blemmides, and long before

him adopted by the

from Plato,
it

from

firft

as

Peripatetics,

may be feen
In

his Cratylus.

came

in the following

this

originally

account of

Dialogue Socrates, having:

(according to the Heraclitean Philofophy, which

Cratylus favoured) etymologized a multitude of Words

with a view to
pofed

th?.:

Flow and unceafing Mutation, fup-

by Heraclitus

changes

his

to

run thro'

all

things, at length

Syftem, and begins to etymologize from

another, which fuppofed fomething in nature to be per-

On this

manent and fixed.

~Lxo7To)ixiv

tkto to

$n,
cvo[j.x

pxXXov

i%

auTwi/

tvv

principle he thus proceeds

xvxXxQovtss zrg&rov

EIIISrHMHN,
<m[*x7vgv

on IZTH2IN

tfi,

Xy

7)[j.wi>

EI1I rotg zrowyy.xtri ryv uVyp^i/, y

<pigiTXi.

Eotxe

ri

[XIV

uq dy.<pi*,oXo*

on

c"*j^7tsc'

Let us confider then (fays he) fame of the

B b
very

370

Ch.IV. Knowledge,

*T

'

E R

S.

as far as their nature will per-

For then only may any Particular

mit.

be

very Words already examined \ and in the prft placey

the

Word Science; how

(as to its

this

difpu.'able is

former Etymology) how much more naturally

appear

things, than

that

Cratyl. p. 437.

The
ludes,

it is

does it

the Soul at

it Stops

fignify, that

to

carried about with than.

Plat,

Edit. Serr,

difputable

Etymology, to which he here

was a ftrange one of

his

own making

al-

in the

former part of the Dialogue, adapted to the flowing

Syftem of Heraclitus there mentioned.

to this notion, he had derived
7T(r5j

and

[/Aheiv,

as if

perpetually following

it

them

According

EITIXTHMH

from

kept along with things,

motions.

in their

by

See

Plato as before, p. 412.

As

Scientia, we

to

the following ingenious

tio, motus quidam

cjl :

are indebted to Scatiger for

Ratiocina-

Etymology.

Scientia,

quies

nomen, turn apud Grtvcos, turn etiam nojlrum.

to

Eni I2TA20AI, EniXTHMH.

Scientia,

cti

ylvirai

et

Yluox

Si/litur enim

mentis agitatio, et Jit [pedes in animo.

Nam

undc

Sic

Latinum

ZXEUZ TOT ONTOS.

Latini, quod nomen cutis fimplex

alt

ufu abjecerunt

etque repudjaruntj cmnibus aclivis participiis idem ad"

junxerunt. /tudiens i oLx.zuv wv. ScievSj<r%ocv un. Seal,

in

Theophr. de Caufis Plant. Lib.

1

I.

p. 17.

The

Book the Third.

be faid to be known,

Man,

to be a

when by

371

afTerting

it

or an Animal, or the like,

we

The

Word, Understanding, means

Englijh

not fo properly Knowledge^ as that Faculty of the Soul,

where Knowledge

Why

refides.

may we

not then

imagine, that the framers of this Word intended to reprefent

as a kind of firm Bafis,

it

Structure of Sciences was to

stand Under

pofed to

Support

reft,

on which the

fair

and which was fup-

themj as their immoveable

Whatever may be

faid of thefe

Etymologiesj whe-

ther they are true or falfe* they at leaft prove their

Authors to have confidered Science and

standing, not
Senfe?

zs fleeting

but rather

as

Comprehensions.

Under-

powers of Perception,

like

Jhady, permanent? and durable

But

if fo,

we muft fomewhere

or other find for theni czttzmjleady? permanent?

and

Objects; fnice if Perception of anv

KIND BE DIFFERENT FROM THE THING PER-

durable

CEIVED, (whether
crooked

it

perceive ftraight as crooked, or

as ftraightj the

moving

as fixed, or the fixed

moving) 6uch Perception must of necessity be erroneous and false. The following paf-

as

fage from a Greek Platonic

hereafter) feems

El

(whom we (hall quote again

on the prefent occafion not without

yvurts dxgiQtfigcc ttk aW0>iVfw?,

its

weight

,6'r

v k) yvwrx, dtoQtfiga

if)

3b

rw

ccurQriTUU,

If there

be

a Know-

2
\

Ch.IV*

HERME

3/2
Ch.IV. we
**~-n<-*-'

re ^er

lt

S.

t0 f me foch comprebenjive, or

general Idea.

Nowitisofthefe coMPREHENSivEand

permanentIdeas,thegenuinePerceptions of pure Mind, that Words

of

Languages, however

all

different, are

Symbols. And hence it is, that as

//^Perceptions include, fo do thefe their

the

Symbols
a Knowledge

mare accurate than

Sensation

objects offuch knowledge MORE

OBJECTS OF SENSE.

there mnjl be certain

TRUE THAN

The following then are Queftions worth confiderWhere theyrefidc I

What thefe Objecfs are
And how they are to be difeovered? Not by expe-

ing,

rimental Pbilofopby

nothing, but what

it is

is

plain; for that meddles with

tangible, corporeal, and

nor even by the more refined and

tion of Mathematics

for this, at its very

ment, takes fuch Objecls

for granted.

add, that if they refide in our

mutable

rational fpecula-

commence-

We can only

own Minds, (and who,

that has never looked there, can affirm the}" do not

then will the advice of the

Satiriif.

proper,

NEC

TE

be no ways im-

QUiESIVZRIS EXTRA.
Pcrf

Book the Third.

Symbols

373

exprefs, not this or that fet

of Ch.IV.

Particulars only, but all indifferently , as

Were

they happen to occur.

therefore the

Inhabitants of Salijbury to be transferred

to York, tho'

new

appear on every

more want

would

particular objects
fide,

they would

new Language

ftill

to explain

themfelyes, than they would want

Minds

AH

new

comprehend what they beheld.

indeed, that they would want,

be the
as

to

no

local proper

we have

would

Names; which Names,

{aid already *, are

hardly a part

of Language, but muft equally be learnt

both by learned and unlearned, as often
as.

they change the place of their abode.

It

is

upon the fame principles w e may

r

perceive the reafon,

the dead

Lan-

we call them are now intelliand why the Language of modern

guages (as
gible

why

England

is

able to defcribe antient

* Sup.

b 3

p.

345, 346.

Rome

and

"""

HERMES.

374

Ch.IV. and that oiantient Rome

i*^ England (b). But of

to defcribe modern

wc

thefe matters

have fpoken before.

2.

And

Procefs, by
let

now having viewed the

which we acquire general Ideas

us begin

and

anew from other

try to difcover (if

fortunate) whence

If

ginally come.

may

it is

we

we

Principles,

can prove fo

that thefe Ideas ori-

can fucceed here,

we

difcern perhaps, iphat kind of Beings

they are > for this at prefent appears

fome-

what obfeure.

Let

(b)

As

far as

Human ATat:re,

and the primary Ge-

nera both of Sv.bjlance and Accident are the fame in

places, and have

been

fo thro' all

ages

fo far all

common Identity. As

guages fhare one

all

Lanpe-

far as

culiar (pedes of Sub/lance occur in different regions

and much more,

ligious

and

far each

civil Polities

Language has

the Caufes

oi

are every where different

its

fo

Diversity. To
mentioned, may be added

peculiar

Diverjity here

Charade f and Genius of every Naconcerning which we (hall fpeak hereafter.

the dijlinguifoing
tien,

as far as the pofiiive Injlitutions of re-

Book the Third.

Let

375

us fuppoie any mat* to look for

Work

time upon fame

of Art , as

the

firil

for

example upon a Clock, and having

Sufficiently

Would

viewed

he not

length to depart.

at

it,

retain, when abfent,

of what he had feen

x^nd what

an Idea
is it, to

Form
internal correfposdent /otheexter-

retain fuch Idea f

nalj

It

is

to

have a

only with this difference, that the

Internal

Form

External

is

is

devoid of the Matter; the

united with

it,

being feen in

the metal, the wood, and the like.

Now

if

we

fappofe this Spectator to

view many fuch Machines* and not limply

to

view,

but to confider every part of

them,fo as to comprehend
all

how thefe parts

operate to one End, he might be then

faid to pofTefs a

kind of

intelligible

Form, by which he would not only underftand, and know the Clocks, which he
had feen

already, but every

like Sort,

which he might

b 4

Work

alfo

of

fee hereafter.

Should

Ch.IV*

HERMES.

37^

be aiked " which of thefe Forms

prior, the External and Senfble, or

Ch.IV. Should

it

*'

is

*'

the Internal

fwer

is

and

Intelligible 5"

obvious, that the prior

is

the

An-

the Sen-

fible.

Thus

we fee, there are intelligible Forms, which to the

Sensible are subsequent.
then

But farther flill If thefe Machines be

allowed the Work not of Chance, but of
an Artift, they mull be the Work of one,
who knew what
is it, to

It

is

he

was

about.

And what

work, and know what one

is

about?

have an Idea of what one

to

doing; to poffefs

a Form internal,

refpond:?2g to the

is

cor-

external,/!? which ex-

ternal itfervesfor an

Exemplar

or

Ar-

chetype.

Here

we haye an intelligible Form, which is prior to the

sensible Form; which , being truly prior
then

as

Book the Third.

(is

277

well in dignity as in time, can no mor.e be- ChJV".

come fubfeqaent, than

Thus then,
Art, we may

Caiife

v--vw

can to Effect*

with refpect to

Works of

we attend, A
triple Order of Forms; one Order,
perceive, if

and previous

intelligible

to thefe

Works; a

fecond Order, jQnjible and concomitant ; and

a third again, intelligible and fubfequent.

After the

firfl

Maker

of thefe Orders the

may be faid to work

the Works themlelves

thro' the fecond,

exiji,

and are what

they are j and in the third they become

recognized, as :nere Objecls of Contemplation.

To make

thefe

Forms by

different

Names more eafy to be underitood; the

firfl may be called Tin: Maker's Form;
thefecond, that of the Subject and the
third, that of the Contemplatgr.
;

Let us
Nature.

pafs

viewing fome
*'

from hence

to

Works of

Let us imagine ouriclves

diverfified

Profpect

'*

Plain, for example, fpacious and fer-

"

tile;

HER M

3;3

S.

Ch.IV. u tile ; a river winding thro' it ; by the

v-v-'
" banks of that river, men walking and
C(

grazing

cattle

" with diftant

view terminated

the

fome craggy, and

hills,

" fome covered with wood."

Here

it

we have plenty of Forms natural. And could any one quit fo fair

is

plain

a Sight, and retain no traces of

had beheld ?-

what

traces of

have certain
spondent to
bling

them

And what

is it,

what he
to retain

ore has beheld h

It is

Forms internal
the external, and
in

every

being merged in Matter.

to

corre-

refem-

thing,

except the

And

thus, thro'

the fame retentive and collective Powers,

the

Mind becomes

6v'j/.
*'

Should

thefe

it

ones

allied,

viewed by the

Internal exijling

Anfwer

be

Forms

artiji-

" which of

natural Forms are prior, the

u ternal
*'

with

before

as

natural,

fraught with Form*

is

in

the

Bx

Senfes, or the

MindV

the

obvious, that the prior are the

FsXternaL

Thus

Book the Third,

Titus therefore

in

Nature,

370,

as well

Art, there are intelligible

Forms, which to the sensible are
in

fcs

subsequent.
meaning of that
ejl

in

Hence then we fee the

noted School Axiom, Nil

Intellect u

quod non priusfoit

SeJnsu; an Axiom, which we mull

to be fo far allowable, as

in

own

refpects the

it

Ideas ef a mere Ccntemplaior*

But to

proceed lbmewhat farther

made by Chance
Let us admit by De~

natural Productions
or

by Design

Are
,

Jign t not to lengthen our inquiry.

The'y

are certainly * more exquifite than any

Works of Art, and

bring

ourfelves

Chance. -Admit

fuppofe

to
it,

yet thefe

we cannot
made by

and what follows

We mujl of necejjity admit a Min d a/fi,

Design

caufe
is to

be found.

implies

Mind,

Allowing

he-

wherever

it

therefore this.

what

*
L

Arifi. de

Part. Animal. L.

I.

c. 1.

Ch.IV.
'

)r~mJ

HERMES.

3^P

Ch.IV. what do we mean by the Term,

We

Mind r

mean fomething, which, when

knows what

it

is

going

Jlored with Ideas of

to do

aci',

it

fomething

intended Works,

its

agreeably to which Ideas thofe

Works arc

faflnoned.

That fuch Exemplars, Patterns,

Forms, Ideas
muft of necejjity

(call

them

be, requires

Caufe of Nature

you

pleafe)

no proving,

we admit the
be a Mind, as above

but follows of courfe,

mentioned.

as

to

if

For take away

thefe,

and

what a Mind do we leave without them ?

Chance furely is as
without Ideas
without Ideas is
;

knowing,
or

no

Mind
Mind

as

rather
lefs

blind than

Chance.

The

Nature of thefe Ideas

not dif-

we once come

to al-

a poffibility of their Exiftence.

That

ficult to explain,

low

is

they

are

and

orderly,

if

exquilitely
is

beautiful,

various,

evident from the exquinte

Beauty, Variety, and Order, feen in natu-

Book the Third.

381

ral

Sub fiances, which are but their Copies Ch.IV.

or

Pictures.

That they

plain, as they are of the

are

Efence

mental

of

is

Mind,

and confequently no Objects to any of

the Senfes,
either

nor therefore circumfcribed

by Time or Place.

we have
plenty of Forms intelligible, which
ARE TRULY PREVIOUS TO ALL FORMS
sensible. Here too we fee that Nature is not defective in her triple
Order, having (like Art) her Forms
PREVIOUS, HER CONCOMITANT, and
her Subsequent (/).

Here

on

then,

this

Syitem,

That
(i) Slmplicius, in his

ments,

calls

zrpo ttk

commentary upon the Predicathei'e intelligible Forms,

thefijl Order of

ptQiZius, thofe-'jrevious

and at other times,

r]

is,

i>

jw.0:;*,

thofs

tbofe

merged

in

Participation,

i^n^tvn mvotw,

dent Univerfaiity or Samenefs

ra

to

which
Matter

the tranfcen-

the/econd Order he calls

exijl in Participation, that

;

and

at other times,

he

calls them % KdTccriTxyiJ.hr) xoh/otj?, the fub ordinate

Ijmverfaiity or Samtneji', Litly,oi ine third

Order he
fays,

<

_,J

HERMES,

$$2

That

Ch.IV.

called

the Previous rriay be jujlly {q

beeaufe they are

is plairij

effentially

prior

fays, that

they have no independent exigence of their

own, but

that

gxi$

fi[AS?S

x^tXovrsg xvfot

xaO' Ixvtx UTitmv xy.it ,

inoicz.ii;,

abjlracling them in our

own

ix7; fytEr!;<?

ourfelves

Imaginations^ have given

them by fzich abfiraction an exigence as of themfelves.

Praedic. p. 17.
Simp,
In another place he fays, in

a language fomewhat myfteribuSj yet Hill conformable

to the

fame doctrine

KcwoVy to
rri<;

iv

twv

Xr^llf

Tn?

>tj

UicctpocirriToi;

0*VTtP0\> Si Ifl

xxtx

to

ol,

iv

we tnuji admit a

TO HOMOS', TO X7T0 KGiti! CCITIZ

rxTg

nfji.iTiptcif

and fuperior

them, as thro'

from

its

therefore
is

Uni-

that of the frfi Order^

PartietdarSf which thro'

its

that

of the fccond Ordert what

ii

the ptjl ut.iverfa! Coufc into the various

ftVeral Species
ftf abjirtioiion

to

aat-

taHi of that Samenefs exijiing in

jnultf/m pre-conception it is the caufe-

Species of Beings,

ftfuunt origin

JiavoiaK

the

is

their Diverftty

infufed

Itvrct^o'j xvroTg

vfigoymt;

versal and the Samf;

uniform nature

(pvviv }

ty,v zroXvtiSri -zroo-

o> Perhaps
triple Order of what

ciuioo; v$irx[ji.tvoi>i

frauji: trident

xy xitiov

yixv szutz

r'/iv

$ix(pcgoi<; hdiffiv iy^^ofjavot, x,

TCiTfli/

#/*

hiXfXy

::<x6'

xvrtnq xcivoT^rog t x.urx

olfTrig

tok

%> tpit]cv \rnr\iov to

Mri7ro~t

[xtv irigv)[jt.wcv

and which has

its exiflenct

that of the third Ordtr,

in our oivn UndtrJiandtUgiy being

to the other

two*

Ibid. p.

in

theft

what fubffit
offub-

2t f

7>

Book the Third.

frkrto

World

ble

The whole

things eliV.

all

3^3
visi-

exhibits nothing n.ore, than

fo

To

Si::ipliciu$

wefnall add the two following

Quo-

ji(nmttius

and Nicephorus Blewmides t

which we have ventured

to transcribe, without regard

from

tations

uncommon

to their

length, as they fo fully cftahlKU

the Doctrine here advanced, and the works of thefc

Author? are not eafy

to*W

'EwoiivQio

rv^ct, 'ApAA$d?,

to be procured.

JaxJuAio? tc

ti?

u<rr.\6<w:/

"STjotvJot

*y

i? iyo?

moXKci,

*J x'/iosa

^BxJuAfl^P cr^cay;^TW

ScOMrx'Ms'Qf
,

ruAt'u

i TOtVVV 0"pCXyi;

^Xi/Ct%.

t>j

hauoja tS aVo^a^a^^a, EIII

licTa)!/'

T^r?

av

yzj} Ar.y.msyog^ rjoiyv urcu/TU,

tyii to

st.gog

uxo'

fktpoQuy, ura.y~a.q Tuoiu.

<7i

'hxvtco

El

-Er^ca.' Ti) A//^x5^p'yu.

# .wyr'c-t.

T^yaO)

?e'

ra

Ajiima^yc? 3-Hu.ixgyu, n

xpyxy.tvxy r ax tiJwj.
1

T'/J

0i6)f

TOI IIOAAOI^,
wvocicrfty ^ W\ tw ytvuv x$

tzvru rx ~<x.v7uy zrq$g.$uyy.z7cc*

*/l

n*

X; uf^c>yi!/"/K.

wf

wutw t

~z;<z~

HPO TON IK)AAX1N iVi* w $

EN TOI nOAAOIS*
xiifioif,
$ ?

tsk

sjj

<?s

^lyirf

t>

7T0V,

o os

iifffloe

roc ^nfl>, STij-tfcr^f or*

aa7J S%$T

iY.[-JTTUp.Z TVJ

srapaxsj^ya*

xicab Tsoivla;'

-raj

*crn/ ic1 v'7rw

Ixliiruiixa, ivujf } si

'AAA

ak$|4w

t d]/^u)7THj urge; 2
TJJ

hrcnn

Afivw^, co?

Jw, j'.s:stw tcj'Jt,

liicog
J

iyj- ~e<zs

oiov, zroiuy

tx uV avr

jt*V

jt*j

njwi,

ttfAAtop ETcr^ai* t,

e)\'jm'jc

a^3?

Ch.IV.

HERME

384
Ch.IV.

S.

& many pdjjtng Pictures of thefe immutable

Nay thro'

Archetypes.

thefe

attains

it

Sem-

f&tXXu

x'jtg

t.o

a yap, us

-ujoiz-.v y

CoQiv

croia*

y~,

yiyvouiwcj

ciJjs-i! -zxxvrus

yiyvoy.ivoi/'

fl

TJJS UAJ?

Ta EidV

p^a;^ra

"TGIZ

7^ vfEfoyEVEC-

Efi

di to Eidor

TU7T0;*

ei>

T3 XVVfOJTTH
To7g

K^tlc

QictTxpivoi

il

ct

xa7

jxJu^^jocoiTa." x)

Lvaj,

xxrx yAoog

T3>

to xvto ejoo? t ai<()pw7r8 t%x<riv y

A0os/to?, y^ SixtrxfAiitz

oiuto

tu

^weiro*

Hj IV TOif

/k

tjj

nOAAOIS,

Sixvoix'

x)

ffyew f" T

xij^/a)

Xiysrai tto

T * woAXa,

Tnttlligatur annuius, qui alicujus, ut-

fcte AchiUii, imagbiem infculptam babeat:

cerafint,

k)

i.>

u;

"KiyAiCbl

>t,

EN TOI2 IIOAAOI2

Tr;s uXjjf.

I1ITI

ut

vToittj oloz to

TON nOAAHN,

roistvTx

ft6<icjTr^j, qtj zrdi/TiS

'

Ti) O^exJtArO

EW

toc

ttVpt,xfcafAx

TQHiVV

Qeos

0 TO iJOOj

(wj eVi Td ifipav

Xoymriv zfouTy

XVTZ.

sroiTj, atiTcfii dn?-ov }

dt ZiStv

jxaroK avO^WTrojf, J; t

>JyiTca

yvufi-

a,i>Qp'j}7rov, I

Uo? nPO

tSto to

U7r'

ovvocpst

stpirxvatrx

&>J

aA&yw

<P'jc"Kj

'Ej de ti y.xP ifciv

ffi* EB to> Arr utaf"j/x'

AvfAIZPytf,

'A

<pu<rsq> ix.

r\

to yiyvt/pivov

hxtx

(*n XfiPOVjii

uts

TsroiHi

even

ab annulo imprimantur

multa infuper

veniat dcinde quif-

piamyvideatque ceras ownes unius annuli imprcjfwmfortnatasyanmilique imprejfionem in mente contincat : figillum

annulo infculptuin, a::te

multa

dicetur : in cerulit

MULTts: quod vera in Halts, qui Wo veintelligentid remanferit^ post multa, et pojte-

impreunt3 in
nerat

rius

Book the Third.

585

a Semblance of Immortality, and con- Ch.IV.

tmues

rius genitum dicetur.

ligendum cenfeo

Idem in generibus etfrmis

etenlm

Intel-

optimus procreator ?nundi

ille

Deus, omnium rerum formas, atque exempla habet apucl

fe

hominem

ut ft

habet-y

efpeeire velit, in

ad

initieatuf, et

omnes.

At Ji quis

Creator em non

effe

hominis formam,

exemplum

illius

rejlilcrit,dicatque

cate'ros

rerum formas apucl

quevfo ut dilijrenter atiendat

fex, quce facit, vel cognofcit, vel ignorat

nefciet,

nunquam quicquam faciet

non advertat :) Si

t)ero

quodcunque ab eofaclum

Deus non

efj'e

Ji cognovit

perfpicuum

perinde

ejl.

Neque enimfaadtate

MULT a,

et

etji

natura

quafaciat,

omnino cognovit.

Si igitur

quam homo, facit quid, qua;

qua fecit, in ipfo rerum for-

Forma

ac in annuls figillum,

aute?n in opifice

hacque forma

avulfa a materia dicitur.

fpecies in unoquoque

qui

ratione quadatn aliquidfacits

ejl

pejore ratione,

fecit cognovit

Opi-

is,

rationis experte aliquid agct, prout agii

(ex quo conf.citur, ut natura etiam agat,

mas

fed

quis cnim idfacer

aggreditur, quod facer e ignorat ?

quddam

quam

faciat

nomine

funt

ante

Atqui hominis

quemadmodum etiam

ejl,

et in MU'ltis, nee avulfa a materia

;
At cum fingulos homines animo confpicimus, et

figilla in ceris

dicitur.

eandem in unoquoque formam atque

effigies in

mente nofird infidens

rius genita dicetur : veluti in

multa figilla in cerd una

fpexerat.

Ammm.

et

effigiem videmus, ilia

post multa,
illo

et pojle-

quoque dicebamus, qui

eodem annulo impreffa con-

in Porphyr. Introtiuit. p. 29. b.

Asyofls

386
Ch.IV.

E R

throughout ages

tinues

S.

be specifi-

to

cally
Aiyofixt

rot

S\

rx

Kj

y'ivr\

TI2N

ITPO

t\$T\

JIOAAttN,

EN TOI2 IIOAAOI2, Eni TOIZ

nOAAOI2

aov tvvoturQa

trtp^xyirriciov,

ri

poi

Xy >cJu7TWjW.a TO TUp^OV, f XY1CIX ZTOXXCC y.ZTOt.Xtt.&i.-

ru t

r,i}v7ru> ua.T(?jy>
l

rx }

utooxxtiSw

fxn

exxwg

>

Si

rx

lv

xxt tj?

&4"f

tx.ytx.yiTj)

to ix\u7ru[j.x y

Xj

tirifriirxf

rzxv\x ra xvra [AiTi^avw ix\vTruy.xr!^3 i

ztroXXx tjO

Xoyq

Sixvoixv*

To

trMva^ooHTuq

t\q

fisv,

x)

xxtx

Sixvoixv otuAws

"Ovrccg

xv

npo ton noAAriN

i
ji*l

yo, xxrx rag Tzro^TJxa? Ao'yaf

CIQTTOIQI

Mirt^itn^3 rx ow

7rxpr,yxyti/'

tJn

vtpsrnxivoci

dv^coiroig to

KT [Aig

3 <7T7rOt5'

>ij

'lITTTGlCy

X^ TO??

twv T0aTWV

cus

ejo'wi',

~mx
Jtwri

cC0J TO

lr

tg~? w6q>vroi$ to

*nr&>iT)tov,

cW

TOIS

rx

x,

tm

x^

<

lv
J'o?

iV'/TK lJJ ' V

xAXoig
oVf^

ETII

UTroraVj

t5 C4^0^w7ra

TO T3

xxrxXytp-

t\Si>

a^j^o jj-

y^

XXV

zt^ouokts Xy

Xiyo^xi rx ywri

ot

EN TOI2 I10AAOI2,

f/.'tp(f

roTg xylols,

lv

rx yan

tt>

y.x-

Tonuipx Xiyi-

e jZvruv

ejVjv

brt

rx Soxxv-

ZVtXIOCg VT^OMtplf^XXCij

XoyOi TUV 6VTUV

zg Xoysg

to

y^

lyiru raro

fj>,

(aIv zv <Ttp^xyiq-,',piov

txi nPO TON IIOAAX2NEN TOI2 I10AAOI2- ro S\

ITOAAOIS.

rxZ~

oAw? to tnpgxyirTigiov' lu~

y.y)S

olg

Mir*

ro7g
tfij

jt,

rx

xxrdt
x, toV

XU^U7T0^

Sly

yjV^P VKTXT

to ^wof*

xu< tc<? ^uotg

xaGoAtJtwTf^ov

^JT*^Ti* vvvxyjiivruv

Si Xy

yiV^

ri"

ruv QMruv,

Book the Thikd.

cally

one, amid thofe

387

infinite parti-

cular

SeugETreu to ifx^/v^ov'

tx

tjj i7rKTK07ruv xj

Toy/ETxi' o'vv^pxfxva'uv

TUV
to,

TO ZTOUTOV

sViWi/,

tx

TiocTtx.

%
(pCCVUTXl J^ yiV\Y.UTX\0\)

ylv3

Ktx.TdXa.Cuv

yivv\.

TY1V

Si Tig

XUTUV QlGW,

vQsrws

toj ii$t) x]

tuv xara pio<& av-

tx.

avQp U7T0TY}TX } IK 01 TUV

T5JV

[aso* 'nriruv xvtt,v tvv l-nroTATXy

xaOoAa xvPUTrov y

x)

xa-

vupTrxv

tok upripiyois tuv acrco^ca-

(Te

EN TOI2 IIOAAOIS

tw p\v

QpWKUV

$1 <rJ* toj? tjUiJ/up^oi? IQeXsi

il

*i]/Up, to <ruy.x

arw tov

x,

Toy xaOoAss iimov l7rnon<rxq ' Xy

to xa9oA i^uov Ik tuv xxdixarx tu Xoyx <rvvxyxyuv

x)

to xaQoAa

kJ

to xaOo'Aa cru^x,

a!<r0i?T>coif,

^Vat/Tai/ o"uAAo
yoj'*

ytVij xj

IIOAAOIS,
Genera vero

yt(ra//i'J

tx

toistoj

et Species

dicuntur

MULTA.

J'ta-

T0I2

ejfe

ante multa,

Vt puta,

intclligatur

et in

medium

aliquis has

Cum

autem

vU

eas ceras in quibus figura exprimitur, et anitnad-

omnes eandem jiguram partlcipare^

vertijjet

in

unum

mente teneat*

Nempe figillum

dicitur

multa

vero in ceris x in

videbantur multa,

iis

quamlibet Jiguram habens, ex quo mult a cerce

tjufdem figurajint participes,

ab

sauTa

dvXus vTrirwsv Ettl

proferaty nequaqua?n pravifo figillo.

dijj'et

si/ t'i

atrtaj/

T8TtT, jt*Ta t<x zjoAAa xj Jr^oysvwfo

IN MULTis, POST
figi-ltum,

ito^Yi

{^yvp^of,

xa9o'A8

to

x]

t^ kx^oXmutxtym

x)

ilia

defumiturj

POST MULTA.

multa

et

ratione

in

ejfe fpecies

ANTE

multis

in Creatore funt)

Genera

fecundum

qua

hoc in

qua vero

mente immaterialitcr

Sic igitur et

et

coegijfet,

fub/i/lit t

et Species

ANTE

rationes ejjic'untes*

It

Ch.IV.

HERMES.

3 S8

Ch.IV. cular changes, that

ment

befal

it

every

mo

(k).

May
In Deo enim rerum

una

effeclrices rat tones

et fimplleiter

pra-extflunt, fecundum quas rationes Hie jupra-fubfantialis

omnes res

autc7n dicuntur

et

Exijlere

prcedejlinavit et proauxit.

Genera

et Species

IN MULTIS, queniam

infingul'is hominibus hominis Species, et in fingulis equis

equi Species

cjl.

In hominibus aque ac in equis

et atiis

harum fpecicrum, quod ejl

In animalibus etiam una cum Zoophytis magis

animalibus Genus ir/venitur

animal.

univerfale Genus, nempe fenfitivum exquiritur.

vero plantis, fpeclatur Genus animatum.

cum animatis quifquam

matay totum Corpus

mum

vclit perfcrutari etiam inani-

Cum

perfpiciet.

porea conjunct a fucrint

its

et generaliffirnum

Odditis

Si vero una

autem entia incor-

modo traclatis, apparebit pri-

Genus.

MULTIS fubfijlunt Genera

Jit que

et Species.

quidem IN

it a

Comprebendens

vero quifquam ex fingulis hominibus naturam ipfam bu-

mananiy

et

ex fingulis equis ipfam equinam, atque ita

univerfalcm hominem
et univerjale

verfale fenfitivumy

corpusy et

et

univerfalem equum ccnfidcranSy

animal ex fingulis
et

maxime

EIiI

Genera

et Species

TOI2 IIOAAOIZ,

mult a, et pojlerius genita.

immaterial

hoc

eft,

post

Niceph. Blem. Log. Epit.

Vid. etiam Alcin. in Platonic. Philofoph. In-

p. 62.

troduce.

(i)

uni-

univerfale ens ex omnibus colligensy

hicy inquam, in fua mente

liter coriflituit

rat'tone colligens y et

univerfale animatum, et univerfale

C. IX. X.

The following elegant Lines

of Firgilare worth

attending to, tho' applied to no higher a fubjec~i than

Bees.
Ergo-

Book the Third.

389

May we be allowed then to credit thofe

Men, who

ipeculative

us,

tell

"

it

"

Ergo

ipfis

Excipiat

may be

thcfe

(neque enim plus feptima ducitur <ztas)

fame Immortality, that

Kind,

in

quamvis angujli terminus avt

At Genus immortale manet

The

is

feen in

animal or inanimate

is,

G. IV.

the Immortality of the

per ijhable fubftances, whether

all

for tho' Individuals perifu, the

And hence, if we take

Time, as denoting the fyfletn of things temporary, we
may collect the meaning of that paflage in the TtmauSj

feveral Kinds

where
f*.iV

Jlill

Time

the Philofopher delcribes

OPT* aiU!V^ J

iv

Mtermtatis

iixcvci.

quondam,
Plat.

remain.

V.

certis

doidydu

ii/i

KOtr

in

uno permanentis

numerorum

to be

lairocv olvxviov

Irnaginem

progredieniem.

articulis

III. p. 37. Edit. Serran,

We have fubjoined the following extract from Boethius, to ferve as a

Time.

commentary on

/Eternitas

totafimul et perfeci a

igitur

pnffefjio.

Hum clarius liquet. Nam

id prafens a pr enteritis

this defcription

of

interminabilis vitee

eji,

^uodex collatione temtora-

quidquid vivit in

m fittura procedit

TEMPORE,

nibilque

efl

in

tempore ita conflitutum,quod totum vitee fuesfpatiutn pariter pojfit amplest

fed

c,

aflinum quidem nondum af>pre-

hendit, hc/lernum vero jam perdidit.

In hodierna quo-

qw

iilo

vita non amplius vivit/ 's,

Cc

quam
3

in

mobili tranfitorioque

Ch.IV.

HERMES.

39

Ch.IV. " thefe permanent and'comprehenfveY'or Ms

" that the Deity views at once, without

*^V~~J

"
"
*'

looking

abroad,

both prefent,

that this

but a View

is

all things

in their Principles

torioqve momento.

p aft, -andfuture

where

himfelfy

productions

all pofjible

great and Jiupendous View

" of
i(

lie

inveloped.

and Exemplars,

as be-

.^uod igitur Temporis patitur eondi-

iionem, licet illud, ficut de niundc cenfuit Ariftoteles, nee

ccepent

uvquam

effe,

nee deftnat, vitaque ejus

cum tem-

poris itifinitate tendatur,

nendum tamen

num

Non enim toiumfimul infinites

ejfe

jure credatur.

licet vitcz fpatium

tale eft, ut ceter-

comprehendit, atque compleclitur, fed

futura nondum iranfacla jam non

habet.

)uod igitur

interminabilis vita plenitudincm totatn pariter comprehendit, ac pojjidet, cut neque futuri

pr^teriti jiuxerit, id

idque necefe

sternum

qaidquam

abfit, nee

ejfe jure per-hibetur

profensjibifemper afftftere,
et infiniiatem mcbilis temporis habere prafentem. Unde
quidam non rede, qui cum audiunt vifum Platoni, mun-

dum hunc

eft,

etfui compos

nee habuijje initium, nee habiturum

ejfe

de-

fectum, hoc modo conditori conditum

aternum putant. Aliud

LEM DUCI vitam,

eft

mundum fieri coenim per interminabi-

(quod Alundo Platq tribuit) aliud

INTERMINABILIS VITJE TOTAM PARITER COMPLEXAM ESSE PR.SENTIAM, quod Divines Mentis
prcprium

ejfe

manifeftum

eft.

Neque enim Deus

conditis

rebus

Book the Third.

cc

ejj'ential to

*HJ
*'

Intelleflion?"

that

we

thefulnefs of his unlverfal

If*

invert the

We

tioned.

mull:

fb, it will

Axiom
now fay

Sensu, quod non prius fuit

ts

For

u.

391

be proper

men-

before

Nil eft

in

Intellecmay be true

in

tho' the contrary

with refpect to Knowledge merely human,

yet never can

be true with refpect to

it

Know-

rebus antiquior videri debet temporh quantitate,fedjim-

HuNC ENIM VITJE

STATUM,
IMMOBILIS PRJESENTARIUM
INFINITUS
ILLE TEMPORALIUM RERUM MOTUS IMITATUR i

plicis potius proprietate natures.

eumque eum

cit in
tot

motum,

ex immo-

pojjit,

exfimplicitate prafentia decref-

infinitamfuturi ac prateriti quantitate?n\

am par iter vitafua

hoc

aquare non

ejfingere, at que

hilitate deficit in

ipfoj

plenitudinem nequeat

qubdaliquo modo nunquam

ejfie

definite

et,

cum

pofjidere-y

Mud, quod

implere atque exprimere non pote/l, aliquatenus videtur

amulariy alligans je

ad qualemcunque praftntiam bujus

exigui valuer ifque momenti

NEM,

qua, quoniam

MANENTis

QUANDAM GESTAT IMAGI-

ILXIUS PRJESENTIiE

quibufcumque coutigerit, id pro/fat, ut ESSE vi-

deaniur.

Quoniam vera manere non

Temporis iter arripuit

potuit, infinitum

eaque modo faclum

eji,

ut

TINUARET viTAM eundo, cujus plenitudinem

pleSii non valuit permanendo.
Itaque^ &C.
Confolat. Philofoph. L.

V.

CONcom-

Dc

Ch.IV.

HER M E

392

5.

Ch.I V. Knowledge univerfally, anlejs we give Precedence to

Atoms

and lifeless Body,

making Mind, among

other things, to be

Jlruck out by a lucky Concourfe.

3.

It

is

far

from the defign of

Treatife, to infinuate that

Atheifm

this

is

the

Hypothecs of our latter Metaphysicians.

But yet it is fomewhat remarkable, in
their feveral Syftems,

how

readily they

admit of the above Precedence.

For mark

the Order of things, accords

ing to their account of them.

comes that huge Body

Then
Ideas.

this

and

Then

its

Firft

the fenfible World.

Attributes beget fenjible

out of fenfible Ideas, by a

kind of lopping and pruning, are made

Ideas intelligible, whether fpeci/ic or gene-

Thus mould they admit that Mind

was coeval with Body, yet till Body gave
it Ideas, and awakened its dormant Pow-

ral.

ers, it

could at bell have been nothing

more.

Book the Third,.

393

more, than a fort of dead Capacity

innate ideas

it

for Ch.IV,

could not pojjibly have

any.

At

we

another time

exceedingly fine,

makes them
knowledge

that

hear of Bodies fo

their

very Exility

fufceptible of fenfation

as if they

by their exquifite

fhrunk into

fubtlety,

and

IntellebJ

which render-

ed them too delicate to be Bodies any

It is to this notion

longer.

we owe many

curious inventions, fuch zsfubtle /Ether,

animal

nervous Duels, Vibrations,

Spirits,

and the

like

Terms, which

Philosophy, upon
Qualities, has
itfelf,

modern

parting with occult

found expedient to provide

to fupply their place.

But

the intellectual Scheme, which ne-

ver forgets Deity, poftpones every thing

corporeal to the primary mental Caufe. It

here

it

looks for the origin of

Ideas, even of thofe,

Capacities.

which

is

intelligible

exift in

human

For tho'fenfble Objects may

be

"""

v""~'

HERMES.

396
Ch.IV.

or

their Ideas,
it

inteiiigible

Were

Forms.

otherwife, there could be no intercourfe

between
J

dvTr\q oKzvotiirQxi'

<Te

yx$> zstipvaivai. rr,v i^v%rlu

ruv So^ov

(AYidxiAn ov, ti iocvoii<jxS za.q yccg $/tuo*t7s

sp^t

cvTUV

fj.n\

ttyou

AA

rivag, a

<ruv9i<rff

Ai7r<r0at
apiit\</Vq$

>c,

x*t

to

o'^Ooi/

yivo^ivx';.

ttoXXu

tri

T^a;Tfla? utpnx'.i)/ r;i J/ U PC 5 ? T

T ~

TWf

Artc'TEOGK TJJTO

kxt aAAwv

fAtv, aAAcdi> Je

fri^af two?

a'p'

(?

re

ovruv

fu<ra>j

rotV ai<r9>]T6?V A&ywi/.

whofuppofe Ideal Forms, fay fA^

f& .SWZ,

77>0/

when Jhe

affumes, for the purpofcs cf Science, thafe Proportions,

which

exiji in Jenfible objects, pojpjjes

rior accuracy

and

them with afupe-

perfection, than that to

attain in thofe fenfible objetls.

New

which they

this fuperior

Per-

fection or Accuracy the Soul cannot have from fenfible

objects, as it is in fail not in them ; nor yet can Jk>e con-

ceive

it

berfelf as

ence any

where

to conceive that,

frem

elfe.

its

having exig-

the Soul is not

formed fo as

kerf-If without

For

which has

exijlence no

where,fince even

Jiich opinions, as are falfe, are all of them cempojitions

'

irregularly formed, not of mere Non-Beings, but of various real Beings, one

with another.

fore that this Perfection, which

is

It

remains there-

fuperior

portions exijiing in fenfible objecls, mttjl

to

the

defend

Proto

the

SQME OTHER NATURE, WHICH IS BY

MANY DEGREES MORE EXCELLENT AND PERFECT,

Soul from

Pletb. de

Ariptel

ct Platonic.

Philofoph. Diff. Edit,

Paris 154.T.

The AOrOI
here

fpe?.l c j

or Proportions, of which Gemijlius

mean not only thofe relative Proportions

of

Book the Third.

between

Man

and Man, or (what

Man

important) between

397
is

more Ch.1V.

and God.

For
of Equality and

which

Inequality,

exift in

Quantity,

(fuch as double, fefquialter, Sec.) but in a larger fenfe,

they

may be extended

Figures, &c. of

we

all

poflefe in the

Ideas, yet

it

to

mathematical Lines, Angles,

which Aoyo; or Proportions, tho'

Mind

the moft clear and precife

may be juftly queftioned, whether any one

of them ever exifted in the fenfible World.

To
after

thefe

two Authors we may add

Boethius,

having enumerated many ab of the

Intellect, wholly
pendent of

it,

diftincl

who,

Mind

or

from Scnfation, and inde-

at length concludes,

liecc ejl efflciens

Long} caujfa

magis

potentior,

>)uam qua: materia modo

1

ImprefJ'as patitur notas.

Pracedit tamen excitans,

Ac

vires animi movens,

Vivo

in corpore pajjio.

Cum

vel lux oculos ferit,

Vel vox auribus

Turn

injlrepit

MENTIS VIGOR

QUAS INTUS

excitus,

SPECIES TENET,

Aid motus funileis vocans,

Notis applicat exteris,

Introrsumque RECONDITIS
Formis mifcet imagines.

De

Confolat. Philofoph. L.

V.

HERMES.
For what is Con verfation between Man

Ch .IV.

and

Man

It is a

mutual intercourfe of

Speaking and Hearing.

To the Speaker,

it is to

teach ; to the Hearer,

To

the Speaker,

it

is

it is

to learn.

to defcend

Words; to the Hearer,

Ideas to

Words

afcend from

to

Ideas,

it

he afcend

he

is

is

What

is

then

to

at no

faid not to underfiaiid-, if

to Ideas diliimilar

geneous, then

is

If the

Hearer, in this afcent, can arrive

Ideas, then,

from

he

and hetero-

faid to niifunder/land.

requifite, that

faid to underjlandt

he may be

That he mould

af-

cend to certain Ideas, treafured up within

him/elf,

correfpondent

thofe within the Speaker.

be faid of a Writer and a

and

fimilar

to

The fame may

Reader as when
;

any one reads to-day or to-morrow, or

here or in Italy, what Euclid wrote

iri

Greece two thoufand years ago.

Now

is it

not marvelous, there

hefo exacl an
i

mould

Identity of our Ideas, if they

were

Book the Third.

309

were only generated from fenjible Objects,

infinite in

Time,

in

number, ever changing,

diiiant

and no one

diftant in Place,

Particular the fame with any other

Again, do we

God
Men

allow

it

to (ignify his <will to

to lignify their

pofiible for

Men;

wants to

or for

God

In both thefe cafes there mult be an

Identity

of

either one

Ideas, or

oKe nothing

is

done

Whence
common Identic Ideas

way

then do thefe

or the other.

Thofe of Men,
come
from
And whence come
God's
Not
from
come

it

Senfation.

all

Ideas ?

furely

we

too; for this

ble Precedence
tion

of even God bimfelf

it

Mind.

to the Intellec-

Let them then

them be

tial to the divine

is

Body that nota-

of being prior

original', let

Senfation

can hardly venture to

affirm, without giving to

be

feems,

connate,

and effen-

If this be true,

not a fortunate Event, that Ideas of

corporeal

derived

rife,

from

and others of mental, (things

fubjecls fo

totally

dijiintt)

fiould

Ch.IV,

'

<j

HERMES.

400

Ch.IV. Jhouldfo happily coincide

in the fame won-*

derful Identity ?

Had

we

foabftrufe a Subject?

Either

original

have

Minds

If all

derived, they muft be de-

have them

rived from fomething, which

Mind, and thus we

kind of Atheifm.
then are

Hypothecs by
the

all

or Jome have thetn ori+

gina I, and Jome derived.

original,

Minds

all

have their Ideas derived ; or

them

upon

not better reafon thus

former.

far

But

is itfelf

not

fall infeniibly into

If
all

if

mitted, then mult, one

have them

all

Minds

more

divine,

plaulible

this

be

Mind

have original Ideas, and the

not

an

than
ad-

(at leaft)
reft

have

them derived. Now fuppofing this laft,

whence are thofe Minds, whofe Ideas
are derived, moft likely to derive them ?

From Mind, or from Body From

?

Mind,

thing homogeneous-,

or from

Body, a thing heterogeneous? From

Mind, fuchas (from the Hypothecs) has
n

original

Book the Third.

original Ideas

or from

cannot discover
all

(/)

to

401

Body, which we Ch.IV.

have any Ideas

An Examination

of

at

this kind,

purfued with accuracy and temper,

is

the

moil probable method of folving thefe

It is thus

doubts.

we

fhall

be enabled

with more affurance to decide, whether

we

are to

admit the Doclrine of the Epi-

curean Poet,

Co r p o r e a

n a t u r A animum

animamque
or truft the
in divine

Igneus

conjiare,

Mantuan Bard, when he

fings

numbers,

eft ollis

vigor, etc ^elestis

origo

Seminibus.

But

NOTN
ANOHTA

aJly 2X2M\ ysvvoi'

<sr? yxg oiv
\ OTN ywnnoi ; No Body produces Mind: for bow Jhould Things devoid of
Mind produce xVIind ? Salluji de Diis et Mundo, c. 8,

(/)

roc

St

402

But

Ch.IV.
""'

and have

farther}

riudies,

S.

now time, to quit thefe SpeThofe, who would trace

it is

dilations.

them

E R

may

leifure for

fuch

perhaps find themfelves led

into regions of Contemplation, affording

them profpe&s both

iknt.

as

was

We

have

interesting

at prefent faid as

requifite to our Subject,

therefore pafs

and plea-

much

and mall

from hence to our

con-*

eluding chapter.

CHAP.

Book the Third.

CHAP.

V.

Subordination of Intelligence

of

Ideas, both in particular

inhole Nations

403

"Difference

Men, and

-Different Genius cf dif-

Character
Englifh,
Greek Languages

ferent

Languages

of the

the Oriental, the Latin,

and

Superlative

Ex-

the

cellence

in

of the Laji

Conclufon.

Original Truth

having the Ch. V.

{a),

molt, intimate connection

with the

fupreme Intelligence, may be faid (as it were

to

(a) Thofe Philosophers, whofe Ideas of Being and

Knotvledge are derived from Boffy an d Senfation, have a

fhort method to explain the nature of

Truth.

a factitious thing, made by every man

whici comes and goes,

jutt as

remembered and

it is

forgot; which in the order ot things makes

ance the

la/l

its

appear-

of any, being not only fubfequent to fenji-

bl -/bj.cts, but even to our Scnfations of them.

cording to

It is

for hirrifelfj

this

Ac-

Hypothecs, there are many Truths,

which have been, and

are

no longer

3,

others, that will

be,

HERMES.

404
Ch. V.

<

t0 foine

with unchangeable fplendor, en-

lightening throughout the Univerfe every

Dofiible Subject,
its

by nature fuiceptible of
Paffions and other

benign influence.

may

obflacles

prevent indeed

may

its

efficacy,

obi cure the

as clouds

and vapours

Sun

it

tion,

nor Change, becaufe the Darknefs re-

but

felf neither

admits Diminu-

fpedts only particular Percipients.

thefe therefore

we muft

Among

look for ignorance

and

be, and have not been yet

may never

fibly

and multitudes, that pof-

exift at all.

But there are other Reafoners, who muft furely have

had very different notions ; thofe I mean, who reprefent

Truth

who call
that

all

thefe

it

it

not as the

lajl,

but the firji of Beings

immutable, eternal, omniprefent

Attributes,

indicate fomething more than human.

muft appear fomewhat ftrange,how

To

men mould

imagine, that a crude account of the method how they

perceive Truth, was to pafs for an account of Truth
as if to defcribe the road to

itfelf;

London, could be

called a Description of that Metropolis.

For
fation

large

my own

part,

when

and Reflection, and

how my

Ideas are

all

I read the detail

am

about Sen-

taught the procefs at

generated,

feem to view
the

te Third.

Booic
and errour, and
Intelligence t

405

of Ch. V.
their natural confe- ^-*v

for that Subordination

which

is

quence.

We have daily experience in the Works

of Art, that a partial Knowledge

will fuf-

we know

fice for Contemplation, tho'

enough, to profefs ourfelves Artifts.

more

is

ture

this true,

D
the

human Soul

Much

Na-

with refpect to

and well for mankind

d

is it

found
to

in the light of a Crucible,where

Truths

arc produced by a kind of logical Chemiftry.

may

confift (for

but are as

aught we know)

much

not

They

of natural materials,

creatures of our own, as a Bolus or

Elixir.

If 'Milton

Truth,

by

Urania

his

intended to reprefent

he certainly referred her to a

tient, as well as a far

more noble

much more an-

origin.

-Heavnly born

!
7

appeared, or fountains flow* a

Before the

bills

Then with

eternal

Wifdom
In

thy Sijier

prefence of tb'

With

Wifdom
;

and with her

didji play

almighty Father, picas''d

thy celcflial Song.

See Proverbs VIII. 22, &c.

Marc. Antonin. IX.

-,

didf) converfe y

I.

F. L. VII.

Jeremiah X. 10,

HERMES.

44

with unchangeable fplendor, en-

Ch. V.

t0 foine

-~^~

lightening throughout the Univerfe every

'

Doflible Subject,
its

by nature fufceptible of
Paffions and other

benign influence.

may

obflacles

prevent indeed

may

its

efficacy,

obicure the

as clouds

and vapours

Sun

it

tion,

nor Change, becaufe the Darknefs re-

but

felf neither

admits Diminu-

fpedts only particular Percipients.

thefe therefore

we muft

Among

look for ignorance

and

be, and have not been yet

may never

fibly

and multitudes, that pof-

exift at all.

But there are other Reafoners, who mufr furely have

bad very different notions ; thofe I mean, who reprefent

Truth

who call
that

all

thefe

it

it

not as the

lajl,

but the/r/? of Beings

immutable, eternal, omniprefent

Attributes,

indicate fomething more than human.

muft appear fomewhat ftrange,how

To

men mould

imagine, that a crude account of the method

how

they

perceive Truth, was to pafs for an account of Truth

as if to defcribe the road to

it/elf;

London, could be

called a Description of that Metropolis.

For
fation

large

my own

part,

when

and Reflection, and

how my

Ideas are

all

I read the detail

am

about Sen-

taught the procefs at

generated,

feem to view
the.

the Third.

Booic
and errour, and
Intelligence ,

405

of Ch. V.
-" " ~"
their natural confe- * v

for that Subordination

which

is

quence.

We have daily experience in the Works

of Art, that a partial'Knowledge

will fuf-

we know

fice for Contemplation, tho'

enough, to profefs ourfelves Artifts.

more

this true,

is

ture ;

with refpedt to

and well for mankind

D
the

human Soul

is it

Much

Nafound
to

in the light of a Crucible, where Truths

are produced by a kind of logical Chemiftry.

may

confift (for

but are as

not

aught we know)

much

They

of natural materials,

creatures of our own, as a Bolus or

Elixir.

If Milton

Truth,

by

Urania

his

tient, as well as a far

"

more noble

hills

Thou with

eternal

Wifdom

an-

appear'df or fountains firco''dy

thy Sijier

prefence of th'

With

much more

origin.

-Heavenly born !

Before the

In

intended to reprefent

he certainly referred her to a

Wifdom
;

didf) ctmverfe%

and with her

thy celcjlial Song.

See Proverbs VIII. 22, &c.

Marc. Jntonin, IX.

didji play

almighty Father^ picas'

I.

P. L. VII,

Jeremiah X. 10.

4 o6
Ch. V.
-^~*-

S.

to be true, elfe never could

natural Knowledge at

we

For

all.

any

attain

the

if

eonJHtutive Proportions of a Clock are fo

few conceive them

fubtle, that

but

truly,

we fay to
which make the

the Artift himfeif ; what fhall

thofe feminal Proportions,

and character of every natural

effence
Subject

f,

Partial views, the

Imperfec-

tions of Senfe; Inattention, Idlenefs, the

tutbulence of Paffions; Education, local

Sentiments, Opinions, and Belief, con-

many

fpire in

fome

Ideas,

and (what

many

inftances to furnifh us with

too general,
is

fome

worfe than

all

too partial,

this)

with

that are erroneous, and contrary to

Thefe

Truth.

it

behoves us to correct as

far as pcffible, by cool fufpenfe and can-

did examination.

tuv

And

(ppevuv.

thus by a connection perhaps

tle expected, the

CauTe of

lit-

Letters, and
that

Book the Third*

that of

Virtue

appear to co-incide,

being the bulinefs of bcth

amend than

Ideas, a?id to

of Nature and of Truth

how

led to obferve,

Men, have

Nations, like fingle

how thefe
become the Genius of

of courfe correfpona

D
ufeful to

"Knowledge

iylus;

Xenoph.

17. II. 10.

(0

the

indeed to

Grammatical Dis-

Etymology and Meaning

of

the chief and ableft Philo-

feen by confulting Pluto in his Cra-

Mem. IV. 5,6.

Marc. Anton.

Arrian. Epicl.

III. 11.

H0OT2 XAPAKTHP

AOrOS.

how

d 4

Ethic Science, and

was efteemed by

may be

sophers,

the Symlolmuft.

to its Archetype (c)

in general, a

<juisition into

Words

by the Standard

(/).

their Language, fince

How

examine our

their peculiar Ideas;

peculiar Ideas

(b)

to

it

Work, we mall be

important

this

407

I.

V.

8.

X.

!p

\fyw'jr

8.

Caphintur Signa'baud levia, fed cb-

Stob.

fervatu digna (quodfort affe quifpiam nonputarit) de ingeniis et moribus pcpulorum et nationum ex Unguis ipfo-

rum.

Bacon, de

Ghwifiil.

L.

I.

L. XI.

p. 58. et

Augm.
p.

Scient. VI. 1.

675.

Menag. Com.

Edit.
Tufc.

Vid.

Capperon.

Difp. V.

etic.m.

Diog.

16.

Ch. V.
'

,r"~J

HERMES.

408

Ch. V. how the ivifeft Nations, having the mofi

*v-> a nd befi Ideas, will confequently have the
and

bejl

itiojl

copious

Languages

whofe Languages

others,

how

are motley

and

compounded, and who have borrowed

from

different countries different Arts

by

Words,

they are indebted for

Things.

Practices, difcover

To

illuftrate

few examples.

what has been

to

by a

We Britons in our time

multiform Language

may

as

fufficiently

our

fhew.

in polite Literature prove, that

came from Greece

this

whom

faid,

have been remarkable borrowers,

Our Terms

and

our

Terms

in

Mujic and Painting, that thefe came from

Italy-,

that

our Phrafes in Cookery and War,

we

learnt thcfe

from the French-, and

our Phrafes in Navigation, that

taught by the Flemings and

Thefe many and very

our Language
is fo

may

this

Low

Dutch.

different Sources

be the caufc,

deficient in Regularity

Yet wc have

we were

why

of
it

and Analogy.

advantage to compenfate
the

Book the Third.

we want

the defeat, that what

we gain

gance,
laft

fuperior to our

Let

Eas*t.

ern World, from the

any time
(and

The

On
its

civil

its

(d) Eaft-

has

of enormous

natives fair Liberty

influence.

genial

Difcords arofe

there

arife

to the

earlieft days,

at all times the Seat

never ihed

found

will be

us pafs from ourfelves

Monarchy.

which * "v *

own.

Nations of the
been

E/o Ch. V.

in

in Cdpioufnefs, in

few Languages

refpect

409

If at

among them

innumerable) the

did

was never about the Form of their

Government; for this was an object, of

conteft

which the Combatants had no conception

;)

it

was

who fiould

of,

all

from the poor motive

be their

Master, whether

{d) Aia yap to duXMurtpoi avxi tx

Bf bsc^&j
tyiv

tuu EXXwuv,

EvpuTTW,

\iiroulvH<n TV*

SvG"xjioccivovrt<;.

o*

y.&

StiFirQTiMW ctpyrw/j

aim

For the Barbarians Zy being inorcjlav-

ijh in their

Manners than

than

of Europe, Julmit

thofe

ri^n

o* 1 zirsoi rr,v Acrix]/ rcoi/ Zosgi

the

Greeks, and thofe of Afla

to

defpoti'c

Government

ivithwt inurmuring or dijcontent. Arift. Polit. ill. 4.

HERMES.

4io

Ch. V. ther a Cyrus or an Artaxerxes, a Mahomet

or a Mujlapha*

Such was
was

their Condition, and

confluence

the

Their

what

Ide.is

be-

came confonant to their fervile State, and

their Words became confonant to their

The

fervile Ideas.

ever in their
Slave

fight,

great Diftinclion, for

was that of Tyrant and

the moft unnatural one conceiva-

and the moft fufceptible of pomp, and

ble,

empty

exaggeration.

of Kings

as

Hence they

talked

Gods, and of themfelves, as

the meaneft and moft abjeel Reptiles.

Nothing was

either great or

deration, but every Sentiment

little

in

mo-

was height-

ened by incredible Hyperbole. Thus tho*

they fometimes afcended into the Great

and Magnificent

(e) t

they as frequently

degenerated

(e )

The

trued Sublime of the Eaft

may be found

in the Scriptures, of which perhaps the principal caufe

is

ed

the intrinfic Greatnefs of the Subjects there treat;

the Creation of the Univerfe, the Difpenfations

of divine Providence, t?V.

Book the Third.

411

degenerated into the Tumid and Bombaft. Ch. V.

T/je Greeks too

cf Af,a became infected by

who were

their neighbours,

often at times

not only their neighbours, but their mafters

and hence that Luxuriance of the

-,

Ajiatic Stile,

unknown

to th^ chafte elo-

quence and purity of Athens.

we

Greeks

But of the

we
when we

forbear to fpeak now, as

(hall

fpeak of them more

have

firft

fully,

confidered the Nature or

Ge-

nius of the Romans.

And

what

fort

of People

nounce the Romans?

may we

pro-

A Nation engaged

in wars and commotions, fome foreign,

fome domeftic, which

wholly engrofled

years

Hence
came,

for feven

therefore their
like their Ideas,

their

hundred

thoughts.

Language

copious in

all

be-

Terms

expreffive of things political, and well

adapted to the purpofes both of Hiflory

and popular Eloquence.

their Fbilcfopby f

we may

none,

if

ers.

And hence
3

As

But

what was

a Nation,

credit their ableil

it

was

Writ-

the Unfitncfs of their

Language

%0*m*~mmJ

HERMES.
Language

even Cicero

more

fully

which

to this Subject; a defeat,

is

compelled to confefs, and

makes appear, when he writes

Philofophy himfelf, from the number of

which he

terms,

obliged to invent (f).

is

Virgil
a

(f) See
&c. but

Philosophia^-w/Y
habuit lumen

tranda

I. 3.

C.

1, 2, 4.

where he

fays,

nee ullum

Liter arum Latinarumj

qua; illuf-

Difp. IV. 3. and Acad.

the

i, 2, 3. III.

ad banc atatem,

ufque

excltanda nobis

et

Cicero

C.

Cic. de Fin. I.

in particular Tufc. Difp.

ejl

I. 2.

utji, Sec.

where

it

See

alfo Tufc.

appears, that

'till

applied himfelf to the writing of Philofophy y

Romans had nothing of the kind

in their language,

except fome mean performances olAmafanius the Epicurean^ and others of the fame

Romans were indebted

feci.

How

far the

to Cicero for Philofophy,

and

with what induftry,as well as eloquence, he cultivated

the Subject,

may be

Works

that are

thofe

the

many

The

noble ones

feen not only from the

now
frill

Epicurean Poet

loft,

but

titles

of

much more from

fortunately preferved.

Lucretius, who

flourished

nearly at the fame time, feems by his hlence to have

over-looked the Latin writers of his

riving

all

cian Sources
ficulty

own fe&

his Philofophy, as well as Cicero,

;

de-

from Gre-

and, like him, acknowledging the dif-

of writing in Philofophy in Latin, both from

the Poverty of the

Tongue, and from

the Novelty of

the Subject,
iwff

Book the Third.

413

Virgil leems to have judged the moft

truly of his

Countrymen, when admitting

their inferiority in the

he concludes

at

more elegant Arts,

lad with his ufual

ma-

jefty,

Nee me annul fallit, Graiorum abfeura repertaDifficile inlujlrare Latinis verjibus effe,
(Mult a novii rebus pr&ferthn quom jit agendum\)
Propter egestatem linguae et rerum no-

vitatem:
Sed tua me virtus tamen,

et fperata

voluptcs

Suavis amicitia quemvis perjerre laburem

Suadet

Lucr.

In the fame age, Varro, among

his

I.

137.

numerous works,

wrote fome in the way of Philofophy; as did the Patriot

Brutus,

a Treatife concerning Virtue,

plauded by Cicero

but thefe

Works

are

much ap*

now

loft.

Soon after the writers above mentioned came Horace, fome of whofe Satires and Epiftles may be

juftly ranked

amongft the moft valuable pieces of

Latin Philofophy, whether we conlider the purity of

their Stile, or the great Addrefs, with

which they

treat

the Subject.

After Horace* tho' with as long an interval as from

the days of Augujlus to thofe of Nero,
rift

Persius, the

friend

came

the Sati-

and difciple of the Stoic Cor-

nutus-t to whofe precepts as he did honour by his vir-

tuous

Ch. V.

HERMES.
Tu REGERE IMPERIO POPULOS,
mane, memento

(Hce

tibi

i?7-

erunt artesj pacifque imponere

morem

Tarcerefubjeftisy et debellarefuperbos.

From

tuous Life, (o his works, tho'

(hew an

finall,

ficiency in the Science of Morals.

be

(aid, that

he

is

almofl:

cient merit, to

make

may

it

the fingle difficult writer

the Latin Clafiics, whofe

among

early pro-

Of him

meaning has

furfi-

worth while to labour thro' his

it

obfc unties.

In the fame degenerate and tyrannic period, lived

Seneca ; whofe character, both as a Man and a

alfo

Writer,

Under

difcufled with great accuracy

is

Author of

the Characlerijiia y to

a milder Dominion, that of

Anton'ims, lived

by the noble

whom we

Aulus Gellius,

refer.

Hadrian and the

or (as fome call

him) Agelliu?, an entertaining Writer in the mifcellaneous way; well fkilled in Criticifm and Antiquity

of

who

tho' he can hardly

be entitled to the name

a Philofopher, yet deferves not to pafs

unmentioned

here, from the curious fragments of Philofophy interfperfed in his works.

With

Aulus Gellius

we

range

caufe a Contemporary, (for he

is

MACROBius,not befuppofed to have lived

under

Book the Third.

415

Ch-V.

From confiderlng the Roman?, let us

pafs to the Greeks.
The Grecian
Common-

under Honorius and Tbeodofius) but from

refemblance, in

Works,

the character of a

like the other's,

his

near

His

Writer.

are mifcellaneous

filled

with Mythology and antient Literature, fome Philosophy being intermixed.

Somnium

His Commentary upon

Scipionis of Cicero

may be

the;

confidered as

wholly of the pbilofophical kind.

In the fame age with Julus

X.EIUS

otMadaura

Matter

Gellius, flourifhcd

Apu-

in Africa^ a Platonic Writer, whofe

in general far exceeds his perplexed and af-

fected Stile, too conformable to the falfe Rhetoric of

the

Age when he

Of

lived.

the fame Country, but of a later

harfher Stile, was

Age, and a

Martianus Capella,

he deferve not the name rather of a

if

indeed

Philologijl, than of

a Philofopher.

After Capella,
tonic, tho'

we may rank Chalcidius

are doubtful.

His manner of writing

agreeable than that of the

appear to be their inferior

fophy, his
the

the Pla-

both his Age, and Country, and Religion

work being a

is rather more
two preceding, nor does he
in the knowledge of Philo-

laudable

Commentary upon

Timaus of Plato,

The

HERMES.

416
Ch. V.

Commonwealths, while they maintained their Liberty, were the moft heroic

They were

Confederacy, that ever exifled.

the

The

laft

Boethius, who
Roman

Latin Philofopher was

was defcended from fome of

the nobleft of the

Families, a-.d was Conful in the beginning of the fixth

Century.

greaur part

On

He

wrote many

But

and

and

m all

is

far better

king of the Gcths^

laft

By command

was the hard

it

to fufFer death

and the

he ap-

laft

age than his cwn,

refpects preferable to thofe crabbe

cans already mentioned.

Man

partly

is

encomiums both

which

for the Stile; in

proaches the Purity of a

with

whom

trie

Ethic p-ece,

his

and which

the Confolation oj Phuofophy y

profe, and partly verie, deferves great

for the Matter,

Works,

piiilofophicai

way.

in the Logical

fate

t-

of Theodoric

of

this

v.

orthy

the Latin Tongue^

remains of Roman Dignity^

may be

faid to

have funk in the weft em World.

who left Phihfophical

Musonius Rufus, and tne two
Emperors, Marcus Antoninus and Julian but
as thefe preferred the ufe of the Greek Tongue to
There were

Writings; fuch

other Romans^
as

their

own, they can hardly be coniidered among the

number of Latin Wriiers.

And fo much (by way of (ketch) for the Latin

Authors of Philosophy a fmall number for fo
;

vaft an

Empire,

duct of near

if

we

confider

them

fix fucceflive centuries.

as all the pro-,

Book the Third.

the politeft, the braveft, and the

4.17

of Ch. V.
more ^-v*J

wifefl:

men.

In the fhort fpace of little

than aCent-nrjr t'v>^- t^^anic inch otatef-

men, Warriors, Orators,

Phy-

Hiftorians,

Poets, Critics, Painters, Sculp-

fician^,

Architects, and (laft of all) Philofo-

tors,

phers, that one can hardly help confider-

ing

that Golden
Event

dential
ture, to
cies

in

mew to

Period,

as a

Provi-

honour of human Na-

what

perfection the Spe-

might afeend (g).

Now

(g) If
Poets,

we

we

except Homer, Hcfiod, and the Lyric

hear of few Grecian Writers before the ex

pedition of Xerxes.

After that Monarch had been

defeated, and the dread of the Perfian power was

end, the

may

at

Effulgence of Grecian Genius

ufe the expreflion)

broke

forth,

and fhone

time of Alexander the Macedcmian, after

appearcd, and never rofe again.

Period fpoken of above.

This

till

whom
is

it

an

(if

the
dif-

that Gulden

do not mean that Greece

had not many writers of great merit fubfequent to that

period, and efpecially of the philofophic kind; bat the

Great, the Striking, the Sublime

(call it as

attained at that time to a height, to

you

which

pleafe)

it

never

ould afeend in any after age.

The

4 r8

E R

E &

*fow the Language of these

Ch V-

Greeks was

truly iiKe tfcrcmfciVcs,

it

was

con-

The

fame kind of fortune befel the people of Rome.

When the

Punic wars were ended, and Carthage their

dreaded Rival was no more, then (as Horace informs

us) they began to cultivate the politer arts.

foon after

this,

and Poets

arofe,

their great Orators,

It

was

and Hilrorians,

and Rome, like Greece, had her Golden

Period, which lafted to the death of Oclavius Car-

far.
I call thefe

two

Periods, from the

niufes that flourifhed in each,

Period,
There
them.

the other

are

the Ciceronian.

farther analogies fubfifting

common

and fuch wars impended,

thefe fears

folici-

welfare engaged men's attenas threatened their de-

ftru&ion by Foreigners and Barbarians.

once

between

Neither Period commenced, as long as

tude for the

tions,

ilill

greateft Gethe Socratic

two

one

were over, a general

But when

fecurity foon en-

fued, and inftead of attending to the arts of defence

and felf-prefervation, they began to cultivate thole of

Elegance and Pleafure.

Now,

as thefe naturally pro-

duced a kind of wanton infolence (not unlike the vitious temper of high-fed animals) fo by this the bands

of union were infenfibly diflblved. Hence then among

the

Book the Third.

conformable

to

tranfcendent and Ch. V.

their

Where Matter

Genius.

unjverfal

419

fo

abounded,

the Greeks that

fatal

P eloponncfian War,

with other wars,

ther

which toge-

immediate confequence,

its

their Commonwealths
made them jealous of each
other; and thus paved a way for the contemptible
kingdom of Mace don to enflave them all, and afcend

broke the confederacy of

Wafted their ftrength

Monarchy.

in a few years to univerfal

A like luxuriance of profperity fowed difcord among

the

Romans y

raifed thofe

unhappy contefts between

the Senate and the Gracchi

rius

the

laft

ftruggle for Liberty

Brutus and

between

feat of

by

Cajfius at Philippic

Anthony

at

many

thofe brave Patriots

Fellow-Citizen.

eftablifhed their

bright Geniufes,

Government.

Ma-

at length, after

and the fubfequent de-

muft indeed be confefled, that

Odavius had

Sylia and

till

Attiwn, the Romans became fubject

to the dominion of a

It

between Pompey and Qefar;

after

Alexander and

Monarchies, there were

who were eminent under

their

maintained a friendfh.jp and

epiftolary correfpondence with Alexander. In the time
Arijlotlc

of the fame Monarch lived Theophraflus>z\\& the Cynic, Diogenes.

Then

lpoko

celebrated Orations

*ht>\ r t

wo

alfo

Demojlhene*
,

the time of Otlavms, Virgil wrotr,

his
e 2

and JEfchlves

So

like, wi

"e-

'n

Enel^ and with

Horace*

420

E R

S.

Ch. V. abounded, Words followed of courfe, and

,

v>

thofe exquifite in every kind, as the Ideas

for

which they

And

flood.

hence

it

fol-

there was nt a Subject to be

lowed,

found, which could not with propriety be

exprefTed in Greek.

Here
the

were Words and Numbers for

Humour

of an Ariflophanes

for the

native

Horace, Partus, and

many

other fine Writers, par-

But

took of his protection and royal munificence.

then

it

muft be remembered, that

thefe

men were bred

land educated in the principles of a free Government.

It

was hence they derived

Succeflbrs and

manly

fpirit,

after-ages.

The

that high and

which made them the admiration of

Forms of Government

left

by Alex-

ander and Oclavius, foon ffopt the growth of any

thing farther in the kind.

ing of Longlnus

0>nj/a

fxara. tuv ptyccXctpgovuv v

<ri,

jt*a

/t,

"<<$0?,

Xy T?]f STi

te

is

that noble fay-

yxg Ixani rx

EAET0EPIA,

TO. TSTOiOTUOi (piXo-r^Aius.

to injpire

them with hope

rous emulation of being the f.fl

44.

It it

nurfe the fentiments ofgreat

;

to

the propenfity of contejl one with another,

Seel:.

Qoovy-s

xj iTTiXirl-

fiuh7v re w^cGu/aov taj ur^o? olh\r\\xs

Liberty that is formed to

Geniufes

So true

iti

pajh forward

and

rank,

~ s*"*"

*l

De SubU

Book,

the Third.

native Elegance of a 'Philemon or

der

amorous

for the

Menan-

Strains of a

Mim-

nermus or Sappho; for the rural Lays of a

Theocritus or Bion

and

for the fublime

Conceptions of a Sophocles or Homer.

fame

in Profe.

Here

Ifo crates

The

was enabled

to difplay his Art, in all the accuracy of

Periods, and the

counterpoiie

of

Here Demojlhenes found mate-

Diction.
rials

nice

for that nervous Composition, that

manly force of unaffected Eloquence,

which

rufhed, like a torrent, too impe-

tuous to be withftood.

Who
biting

were more

their

in exhi-

different

Philofophy, than

Xenopbon>

Plato, and his difciple, Arijlotle?

ferent, I fay, in their character
pojition
it

was

reality

the fame.

it/elf,

Arijlctk,

methodic, and orderly; fubtle in

flrict,

Thought;
little

of Com-*

for as to their Philofophy

in

Dif-

addrefs to the

nation

Ornament; with

fparing in

Paffions or Ima^i-

but exhibiting the whole with

fuch

422

HERMES.

'

Ch. V. fuch a pregnant

v-~~^"'"-'

we

fentence

How

feem

exquifitely

Greek ?

Let thofe,
in

who

performed

imagine

made by men of

the contrary,

when we

may

it

thod and

ftrict

may

learning.

this

me-

The Forwholly dropt. What-

order appears.

tnalapd Didactic
ever they

tranfla-

read either

Xenophon or Plata, nothing of

is

teach,

it is

without profef-

be teachers; a train of Dialogue

and truly

polite Addrefs,

a Mirrour,

in

in

another Language,

him, or by perufing his

tions already

lirig to

page.

themfelves either by attempting tq

tranflate

On

read

to

this all

is

be done as well
fatisfy

every

brevity, that in

adorned in

all

in

which,

we behold human
its

as

Life,

colours of Sentiment

and Manners.

And-

yet though thefe differ in this

manner from the

.

Stagirite,

how

differ-

are they like wife in character from

each other

-Plato, copious,

figurative,

Book the Third.

and majeftic ; intermixing

live,

the facetious and

Works with

fatiric

423
at times

enriching his

-,

Tales and Fables, and the

myftic Theology of antient times.

nopbon,
city

every,

and pure

where fmooth, harmonious,

declining the figurative, the

marvellous, and the myflic

much

afcending

but rarely into the Sublime

fo

Xe-

of perfect fimpli-

the Pattern

nor then

-,

trufting to the colours of Stile,

as to the intrinfic dignity of the Senti-

ment

itfelf.

The

Language

in the

mean

time, in

which He and Plato wrote, appears

to fuit

fo accurately with the Stile of both, that

when we

read either of the two,

not help thinking, that

who

has hit

it

character,

its

is

we can-

he alone,

and that

it

could not have appeared fo elegant in any

other manner.

And
from

its

thus

is

the Greek Tongue,

Propriety

and

Univerfality,

made
for

ch. V.

HERMES.

424
Ch. V. for
<L-W_m-'

great y and all that

all that is

tiful,

beau-,

is

every Subjedl, and under every

in

Form of

writing.

Graiis

ingenium,

Graiis

dedit ore

rotunda

Mifa

loqui.

t were

amongit

us,

wifhed,

be

to

who

that

either write or read,

with a view to employ their

we

views more fordid,

liberal lei-

do either from

fure (for as to fuch, as

leave them, like

Slaves, to their deftined drudgery)

to

be wifhed, I

they have a

hours,

it

were

fay, that the liberal

(if

would

in-

for letters)

relifli

fpect the finifhed

terature

thofe

Models of Grecian Li-

that they

would not wafte thofe

which they cannot

the meaner productions

and Englifi Prefs

upon

recall,

upon

of the French
that fungous

growth of Novels and of Pamphlets,

where,

it is

to be feared, they rarely find

any

Book the Third.

any

rational

ftill,

any

To

is

by no means a work of fuch

The

bles

very progrefs

a Journey through fome pleafant

new charms

we

advance,

It is certainly as eafy

arife.

to be a Scholar, as a Gameiler, or

other Characters equally

The fame
of habit

tell us,
it

will

and low.

us for one, as completely

fit

with an
is

illiberal

many

application, the fame quantity

as for the other.

that

it-

attended with delight, and refem-

Country, where every mile

And

as to thofe

who

of feeming wifdom,

air

Men, and

not Bocks,

fludy to become knowing

we mud

this

have

always remarked, from repeated Experience, to be the

common

language of Dunces.

coniolation and

They

fhelter their

ignorance under a few bright Examples,

whole tranfcendent

abilities,

Ch. V.

<vw

improvement.

infuperable pains.
is

rarely

be competently fkilled in antient

learning,

felf

and more

pleafure,

folid

425

without the

common

HERMES.

426
Ch. V.

common

helps, have been fufficient of

thetnfehes to great and important Ends.

But

alas

Decipit exemplar

In

when

truth,

vitiis imitabile

each man's Underftanding,

ripened and mature,

is

a compofite

of natural Capacity, and of fuper-induced

Hence the

Habit,

be necefTarily thofe,

greateft

who

Men

poffefs the befi

Capacities, cultivated with the befi

bits.

when

Hence

alfo

adorned

will far tranfcend others the

either

Science,

moil acute

neglected,

applied to low and bafe purpofes.

thus for the honour of

good Learning,

Ha-

moderate Capacities,

with valuable

by nature, when

will

or

And

Culture and

they are able to ren-

der a man, if he will take the fains, intrinfically

more excellent than

his

natural

Superiors*

And

Book the Third*

And

fo

much

427

at prefent as to

ge- Ch. V.

neral Ideas; how we

acquire them-,

whence they are derived ;

what

Nature

and what

Language.
Subject

So

is

their connexion

much

their

with

likewife as to the

of this Treatife,

Universal

Grammar.

.End of the

Third Boos-

A D-

ADVERTISEMENT.
CT^HE following Notes
lations

tracts

of former Notes, or Additions

The

to thetn,

are either Tranf-

additional are chiefly

from Greek Manufcripts,

Ex-

which

(as the Author has faid already co?icerning others of the

able both
intrinflc

for

fame kind) are valu-

their Rarity,

Merit.

and for

their

43'

ADDITIONAL NOTES.
95.to Stop, &V.] The Quotation
PAG.
the Note may be thus rendered
from Proclus
in

That

thing is at rest, which for a time

PRIOR AND SUBSEQUENT IS IN THE SAME PLACE,
and

both itfelf

P.

its

Parts.

05. In the Note, for yiyvoy-Svov read yiVQy.vov t

For by

and render the paffage thus

ly the faculty of Senfe)

we

neither

thisfaculty

know the

(name-

Future-) nor

the Pajl, but the Prefent only.

P. 106.

Note

here referred

to,

The

(d).]

paffage of Philoponus

but by miftake omitted, has

refpeel: to

the notion of beings corporeal and fen/ible, which were

faid to be nearly

thor explains

ing n?

approaching

this,

$1

among

toV

to

iori

[Ml

liraSn

lvTct.vQtx,

to zrcc^iXQiv

Je

qvtx' to

[aIv

fj.n

yug

cSe

yj^avoq.
to

tj?

How

therefore

is

e'j-j

TIputou

3^ to f^iXAoVy

[xivy

toZtx

tw

<$

Jc/w roc (pxxrixx zrxflxy

is it

fl

that they approach nearly

becaufe here
the Past aridTHE Future,
are Non-Entitys for the one is vanijhedy

(where theyexift)

and

ysnvuz^Bi

xiV7i<?iU$ cLvtuv zrzo.xx.o\zQyip,a,

Non-Entitys? In

and thefe

The Au-

n/pdiHfcu y^ in 'in eV, to

httu tjV cvfAirccgoiQUi Js

pxXXov

Non-Entitys.

other rea/bns, by the follow-

the firfl place,

exjjls

no more, the other

Sub/lances pafs

away

is

not as yet.

along with

upon their Motion that

Time

is

Nnv all natural

Time,

or rather

it is

an Attendant.
P. 119

Additional NOTES.

43 2

P.

19

made of

Note here fubjoined mention is

or Instant, and its effi-

the

in

the

Real Now,

To which we may add, that there is not only

a neceffary Connection between Exijlence and the Pre-

cacy.

fent Infant, becaufe no other Point of

perly be faid

to be,

but

alfo

Life, becaufe whatever lives,

cefiarily

Hence

Is.

The

fpeaking

of Time

it

Living, and now

Time.

prefent

Trachin.V.
P. 227.

The Paffage

here fpeaks,
brothers,

is

pro-

by the fame reafon ne-

Sophocles,

prefent, elegantly fays of

Time can

between Exijlence and

in Virgil, of

185.

which Scrvius

a defcription of Turnus's killing two

Amycus and Diores

after

which the Poet

fays of him,

curru

abfcifja

Duorum

Sufpendit capita

This,
riot

literally tranflated, is

the heads of

Two

he hung up on his cha-

which were cut

perfons,

off",

whereas the Senfe requires, of the Two perfons, that

is to fay, of Amycus and Diores. Now this by Ambo-

rum would have been

means
as

The Two;

P. 259.

may

Two

means only

it

to

in fame

in

it

may

Note

Nature

make her tranftion

Beings

is

expreft improperly,

indefinitely.

The PafTage

be thus rendered

pears

expreft properly, as Atnborum

by Duorum

in

(0)

from Themijlius,

many

by little

and

injlances aplittle,

jo that

be doubted, whether they are

Ani-

mal, or Vegetable.

P. 294.

Additional NOTES.
number
TJnre are
P. 294. Note
in the

(f)

433
of

which have a moji knovjn Existence,

things many,

Essence fuch for

but a moji unknown

example as

Time.
The Existence of each ofthefe is known and indifputable, but what their Essence is, or Nature, is among
Motion, Place, and more than

the moji difficult things

fame
but what

it is, is

Aphrod.

p.

the

P.

Clafs

that

either of them.,

The

to difce'rn.

fomething,

it is

a matter not fo eajy

to learn,

Language in'cApaele

340

or Vol.

Alex.

in the

Malmefbury, and

commu-

of

See Three Trea-

220, and the additional note on the

I. p.

Words, The Source of

P. 368

alfo is in

moji evident

142.

nicating Demonstration.]
tifesr,

Soul

is

infinite

Truths, Sic,

Note yet fo held the Philofopher

the Author of the Effay,

of

&c.J

Philoponus, from the Philofoph y of Plato and Pythagoras, Teems to have far excelled th.fe Moderns in his

account of Wisdom or Philosophy, and

butes, or ejjential Characlers.

JJW
'

TO El/TOl? TJoAAojf i^iHTlhxQOPXV 3s7xi

7*3

to

i\>

gac-JV*
3t)

toV uToAAe/s lyjuo'i

yap Sug-^ipU

to

xowwixv
St^xi

artPi?lPu<; nonunion* (zjt*vti

{jege

oVa) to

JixQopxv,

oiutpopov

aAA

T*]!c

XOtVCOViCCVf

{le^e parltff)

i5-ff87r7ov),

tstuv L iriiit' aVe

ti y.oinov Xyztriv,

Aitri~

s7ai tjh ix$i-

(px-rvrr;

yxp

its

yxg piAeo-op/ac

It

&AA' a

xtfvog *. 'i-mrx

is

THE PRO-

PER business of

Philosophy to shew in
mAny thincs, which have Difference, what
is their Common Character ; and in many
things, which have a Common Character,
Vhr.o'

what

it

is

they differ.
X

It is

indeed
7i

Additional NOTES.

434

difficult matter to Jhew the common Character of a

Wood-Pigeon and a Dove (for this is evident to every

no

one), but rather

rather

P. 379

thefe

tk

what

to Jhezv,

Com. MS.

in

THEY

pxXXov

of

iv

-a

Jri/lotle,

to a

common,

Philop.

The

Book

>t,

to xxXoh

Beauty

to,

are

tu -rot?

The Prin-

are mtre in the

they are in thofe of

WE MUST

Mind, &c]

here referred

ivtxot,

toIV tjij rt^yng.

Works a/Nature, than

the third

nor

a Horfe^ hut

ARE MORE EXQUISITE THAN,

ciples of 'Design and

379

the Difference

Dog and

they poffefs in

<T eV

(pvcriwg tgyoig,

P.

lies

Nicomach. Arithm.

The Words

bfc]

where

to tell

Difference between a

to tell the

Art.

OF NECESSITY ADMIT A

following quotation, taken from

of a manufcript Comment of Proclus on

Parmenides of Plato, is here given for the fake of

thofe, who have curiofity with regard to the doctrine

the

of Ideas, as

Ej

IfiVy

vi

yap

r^crs, pviriov

Kj 17T0

xmxv' xXX

xoct

aiTiXy

imsiv rnv uirtxv

t)v ixE(j/0{;

OgXTX, UgUVlK

C<jX

i?i

by antient Philofophers.

Se $t7 trui/To/AWf

W7ro0fl"w?, 3i

jij

hc.'J

to?$ vfBaoig

>c,

>

\r,VY)V >

oLiro

y^

^F? T

*? o

'(z^xtrig

tx'jtcc tjxvJx

TX'j]cy.xTX xovvxrov*

<pww

vag,

xj

Xoyog,

X7roTt\<r[j<.XTK.
o

'A^forehng'

mtiuv ihx\ rx xaG' u-

to y.xtx

<rv[j.tr}y.og'

ccno -rxuioy.x'xz ttiv>\>TtcQv uv nu to xt'

*7T

ruv iSluv

X7TQ TX'JlopXTS

stw tx

e7z7(:b rcot y.xtx crv^itn'/Cog

rx y TBtuv yxp

on

7)

rx xPinlovx,

tx xinxg,

x^sjtJw twv u%x,

(7

rv\g

TXvJc^XTH TX @flCTT

Y,i>

uf ts

ma>, h

TWV QXVtpWV.

>

If

there'

Additional NOTES.

435

we are to relate concifely the Caufe, why THE

Hypothesis of Ideas pleafed them (namely ParmeftideSy ZenOy SocrateSy &c.) we mitji begin by oljerving

therefore

that all the various vifible objects around usy the hca~

vcnly as tvellas thefublunaryy are eitherfrom

or according

possible

to

Chance,

From Chance

Cause.

for then the more

is

im-

excellent things (fuch as

Mindy and Reafony and Caufey and the Ejfecls of Caufe)

will be among thofe things that come la/?, andfo the ENDINGS of things will be more excellent than their Beginnings. To ivhich too may be added what Ariftotle
fays that essential Causes ought to be prior.
;

to accidental, in as much as every accidental Cause is a Deviation from them; fo that

whatever

is the Ejfecl offuch ejjential Caufe [as is indeed every work of Art and human Ingenuity] mujl

needs be prior to that ivhich

tver. tho*

we were

vifible objecls [the

The
(hew

that

is

the Effecl of Chance^

Chance the

?no/l

divine of

Heavens themfelves].

Philofopher,

Caufe of the
to

refer to

to

World

having thus proved a

definite

in oppofition to Chance, proceeds

from the Unity and concurrent Order of

things this Caufe rauft be

One.

After which he

goes on, as follows.

in
zrxhiv tuk

Xoycu

>t,

mq

thtuv

*2

ama?

KoiTrjovyZo

yvu<nv zsoiav, iicu tx Tlocvroq ov t

aKoyz

aUT0 ywuf/tov, oldev

JTioi; cvy

Et

u<tt)wv

xhoyov tkto, utottqv. i?ca yxo t

sittw xir* uiTixs

y-ipoiy

*XP V >

[xtv av

n thto ccyvoxv,

dt aioiVy

qh hxt

ToinTo.

sx-jto fairx

ccyvo'ticii rr,u

vTixv ojti th

f 2

kxtx

ra'OAa

'Ei t

Xoyov

txv tztxutuv
ixvtz

zs-xvlos

tp^trw.

xiTiov,TQ

Additional NOTES.

436

upic-fxivoog iio$ $xTj>ov y

xrie y Qitv

agx

*y

to IlocV) Xy vrxflx i% uv to

Kai

vucxov,

ojJ'f

xj

t#

/ocfT

iv

ej-i*

tik uajjj.-

Reason,

auTO.

ifi

Aoyoif aca

n^

aura to

AW

if this

in order,

Caufe.

more

excellent

I mean by more

according

>c)

x\tiov.

hhfnv

atu-

s uv to

s'ijjj,

wj

dirty,

y&

Cause be void of

to

which came

thofe things,

than their Principle or

excellent,

Jemething operating

Rcafon and Knowledge, and yet within that

and a Part of that Whole, which

a
from Caufe devoid of Reafon,

Univerfe,
is,

>c)

yi-

>^ toj
it

av

iuvro

k-

>^

civxt-^

that indeed would be abfurd; for then again

would befomeihing among

there
laji

Hxv, uv

Tag Koer/xix? Aoysc,

otcJf

rial/,

upi<r[Ait/u<;' onJfi/

tjjto, r.roi lis fcUTO oipa, fiXi-rrov,

ii

Xoj?

Sxtz^qv oihv i%

x-,

a ifiv airioi/

is,

what

it

But if, on the contrary, the Cause of the Uni

verse be a Cause, having Reason and knowing
itfelf, it

of courfe knows

itfelfto be the

elfe,

own

nature.

Essence it
and
ly,

But if
is

it

Caufe ofall things;

would be ignorant of its

knoiv, that from its very

being ignorant of this,

it

the Cause of the Universe,

which knows one part if a Relation definitealfo of neeejfity the'other, it knowsfor this re a-

if that,

knows

[on definitely the thing of vohich

it

is

the Caufe.

It

KNOWS therefore THE Universe, and all things

cut of which the Univerfe

is

compofed, of all

which

alfo

But
BY LOOKING INTO ITSELF, AND BY KNOWING
ITSELF, IT KNOWS WHAT COMES AFTER ITSELF,
if this be true,

it is

evident that

it is

the Caufe.

AND

// is, therefore, through ceris subsequent.

Reasons end Forms devoid of Matter

tain

that

NO TE S.

Additional
that

it

which
in

it,

the

thofe

as in a Caufe, diftinftfrom

Principles that

@a

and without the Matter.

AGREEABLE TO WHICH IDEAS THESE

P. 380

Works are
calls the

4J7

mundane Rcafons and Forms, out of

Univerfe is compefed, and that the Univerfe is

knows

&c]

fashioned,
Nkomachus

Supreme Being an Artijl

dixvoiu, in

Dei

upon

It is

thefe

in his Arithmetic, p. 7.

artificis

\v tv?

tS re^v/nt

Where

mente.

Philo-

ponus, in his manufcript Comment, obferves as follows

TpWTJJH
t?

(pYCTl

TOV &E0V,

CO?

TZXvluV T? ZSPUTX^ CXJ-

He

t? Koyng xvtuv ty/ovlx.

Jt,

Artist,

God

calls

all things,

and their Recfons

Soon

or Proportions.

finifh their Pictures,

r ufr?,
t

zfj.tv

tlSi Tt, kreo

xiiru3v,

rx

fj.lv

he fubjoins

iU t toixvtx rxwygot<pvif*XTOt
Xj

after

work

fpeaking of thofe Sketches, after which Painters

and

an

as poffeffing within himfelf the firjl Caufes of

uIo-itep

a>

/3A7TOv7?, ZTOl-

SyifAixoyoq, -arpog htsTvx xttq-

to, TA<ii tstxvJx xEX.6trfJ.Wiv'

r/\$z crx.ixyoxtpnfj.XTX

&jO\r\

&IU> AtyOi XPViTVTTOl *}

OJ

IV T!d

As

therefore we, looking upon

make fuch and fuch particular

xXX

ifiov, ot

ium,

Ixe7i>oi $\

ZTXvli^ElOl

EKTIV.

fuch Sketches as

thefe,

things, fo alfo the Creator,

looking at thofe Sketches of his, hath formed and adorned

with beauty

all things here below.

We mufl

remember,

however, that the Sketches here are imperfecl; but that

the others, thofe

in

God,
It is

are

REASONS

or Proportions,

which

exi/i

Archetypal and all-perfect.

according to

this Philofophy, that

Milton re-

presents God, after he had created this vifiblc

World,

contemplating

taw

Additional NOTES.

438

how

it

Jhow'd

In profpeJi from his throncy how

how fair

good-,

Idea

Answ'ring. his great

P. Loft, VII. 556,

Proclus proves the Exigence of thefe

Ideas

or

Universal Forms by
/

>

purnents.
o

tlVXl WOtZITXy TO 31 XUTOO

TiPOOg Xy

TZTO

olov to
Yi

zrvp x,

JiJWj

^v^ri J/dWj
a.v Atjo*i

toig

T&PUTUS^

ifl

Xj

xjtu

aAAWj

OtV~

Xy sr Sscixovy
''b

i* 1 TZ&nUiit

uvxi zroui. Xy

too

to xinov kv ra zrxvjog aiiTw tw uvxi zroizv tzto

ZcPUTug,
ctty.x

oiriP

iioc[j.og

Sfi tjxvJgioov,

iicioov

TX'otx urpwTug

xg(T(j.h

x) cteA'/jhiv,

EiJV),

Ti)

xit'ix

iV TOO TJTXvll,

x,

TUT
y\Kiog

tuv tiJW

Tsxviog

tuv divQriTuiv,

arna

Xy

STgov-nxgy^ovlx.

from

itj

PRIMARILY,
that,

fecondarily.

it

xitico

th

Xy tjAjov,

\irirovy Xj oAfff

fla ZXPOOTOjg IflV tv

zrxpx tov IfAQxvn,

amx

xj

ifW xpgl

xvtuv tx onptup'

Iv

tv

[jlix

th Koapx.

If therefore THeCause
which operates merely

which operates merely by

is

exif.ingy

such Cause is
ITsEfFECT IS SECONDARILY,

own proper

WHAT

which

tw

amev

be a Caufe

by exi/fingy and if that

operate

$w
Xy \v

Xy

ey*

xoarpog zr\y-

oy.oioog 'ixxfov.

y.xtx tov iignpivov Xlyovy

of the Universe

and

av

iiri

to yxp xvtq

th tuxv\og, xXXog

'LSn tx(>o

ywx

it

a.i/Qpoo7rov \)irfi/i(FS i

k,

aXXog xv^pcarog^

tx

Swricug.

to

OWTEpUg'

TO) WOiUfJ-lVU}

auru

Ar>

ZJOliifJ.tVCV

s;/n v^i/,

tov Xoyov, ocrx

XTTQ T/\$ iXVTU

TO

OTTIP

$sg[jt.GT-nlx

^WJJVj

m ixxvlog
*i\-

TW HVXl ZTVMV

utpUTUS) O^JWl

Ifl

toivvv tftv ounce

ei

TZQlii XGlQCq

>

>

General

the following

EffencCy

primarily ,

it

giveih

to its

It is thus that Fire both giveth

Ejjlct

JVarmth

Additional NOTES.
to

fomething

eth Life,,

and

elfe,

and

may perceive

to

warm

is itfelj

Life

poffeffetb

and

439

that the Soul giv*

this reasoning

be true in all things whatever-,

you

which

It follows therefore, that

tperate merely by exifling.
the Cause of the Universe, operating after this
manner, is that primarily, which the World

IS

secondarily.

plenitude of

If therefore

Forms

ALSO BE PRIMARILY IN
it was the fame
and

World

be the

Forms must
THE CAUSE OF THE

World, for
the Sun,

the

of all Sorts, thcfe

Cnife,

which

conflituted

Moon, and Man, and Horfe, and in

Forms exifjng in the Univerfe. Theft

the

general all the

therefore exifl primarily in the Caufe of the Univerfe

another Sun befides the apparent, another

with
fore,

Form

refpeel to every

PREVIOUS

which according

Forms

there-

and external Forms, and

reafoning are their

this

to

The

elf.

the fenfible

to

Man, and jo

ACTIVE

and efficient Causes,

are to be found pre-exi sting IN THAT ONE AND COMMON CAUSE OF ALL
the Universe. Prodi Com. MS. in Plat. Par-

menid. L. 3.

We

have quoted the above paflages

reafon as the former

have a curiofity to

for the

fee a fampl.e

of this antient Philo-

fophy, which (as fome have held)

from Plato and Socrates

fame

who may

for the lake of thofe,

may be

traced up

to Parmenides, Pythagoras,

and Orpheus himfelf.

If the Phrafe, to operate merely by exifling,

pear quellionable,
fition,

that in the

it

ap

Supreme Being no Attributes are

fecondary^ intermittent, or adventitious, but

ever perfect and

mould

mull be explained upon a fuppo-

ejfential.

See
f

p.

all

original,

162, 359.

That

Additional NOTES-

44

That we

lhould not therefore think of a blind

tin-

confcious operation, like that of Fire here alluded to,

the

Author had long before prepared

Knowledge with natural

Efficacy,

us, by uniting

where he forms the

Character of thefe Divine and Creative Ideas.

But

let

us hear

him

XiTZtp l^iXoitj-iv rr\u

cxgQxi

Xoyuv

Jioi Tu;i/

in his

own Language.

I^otkIx xvtuv

yvugipuTiguv, cnro /mv twv

Xx<cy.v ro

dvru

ru>

uuxi

xXX*

(fc. I^siovj cctpoei<pv<riKCcu

zroiTirr/.oy, ui> $r, y^

ZTOUMTi' XTTO $i TUV nyj/\Y.M TO yVCOfiy.GV, UV "CTQl'dCiVy

y.-i-

y^

fj.tv

dvTu tw

x\iix<; sii/xt

ttxvtm

tojv

Jhould chufe
-

tlvx: zs'cjacri,

tx$ iSixi

xxrx

10

>c?

txmtx

^Yi;j.ns^yi>ixg

svufxulss <pu-

xjxx

<pu<ru< xTro-rtX-d{Atvu>v.

define the peculiar characler

more k.iown

to

us than themfelves,

voi^oii

>t,

But if we
of Ideas by
let

us ajjume

from natural Principles the Power of efFF CI -KG, MLRhLY BY EXISTING, all the things that
they effieSt; andfrom ARTIFICIAL PRINCIPLES THE
Power of comprehending all that they effft, although

t'^ey

did not effecl them merely by exi/ling

the* uniting thefe two,

the

let

us fay that

Ideas are

and

at once

efficient and intelligent Causes of ail

From book the
to Nature.

things produced according

(econd of the fame

Comment.

The Schoolman, Thomas Aquinas, a fubtle and

acute

writer, has the following fentence, perfectly corrc-

fponding with tins Philofophy.

rantur ad

Divhmm

Res omnes eompa-

InHllUtum, ficut art ifdata ad

jirtem.

The

Additional NOTES.
in

44K

The Verfcs of Orpheus on this fubje<5t may be found

the tral De Mundo afcribed to Ariflotky p. 23.
y

Edit. Sylburg.

Ztv$ agtrnv yivsTO, Ziv$ a, t. A.

Where

P. 391

ova,

zt<(>

BlfTfACVy T0<TX

y.xrx ro
Q%7tso

ej-j

JTX

all things lie inveloped,

TA IIOAAA xxtx $n rivx fTO EN f/.iUvO ZTCQ Td UtpKTpZ

JC,

xpi^U' z yxp

"srav??)

IIANTA.

As numerous

2jj

u$ fAap^irot/, x-

hiyiiVy

27ruVi7r7ro? ifofy

as

is

cc\X

EN, X2S

the Multitude

of Individuals by Partition,^ numerous alfo is that

Principle of Unity by wrc/'zwy^/ Impartiality. For
it is not One, as a minimum is one (according to what
Speucippus feemed tofayy ) but

things.
P.

Damafcius

tzioi

One,

it is

'Ap^uvy

as being all.

MS.

408 the wisest Nations the most

pious Languages.]

It is

co-

well obferved by Muretus

Nulli unquaniy qui res ignorareniy nomina, qui bus

eas exprimerenty quafierunt.

P.

phy
upon

But what was their

4.1 1

?]

The

the

Var. Left. VI.

Philoso-

fame Muretus has the following paflage

Roman Taste for

Beati autem

1.

illiy

et opulently et

Romani, inpetendis

Philosofhy.

omnium gentium vi-51 ores-

honoribusy et in prenfandis civibusy

et in exteris nationibus

eccupatiy philojophandi

verba compomndis y re ccmpilandh

curam fervis aut Hbertis fuis,

Oracidis efurientibus relinauebant,

JpJ:,

tt

quid ab avaritioj

44^

Additional NOTES.
ritla^

quod ab ambitioney quod a voluptatibus rellquum,

erat temporis^ ejus fi partem aliquant aid ad audlendum

Grescum quemp'iam philofophum^ ant adaliquem dc philofophia libcllum vel

legendum vel fcribendtan contulif*

fent^jamfe ad eruditionis culrnen

aft? et projtigatam jacere

Led. VI.

perven'ijje,

jam vlclam

Graciam Jomniabani.

Var.

i.

INDEX.

INDEX.
A.

how

ADjective,
tives, fuch
1

as

it

differs

from other Attribu-

the Verb, and the Parnciplc,

86. verbal, 187. pronominal, 189

Adverbs,

their character

ftridtly

ing can have no Genders,

and

ufe,

fpealo

190

192 to 194. Ad-

verbs of Intenfion and Remiffion, 195. of

Com-

196 to 199. of Time, and Place, and

parifon,

Motion, 204, 205. made out of Prepofitions, 205.

Adverbs of Interrogation, 206. affinity between
and the Pronoun relative, 206 to 208.
Adverbs derived from every Part of Speech, 209.
thefe laft,
.

found in every Predicament, 210. called by the

Stoics

Ylci.vSc.i\y\<; 3

iEsCHINES,

ibid.

419

Alexander Aphrodisiensis,

294, 310, 433. his

Imagination,
account of Phanfy or
357

Alexander

and Thais,

Greek Genius,

Amafanius,
Ammonius, his

to

account of Speech, and

4. of the Progrefs of

plex

upon the

71. his influence

419, 420

412
relations,

its

human Knowledge from Com-

Simple, 19. of the Soul's two principal

Powers, 17. of the Species of Sentences,

notion of

God,

Verb, 87, 193.

ibid,

his

55. quoted, 59. his notion of a

his notion of

Time, 100.

illuftrates.

from Homer the Species of Modes or Sentences,

145. quoted, 154. his notion of conjunctive Particles,

and of the Unity which they produce, 241.

quoted, 278. his account of Sound, Voice,

pliation,

Iztc,

321, 328.

of the

Am-

diftinclion

be-

tween

INDEX.
tween a Symbol and

Refemblance, 331.

wh

thought the human Body with refpect to the Sou!,

382
334. his triple order of Ideas or Forms,
Jnalyjh and Synthefisy 2, 3, 367. analyfis of Cafes,
275> 276, 285

Anaxagoras,
Anthologia Gr.
Amtoninus,
Apollonius,
of

the

Words by

name

269
47> 5 C

183,310,405,407,4.16
Grammarian^ explains the Species

the Species of Letters, 27. his elegant

Noun and

for the

Verb, 33. quoted, 63.

his

idea of a Pronoun, 65, 67. quoted, 70. explains

the Diitinclion and Relation between the Article

and the Pronoun, 73, 74. his two Species of Ast^?

or Indication, 77. holds a wide difference between
the Prepofitive and Subjunctive Articles, 78. explains the nature of the Subjunctive Article, 80.

corrects

Homer from

the doctrine of Enclitics, 84,

85. his notion of that

peculiarly explained

the Indicative
in

all

Tenfe

called the Prateri-

holds the

tum. perfeflu?}!} 129.

Soul's difpofitiou

by Verbs, 141.

Mode,

his notion

of

151. of the Future, implied

Imperatives, 155.

explains the

power of

thofe paft Tenfes, found in the Greek Imperatives,

156. his Idea of the Infinitive, 165. his

it,

name

for

i66 quoted, 168, 175. his notion of middle

Verbs, 176. quoted, 179, 181, 195. explains the

power and
holds

with

it

it,

Greek

efFeit of the

Article, 217 to 222,

Pronoun not to coalefce
22S. {hews the different force of

eftential to the

225

the Article

to

when

differently placed

in the

fame

Sentence, 231. quoted, 238, 239. his idea of the

Picpofition,

it

261
Art:-*

INDEX.
A"PULEius, fhort account of him,

Ao^usnas,

Thomas,

jirgWMerti a priori

two more

&

quoted

Man,

415
440

a pofteriori, 9, 10.

natural to

Aristophanes,
Aristotle, his

which of the
ibid.

420

notion of Truth, 3. quoted, 8. his

notion of the difference between things abfolutely

prior,

and

relatively prior, 9, 10. quoted, 15. his

Definition of a Sentence, 19. of a

Word,

20. of

Subftance, 29. divides things into Subltance and

how many

Accident, 30.

Parts of Speech he ad-

mitted, and why, 32, 33, 34, &V. his notion of

Genders, 42.

his account of the metaphorical ufe

of Sex, 48. quoted, 55, 56, 89. his Definition of a

Verb, 96. his notion of a Now orlnifant, 102. f
it, 104, 105, 431. of Time,
106, 107. of Time's dependence oa the Soul, 112.

Senfation limited to

quoted, 119, 193. his notion of Subflance, 202.

calls Euripides I tzqwty,:,

Stagirite y

why,

ibid,

223. himfelf called the

a diftincfion of

definition of a Conjunction, -239.

224. his

his,

a paflage in his

Rhetoric explained, 240. his account of Relatives,

286. his notion of the divine Nature, 301.

whom

was probable the Gods fhould

love,

302. his notion of Intellect and intelligible

Oh-

he thought

it

Words

founded in Compact, 314,

315. quoted, 310, 320. his account of the Ele-

iecls, ibid, held

ments or Letters, 324.

ples, 325. quoted,

his high notion of Princi-

357, 379, 434. his notion of the

between moveable and immoveable Ex360. between intellectual or divine Plea-

difference
istence,

iure, and that

361.

which

is

fubordinate, ibid,

quottd,

his notion of the divine Life or Exiftence,

v.jmDared

INDEX.
compared with

that of

Man, 362. of the

difference

between the Greeks and the Barbarians, 409. his

character, as a Writer, compared with Plato and
Xenophon, 421. correfponds with Alexander,

419

Arithmetic, founded upon what Principles, 352. (See

Geometry.)

its fubjecl:,

what, 367. owes

Mind, how,

to the

Arty what, and Artift, who,

its

Being
ibid.

in, 352

Articles, 31. their near alliance with Pronouns,

73. of two kinds, 214. the firft kind, 214 to 232.
the fecond kind,
difference

and

233 to 236. Englijh

Articles, their

215. Greek Article, 219. Articles denote pre-acquaintance, 218, 220. thence
ufe,

eminence and notoriety, 222 to 224. with what

words they aflbciate, with what not, 224 to 229.
Greek Article marks the Subject in Proportions,
Articles, inftances of their effect, 231, 232.

230.

Articles

pronominal,

their effect, 235,

fee

Pronoun

72, 73, 233.

236, 347.

inftances

of

Subjunctive Article,-

relative or fubjunclive.

Articulation, fee Voice,

Attributives,

Asconius,

30, 31. defined, 87. of the

firft

132
or-

der,

87 to 191. of the fecond order, 192 to 211.

See

Verb, Participle, Adjective, Adverb.

ftiort account of him as a Writer,

Aulus Gellius,

414
B.

BACotf,
tient

his notion

olVniverjal Grammar,

2. of

an-

Languages and Geniufes, compared to mo-

dern, 288. of mental Separation or Divifion, 306.

of Symbols, to convey our thoughts, 334. of the

Analogy

INDEX.
Analogy between the Geniufes of Nations and
their

Languages,

407

Being, or Exijience, mutable, immutable, 90, 37 r.

temporary, fupeiior to Time, 9:, 92.

See Truth)

God.

Belisarius,

prefect,

119.

his

150

Time

noiion of

Etymology of 'E7nf^a7j, 36H.

his

his triple order of

Blemmides, Nicephorus,
Forms

or Ideas,

386

Body, Infrrument of the Mind, 305. chief Object of

modern Philofophy, 308. confounded with Mat309. human, the Mind's veil, 333. Body,
that, or Mind, which has precedence in different

ter,

Syftcms,

Boerhaave,
Boethius, how many
"

Modes

Sentences,

Language founded
Deity's

from

illuftrates

or

146.

quoted,

between

Time

fhort

312.

held

refers to the

of the difference

(however immenfe) and Eternity,

account of his Writings and cha-

racter,

Both, differs from T-wo, how,

Brutus,

Exift-

Nature, 361.' his notion of

original, intelligible Ideas, 397.

339.

God's

Virgil the Species of

Compact, 315.

in

unalterable

321

Parts of Speech he admitted

as neceflary to Logic, 33. his idea of

ence, 92.

392, 393

416
227

413, 419

C.

Cjesar, C. Julius,

his

Laconic Epifde,

Octavius, influence
upon the Roman Genius,
Callimachus,

Cj"Esar,

of his

178

Government
419, 420

.52

Cases,

INDEX*
Cases,

fcarce any fuch thing in

273. name

modern Languages,,

whence, 277. Nominative, 279 to

282. Accufative, 282, 283. Genitive and Dative*

284

of,

to 287.

Vocative,

tive, peculiar to the

ployed

it,

why

Abla-

omitted, 276.

how

Romans, and

they

em-

276, 277

Conjunctions connect the four Species

Caufes,

with

their effects,

tion,

but

laft

248.

final

Caufe,

in Event, ibid, has

firft

its

of,

in Specula-

peculiar

Mode,

142. peculiar Conjunction, 248. peculiar Cafe, 287

Chalcidius, 301.

fhort account of him,

Chance, fubfequent to

Mind and

Reafon,

415

434, 435
205, 210

Charisius, Sosipater,
Cicero, 132, 170, 269, 272, 311, 313, 407. compelled to allow the unhtnefs of the Latin

one of the

for Philofophy, 411.

duced

it

into the Latin

nian and Socratic Periods,

City,

Feminine, why,

firft

Tongue

that intro-

Language, 412. Cicero-

418
48

128
Clark, Dr. Sam.
Comparison, degrees of, 197 to 199. why Verbs
admit it not, 200. why incompatible with certain
Attributives, ibid, why with all Subftantives, 201
Conjunction, 32. its Definition, 238. its two
kinds, 24O, 241.

Conjunctions Copulative, 242.

Continuative, ibid. Suppofitive, Pofitive, 244.

fal,

Cau-

Collective, 245, 246. Disjunctive Simple, 252.

Adverfative, ibid.

Adverfative abfolute, 254.

Comparifon, 255. Adequate,

Subdisjunctive, 258.

obfeure Signification,

Connective,

30, 31.

kind, ibid, to 260.

ibid.

of

Inadequate, 256,

Some Conjunctions have ari

when taken alone,
259
its two kinds, 237. its firft

its

fecond, 26 1 to 274.

See

Conjunction, Preposition.

CN-

INDEX.
Coxsentius,

his notion of the Neuter Gender, 43.

of middle Verbs, 177. of the pofitive Degree, 198
Confonant, what, and why fo called,
323

pafs into each other, 132. deftruutive

Contraries,

each other,

Converfation, what,

of

25

398

Converfion, of Attributives into Subftantives, 38. of

Subftantives into Attributives, 182, 189. of Attributives into one another, 187. of Interrogatives into
Relatives, and vice verfd, 206, 207. of Connectives

into Attributes,

Corn. Nepos,
Country, Feminine,

why,

205, 272

212

48

D.

Damascius,

his notion of Deity,

Death, Malculine, why, 51. Brother to Sleep,

Declenfion, the

name, whence,

Definitive,

30, 31, 214.

Definitions, what,

&,

Demosthenes,

441
52
278

Articles.

See

367
64, 76

49,419,421

Derivatives more rationally formed than Primitives,

why,

Defign, neceflarily implies

Diogenes,

the Cynic,

Diogenes Laertius,

Mind,

336

379, 434

419

34, 145, 154, 317, 322, 3^4,

407

Dionysius
Diverfity,

its

of HalicarnaJJus,

34, 35
importance to Nature, 250. heightens

by degrees, and how,

-"
Donatus,

ibid, to

252

74,

272

E.
Earthy Feminine, why,

Gg

47

Eccie-

INDEX.

EcCLESIASTICUS,

56

Element , defined, 324. primary Articulations or Letters

why,

(o called,

Empiric, who,
Enclitics,

among

English

their extenfive applica-

ibid,

See Letters.

tion, 325.

352

the Pronouns, their character, 84,

Tongue,

liar privilege of,

its

rule as to

power of contra-

58. exprefTes the

and enclitic Pronouns, 85.

diftinctive

poverty as

its

Modes and Tenfes,

to the expreflion of

85

Genders, 43. a pecu-

148.

its

analogy in the formation of Participles, 185, 186.

neglected by
er of

illiterate

Articles,

its

Writers,

215

to

force and

ibid,

of the Propofition by pofition, as

Accufa-

alio the

Cafe of the Sentence, 26, 274, 276.

racter, as a Language,
tive

its

Epictetus,
"E.irirr,y.n >

its

Ether, Mafculine, why,

Experience, founded

Experiment,
ibid,

Bffe'fice,

on what,

its utility,

how,

408
368

Euclid, a difference between him and

Theorems founded upon what,
Euripides,

cha-

310,407

Etymology,

Exiftence, differs from

pow-

233. fhews the Predicate

46

Virgil, 69. his

340

5 2 > 3 i0 j 331

294, 433

352

352. conducive to Art, how,

beholden to Science, tho' Science not to that,

353
F.

Form and Matter,

2, 7.

elementary Principles, 307.

myfterioufly blended in their co-exiftence, ibid, and

312. Form,

its

original

meaning, what, 310. trans-

ferred from lower things to the higheft, 311.

pre-

exiftent, where, 312. defcribed-by Cicero, 311, 313.

in

INDEX.
in

Form

Speech, what, 315,326,327, &c.

Forms, 312.

triple order

Nature, 377.

of

Forms

of

in Art, 374. in

intelligible or fpecific

Forms,

their

peculiar character, 364, 365, 372, 380, 396, 436,

438

Fortune, Feminine, why,

57
183

Fuller,

G.

Gaza Theodore,

his Definition

of a

Word,

2r.

explains the Perfons in Pronouns, 67. hardly ad-

mits the Subjunctive for an Article, 78; his account

of the Tenfes, 129. of Modes, 140. quoted, 15 r.

calls the Infinitive the Verb's Noun, 165. quoted,
181. his Definition of an Adverb, 195. arranges

Adverbs by

clafles

according to the Order of the

Predicaments, 210. explains the power of the Article,

218. quoted, 225. explains the different powers

of conjunctive Particles, 245. of disjunctive, 249.

his fingular explanation of a Verfe in Homer, 253*

quoted,

Gemistus,

262, 271

Georgius, otherwife Pletho, his doctrine

of Ideas or intelligible Forms,

395

Genders, their origin, 41. their natural number, 42.

(See Sex.) why wanting to the

noun,

Genus and

firft

and fecond Pro-

'

Species,

why they

mit of Number,

69

(but not Individuals) ad-

39

Geometry, founded on what Principles, 352. that and

Arithmetic independent on Experiment,

(See

ibid,

Science.) hi Subject, what, 367. beholden for

it

the Mind, how,

ibid.

God,

"

exprefTed by Neuters, fuch as to $i7ov t

&c. why, 54, 55.

as Mafculine,

Gg

why,

ibid,

to

Numeny
immutable,

INDEX.
table,

and fuperior to

allwife,

his

Time

and

its

Diftin&ions, qz,

and always wife, 301. immediate objects of

Wifdom, what,

whom among men

ibid,

Form

be fuppofed to love, 302.

Artift, 312, 313,

437. above

all

his

miffions,

361.

may

Intenilons and

Re-

Exiftence different

162, 359, 439.

from that of Man, how, 360, 362.

tributes,

he

of Forms, fovereign

At-

his divine

his Exiftence neceiTarily infers that

of Ideas or exemplary Forms, 379, 380, 436. exquifite Perfection of thefe divine Ideas or Forms,
380, 437. his ftupendous view of all at once, 389,
390, 442. region of Truth, 162, 391, 403, 405.
in

Him Knowledge

Good, above

all

and Power unite,

utility,
all

as valuable for

itfelf,

ibid,

Grammar,

philofophical or univerfal, 2.

to other Arts, 6.

how

Grammars,.
Grammarians, error

charac-

how

eflential

Gorgias,

diftinguifhed

all

its

intellectual,

God.

See Science,

299.

it,

men, 296, 298. confidered by

297. fought by

ter,

440

and totally dLftinft from

52
from other
II

naming Verbs Neuter, 177.

of, in

in degrees of Comparifon, 198. in the Syntax of

Greeks,

their

Conjunctions,

238
&c.

character, as a Nation, 415,

Afiatic Greeks, different from the other Greeks,

why, 410.
cay,

Grecian Genius,

Greek. Tongue, how

Modes and Tenfes,

Grocinus,

his

147. force of

wrong

tions with Adverbs, 289.

and

maturity and de-

417, &c.

perfect in the expreffion of

in the paft tenfes, 156.

guage,

its

its

in

its

imperatives

ranging Interjec-

character, as a

Syftem of the Tenfes,

Lan-

4*M 2 3

128

H. Herac-

INDEX.
H.

H^raclitus, Saying

of,

what,

Hermes,

his

325, 326.

Hesiod,

8. his

System of things,

^69,370

Figure, Attributes, and Character, 324,

Authors wno have writ of him,

to-owtik, the Poet,

called

Hoadly's Accidence,

326

by Plato,

223
128

Homer,

50, 52, 82, 84, 145, 149, 221, 223, 235,

Horace,

253) 2 73> 28 5> 3 o8 > 4175 42i

57, 80, 125, 142, 163, 169, 178, 199, 207,

232,260,413,424,425
I.

Ideas, of what,

Words

the Symbols, 341 to 347.

if

only particular were to exift, the confequence what,

337

to 339* general, their importance, 341, 342.

undervalued by

whom, and why, 350.

of what fa-

culty the Objects, 360. their character, 362 to 366,

390. the only

ledge,
rived,

obj.ets

real

Know-

376. the lame

in

why, 379, 380.

ter of,
ir.at.ed,

of Sci nee and

why, 368. acquired, how, 353 to 374.. dewhence, 374, &i their triple Order in Art,
Nature, 381.

the

380, 440.

firft

Mind,

Ideas, their different Sources,

400. their real fource,

Jeremiah,

eiTential to

ana highert ideas, charac-

434, 438

405

Imagination, what, 354. differs from Senfe, how, 355.

from

ibid.
Memory and Recollection, how,
why fo called, 39, 40. quit their charachow and why, 40, 41. their infinity, how ex-

Individuals,
ter,

number of Words, 214 to 217,

234, 346. become objects of Knowledge, how, 369
Instant. See Now.
preiTed

Intelleft.

by

a finite

See Mind.

g 3

ItfTERr

INDEX.
Interjections,
no

their application

and

289,

effect,

Speech with the Greeks, though

diftinct Part of

with the Latins, 289. their character and defcrip-

tion,

Interrogation,

its

to 154. Interrogatives refute the Article,

Joannes Grammat.

See

Isocrates,

Julian,

KUSTER,

-r-

K.
Knowledge-,

if

290

fpecies explained and illuftrated,

151
why, 228

Philoponus.

421

416

I76

any more excellent than Senfation, the

confequence,

371, 372

u
^Language, how
bolic,

for

it

defined,

conftituted, 327.

founded in compact, 314, 327.

(See

Speech'.)

329.
fym-

not imitative, why, 332 to 355. impoflible

to exprefs the real Eflences of things, 335.

double capacity,

why

neceiTary, 348.

its

its

Matter,

what, 349. its Form, what, ibid, its Precifion and

Permanence derived whence, 345. particular Languages, their Identity, whence, 374. their Diverfity,

whence,

ibid.

See Englifi, Greek, Latin, Oriental.

JLatin Tongue, deficient in Aorifts, and

plies the defect, 125.

ritum Perjeclum,

Participles, 185. in

in feparating Interjections

411.

fenfe

it

its

has Articles,
it,

character, as a

276. right

from the other Parts of

not made for Philofophy,

with BoethiuS)

(im-

148. to a Periphrafis for

what

233. the Ablative, a Cafe peculiar to

Speech, 289, 290.

it

Prate-

31. has recourfe to Auxiliars for

fome Modes and Tenfes,

fome

how

peculiar ufe of the

its

ibid.

Language,
412.

funk

4X^
Letters^

N D E

X.

what Socrates thought of their Inventor, 325.

divine honours paid him by the Egyptians, ibid. See

Letters,

Element.
Liberty,

influence upon

its

Men's Genius,

Life, connected with Being,

Linn-sus,
Literature,

caul'e,

its

how, 407.

44

and that of Virtue, connected,

antient,

the liberal, 424.

420

300, 301, 432

recommended

Study of

to the

peculiar effect with regard to

its

a man's character,

425, 426

Logic, what,

Longinus,
Lucian,

noble remark

LUCILIUS,

4
420

3,

of,

41

__

rm

ibid.

M.
Macrobius,

fhort account of him, 414.

quoted,

127, 157, 168

Man,

rational and focial, j, 2. his peculiar

what,

2.

firft

or prior to

Exiftence, the manner

likely to

ornament,

Man,

of,

what, 9, 269. his

what, 359. how moft

advance in happinefs, 362. has within

him fomething

divine, 302. his Ideas,

rived,

401.

393

to

Medium,

thro'

whence de-

which he de-

rives them, what, 359, 393. his errors,

406. to be corrected,
Manufcr'ipts quoted, of

whence,

how
Olympiodorus,

ibid.

371, 394,
395. of Philoponus, 431, 433,437- of Prqclus, 434, 435, 438, 440. of Damascius, 441

Marcianus Capella,
Mafier

Artijl,

what forms

Matter joined with Form,

fhort account of him,

his character,
2, 7.

its

415
1

original meaning,

confounded by the Vulgar, how, 309.

its

extenfive

character according to antient Philolophy, 308. de-

Gg

(bribed

INDEX.
fcribed

by

Language, what, 315,

316, &V.

Cicero, 313. of

Maximus Tyrius,

left,

Memory and

defcribed at large,

his notion of the

fupreme Intel-

what, 355.

Recolleclion,

from Imagination or Phanfy, how,

Metaphor,

ufe,

its

162

diftinguifhed

ibid.

269

Metaphyficians modern, their Syftems, what,

Milton,

13, 14,

392
44,45,47,49, 51, 53, 56, 59, 60,

112, 124, 147, 207, 267, 268, 404, 437

Mind

(not Senfe) recognizes time, 107 to 112. uni-

verfal, 162,

differs

311, 312, 359.

does) from the objects of

its

not (as Senfe

perception, 301. acts

\i\

part through the body, in part

its

high power of feparation, 306, 366.

into

things,

all

307.

Mind differs from

ithout

305.

it,

penetrates

Nov? 'TAjxo?, what, 310.

how, 364, 365. the fource

Senfe,

of Union by viewing

One in Many, 362 to 365.

Many in One, 366. withr

of Diflinction by viewing

out Ideas, refembles what, 380.

region of

Truth

and Science, 371, 372. that or Body, which has

precedence, 392, &c. Mind human, how lpontaneous and eafy

in its Energies,

fimilar and congenial,

Modes

or

361, 362.

all

why,

Moods, whence

derived, and to

Minds

395
what end

deftintd, 140. Declarative or Indicative, 141.

tential, 142.

Subjunctive, 143. Interrogative, ibid.

Inquifitive, ibid. Imperative,

44. Precative or

tative, ibid, the feveral Species illuftrated

mer,

I'irgil,

Mode,
fied
it,

by the

166.

and Milton, 145 to 147.

peculiar character, 162, 163.

its

Stoics,

its

Po-

164. other

Modes

Op-

from HoInfinitive

how digni-

refolvable into

application and coalefccnce, 167.

Mode

of Science, of Conjecture, of Proficiency, of Legiflature,

168 to 170, Modes compared and

diftin-

guifhed ?

INDEX.
guiihed, 149 to 160. Greek Imperatives of the Pali
explained, and illuftrated,

Moon, Feminine, why,

Motion, and even

Privation,

its

Time,

156} 157

>

45
imply

neceflarily

95

..

Muretus,

quoted, 441, 442. his notion of the Ro-

mans,

Musonius Rufus,

ibid.

416

N.
Names, proper, what the confequence
words, 337 to 339. their
of Language,

Nathan
Nature,

and

firft

ufe,

David,

to

Nature,

ftrft

to

Noun,

or

Nouns

hardly parts

346, 373

Man, how

r-

fufceptible of

part of

Instant,

it,

its

437

Number, and why,

its

the

7,

1 1

Number,

8.

to

39. only

41, 171

bound of Time, but no

its

ufe with refpecl: to

minute and tranfient Prefence

117. by this Prefence

1 1

what

three Sorts, 37.

Oi, 102. analogous to a Point in a geo-

metrical Line, ibid,

104.

359

Subftant-ve,

or

differ,

See Blemmides.

Part of Speech fufceptible of Gender,

A Now

232

they

Natures fubordinate fub-

9, 10. frugality of, 320.

fervient to the higher,

Nicephorus.
Nicomachus,

no other

if

345.

Time made

Time,

illuftrated,

prefent,

116,

See Time, Place, Space.

what words

it

appertains, and

why

39,

40

O.
Pbjeflorsy ludicrous, 293. grave,

294
Ocean*

INDEX.
quoted from a Manufcript,

notion of Knowledge, and

262

its

natural co-incidence, 162, 173,

to 265.

49
his

degrees, 371, 372. of

Obje&s of Science,

general Ideas, the

One, by

~-

Ocean, Mafculine, why,

Olympiodorus,

394, 395.
192, 241,

by the help of external connectives,

241,265
Oriental Languages,

number

of their Parts of Speech,

35. their character and Genius,

Orpheus,

Ovid,

409
44!

132,141,206

P.

Participle, how
its

different

from the Verb, 94, 184.

how different from

effence or character, 184.

the Adje&ive, 186.

English
Particulars,

which

See Attributive,

Latin

and

Tongues.

how, though

are_ finite,

infinite, expreffed

ourfelves wholly to them,

Pausanias,

by

Words

confequence of attaching

346.

351

285

Perception and Volition, the Soul's leading Powers, 15,

37.

Perception two-fold, 348.

In

Man

what

firit,

9> I0 > 353> 359* fenfitive and intellective differ,

how, 364, 365. if not correfpondent to its objects,

erroneous,
Period.

~~

37 1

See Sentence.

Peripatetic

Pbilofophy, in the latter ages

commonly

united with the Platonic, 160. whatfpecies of Sen-

tences

it

admitted, 144.

its

notion of Cafes, 277.

held words founded in Compact,

314
Perizonius,

INDEX.
Perizonius,

his rational

account of the Perfons in

Nouns and Pronouns,

171

Persius, 76, 163, 372. (hort account of

ter,

fecond, third,

Pet-Jons, firft,

his charac-

413

Origin and Ufc,

their

65

to

67

See Imagination.

Phanjy.

Philoponus,
nefs of

Time, 431. of the bufiPhilofophy, 433. of God, the

his notion of

Wifdom

or

Sovereign Artifr,

what would baniih

Philofophy,

it

437

out of the World,

293, 294. its proper bufmefs, what, 433. antient

from modern, how, 308. modern, its chief

differs

Philosophers, antient,
tallc

who

about them, 270.

Ideas,

how,
modern,

Philofopbers,

objet, what,

ibid,

their

269

notion of Ideas,

350.

of occult Qualities, how,

Place, mediate and immediate,
the

trate

its

new

provided words for

employment, 351. their Criterion of Truth,

deduce all from Body, 392. fupply the place

their

ibid,

ibid.

not qualified to write or

its

prefeht

Time, and

the prefent Inftant,

various relations denoted, how, 266, 271.

Latitude and Univerfality,

Plato,

393

18. applied to illuf-

how many

21.

266

Parts of Speech he admitted,

32. his account of Genius and Species, 39. quoted,

92.

his Style

new-coined
he placed

abounds with Particles, why, 259.

of, 269. quoted, 325. in what

Word

real happinefs, 362. his

two

different

and

oppofite Etymologies of 'Eyrirr.unv, 369, 370. his

Idea of Time, 3S9. quoted, 407. his character, as a

Writer, compared with Zenophon and Arijlotle, 422

Pletho.

See

Gemistus.
Pliny,

INDEX.
Pliny,
their

his

how

account

names upon

their

Plutarch,

the antient artifrs infcribed

Poetry^ what,

Porphyry,

Po/ition, its force in Syntax,

Prepositions,

their original Signification, 266.

and

33
6

5,

39

230

26, 274, 276,

defined, 261.

32.

136

Works,

265.

their ufe,

their fubfequent

figurative, 268. their different application,

270,
271. force in Compofition, 271, 272. change into
Adverbs,
272, 205
Principles, to be eftimated from their confequences, 7.

232, 236, 325. of Union and Diverfity, their

dif-

ferent ends and equal importance to the Univerfc,

250. (See

One,

Union, Diverfity.) elementary Prin-

ciples myfterioufly blended,

difficult,

why, 325.

how

metry

Priscian,

307.

their invention

thofe of Arithmetic and

fimple,

defines a

Geo352

Word,

Noun and Verb,

how Indication and

20. explains from Philo-

fophy the

28, 33. quoted, 34. ex-

plains

Relation

differ,

63. the

nature of the Pronoun, 65. of pronominal Perfons,

67. his reafon

why

the

two

firff.

Pronouns have no

Genders, 70. why but one Pronoun of each

fort,

71. ranges Articles with Pronouns according to the

Stoics, 74.

a pertinent obfervation of his, 88.

plains the double

Power of

ex-

the Latin Prateritum,

125, 131. his doctrine concerning the Tenfes, 130.

defines

Moods

or

Imperative, 155.

Verbs which

Modes, 141.

of Imperfonals, 175

202.

of

naturally precede the Infinitive, 168.

Participle, 194.
tives,

his notion of the

of the Infinitive, 165, 166.

of Verbs Neuter, 177. of the

of the Adverb, 195. of

quoted, 210.

his reafon

Compara-

why

certain

Pronouns

INDEX.
Pronouns coalefce not with the Article, 225, 226.
explains the different powers of Connectives which

conjoin, 243> 244, 245. of Connectives which difjoin, 250.

quoted, 262. his notion of the Interjec-

of Sound or Voice,

316
Opinion about Reft, 95, 431. quoted,
310. explains the Source of the Doctrine of Ideas,
tion, 291.

Proclus,

his

434,435>436, 43 8

Pronouns, why i^o called, 65. their Species, or Perfons, 65, 66. why the firft and fecond have no Sex,
69, 70. refemble Articles, but how diitinguifticd,
73.

their coalefcence. 74, 75.

Language, 77.

their

importance in

relative or fubjunctive

Pronoun,

nature and ufe, 78 to S3, thofe of the

firft

and

its

fe-

cond pcrfon when expreiTed, when not, 83. 'Eyy.Xilixoti

and o^orovzy.ivo>A,

how

diftinguifhed, 84.

Primitives, refufe the Article, why,

Protagoras,
of

his

-.

his,

225

notion of Genders, 42. a Sophifm

14.4

405
124

Proverbs of Solomon^

PUELIUS SYRUS,

Q,
QuiNTILIAN,
ghialities occult,

their place,

what

154,233,407
modern Philofophy fupplies

in

393

R.
Relatives, mutually infer each other, 251, 286. their
ufual Cafe, the Genitive,

Rhetoric, what,

Romans,
Genius,

their character as a
its

5,

Nation, 411.

maturity and decay,

S.

ibid.

Rowan

418, &V.

Sallus-

INDEX.
S.

Sallustius Philosoph.
Sanctius, his elegant account
refpecting

401

of the different Arts

quoted 36, 163, 171.

Speech, 5.

re-

quoted, 202. his notion of

jects Imperfonals, 175.

the Conjunction, after Scaliger, 238. of the Interjection,

Scaliger,

...

Etymology of

his

Tenfes from Grocinus,

291

^ttis, 82. his notion

of

28. his elegant obfervation

upon the order of the Tenfes, 138. upon the preeminence of the Indicative Mode, 169.

how

his

account

the Latins fupply the place of Articles, 233.

his notion of the

Conjunction, 238.

plication of its various powers,

his reafon

Etymology of
Prefent,

fubtle ex-

to 247, 258.

from Philofophy why Subitantives do not

his origin of Prepofitions, 266.

coalefce, 264.

Science, 5.

hir.

242

its

Scientia,

Mode

why, 159.

the Indicative, and

its

his

370
Tenfe the

Conjunction the Collective,

why, 246. defended, 295. valuable for its confequences, ibid, for itfelf, 296 to 303. (See Gov.)
pure and fpeculative depends on Principles the mod
fimple, 352.

Experiment

not beholden to Experiment, though

to

it,

353. whole of

pofition and Divifion, 367.

relidence of

itfelf

and

its

its

it

whence,

Seneca,
Scnfation,

Com-

objects, where, 372.

Mind,
Scriptures, their Sublimity,

feen in

Etymology, 369.
See

410

47,139,414
of the Prefent only, 105, 107, 139.

of Time, 105. each confined to

its

own

none

Objects,

333>

INDEX.
333> 3 6 9firft

Objeds

its

Perception,

felves wholly to

its

tellection,

how

379.

infinite, 338, 353. Man's

confequence of attaching our-

ibid,

Objects, 351.

Sentence, definition of,

how

fubfequent,

19,20.

its

prior to In-

391

various Species in-

from Milton, 147, &c.

veftigated, 14, 15. illuftrated

connection between Sentences and Modes,

Separation, corporeal inferior to mental,

Servius,

Nature want

it,

132, 227, 432

to Beings,

and why, 44, 45.

ftances alone fufceptible of

Shakespear,

306

Language

Sex, (See Gender.) transferred in

that in

144

why,

it,

Sub171

X2, 13, 23,

41,47, 51, 53
Ship, Feminine, why,
t
48
Simplicity, his triple Order of Ideas or Forms, 381,

382

Sophocles,
Soul,

its

leading Powers,

Sound, fpecies

of,

how

like,

15, is\\

314, 317. the"TA?i, or Matter of

Language, 315. defined, 316.

Space,

432

how

unlike to

See

Voice.

Time, 100.

See

Place.
Speech, peculiar

Ornament

folved or analyzed, 2.

its

of

Man,

1, 2.

how

re-

four principal Parts, and

why thefe, and not others, 28 to 31. its Matter and

Form taken together, 307 to 315. its Matter taken
feparately, 316 to 326. its Form taken feparately,
327 to 359. neceflity of Speech, whence, 332,333.
founded in Compact,
314,327

Spencer,

Spirits, animal, fubtle Ether,

tions,

&c.

their ufe in

134, 164

nervous Ducts, Vibra-

modern Philofophy.

See

Qualities occult.

Stoics,

INDEX.
Low many Parts of Speech they held, 34*
ranged Articles along with Pronouns, 74. their ac-

Stoics,

count of the Tenfes, 130. multiplied the number of

Modes

name of Verb

allowed the

Sentences, 144.

only, into

infinitive

refolvable,

which they fuppofed

164

all

to the

other

view of

to 166. their logical

Verbs, and their Diftinctions fubfequent, 179 to

181. their notion of the Participle, 194. of the Adverb, 195.

Adverb

called the

210. called the Prepofition

261. invented

zrot.v dicing,

<rvi/$<rfios

and why,

-nr^oOsTiHOf,

new Words, and gave new Significatheir notion

tions to old ones, 269.

of Cafes, 278.

of the "TXyj or Matter of Virtue, 309, 310. of

Sound, 316. of the Species of Sound, 322. their
Definition of an Element,
Subjeii and Predicate,

how

324

how difringuifhed

in Greeks

230.

analogous to what in nature,

in Englifo, ibid,

279
Subjlance and Attribute, 29. the great Objects of natural

41.

Union, 264. Subftance fufceptible of Sex, 171,

of Number, 40. coincides not with Sub-

ftance, 264. incapable of Intenfion, and therefore of

Comparifon,

Substantive,
to 62.

noun.)
Nature

20 1, 202

30, 31. defcribed, 37. primary, ibid.

fecondary, 63 to 67.

(See

Noun, Pro-

Subjiantive and Attributive, analogous in

to what,

1Lvu&a.y.x,

Iixga.<j\j[Ji.&ct

ux i

Sun, Mafculine, why,

Sec.

Sylva, a peculiar Signification of,

45

308, 309

Symbol, what, 330. differs from Imitation,

preferred to

it

in conftituting

279
180

how,

ibid.

Language, why, 33a

T.

Tenfes^

INDEX,
T.
Tenfes,

their natural

Aorifts, 123.

what

Number, and why, ug,

Tenfes

120.

either paffing or completive,

128

authorities for thefe Diftindtions,

to 130.

Prateritum perfeftum of the Latins, peculiar ufes

131

Imperfcclum, peculiar ufes

to 134.

of,

of,

135 to

137. order of Tenfes in

common Grammars

not

fortuitous,

138

Terence,

The

and A.

205, 206, 272

See Article.

Themistius, 9. his notion how the Mind gains the

idea of Time, 108. of the dependance of Time on
the Soul's existence, 112. of the latent tranfition of

Nature from one Genus

Theodectes,
Theophrastus,

to another,

his notion of

Speech under

rious Relations, 4. mentioned,

Theuth,

inventor of Letters, 324.

Tibullus,

259, 432

va-

419

Hermes.

76, 132, 133

why

Time* Mafculine, why, 50.

See

35
its

implied in every

Verb, 95, 96. gave rife to Tenfes, ibid, its moil

obvious divifion, 97. how like, how unlike to Space,

100 to 103. ftri&ly fpeaking no Time prefent, 105.

what fenfe it may be called prefent, 116, 117,

in

432.

all

Time

and extended, 118, 100,

divifible

no object of Senfation, why, 105. how faint

and fhadowy in exigence, 106,431. how, and by
what power we gain its idea, 07. Idea of the pair,
1

01.

prior to that of the future,

how

acquired, 109, 110.

and Prudence,

1 1 1

09. that of the future,

how

connected with Art

of what faculty,

Hh

Time

the pro-

per

INDEX,
how

per Object, 112.

the Soul,
cies, 113.

162.

its

intimately connected with

order and value of

ibid,

what things

natural efFet

exift in

it,

Spe*

feveral

its

what

not,

on things exifting

in

160 to
it,

161,

50, defcribed by Plato, as the moving Picture of

permanent Eternity, 389. this account explained

by Boethius, Ibid. See Now or Instant.
Truth, necefTary, immutable, fuperior to

all

distinctions

of prefent, paft } and future, 90, 91, 92, 159, 160,

404, 405.

(See Being,

God.)

place or region,

its

162, 372. feen in Compofition and Divifion, 3,

367. even negative, in fome degree fyntheticul, 3,

250, 364. every Truth One, and

factitious Truth,

fo recognized,

how, 364, 365.

Vers,

V,

Varro,
31.

its

403

more

acceptations, 87, 193.

character, 93, 94.

5 6 > 6 i>74>4 1 3

loofe, as well

more

as

Verb, ftri&Iy

ftrict

fo called, its

diftinguifhed from Participles,

94. from Adjectives, ibid, implies Time, why, 95.

Tenfes, 98, 119. Modes or Moods, 140, 170,

Verbs,

how

fufceptible of

Number and Perfon,

170.

Species of Verbs, 173. active, 174. paifive, ibid.

middle, 175, 176. tranfitive, 177. neuter,
ceptive, 126, 182.

formed out of S ubftant.ives, 182, 183.

Tenfes,

Modes.)

ibid,

in-

defiderative or meditative, 127.

Imperfonals rejected,

(See Time,

175

Verbs Subjlantivcs, their pre-eminence, 88. efTential

to every Propofition, ibid, implied in every other

Verb, 90, 93. denote exiftence, 88. vary, as varies the Exiftence, or Being, which they denote,
See Being, Truthx Gop.
91, 02.

Kr^

INDEX.
Verfes, logical,

Vice,

Feminine, why,

340
56

Virgil, 46,47, 48, 49, 57, 68, 83, 132.

method of coupling the

liar

his

pecu-

pafiing and completive

Tenfes, 133 to 136. quoted, 141, 182, 198, 199,

206, 235, 286, 287, 389, 401, 432. his idea of
the

Roman Genius,

235,412

Virtue, Feminine, why, 55. moral and intellectual dif-

how, 299, 300. its Matter, what, 309, 310.

Form, what, 311. connected with Literature,
how,
407
Under/ianding, its Etymology, 369. human Underfer,

its

standing, a compofite of what,

Union, natural, the great objects

of,

425

264, 279. per-

ceived by what power, 363. in every truth, whence

derived,

365

See World.

Univerfe.

produced how, 318, 319.

how, ibid, articulate, what,

Voice, defined, 318. fimple,

differs

319

from

articulate,

to 324. articulate, fpecies of, 321 to 323.

See

Vowel, Confonant, Element.

See Perception.

Volition.

Vossius,
Vci'jcl,

what, and

JJtility^

why

Co called,

3575>-9 c>
321, 322

always and only fought by the fordid and

illi-

294, 295, 298. yet could have no Being,

were there not fomething beyond it, 297. See

beral,

Good.

W>

Whole and Ports,

7
Wifdom, how fome Philofophers thought it diftinguifhed from Wit,

368, 433

Wouds,

INDEX.
Words,
23

defined, 20, 21, 328. the feveral Species of,

to 31.

by themfelves,

fignificant

Relation, 27.

variable, invariable,

by themfelves ana

alone,

and

to 274.

aflbciated,

213

fignificant

24.

by

fignificant

37 to 211.

by Relation

fignificant

by Compact,

314, 327. Symbols, and not Imitations, 332. Symwhat not, 337 to 341. Symbols, of what,

bols, of

341

to 349, 372.

how, though

in

Number

finite,

able to exprefs infinite Particulars,

Worlds

vifible

346, 372, 373

and external, the pacing Picture of

what, 383, 437. preferved one and the fame, though

ever changing, how, 384, 3S5. its Caufe not void

of Reafon,

436

Writers, antient polite, differ from modern polite, in

what and why,

259, 260

X.

Xenophon, 56,407. his

pared with Plato and

character, as a Writer, com-

rfrijiotle^

Y.
*3TAu, 308.

See Matter^ Sylva*

$.

422, 423